第四,对复注部分含义的阐明巴利
4. Paṭiniddesavāraatthavibhāvanā
开示导法的分别阐明巴利
1. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
5 阿阇梨已经依自性,以略说方式开示了导法等,又以详说方式解说了导法等,我们也已经了知了。那么,为什么还要再发起“其中,什么是开示导法”等这一部分呢?因为所化众生有三种。所化众生有极利根、非极利根、钝根这三种。对极利根者,诸导法等适合以略说方式开示;对非极利根者,适合以详说方式解说;现在,为了给钝根者把诸导法等分别开来显示,所以发起了“其中,什么是开示导法”等这一分别部分。不过,义注中说:“这样,为了便于掌握,先以偈颂结集的方式依自性解说了诸导法等,现在为了对那些导法以复注方式加以分别,而发起‘其中,什么是开示导法’等。”巴利
5. Evaṃ hārādayo sarūpato ācariyena uddesato uddiṭṭhā, niddesato ca niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, atha kasmā puna ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’’tiādiko āraddhoti ce? Veneyyānaṃ tividhattā. Veneyyā hi atitikkhapañño nātitikkhapañño mandapaññoti tividhā honti. Tesañhi atitikkhapaññassānurūpaṃ hārādayo uddesato uddiṭṭhā, nātitikkhapaññassa anurūpaṃ niddesato niddiṭṭhā, idāni mandapaññassānurūpaṃ hārādayo vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’’tiādiko vibhaṅgavāro āraddho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ hārādayosukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gāthābandhavasena sarūpato niddisitvā idāni tesu hāre tāva paṭiniddesavasena vibhajituṃ ‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttaṃ.
在这里,对于那些在略说和详说中被解说的导法等,其中哪一种才是开示导法呢?那以“乐味、过患等”开头的偈颂,是依详说的方式而名为开示导法。对于它那以“乐味、过患等”开头的详说,我现在所要说的“这开示导法开示什么”等种种详细注释的差别,就叫做开示导法分别——应当这样连接理解。因为应当问“这开示导法开示什么”,所以先提出这个问题,为了确定地显示“开示这些”,而说了“这开示导法开示什么?开示乐味、过患”等。其中,如果问“这开示导法开示什么?”那就是:开示乐味,解说、详述;开示过患,解说、详述;开示出离,解说、详述;开示果,解说、详述;开示方法,解说、详述;开示教令,解说、详述——应当这样连接理解。巴利
Tattha ye hārādayo uddesaniddesesu niddiṭṭhā, tattha hārādīsu katamo desanāhāroti ce? Yā ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthā (netti. 4) vuttā, sā ayaṃ gāthā niddesavasena desanāhāro nāma, tassa ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādi (netti. 4) niddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāravibhaṅgo nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘imaṃ desayatī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayati? Assādaṃ ādīnava’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatīti ce ? Assādaṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāreti, ādīnavaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, nissaraṇaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, phalaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, upāyaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, āṇattiṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāretīti yojano.
在这里,“此开示之法”这个说法应当理解为兼顾前后文。因为需要这样问:“在‘乐味、过患等’开头的偈颂中所说的这些乐味等,出现在应当被解说的哪些巴利圣典法里?”所以世尊才说了“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”等话。意思是:在应当被承诺的巴利圣典法——“诸比丘,我将为你们说法,此法初善、中善、后善,有义利、有文句,我将宣说完全圆满、清净的梵行”——当中,那些应当被解说的乐味等确实出现了,而这个开示之法正是要开示它们。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro’’ti saddo pubbāparāpekkhoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘‘Assādādīnavatā’tiādigāthāyaṃ (netti. 4) dassitā ime assādādayo kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe pāḷidhamme āgatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘‘Assādādīnavatā’tiādigāthāyaṃ (netti. 4) dassitā ime assādādayo kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe pāḷidhamme āgatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmī’’ti paṭiññātabbe pāḷidhamme saṃvaṇṇetabbe ye assādādayo āgatā, te ayaṃ desanāhāro desayatīti adhippāyo.
在这里,“法”这个词可以用在很多意思上,比如教法、真理、三摩地、智慧、本性、福德、证得、所知等等,但在这里应当理解为只指教法。“义理的纲要”已经在义注里说过了,所以我在这里不再说。“vo”这个词虽然可以在受格、具格、补足语、与格等用法中出现,但在这里应当理解为只用于与格。“比丘”就是乞求戒蕴等的人,或者是在资具上以身表(而乞求)的人,或者是在轮回中看到怖畏、观察(怖畏)的人。“诸比丘”就是在称呼那些比丘。要知道,是为了什么目的而称呼呢?是为了让他们面向自己,激励他们以极大的热忱听闻佛法而称呼的。巴利
Tattha dhammasaddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattiñeyyādīsu bahūsu atthesu pavatto, tathāpi idha pariyattidhammeyeva pavattoti daṭṭhabbo. Atthuddeso pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vutto, tasmā idha mayā na vutto. Vo-kāropi upayogakaraṇapadapūraṇasampadānatthesu dissati ca, tathāpi idha sampadānatthevāti daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhanti yācanti sīlakkhandhādayo, paccaye vā kāyaviññattiyāti bhikkhū, saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanti paccavekkhantīti vā bhikkhū. Bhikkhaveti te bhikkhū ālapati, kimatthāyāti attano mukhābhimukhaṃ katvā dhammassavane atiussāhane niyojetuṃ ālapatīti veditabbo.
我说“我要说法”,并不是以主宰者的身份要你们去做别的什么事,我唯一要说的就是法。而且在说法的时候,我不是听了别人的法之后、依照闻所成智来说,而是以无碍智对一切应知之法亲自现证,现在就说由我自己所现起的法——他这样承许。
“初善”,是指在开始时就是善妙的;或者说,这法的开端是善妙的,所以叫初善。中善、后善也应当按同样的道理理解。这里应当知道,初善等是就义理的善妙等方面来说的。因此说:“以戒为初善,以定为中善,以慧为后善。或者,以佛陀的善觉证为初善,以法的善妙体性为中善,以僧伽的善行道为后善。又或者,以教化了悟简略之人为初善,以教化了悟广博之人为中善,以教化堪受引导之人为后善。这就是这里所要表达的含义。”巴利
Dhammaṃ desessāmīti nāhaṃ issaratāya tumhe aññaṃ kiñci kāreyyāmi, dhammaṃyeva desessāmi, desento ca na aññesaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā sutamayañāṇānusārena desessāmi, anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbañeyyadhammesu paccakkhakāritāya idāni mayāyeva pavattiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ ahaṃ desessāmīti paṭijānāti. Ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ ādikalyāṇaṃ, ādi kalyāṇametassāti vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ādikalyāṇādayo cettha atthakalyāṇādivasena vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘sīlena ādikalyāṇaṃ, samādhinā majjhekalyāṇaṃ, paññāya pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇaṃ, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇaṃ, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Atha vā ugghaṭitaññuvinayanena ādikalyāṇaṃ, vipañcitaññuvinayanena majjhekalyāṇaṃ, neyyapuggalavinayanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).
“Arīyati ñāyati”的意思是“被了知”。从词根 ara 的非引申义来说,这里指的是以智为主导的、取所缘的心生起;从处所的引申用法来说,指的是应被了知之义具有所缘缘的力量。“iti”这个词就是在指那同一个力量。具足所缘缘力量、被称为所缘缘的应被了知之义,就是 ta 这个缘的意义——应当看出,这是词根与缘之间意义上的差别。或者,“Asati bhavati”(在不存在时存在)是它的意思;与意义一起生起的法,那个法就是“有义”;或者具足意义的法就是“有义”;或者因为与开示等六种义句相结合的缘由而成为“有义”。正是这个意思才是这里所意图的,因为它属于引导的范围。凡法具足圆满的文句,就是“有文”。因为具足了松、紧、长、短、重、轻、连结、确定、分离、空点;因为具足了以 a 结尾等、阴性等、单数等;又因为没有放逸书写等过失,所以支分圆满。由于这些支分集合在一起,这个法就叫做“文句圆满”;或者因为与字母等六种文句相结合而成为“有文”。正是这个意思才是这里所意图的。在这里,这个是缺少的,应当被引入、应当被加入——因为没有应当被引入的东西,所以是“完全圆满”;或者因为戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴、解脱蕴、解脱智见蕴的圆满,所以是“完全圆满”。在这里,这个是多余的,应当被去除——说了之后,因为没有应当被去除的东西,所以是“清净”;为了渡过四种暴流,或者因为不依赖世间利养而持续运作,所以是“清净”。因为是最殊胜的,所以是“梵行”;或者是诸梵天、诸殊胜圣者的行持,所以是“梵行”。在出家梵行、道梵行、教法梵行等当中,我要宣说、我要阐明的是教法梵行,这就是它的意思。巴利
Arīyati ñāyatīti attho, ara-dhātuyā nippariyāyato ñāṇappadhāno ārammaṇikacittuppādo attho, ṭhānūpacārato atthassa ñātabbassa ārammaṇapaccayasatti attho, iti-saddena sāyeva satti parāmasīyati, ārammaṇapaccayasattisahito ārammaṇapaccayasaṅkhāto ñātabbo attho ta-paccayassa atthoti dhātupaccayānaṃ atthaviseso daṭṭhabbo. Asati bhavatīti vā attho, saha atthena yo dhammo vattatīti so dhammo sāttho, atthena samannāgato vā dhammo sāttho, saṅkāsanādichaatthapadasamāyogato vā sāttho. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto nettivisayattā. Sampannaṃ byañjanaṃ yassa dhammassāti sabyañjano. Sithiladhanitadīgharassagarulahusambandhavavatthitavimuttaniggahitasampannattā , akārantādiitthiliṅgādiekavacanādisampannattā, pamādalekhādirahitattā ca avayavo sampanno taṃsamūhattā dhammo sampannabyañjano nāma, akkharādichabyañjanapadasamāyogā vā sabyañjano. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto. Imasmiṃ ayaṃ ūno, so netabbo pakkhipitabboti upanetabbābhāvato kevalaparipuṇṇo, sīlakkhandhasamādhikkhandhapaññākkhandha- vimuttikkhandhavimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhapāripūriyā vā kevalaparipuṇṇo. Idhāyaṃ atireko, so apanetabboti vatvā apanetabbābhāvato parisuddho, caturoghanittharaṇatthāya, lokāmisanirapekkhatāya pavattiyamānattā vā parisuddho. Seṭṭhattā brahmacariyaṃ, brahmānaṃ vā seṭṭhānaṃ ariyānaṃ cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, pabbajjabrahmacariyamaggabrahmacariyasāsanabrahmacariyādīsu sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ pakāsayissāmi, paridīpayissāmīti attho.
“比丘们,我要为你们说法……我要阐明。”对于应当承许的巴利法,当讲到“乐味”等时,导师只是笼统地说“说法之食在宣说、解释、详述”。因此,不应该去区分说“说法之食在这里宣说巴利中出现的这个乐味,在这里宣说巴利中出现的这个过患”等等。因为有人会问“那要怎么理解”,为了确定差别、以标示的方式指出“这是巴利中出现的乐味,这是巴利中出现的过患”,就开始了“其中,什么是乐味?对于贪求欲乐的人……”等等。这里的“其中”,就是在那“乐味、过患……”等偈颂中所指示的、依境与有境等分类的乐味中,什么是乐味?在那些巴利法中,于何处巴利中出现?——如此问后巴利
‘‘Dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… pakāsessāmī’’ti paṭiññātabbe pāḷidhamme āgate assādādayo desanāhāro desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāretīti ācariyena sāmaññavaseneva vuttaṃ, tasmā desanāhāro idha pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ imaṃ assādaṃ desayati, idha pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ imaṃ ādīnavaṃ desayatītiādi viseso na viññātabbo, ‘‘kathaṃ viññātabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘idha pāḷiyaṃ āgato ayaṃ assādo, idha pāḷiyaṃ āgato ayaṃ ādīnavo’’ti visesaṃ niyametvā upalakkhaṇanayena dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu visayavisayibhedesu assādesu katamo assādo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –
只要一个人确实在贪求欲望,他就能如愿以偿;
确实,人一旦得到想要的,就会满心欢喜。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhati; Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti. (su. ni. 772; mahāni. 1) –
在这里的巴利偈颂中,凡是作为对象出现的乐味,这个乐味就是应当被品尝的,是说法之食的对象。不过在注释书中则说——巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo visayabhūto assādo āgato, so ayaṃ assādetabbo assādo desanāhārassa visayoti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
世尊这样宣说并开示了教法,是为了显示那些乐味等;那些乐味等是说法之食的境,它们在经文各处随着不同情况而被分别宣说,从那些地方择取出来之后,为了以例证的方式在这里显示,便开始了“其中,什么是乐味?”等的解说。这是《导论注》第5页所说的。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ bhagavatā desito, pakāsito ca sāsanadhammo yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ dassanavasena pavatto, te assādādayo desanāhārassa visayabhūtā yattha yattha pāṭhe savisesaṃ vuttā, tato tato niddhāretvā udāharaṇavasena idhānetvā dassetuṃ ‘tattha katamo assādo’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttaṃ.
在这里,“可享受”所以叫“乐味”,就是应当被享受的所依之欲。“被欲求”所以叫“欲”,也是指所依之欲。贪求那个所依的,就是“贪求者”,也就是有情。他的心与喜悦相应,所以叫“有喜心”。“人”则是从“了知”等词义得名。对于正在贪求应当被贪求的所依的那个有情,如果他所贪求的所依得以实现,那么他就会确实成为有喜心。任何人希求某个所依,得到那个所依之后,他确实会成为有喜心——偈颂的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha assādīyateti assādo, assādetabbo vatthukāmo. Kāmīyateti kāmo, vatthukāmo ca. Taṃ kāmayatīti kāmayamāno, satto. Tassa pītiyā yuttaṃ mano etassāti pītimano. Manati jānātītiādivacanatthena macco. Kāmaṃ kāmitabbaṃ vatthu kāmayamānassa tassa sattassa etaṃ kāmitabbaṃ vatthu sace samijjhati, evaṃ sati so satto addhā pītimano hoti. Yo macco yaṃ vatthuṃ icchati, taṃ vatthuṃ so macco laddhā addhā pītimano hotīti gāthāyattho daṭṭhabbo.
不能只说“想要……就有欢喜心”这么一点,因为接着还说了“人得到想要的东西时”,所以应该看出这里还有更深一层的意思:不是仅仅得到让人贪爱的东西就有欢喜心,而是得到了一切应当希求、应当供养的东西之后,人才有欢喜心。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ …pe… pītimano hotī’’ti ettakameva avatvā ‘‘laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti vuttattā lobhanīyaṃ vatthuṃyeva laddhā pītimano na hoti, atha kho patthetabbaṃ pūjetabbanti sabbaṃ laddhā macco pītimano ca hotīti atirekattho daṭṭhabbo.
导师已经区分过:“作为境界、应当被享受的乐味,在这段巴利偈颂里出现了”,我们也已经知道。因为应当问“在苦、忧等种种过患当中,哪一种过患?它又出现在哪一段巴利法里?”所以才开始了“其中,哪一种过患?如果那欲求者……”等文句。这里的“其中”,意思是:在那首“乐味、过患……”等偈颂所指示的苦、忧等过患当中,哪一种过患?在那些巴利法当中,它又出现在巴利的哪里?——这样发问之后。巴利
Visayabhūto assādetabbo assādo idha pāḷiyaṃ gāthāyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘dukkhadomanassādibhedesu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo kattha pāḷidhamme āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Tassa ce kāmayānassā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu dukkhadomanassādīsu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –
如果那个众生贪求欲望、生起了欲念,
那些欲乐一旦消退,他就会像被箭射中一样痛苦。巴利
‘‘Tassa ce kāmayānassa, chandajātassa jantuno; Te kāmā parihāyanti, sallaviddhova ruppatī’’ti. (su. ni. 773; mahāni. 2) –
在这里,偈颂中出现的被称为“忧”的过患,这个被称为“忧”的过患,就是“说法食”这一教说主题的所缘境。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo āgato, so ayaṃ domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo desanāhārassa visayoti.
在偈颂中,“kāmayati”就是“icchati”(想要),所以叫“kāmayāno”(欲求者)。或者,“yāyati”就是“gacchati”(行走),所以叫“yāno”(乘者);以欲为乘者,就是“kāmayāno”,指那个人。“chando”(欲)已在某人身上生起,他就是“chandajāto”(生起欲者),指那个人。“vijjhīyati”(被刺穿)就是“viddho”(被刺穿者);“sallati”(刺入)就是“pavisati”(进入),所以叫“sallo”(箭);被箭刺穿的人就是“sallaviddho”(被箭刺穿者)。对于欲求欲乐、生起欲望的人,当那些本可得到的欲乐因为某种障碍而失去时,这个人就受苦。他怎样受苦呢?应当理解为:就像被铁箭射穿的鹿在受苦一样,欲乐失去的人也在受苦。这里还应理解:通过“ruppati”(受苦)这个词,说明了忧的生起。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ pana kāmayati icchatīti kāmayāno. Atha vā yāyati gacchatīti yāno, kāmena yāno kāmayāno, tassa. Chando jāto yassa so chandajāto, tassa. Vijjhīyateti viddho, sallati pavisatīti sallo, sallena viddho sallaviddho. Kāmaṃ kāmayānassa chandajātassa jantuno ye kāmā labhitabbā, te kāmā kenaci antarāyena yadā parihāyanti, tadā so jantu ruppati. Kīdisova ruppati? Ayomayasallaviddho migo ruppati iva, parihīnakāmo jantu ruppatīti daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca ‘‘ruppatī’’tivacanena domanassuppatti dassitāti daṭṭhabbā.
“过患”属于忧的性质,在这里的巴利教法中已经出现,这是阿阇梨所分别解说的,我们也已经知道。因为需要问:“在依道与涅槃而分的两种出离中,哪一种出离、在哪里出现于巴利教法中?”于是便开始说“其中,什么是出离?即远离诸欲……”等文句。“其中”:在那首“乐味、过患……”等偈颂所指示的、依道与涅槃而分的两种出离中,哪一种出离在那些巴利法句中、在何处出现?这样问过之后——巴利
Domanassabhūto ādīnavo idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘magganibbānavasena duvidhesu nissaraṇesu katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgata’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Yo kāme parivajjetī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu magganibbānavasena duvidhesu nissaraṇesu katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –
有人避开诸欲,就像用脚躲开蛇头;
具念者能超越世间这种贪著。巴利
‘‘Yo kāme parivajjeti, sappasseva padā siro; Somaṃ visattikaṃ loke, sato samativattatī’’ti. (su. ni. 774; mahāni. 3) –
在这里,偈颂中已经说到了被称为“道”的超越行为,也就是出离;而这个被称为“道”的超越行为,也就是出离,正是“教示食”的所缘。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, taṃ idaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ nissaraṇaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.
偈颂里的“yo”,指的是获得禅定的人或者圣者。“kāme”是指前面说过的所依之欲。对那些欲境,要通过镇伏或断除当下生起的欲贪来避开。避开什么?怎么避开?就像眼睛好的人看见蛇头,用脚把脚挪开一样,这样避开。具念而具备正念的这个人,在世间对色等事物上的贪著,以那条道彻底超越,超越之后而安住;这称为道的超越作用,是一部分出离,应当这样连接理解。本该说“pādā”,但把长音缩成短音,所以说成“padā”。“pādā”就是“用脚”的意思,就像“amohabhāvā amohabhāvena”那样。因此说“用自己的脚”。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ yoti jhānalābhī vā ariyo vā. Kāmeti vuttappakāro vatthukāmo. Tesu pavattachandarāgassa vikkhambhanena vā samucchindanena vā parivajjeti. Kiṃ parivajjeti iva vajjeti? Sappassa siro siraṃ cakkhumā puriso disvā padā pādena parivajjeti iva, evaṃ parivajjeti. Sato satisampanno so puggalo loke rūpādīsu visattikaṃ imaṃ taṇhaṃ yena maggena samativattati saṃ suṭṭhu atikkamitvā vattati, idaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ ekadesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāmāti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Pādā’’ti vattabbe ākārassa rassaṃ katvā ‘‘padā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pādāti ca pādena yathā ‘‘amohabhāvā amohabhāvenā’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attano pādenā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).
老师已经分析过:这里所说的“一分乐味”,是指属于能缘的那一分乐味,它出现在经典中;我们也已经了解。因为有人会问:“属于能缘的那一分乐味,到底出现在经典的哪里?”所以才开始说“其中,什么是乐味?田地、宅地……”等等。或者也可以问:既然前面已经用“其中,什么是乐味?对想要欲乐的人……”等等分别过乐味了,为什么现在又要用“其中,什么是乐味?田地、宅地……”这样开始呢?确实,前面已经分别过乐味。不过乐味有两种:一种属于所缘,一种属于能缘。其中属于所缘的乐味前面已经分别过了,现在为了分别属于能缘的乐味,才开始说“其中,什么是乐味?田地、宅地……”等等。这里的“其中”,是在那首“乐味、过患……”等偈颂所说明的、按所缘和能缘区分的各种乐味当中,问:是哪一种乐味?在那些经典法义中,又出现在经典的哪里?这样问了之后——巴利
Ekadeso visayasaṅkhāto assādo idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘ekadeso visayisaṅkhāto assādo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tatthakatamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādinā assādo vibhatto? Saccaṃ, assādo pana duvidho visayavisayivasena, tasmiṃ visayasaṅkhāto assādo pubbe vibhatto, idāni visayisaṅkhātaṃ assādaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu visayavisayibhedesu assādesu katamo assādo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –
田地、宅地或黄金,牛马、奴仆,
女人、亲戚、各种欲乐,若有人贪恋。巴利
‘‘Khettaṃ vatthuṃ hiraññaṃ vā, gavāssaṃ dāsaporisaṃ; Thiyo bandhū puthū kāme, yo naro anugijjhatī’’ti. (su. ni. 775; mahāni. 4) –
在这里,偈颂中出现的那个被称为贪求的乐味,就是这被称为贪求的能缘乐味,它是教示之食的所缘。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo anugijjhanasaṅkhāto assādo āgato, so ayaṃ anugijjhanasaṅkhāto visayiassādo desanāhārassa visayoti.
在偈颂中,“田”(khetta)是指种子被撒下的地方。撒种的人所作的撒种行为,是“khip”这个词根的直接含义;能引发撒种行为的心,是果的借代含义;作为那心的亲依止缘的田地,具有使种子生长的能力,这也是果的借代含义。用“iti”这个词,指的就是那使种子生长的能力;而那能力的依止处,即被称为田地的场所,则是彼缘的含义。这个道理应当在三藏以及类似的词义解释中,随宜取用而理解。“vapanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha”——在这里播种、安立,所以叫宅基(vatthu)。豆类等的安立,是“vap”这个词根的直接含义;场所具有的使安立的能力,是果的借代含义;用“iti”这个词,指的就是那使安立的能力;那能力的安立处,即是彼缘的含义。不过,田是谷物生长的处所,宅基则是豆类等生长的处所。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ khettanti khipīyanti bījāni ettha ṭhāneti khettaṃ. Khipantānaṃ janānaṃ khipanakiriyā khipa-dhātuyā mukhyattho, khipanakiriyājanako cittuppādo phalūpacārattho, tassa cittuppādassa upanissayapaccayabhūtassa kedārassa viruḷhāpanasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā viruḷhāpanasattiyeva parāmasīyati, tassā sattiyā patiṭṭhaṃ kedārasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ ta-paccayattho. Esa nayo tīsu piṭakesu evarūpesu ca vacanatthesu yathārahaṃ nīharitvā gahetabbo. Vapanti patiṭṭhahanti etthāti vatthu. Aparaṇṇādīnaṃ patiṭṭhahanaṃ vapa-dhātuyā mukhyattho, ṭhānassa patiṭṭhāpanasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā patiṭṭhāpanasatti parāmasīyati. Tassā sattiyā patiṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ ta-paccayattho. Khettaṃ pana pubbaṇṇavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ, vatthu aparaṇṇavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ.
“hi”是令喜乐生起、运转的意思,那是什么?就是喜乐。“ra”是令黄金运转生起,那是什么?就是黄金。“hi”和“ra”合起来是“hira”,这是第二种依主释复合词。“ña”是令知道、令满足的意思,那是什么?也是黄金。既是“hira”又是“ña”,就成了“hirañña”;应当这样理解其含义:运转中的喜乐运转起来之后,特别地令人们满足。“vā”这个词表示把已说和未说的意思合在一起。“gacchanti visesenā”所以叫“gāvo”(牛);“rattindivaṃ asanti bhakkhanti visesenā”所以叫“assā”(马);牛和马合起来就是“gavāssaṃ”。“dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ denti”所以叫“dā”;“asanti bhakkhantī”所以叫“asā”;先给了之后再吃,所以叫“dāsā”(奴仆),意思是:先把应当给主人的东西交出去,然后自己才吃。或者,吃主人给的东西,所以叫“dāsā”;或者,以苦、以艰难而吃、而活,所以叫“dāsā”。“mātāpitūnaṃ hadayaṃ purenti”所以叫“purisā”(男子);或者,寻求、觅求利益和安稳,所以叫“purisā”。业能圆满佛、辟支佛、转轮王的状态,那就是“puraṃ”,那是什么?是强有力的业。“puraṃ isanti sīlenā”所以叫“purisā”。因为只有男子才能达到正等觉者、辟支佛、转轮王的状态。“或者,住在高处的人叫purisā。因为男子站在母亲和父亲的位置上。”这些词义解释如上所述,都是合适的,因为意义确实如此。“dāsā”和“purisā”合起来是“dāsaporisaṃ”,中间有增音。这里,由“dāsa”一词也包含了“dāsī”(女奴)。“dāsā”是受苦的人,“purisā”是快乐的人,应当看到这个区别。“ṭhanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha mātugāme puttadhītā”所以叫“thiyo”(女人)。“nara”一词的分解义前面已经说过了。巴利
Hinoti pavattati pītisomanassanti hi, kiṃ taṃ? Pītisomanassaṃ, rāti pavatteti jātarūpanti raṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Jātarūpaṃ, hiṃ ranti hiraṃ, dutiyātappurisasamāso. Ñāpeti tosetīti ñaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Jātarūpaṃ. Hiraṃ hutvā ñaṃ hiraññaṃ, pavattamānaṃ pītisomanassaṃ pavattetvā jane visesena tosetīti attho gahetabbo. Vā-saddo vuttāvuttatthasamuccayattho. Gacchanti visesenāti gāvo, rattindivaṃ asanti bhakkhanti visesenāti assā, gāvo ca assā ca gavāssaṃ. Dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ dentīti dā, asanti bhakkhantīti asā, datvā asā dāsā, sāmikānaṃ dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ datvā pacchā asanti bhakkhantīti attho. Sāmikehi vā dinnaṃ asanti bhakkhantīti dāsā, dukkhena kasirena asanti pavattantīti vā dāsā,. Mātāpitūnaṃ hadayaṃ purentīti purisā, puraṃ hitaṃ vā isanti gavesantīti purisā. Buddhapaccekabuddhacakkavattibhāvaṃ pureti kammanti puraṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Balavakammaṃ, puraṃ isanti sīlenāti vā purisā. Purisā eva hi sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhacakkavattibhāvaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Puri uccaṭṭhāne sentīti vā purisā. Purisā hi mātūnaṃ pituṭṭhāne ṭhitā’’ti ime vacanatthā vuttappakārā yuttāyeva atthasambhavato. Dāsā ca purisā ca dāsaporisaṃ, majjhe vuddhi. Ettha ca dāsaggahaṇena dāsīpi gahitā. Dāsā dukkaṭajanā, purisā sukhitajanāti viseso daṭṭhabbo. Ṭhanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha mātugāme puttadhītāti thiyo. Narasaddassa viggahattho heṭṭhā vuttova.
这里,导师已经把“忧”这一类过患判为在这段巴利偈颂中出现,我们也已经知道这一点。因为有人要问“名为‘苦’的过患在巴利圣典的哪里出现”,所以开始说“其中,什么是过患?无力者压制他”等等。或者也可以问:为什么这里要这样开始说“其中,什么是过患?无力者压制他”等等呢?不是已经用“其中,什么是过患?如果他追求欲乐”等等分别解说过过患了吗?确实如此。不过,过患按苦、忧等有多种多样。在这么多样的过患中,先前已经分别解说了“忧”这一类过患,现在为了分别解说“苦”这一类过患,所以开始说“其中,什么是过患?无力者压制他”等等。这里的“其中”,就是在“味、过患等”那首偈颂中所指出的苦、忧等过患当中,问是哪一种过患;也就是问:在那些巴利法句当中,过患出现在哪一处巴利法句里?巴利
Ekadeso domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘dukkhasaṅkhāto ādīnavo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī’’tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Tassa ce kāmayānassā’’tiādinā ādīnavo vibhattoti? Saccaṃ, ādīnavo pana bahuvidho dukkhadomanassādivasena, tasmiṃ bahuvidhe ādīnave ekadeso domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo pubbe vibhatto, idāni dukkhasaṅkhātaṃ ādīnavaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu dukkhadomanassādīsu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatoti pucchitvā –
无力者战胜他,种种危难将他摧伏;
从那以后,苦就跟着他,就像水跟着破船一样。巴利
‘‘Abalā naṃ balīyanti, maddantenaṃ parissayā; Tato naṃ dukkhamanveti, nāvaṃ bhinnamivodaka’’nti. (su. ni. 776; mahāni. 5) –
在这里,巴利偈颂中所出现的那一部分被称为“苦”的过患,这一部分被称为“苦”的过患,就是说法资粮的范畴。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo dukkhasaṅkhāto ekadeso ādīnavo āgato, so ayaṃ dukkhasaṅkhāto ekadeso ādīnavo desanāhārassa visayoti.
偈颂里说“这些烦恼没有力量”,所以叫无力。为什么烦恼是无力的呢?因为它们可以被善法断除。所谓“人”,是指贪恋田地等欲乐的人,或者因为缺少信等力量而无力的人,烦恼战胜、制服这样的人。虽然烦恼因为可被善法断除而是无力的,但对于贪恋欲乐、缺少信等力量的人,它们仍然能够将其制服。“诸危难摧伏他”:对于贪恋欲乐、追求欲乐、守护欲乐的人,从四面八方包围、逼迫他而现起的,就是危难——比如狮子、老虎等,以及身恶行等——这些摧伏他。从此,被那些危难所征服的人,生等之苦便追随他、跟随着他。像什么一样追随?就像水追随破裂的船一样,如此追随。这就是其中的含义。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ natthi balaṃ etesaṃ kilesānanti abalā. Kasmā kilesā abalā hontīti? Kusalehi pahātabbattā. Naranti khettādikāme anugijjhantaṃ naraṃ, saddhābalādivirahato vā abalaṃ taṃ naraṃ balīyanti abhibhavanti. Kiñcāpi kilesā kusalehi pahātabbattā abalā honti, tathāpi kāmamanugijjhantaṃ saddhābalādivirahitaṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthā bhavanti. Maddantenaṃ parissayāti kāmagiddhaṃ kāme pariyesantaṃ, kāmaṃ rakkhantañca enaṃ naraṃ pari samantato paripīḷetvā ayanti pavattantīti parissayā, sīhabyagghādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca maddanti. Tato tehi parissayehi abhibhūtaṃ naṃ naraṃ jātiādidukkhaṃ anveti anugacchati. Kimiva anveti? Udakaṃ bhinnanāvaṃ anveti iva, evaṃ anvetīti attho.
阿阇梨已经分别解说过:在这首巴利偈颂里,有一部分被称为“道”的出离,我们也已经知道这一点。因为有人应当问:“被称为涅槃的那一部分出离,出现在哪一处巴利法句里?”所以接下来开始说“其中,什么是出离?因此,人应常具正念”等等。或者也可以问:为什么这里要这样开始说“其中,什么是出离?因此,人应常具正念”等等呢?不是已经用“其中,什么是出离?若他遍舍诸欲”等等分别解说出离了吗?确实如此,不过出离按道和涅槃分为两种。在这两种出离中,被称为“道”的出离前面已经分别解说过;现在为了分别解说被称为“涅槃”的出离,所以开始说“其中,什么是出离?因此,人应常具正念”等等。这里的“其中”,是指在那一首“味、过患等”的偈颂中所指出的道与涅槃等出离之中,那一部分被称为“涅槃”的出离;接着问:在那些巴利法句里,它出现在哪一处巴利法句中?巴利
Ekadesaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amheti ca viññātaṃ, ‘‘nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ ekadesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ kattha pāḷidhamme āgata’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato’’tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Yo kāme parivajjetī’’tiādinā nissaraṇaṃ vibhattanti? Saccaṃ, nissaraṇaṃ pana duvidhaṃ magganibbānavasena, tattha duvidhe nissaraṇe maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ pubbe vibhattaṃ, idāni nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu magganibbānesu nissaraṇesu ekadesaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –
因此,一个人应当永远保持正念,避开种种欲乐。
舍弃了它们,就能越过暴流,就像把船里的水舀干之后,便能到达彼岸。巴利
‘‘Tasmā jantu sadā sato, kāmāni parivajjaye; Te pahāya tare oghaṃ, nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragū’’ti. –
在这里的巴利偈颂中,所提到的名为涅槃的出离,正是教法所宣说的范围。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.
偈颂里说的“因此”,是因为苦会跟随贪恋欲乐的人,所以人应当无论何时,在初夜和后夜都精勤地保持觉醒,具足正念,对诸欲——也就是烦恼欲——或者以镇伏的方式,或者以断除的方式,加以避开、舍弃。以圣道断除那些欲之后,就能渡过四种暴流。怎样渡呢?就像船主把渗进船里的水舀出去、泼到外面,然后凭着轻快的船毫不费力地渡过去,到达彼岸;同样,把自己身上生起的烦恼之水舀出去,以圣道排除掉,凭着轻安的身,在无余依涅槃界中,以涅槃到达彼岸、证得涅槃、得到寂静,这就是这段话的意思。这个涅槃为什么叫出离呢?因为出离一切有为法,所以叫出离。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ tasmāti yasmā kāmagiddhaṃ naraṃ dukkhaṃ anveti, tasmā jantu sadā sabbakāle pubbarattāpararatte jāgariyānuyogena sato satisampanno hutvā kāmāni kilesakāme vikkhambhanavasena vā samucchedavasena vā parivajjaye parijaheyya. Te kāme ariyamaggena pahāya catubbidhaṃ oghaṃ tareyya tarituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Ko tarati iva tareyya? Nāvāsāmiko nāvaṃ yaṃ pavisantaṃ udakaṃ sitvā bahi siñcitvā lahukāya nāvāya appakasirena taritvā pāragū pāraṃ gacchati iva, evaṃ attani pavattaṃ kilesūdakaṃ siñcitvā ariyamaggena nīharitvā lahukena attabhāvena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā nibbānena pāraṃ nibbānaṃ santiṃ gaccheyyāti attho. Idaṃ nibbānaṃ kasmā nissaraṇaṃ hoti? Sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇato nissaraṇaṃ nāma.
这个出离在此巴利法句中出现,是阿阇梨所分别解说的,也是我们所知道的。因为应当问“什么是果?在巴利法句的哪里出现?”所以开始说“其中,什么是果?法确实保护行法者”等。其中“其中”是指:在那首“味、过患等”的偈颂中所开示的保护、成就、不死、渡越等果当中,什么是果?在那些巴利法句中,于何处巴利法句中出现?这样问了之后——巴利
Idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ idha pāḷidhamme āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca viññātaṃ, ‘‘katamaṃ phalaṃ kattha pāḷidhamme āgata’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalaṃ? Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu rakkhananipphādanamaccutaraṇādīsu phalesu katamaṃ phalaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –
法确实会保护依法而行的人,就像雨季里的一把大伞。
这就是在法上好好修行的功德:行法的人不会堕入恶趣。巴利
‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāriṃ, chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāle; Esānisaṃso dhamme suciṇṇe, na duggatiṃ gacchati dhammacārī’’ti. (su. ni. 102, 103) –
在这里,这首巴利偈颂中说到,法能保护人免于种种灾祸,这是守护的果;也说到,守护所带来的增上成就如何产生,这是成就的果。这守护与成就的果,就是这段说法所涵盖的内容。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ anatthehi dhammassa rakkhanaphalaṃ āgataṃ, rakkhāvahanassa abbhudayassa yañca nipphādanaṃ phalaṃ āgataṃ, idaṃ rakkhananipphādanaṃ phalaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.
偈颂里说的“法”,是指某个人所生起的布施等种种善行之法,这就是法。行法的人,也就是生起这个法的人,法会保护他不受种种灾厄伤害。用什么来比喻呢?就像雨季下雨的时候,一个人撑着一把大伞,那把善伞能保护他不被雨淋;同样,依靠自己的正愿、不放逸而好好护法的人,法也会保护他。这样的人,行法的人,不会堕入恶趣。这就是善修法的功德,意思是“善修法所带来的功德”。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ dhammoti yena puggalena yo dānādippabhedo puññadhammo nibbattito, so dhammo. Dhammacāriṃ dhammanibbattakaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ anatthehi rakkhati. Kimiva? Vassakāle deve vassante sati mahantaṃ kusalena dhāretabbaṃ chattaṃ dhārentaṃ kusalaṃ taṃ janaṃ vassatemanato rakkhati yathā, evaṃ rakkhitabbo dhammopi attasammāpaṇidhānena appamatto hutvā suṭṭhu dhammaṃ rakkhantaṃyeva rakkhati, tādiso dhammacārīyeva duggatiṃ na gacchati. Eso ānisaṃso suciṇṇe suciṇṇassa dhamme dhammassa ānisaṃsoti attho.
有一部分果报是这里巴利圣典中讲到的,这是阿阇梨所分别阐明的,也是我们所知道的。因为应当问“什么是方法?它在巴利圣典的哪里出现?”,所以就从“一切行无常”等开始说起。那里的“在彼处”等,是指在以“乐味与过患”等开头的偈颂中所指示的、以观为前导的厌离等方法当中,问的是:在这些方法里,什么是方法?在那些巴利圣典的法义中,它又出现在巴利圣典的哪里?巴利
Ekadesaṃ phalaṃ idha pāḷidhamme āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘katamo upāyo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo upāyo? Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu vipassanāpubbaṅgamanibbidādīsu upāyesu katamo upāyo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatoti pucchitvā –
一切行都是无常的……
一切法都是无我的,当一个人用智慧看清这一点时。巴利
‘‘Sabbe saṅkhārā ‘aniccā’ti…pe…; Sabbe dhammā ‘anattā’ti, yadā paññāya passatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 277-279) –
在这里,巴利偈颂中讲到的“道”,是以观(毗婆舍那)为先导的厌离智,因为它是证得清净的原因,所以这个“道”就是方便,也就是这段教说所涵盖的范围。巴利
Idha pāḷigāthāsu yo vipassanāpubbaṅgamanibbidāñāṇasaṅkhāto visuddhiyā adhigamahetubhāvato maggo āgato, ayaṃ upāyo desanāhārassa visayoti.
在偈颂中,当一个人以智慧看见:一切行毫无例外都是由业、心、时节、食所造作而成,成为有为的诸行,因此以坏灭之义而称为无常;那时,他便对具有无常与苦之本质的法生起厌离。这个以观为前导、被称为厌离智的法,就是通向清净的道路。
在“诸行无常”等语句中,诸行具有有为法的性质,这一点在《分别论注》中已经说过。有些老师没有查阅那部《分别论注》,就说“因为它们是观智的所缘,所以只是三地之法”。如果这样,那么道法与果法就会变成常等,因此应当依照《分别论注》来理解其含义。
所谓“苦”,是因为具有苦苦、坏苦、行苦的性质,所以是苦。所谓“无我”,是因为没有常的实质、乐的实质、我的实质,以无实质之义为无我;或者以不能自主之义为无我。巴利
Gāthāsu sabbe niravasesā kammacittotuāhārehi saṅkharitā saṅkhatasaṅkhārā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā iti yadā paññāya passati, atha anicce dukkhasabhāve nibbindati, eso vipassanāpubbaṅgamo nibbindanañāṇasaṅkhāto dhammo visuddhiyā maggoti. ‘‘Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādīsu saṅkhārānaṃ saṅkhatadhammabhāvo paccayākāravibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa) vuttova, taṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathaṃ anoloketvā ekacce ācariyā ‘‘vipassanāñāṇārammaṇattā tebhūmakadhammāyevā’’ti vadanti, evaṃ sati maggaphaladhammānaṃ niccādibhāvo bhaveyya, tasmā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathānurūpova attho daṭṭhabbo. Dukkhāti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhāvena dukkhā. Anattāti niccasārasukhasāraattasārarahitattā asārakaṭṭhena anattā, avasavattanaṭṭhena vā anattā.
有一部分方法在这里的巴利法中是提到的,这是阿阇梨所分别解说的,也是我们所知道的。因为应当问“什么是教令?它在巴利法中哪里出现?”,所以以“有眼者如避险道”等作为开头。其中,“在那些地方”就是在那首“乐味与过患”等偈颂中所指出的那些地方,在远离恶行的教令和行持善法的教令等当中——这是哪种教令?在这里,在那些巴利法当中,它出现在巴利法的哪里呢?这样问了之后——巴利
Ekadeso upāyo idha pāḷidhamme āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamā āṇatti kattha pāḷidhamme āgatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā āṇatti? Cakkhumā visamānīvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhāsu pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇattikalyāṇasucaritacaraṇāṇattiādīsu katamāṇatti tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatāti pucchitvā –
具眼之人,犹如避开险路,于存在(机会)时精进;
智者活在世间,就该远离种种恶行。巴利
‘‘Cakkhumā visamānīva, vijjamāne parakkame; Paṇḍito jīvalokasmiṃ, pāpāni parivajjaye’’ti. (udā. 43) –
在这里,巴利法中所说的远离恶行与恶业的教示,就是属于说法所涵盖的范围。巴利
Idha pāḷidhamme yā pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇatti āgatā, ayaṃ pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇatti desanāhārassa visayāti.
在偈颂中,具眼之人当危险存在时应当精勤,就像背负着身体的人避开不平坦的地面或避开不平顺的大象等一样;同样,在众生世间,智者避开种种卑劣的恶行。所谓“教令”,就是具有教令权的法王世尊的教令,它有许多种,因此在“应行善”等偈颂中,行善行就是教令。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ cakkhumā puriso vijjamāne parakkame āvahitaṃ sarīraṃ āvahantova hutvā visamāni bhūmippadesāni vā visame hatthiādayo vā parivajjeti iva, evaṃ jīvalokasmiṃ paṇḍito pāpāni lāmakāni duccaritāni parivajjeti. Āṇatti nāma āṇārahassa dhammarājassa bhagavato āṇā, sā bahuvidhā, tasmā ‘‘kareyya kalyāṇa’’ntiādigāthāyaṃ sucaritacaraṇā āṇatti.
你们去皈依佛、法和这样的僧伽;
你们要受持戒律,那对你们会有利益。巴利
‘‘Upetha saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ saṅghañca tādinaṃ; Samādiyatha sīlāni, taṃ vo atthāya hehitī’’ti. (therīgā. 249-250, 289-290) –
在开头的那些偈颂里,已经出现了皈依的教令、受戒的教令等内容。巴利
Ādīsu gāthāsu saraṇagamanāṇattisīlasamādānāṇattiādi āgatāti.
为什么这里以“应观世间为空”等语句作为开头呢?难道不是在那些经文里,已经分别用“其中什么是果?就是法”等、“其中什么是方法?就是诸行”等、“其中什么是教令?就是具眼者”等,把果、方法和教令各自讲清楚了吗?确实如此。不过,那些经文是各自分开讲果、方法和教令的,现在要把共同出现的果、方法和教令合在一起说明,所以才以“应观世间为空”等语句作为开头。巴利
‘‘Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassū’’tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalaṃ? Dhammo have’’tiādinā, ‘‘tattha katamo upāyo? Sabbe saṅkhārā’’tiādinā, ‘‘tattha katamā āṇatti? Cakkhumā’’tiādinā ca phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattāti? Saccaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ pana suttesu āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattā, idāni ekato āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhajituṃ ‘‘suññato lokaṃ avekkhassū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
在这里,“应当观察世间为空”的意思是:要观察整个行世间为空、无我,或者从不自在的相状来观察,或者从审视它空虚不实的角度来观察。这是世尊的言教,因为它具有指令的性质,所以称为“教令”。由于它没有恒常的坚实、乐的坚实、我的坚实等等,所以称呼他为“摩伽罗阇”;又或者因为没有信心、戒行、多闻、布施等等,所以是“空虚”(摩伽)。巴利
Tattha suññato lokaṃ avekkhassūti sabbampi saṅkhāralokaṃ attato suññoti avasavattitāsallakkhaṇavasena vā tucchabhāvasamanupassanavasena vā passāti idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ vidhānabhāvato āṇatti nāma. Niccasārasukhasāraattasārādirahitattā ‘‘mogharājā’’ti ālapati, saddhāsīlasutacāgādirahitattā vā mogho.
“常具念”这句话,是依人而说的念。因为以念作为观空的助缘,能让人生起正知,所以这里只有念才是方法,并不是指“具念者”。在这个地方,所说的“念”就是这个意思。巴利
‘‘Sadā sato’’ti puggalavasena vuttāya satiyā suññatādassanassa sampajānahetubhāvato satiyeva upāyo, na satimāti ettha satīti adhippāyo.
“拔除我见”这句话里,所谓“我见”,就是认为“色是我、我有色、色在我中、我在色中”等等,以二十种事为对象的见解。用圣道把它拔掉、彻底断除之后,按照上面所说的方式,就能超越死亡、越过死亡的领域。这里所说的越过、超越死亡的领域,以及为成就这种超越而圆满修习前行之道,就是世尊这番教导的果,也是教说所涵盖的主题——这就是其用意。前面已经分别说明了果、方法和教诫,巴利
Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhaccāti ettha attānudiṭṭhi nāma ‘‘rūpaṃ attā, rūpavā attā, rūpasmiṃ attā, attani rūpa’’ntiādippakārā vīsativatthukā diṭṭhi. Maggena ūhacca samucchinditvā evaṃ vuttavidhinā maccutaro maccuno visayātikkanto siyā bhaveyya. Ettha yaṃ maccuvisayaṃ taraṇaṃ atikkamanaṃ, tassa atikkamanassa yañca pubbabhāgapaṭipadāsampajjanaṃ, idaṃ bhagavato desanāya phalaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti adhippāyo. Pubbe visuṃ visuṃ phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattāpi –
摩伽罗阇,你要常常保持正念,观察世间是空的。
把我见彻底拔除,这样就能超越死亡。巴利
‘‘Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassu, mogharāja sadā sato; Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhacca, evaṃ maccutaro siyā’’ti. (su. ni. 1125; mahāni. 186; cūḷani. piṅgiyamāṇavapucchā 144, mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 88) –
再者,当果等法在同一首偈颂中被合并在一起显示时,或者在一切经中、一切偈颂中,果等法都应当像味、过患等那样,在某些地方经过简择之后才显示出来——应当知道这就是其中的差别。因此注释师说:“然而,正如……应当看作合并在一起举例。”巴利
Ekagāthāyaṃ puna ekato vibhajanato phalādīsu ekato dassitesu sabbattha suttesu vā sabbattha gāthāsu vā phalādayo dassetabbā assādādayo viya katthaci niddhāretvāti viseso vijānitabbo. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo ‘‘yathā pana…pe… ekato udāharaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabba’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).
6 第六,作为说法食之对象的味、过患等,阿阇梨已经用“在此圣典法句中,这个味出现了;在此圣典法句中,这个过患出现了”这样的方式,通过特别举例,依其自身的样子做了分别说明。那些味、过患等,因为会产生这样的追问:世尊是普遍地为略说即知者等三种人说法,还是随各人所得而为某一个人说法?所以,为了按人的差别来分别显示味等,说明“对这个人,世尊说这个;对那个人,世尊说那个”,于是开始说“其中,世尊对略说即知者……”等语。其中的“其中”,就是指那些味等之中。应当这样理解其连接关系:世尊对略说即知者说离;世尊对广说即知者说过患与离这两法;世尊对应引导者说味、过患与离这三法。巴利
6. Desanāhārassa visayabhūtā assādādayo ‘‘idha pāḷidhamme ayaṃ assādo āgato, idha pāḷidhamme ayaṃ ādīnavo āgato’’tiādinā visesato nidassanavasena sarūpato ācariyena vibhattā, te assādādayo tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ sāmaññato bhagavā kiṃ nu kho deseti, udāhu ekassa puggalassa yathālābhaṃ kiṃ nu desetīti anuyogassa sambhavato imassa puggalassa imaṃ deseti, imassa puggalassa imaṃ desetīti puggalabhedena assādādayo vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu assādādīsu. Nissaraṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññussa puggalassa bhagavā deseti, ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca ime dve vipañcitaññussa puggalassa bhagavā deseti, assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca ime tayo neyyassa puggalassa bhagavā desetīti yojanattho daṭṭhabbo.
不过,在义注里则这样说:像这样用举例的方式,把乐味等按它们自身的样貌展示出来之后,现在为了在那里面按人的类别来显示教法的分别,所以说了“其中,世尊……”等话。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassetvā idāni tattha puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘tattha bhagavā’tiādi vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
在这里,“略说即知者”是指:义理被打开、被通达,或者说,具有种种分别和详细展开的义理被确立,所以叫“打开”;能知道,就叫“知”;能知道被打开的义理,就是“略说即知者”。意思是:仅仅通过简略的开示,就能通达那本来要通过分别和详细展开才能通达的义理。那种仅仅通过简略的开示、仅仅通过所举的内容,就能了知义理、成就利益的人,就叫“略说即知者”。巴利
Tattha ugghaṭitaññussāti ugghaṭīyate paṭivijjhīyate, ṭhapīyate vā sappabhedo vitthāro atthoti ugghaṭito, jānātīti ñū, ugghaṭitaṃ atthaṃ ñū ugghaṭitaññū, uddesamatteneva sappabhedaṃ savitthāraṃ paṭivijjhitabbaṃ atthaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho. Yo puggalo uddeseneva uddiṭṭhamatteneva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto hoti, so ugghaṭitaññū nāma.
义理被展开、被详细说明,就叫作“广说”;能了知这个的,就是“广说即知者”。如果有人仅仅通过详细的解说、仅仅依照所开示的内容,就了知了义理并达成义利,这种人就叫作“广说即知者”。巴利
Vipañcīyate vittharīyate atthoti vipañcito, taṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Yo puggalo niddesena niddiṭṭhamattameva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto, so vipañcitaññū nāma.
通过反复解说而应被引导、应被令通达的义理,就叫“应引导”。如果有人通过反复解说或从反面阐明,了知了所分别的义理并达成目标,这种人就叫“应引导者”。这里应当把握的意趣是:对略说即知的人,只靠开示出离的教说,他的证悟现观就能成就;对广说即知的人,靠开示过患和出离的教说,他的证悟现观就能成就;对应引导的人,则要靠开示味、过患和出离的教说,他的证悟现观才能成就。巴利
Paṭiniddesena attho netabbo pāpetabboti neyyo. Yo puggalo paṭiniddesena vā paṭilomena vā vibhattaṃ eva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto, so neyyo nāma. Nissaraṇadesanāyeva ugghaṭitaññussa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hoti, ādīnavadesanāya ceva nissaraṇadesanāya ca vipañcitaññussa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hoti, assādadesanāya ca ādīnavadesanāya ca nissaraṇadesanāya ca neyyassa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hotīti adhippāyo idha gahetabbo.
不过,这里没有把“句义最胜者”算进去,因为他没有证悟现观的能力。既然没有把他算进去,那么在味、过患、出离、味与过患、味与出离、过患与出离、味与过患与出离这七种论说方式中,就只有第三、第六和第七种被采用了,其余四种方式没有被采用。要知道,采用还是不采用,取决于所化者是否得到调伏。而所谓所化者的调伏,是指圣道在所化者的心相续中生起,并不只是教法上的调伏。圣道的生起,又只有靠前面所说的这三种论说方式才能成就,所以其余的方式在这里没有说。巴利
Padaparamo panettha paṭivedhābhisamayabhajanābhāvato na gahito. Tasmiñca aggahite assādo, ādīnavo, nissaraṇaṃ, assādādīnavā, assādanissaraṇāni, ādīnavanissaraṇāni, assādādīnavanissaraṇāni cāti sattasu paṭṭhānanayesu tatiyachaṭṭhasattamāva gahitā, avasesā cattāro nayā na gahitā. Veneyyavinayanābhāvato hi gahaṇāgahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Veneyyavinayañca veneyyānaṃ santāne ariyamaggassuppādanaṃ, na sāsanavinayanamattaṃ, ariyamagguppādanañca yathāvuttehi eva tīhi padaṭṭhānanayehi sijjhatīti itare nayā idha na vuttā.
不过,按照《藏论》(第23页)中的说法——巴利
Yasmā pana peṭake (peṭako. 23) –
在这里,什么是乐味和过患?
一个人做了什么,就会在自己身上看到什么;
行善的人得到善,作恶的人得到恶。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca? ‘Yāni karoti puriso, tāni passati attani; Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka’nti.
在这里,行善的人享受到善果,这就是味;作恶的人承受恶果,这就是过患。巴利
‘‘Tattha yaṃ kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ assādo. Yaṃ pāpakārī pāpaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
比丘们,有八种世间法。哪八种?就是“得”等(增支部8.6)。其中,得、誉、乐、称,这是味;失、毁、苦、讥,这是过患。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā. Katame aṭṭha? ‘Lābho’tiādi (a. ni. 8.6). Tattha lābho yaso sukhaṃ pasaṃsā, ayaṃ assādo. Alābho ayaso dukkhaṃ nindā, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
在这里,什么是滋味和出离?巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca nissaraṇañca?
善业的果报是快乐的,心中的愿望也能实现;
他很快就能证得至高寂静的涅槃。巴利
‘Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo ca ijjhati; Khippañca paramaṃ santiṃ, nibbānamadhigacchatī’ti. –
这就是它的滋味和出离。巴利
Ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
比丘们,大人有三十二种大人相,具足这些大人相的人只有两种去处……中略……“无覆障者”,这就是整部《相经》(长部3.199)。这是它的滋味与出离。巴利
‘‘Dvattiṃsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti…pe… vivaṭacchadoti sabbaṃ lakkhaṇasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 3.199) ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
在这里,什么是过患与出离?巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
五蕴确实是重担,而人就是扛重担的人。
在这世间,扛起负担是苦,放下负担是乐。
放下沉重的负担后,不再执取别的负担;
连根拔除渴爱,不再有渴求,已经彻底寂灭。巴利
‘Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā, bhārahāro ca puggalo; Bhārādānaṃ dukhaṃ loke, bhāranikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ. ‘Nikkhipitvā garuṃ bhāraṃ, aññaṃ bhāraṃ anādiya; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, nicchāto parinibbuto’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.22) –
这就是它的过患和出离。巴利
Ayaṃ ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca.
在这里,什么是它的滋味、过患和出离?巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
欲乐确实花样繁多、甜蜜又迷人,它用各种骗人的样子来搅乱人心。
所以,大王,我已经出家了;确定无误的沙门生活才是更好的。巴利
‘Kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti cittaṃ; Tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rāja, apaṇṇakaṃ sāmaññameva seyyo’ti. (ma. ni. 2.307; theragā. 787; peṭako. 23) –
“这是味、过患和出离”,这样说了之后,因此那些理则也应在这里抉择而了知。在果等之中,这个理则同样可以获得。巴利
Ayaṃ assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tepi nayā idha niddhāretvā veditabbā. Phalādīsupi ayaṃ nayo labbhatiyeva.
因为《藏论》(相应部1.23, 192;《藏论》22;《弥兰陀问经》2.1.9)中说:“其中,什么是果和方法?‘具慧之人立足于戒’这首偈颂,这就是果和方法。巴利
Yasmā peṭake (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9) – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalañca upāyo ca? ‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sappañño’ti gāthā, idaṃ phalañca upāyo ca.
在这里,什么是果和教令?巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca?
如果你们害怕痛苦,如果痛苦对你们来说不可爱;
不要作恶业,无论是公开做还是暗中做。巴利
‘Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ; Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho’ti. (udā. 44) –
这是果报和教诫。巴利
Idaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca.
在这里,什么是方法和教诫?巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo upāyo ca āṇatti ca?
要认识到这个身体就像瓦罐一样,把心守护得像一座坚固的城池;
用智慧作武器跟魔罗战斗,打赢之后要守住,但不要执著。巴利
‘Kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā, nagarūpamaṃ cittamidaṃ ṭhapetvā; Yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhena, jitañca rakkhe anivesano siyā’ti. (dha. pa. 40) –
这里说“这是方法,也是教诫”,因此应当这样理解:对果等(从果等角度)也可以依苦这一方面来举例说明。巴利
Ayaṃ upāyo ca āṇatti cā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā evaṃ phalādīnaṃ dukkhavasenāpi udāharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于“略说即知者”等三类人,老师要针对这个人开示这个法,针对那个人开示那个法——老师已经按各人的情况,把贪著等差别分别说明了。那么,这些人是依照哪些修行道而有了差别?那些修行道又有多少种?依修行道而有差别的人又有多少种?为了通过计数说明“那些修行道和那些人就只有这么多”,所以接下来开始说“其中,有四种修行道”等等。巴利
‘‘Ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imassa puggalassa imaṃ deseti, imassa puggalassa imaṃ desetī’’ti yehi puggalehi assādādayo yathārahaṃ ācariyena vibhattā, te puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi bhinnā, tā paṭipadā kittikā bhavanti, tāhi bhinnā puggalā ca kittikāti vicāraṇāya sambhavato tā paṭipadā, te ca puggalā ettakāti gaṇanato dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
这里,“在那些地方”是指那些略说即知者等人。哪些人依哪些行道而有差别,那些行道有四种,那些人也有四种,应当这样连接起来。是哪四种呢?苦行道迟通达、苦行道速通达、乐行道迟通达、乐行道速通达,这就是四种。是哪四种人呢?贪爱行者且迟钝的人、贪爱行者且敏锐的人、见行者且迟钝的人、见行者且敏锐的人,这就是四种。巴利
Tattha tatthāti tesu ugghaṭitaññuādīsu puggalesu. Ye puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi bhinnā, tā paṭipadā catasso bhavanti, te ca puggalā cattāroti yojanā kātabbā. Katamā catasso? Dukkhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā cāti catasso. Katame cattāro? Taṇhācarito mando puggalo, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo, diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo cāti cattāro.
依行道与通达所作的区分,也就是依行道所作的区分,因为两者不相分离,所以心里作意这个道理后,不说“四种行道通达”,而说“四种行道”。不过这些区分,依止的方面也有不同,依观的方面也有不同。依止的方面怎样不同呢?在地遍等业处中,从最初作意“地、地”等开始,直到禅那的近行生起之间,这期间生起的慧,称为止修习的“行道”。然而,从近行开始,直到安止之间生起的慧,则称为“通达”,因为这是从下位的慧而证得殊胜的慧。巴利
Paṭipadābhiññāhi kato vibhāgopi paṭipadāhi kato vibhāgo nāma hoti avinābhāvatoti manasi katvā ‘‘catasso paṭipadābhiññā’’ti avatvā ‘‘catasso paṭipadā’’ti vuttā. Tā panetā samathavasenāpi bhinnā, vipassanāvasenāpi bhinnā. Kathaṃ samathavasena? Pathavīkasiṇādīsu sabbapaṭhamaṃ ‘‘pathavī pathavī’’tiādinā pavattamanasikārato paṭṭhāya yāva jhānassa upacāraṃ uppajjati, tāva pavattā paññā samathabhāvanā ‘‘paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Upacārato pana paṭṭhāya yāva appanā, tāva pavattā paññā ‘‘abhiññā’’ti vuccati heṭṭhimapaññāto adhigatapaññābhāvato.
这种行道,对某些人来说是苦的、艰难的,因为他们心中生起了五盖等与修行相敌对的法;对另一些人来说,因为不存在这些障碍,所以是乐的、不艰难的。通达对某些人来说也是迟缓的,不能迅速生起,因为他们的智慧不清晰;对另一些人来说则是迅速的,能快速生起,因为他们的智慧清晰。巴利
Sā ca paṭipadā kassaci dukkhā kicchā hoti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammasamudācāraggahaṇatāya, kassaci tadabhāvato sukhā akicchā hoti, abhiññāpi kassaci dandhā asīghappavatti hoti avisadañāṇatāya, kassaci khippā sīghappavatti hoti visadañāṇatāyāti.
依观修来分是怎样的呢?有人以色与无色为入手处而投入观修,先把握四大种,再把握所造色,也把握无色法;可是在把握色与无色法时,他艰难、困苦、疲惫才能把握,这对他来说就叫作苦行道。对于已把握色与无色法的人,在观修持续进行的阶段,道生起迟缓,所以叫作迟通达。与这相反的另外两种,就由此成立。不过在这里,应当只依观修来理解行道与通达的区分,因为这里是以现观为主导。而义注中说:“为了把依人而作的说法区分开来,便依行道的区分来分别显示那些人,所以说‘四种行道’等。”连接的方式应当按前面所说的理路来理解。巴利
Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Yo rūpārūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetvā upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, arūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, rūpārūpaṃ pana pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggahaetauṃ sakkoti, tassa dukkhāpaṭipadā nāma hoti. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa vipassanāparivāse maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Tabbipariyāyena itarā dve honti. Vipassanāvasena pana bhinnāyeva paṭipadābhiññāyo idha daṭṭhabbā abhisamayādhikārattā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena desanāvibhāgo dassito, te puggale paṭipadāvibhāgena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘catasso paṭipadā’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 6) vuttaṃ. Yojanānayo vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbo.
这四种人是不是都毫无例外地、没有一定规律地从轮回之苦中出离呢?还是说,有确定的规律——“依这种行道和通达,这个人出离;依那种行道和通达,那个人出离”?由于存在这样的思择空间,为了确定地显示“这个人以这些为依托、获得亲依止缘之后,依这种行道和通达从轮回之苦中出离”,所以说了“渴爱行者、迟钝者”等话。巴利
Catūhi paṭipadābhiññāhi cattāro puggalā sabbeva aniyamato vaṭṭadukkhato kiṃ nu kho niyyanti, udāhu ‘‘imāya paṭipadābhiññāya ayaṃ puggalo niyyāti, imāya paṭipadābhiññāya ayaṃ puggalo niyyātī’’ti niyamato ca niyyātīti vicāraṇāya sambhavato ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo imehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā imāya paṭipadābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyātī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhācarito mando’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,贪爱行者中根器迟钝的人,以四念处作为依托,获得亲依止缘之后,凭借念根以及念根更为增上的圣道,通过苦行道和迟缓通达,从轮回之苦中解脱出来;贪爱行者中根器敏锐的人,以诸禅那作为依托,获得亲依止缘之后,凭借定根以及定根更为增上的圣道,通过苦行道和快速通达,从轮回之苦中解脱出来;见行者中根器迟钝的人,以四正勤作为依托,获得亲依止缘之后,凭借精进根以及精进根更为增上的圣道,通过乐行道和迟缓通达,从轮回之苦中解脱出来;见行者中根器敏锐的人,以四圣谛作为依托,获得亲依止缘之后,凭借慧根以及慧根更为增上的圣道,通过乐行道和快速通达,从轮回之苦中解脱出来。应当这样连接理解。而在注释书中——巴利
Tattha taṇhācarito mando puggalo satipaṭṭhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā satindriyena satindriyādhikena ariyamaggena dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo jhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā samādhindriyena samādhindriyādhikena ariyamaggena dukkhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti , diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo sammappadhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā vīriyindriyena vīriyindriyādhikena ariyamaggena sukhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo saccehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā paññindriyena paññindriyādhikena ariyamaggena sukhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyātīti yojanā kātabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
所谓“四种人”,就是按前面所说的行道分类而来的四种行道者。而为了把那种行道的分类连同因、方便和果一起显示出来,才说了“渴爱行者”等。巴利
‘‘Cattāro puggalāti yathāvuttapaṭipadāvibhāgeneva cattāro paṭipannakapuggalā, taṃ pana paṭipadāvibhāgaṃ saddhiṃ hetupāyaphalehi dassetuṃ ‘taṇhācarito’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 6) –
已说。其中,渴爱行者:这个人的习性是由渴爱产生的,所以叫渴爱行者。迟钝:因为具有迟钝的无明,所以叫迟钝,也就是痴特别重的人。敏锐:就是敏锐,意思是具有广大的智慧。能给出广大的果,所以叫udo;那是什么?就是择法;因为在自己身上生起,所以叫atto;这个人既有udo又有atto,所以叫udatto。词义应当这样来解释。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhācaritoti taṇhāya nibbattitaṃ caritaṃ etassa puggalassāti taṇhācarito. Mandoti mandiyāya avijjāya samannāgatoti mando, mohādhikapuggalo. Udattoti udaatto, uḷārapaññoti attho. Uḷāraṃ phalaṃ detīti udo, ko so? Pavicayo, attani nibbattoti atto, udo atto yassa puggalassāti udattoti vacanattho kātabbo.
第一种行道的因是渴爱行和钝慧,方便是念根;一切行道的果都是出离。第二种行道的因是渴爱行和利慧,方便是精进根。第三种行道的因是见行和钝慧,方便是定根。第四种行道的因是见行和利慧,方便是慧根。应当这样来看待因、方便和果。巴利
Paṭhamāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma taṇhācaritatā, mandapaññatā ca, upāyo satindriyaṃ, sabbāsampi phalaṃ niyyānameva. Dutiyāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma taṇhācaritatā, udattapaññatā ca, upāyo vīriyindriyaṃ. Tatiyāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma diṭṭhicaritatā, mandapaññatā ca, upāyo samādhindriyaṃ. Catutthiyā paṭipadāya hetu nāma diṭṭhicaritatā, udattapaññatā ca, upāyo paññindriyanti hetupāyaphalāni daṭṭhabbāni.
在这里,见行者且根性锐利的人,叫做顿悟者;见行者且根性迟钝的人,以及爱行者且根性锐利的人,叫做广解者;爱行者且根性迟钝的人,叫做可引导者。因此,世尊按照“在这里,世尊为顿悟者开示出离”等的方式,通过显示顿悟者等三种所化众的差别来开示出离,并且显示了说法的分类:“开示过患与出离”“开示乐味、过患与出离”。应当知道,通过“其中,四种道”等显示道的差别,进而显示了分为四类的爱行钝慧者、爱行利慧者、见行钝慧者、见行利慧者这四种人。巴利
Ettha ca diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo ugghaṭitaññū nāma, diṭṭhicarito mando ceva taṇhācarito udatto ca vipañcitaññū nāma, taṇhācarito mando puggalo neyyo nāma, tasmā ‘‘tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussa puggalassa nissaraṇaṃ desayatī’’tiādinā nayena ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyattayassa bhedadassanena nissaraṇaṃ desayati, ‘‘ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayati, assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayatī’’ti desanāvibhāgo dassito. ‘‘Tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādinā paṭipadābhedadassanena ‘‘taṇhācarito mando puggalo, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo, diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo’’ti catudhā bhinnaṃ taṇhācaritamandādikaṃ puggalacatukkaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,为了通过第二种义理组合的方式,说明由四种修行证知而分成四类的爱行钝慧等四种人,所以说了“两种爱行者”等这段话。其中,因为贪爱是定的直接对立面,所以两种爱行者——钝慧和利慧的人——获得以止为先导的观的亲依止之后,为了离贪,依靠道慧而出离,达到心解脱的有学果位。出离只能靠与正见相伴的正定发生,不能只靠正定。因此,两种见行者——钝慧和利慧的人——获得以观为先导的止之后,为了离无明,依靠道慧而出离,达到慧解脱的无学果位。这样一来,四种人其实就只有两种。巴利
Idāni catūhi paṭipadābhiññāhi catudhā bhinnaṃ taṇhācaritamandacatukkaṃ atthanayayojanāya dutiyāya visayaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ubho taṇhācaritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhāya samādhipaṭipakkhattā taṇhācaritā mandaudattā ubho puggalā samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāya upanissayaṃ labhitvā rāgavirāgāya maggapaññāya niyyanti cetovimuttiyā sekkhaphalabhāvāya. Sammādiṭṭhisahiteneva sammāsamādhinā niyyānaṃ bhavati, na sammāsamādhinā eva, tasmā diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā ubho puggalā vipassanāpubbaṅgamena samathena avijjāvirāgāya maggapaññāya niyyanti paññāvimuttiyā asekkhaphalabhāvāyāti cattāropi puggalā duvidhāyeva bhavantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“为了离贪”:能染著,所以叫“贪”;依它而离染,所以叫“离”;贪的离,就是“离贪”,也就是依这个离贪。“心”:按照心的分类来说,定也叫作心,就像“应修习心与慧”那样。由于寂止的力量,从对立面解脱出来,所以叫“解脱”;以心、以定而解脱,所以叫“心解脱”;或者心本身就是解脱,就是“心解脱”,这是指不还果的定。因为不还果的人修定达到圆满,所以依心解脱而出离。“为了离无明”:对不该知道的身恶行等却知道,或者对该知道的身善行等却不知道,所以叫“无明”,这是依词源的解释。依它而离染,所以叫“离”;无明的离,就是“离无明”,也就是依这个离无明。以种种方式了知,所以叫“慧”;解脱,所以叫“解脱”;以慧而解脱,所以叫“慧解脱”;或者慧本身就是解脱,就是“慧解脱”,这是指阿罗汉果的慧,也就是依这个慧解脱。巴利
Rāgavirāgāyāti rañjatīti rāgo, so virajjati etāyāti virāgā, rāgassa virāgā rāgavirāgā, tāya rāgavirāgāya. Cetoti cittappabhedena ca samādhi vuccati yathā ‘‘cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; mi. pa. 2.1.9.). Paṭippassaddhivasena paṭipakkhato vimuccatīti vimutti, cetasā cittena samādhinā vimuccatīti cetovimutti, ceto eva vā vimutti cetovimutti, anāgāmiphalasamādhi. Anāgāmipuggalo hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakāritāya cetovimuttiyā niyyāti. Avijjāvirāgāyāti avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ vā kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā niruttinayena. Virajjati etāyāti virāgā, avijjāya virāgā avijjāvirāgā, tāya avijjāvirāgāya. Pakārehi jānātīti paññā, vimuccatīti vimutti, paññāya vimuccatīti paññāvimutti, paññā eva vā vimutti paññāvimutti, arahattaphalapaññā, tāya paññāvimuttiyā.
对于“在这些人当中,哪些人应当以什么道理来引导”这个问题,既然需要说明,所以就说了“其中,那些以止为先导的人”等话。这里说的“其中”,是指在前面以“两种贪行者”等方式所区分的那些人当中:那两种属于贪行者、根性迟钝与敏锐的人,通过止……(中略)……而解脱,这两类贪行者、根性迟钝与敏锐的人,应当用“喜旋”这种方式来引导、带领、接引;那两种属于见行者、根性迟钝与敏锐的人,通过观……(中略)……以止而解脱,这两类见行者、根性迟钝与敏锐的人,应当用“狮子游戏”这种方式来引导、带领、接引。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Tesu katame puggalā kena atthanayena hātabbā’’ti vattabbato ‘‘tattha ye samathapubbaṅgamāhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu ‘‘ubho taṇhācaritā’’tiādinā vibhattesu puggalesu ye ubho taṇhācaritā mandaudattā puggalā samatha…pe… niyyanti, te ubho taṇhācaritā mandaudattā puggalā nandiyāvaṭṭena nayena hātabbā gametabbā netabbā. Ye ubho diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā puggalā vipassanā…pe… samathena niyyanti, te ubho diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā puggalā sīhavikkīḷitena nayena hātabbā gametabbā netabbāti attho.
7 在这里,通过“其中,四种行道”等教说方式,依照苦行道等的区分,贪行者、钝慧者等不同的人被分别说明,这一点我们已经了解。因为接着应当问:“这样分别之后,这个教说方式在应当注释的法中,以什么方式成立?”所以说了“这个方式在哪里成立”等话。对于具足第九非无暇者所教导的法,在应当注释的法中,思所成等、闻所成等三种慧被分别说明;依靠这三种慧,顿悟者等三种人又被分别说明。应当这样理解:以这种分别的方式,这个教说方式存在于导师所应教导的法中。巴利
7. ‘‘Tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādinā desanāhārena dukkhāpaṭipadābhedena taṇhācaritamandādibhedo puggalo vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘tassa vibhattānantaraṃ svāyaṃ desanāhāro kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme kenaci ākārena sambhavatī’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato ‘‘svāyaṃ hāro kattha sambhavatī’’tiādimāha. Navamakkhaṇasampannassa satthā yaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, tasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme yā vīmaṃsādikā sutamayādikā tisso paññā vibhattā, tāhi paññāhi ye ugghaṭitaññuādayo tayo puggalā vibhattā, iti vibhattākārena ayaṃ desanāhāro satthārā desetabbe dhamme sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,所谓“这个理趣”,就是通过教法的理趣、修行方式的区分,展示了应受教化众生的类别,这就是教法理趣。它在何处成立?就是在应当注释的法中,以注释的方式成立。对于谁呢?就是那位应受教化者,他已经从边地等八种无暇中解脱出来,又具备听闻、忆持等圆满条件,对于这样的应受教化者。导师,就是教导、训导包括诸天在内的世间,所以叫导师。法,就是所教导的、应当注释的法。教导,就是用简略和详细的方式宣说。某一位,就是在世尊的弟子中,能够这样教导法的弟子。应受尊敬者,就是具备戒、闻、施等种种殊胜功德,受到恭敬,其话值得相信。同梵行者,就是平等地、或一起修习世尊教法的梵行,所以叫同梵行者。获得净信,就是对导师生起“教导法的导师是正自觉者”的净信,对所说的法生起“这个法确实是善说,有义有利,文句具足,完全圆满,完全清净,能带来利益、带来安乐、带来幸福,能产生禅那、道、果,我们也应当信受”的不动摇的净信,并在自己的心相续中反复生起信受。同样,对说法的弟子生起“这位说法的弟子确实能够简略地或详细地教导法,是应受尊敬的同梵行者,受到恭敬,其话值得相信”的净信,对由弟子所说的法生起“由这样的弟子所说的法,是有义有利,文句具足,完全圆满,完全清净,能带来利益、带来安乐、带来幸福,能产生禅那、道、果,我们也应当信受”的净信,并在自己的心相续中反复生起信受,这就是其含义。巴利
Tattha svāyaṃ hāroti desanāhārena paṭipadāvibhāgena veneyyapuggalavibhāgo dassito, so ayaṃ desanāhāro. Kattha sambhavatīti kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena sambhavatīti. Yassāti yo so veneyyo paccantajādīhi aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vimutto, savanadhāraṇādīhi ca sampattīhi samannāgato, tassa veneyyassa. Satthāti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ sāsati anusāsatīti satthā. Dhammanti desitaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ dhammaṃ. Desayatīti saṅkhepanayavitthāranayehi bhāsati. Aññataroti bhagavato sāvakesu evaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho sāvako. Garuṭṭhāniyoti gāravassa ṭhānabhūtehi sīlasutacāgādiguṇavisesehi yutto mānito saddahitabbavacano. Sabrahmacārīti samaṃ, saha vā brahmaṃ satthusāsanaṃ carati paṭipajjatīti sabrahmacārī. Saddhaṃ labhati ‘‘yo satthā dhammaṃ deseti, so satthā sammāsambuddho hotī’’ti satthari, ‘‘svākkhāto vatāyaṃ dhammo sāttho sabyañjano ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho atthāvaho hitāvaho sukhāvaho jhānamaggaphalanibbattako, amhehi ca saddahitabbo’’ti desite dhamme ca acalasaddhaṃ labhati, saddahanaṃ attano santāne punappunaṃ uppādeti. Tathā ‘‘yo sāvako dhammaṃ deseti, so sāvako saṅkhepato vā vitthārato vā dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho vata garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī mānito saddahitabbavacano’’ti desake sāvake ca ‘‘tādisena sāvakena desito yo dhammo, so dhammo sāttho sabyañjano ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho atthāvaho hitāvaho sukhāvaho jhānamaggaphalanibbattako, amhehi ca saddahitabbo’’ti sāvakena desitadhamme ca saddhaṃ saddahanaṃ attano santāne punappunaṃ uppādetīti attho.
这里,“在此”是指:对于那位应当生起净信的、可受教化的众生,他对导师所教导的法以及弟子所教导的法生起净信之后,所进行的审察,审察时的策励,策励时的衡量,衡量时的观照——这种以审察等为起点、随信而运转的慧,就叫做“闻所成慧”。
其中,审察就是审察,是对巴利圣典的文句和义理的审察;或者说,审察是以另一文句审察此文句、以另一义理审察此义理的思择之慧。就像这里一样,对于策励等词,也应当按状态成就和作者成就的方式来理解。策励是指以策励为助缘、能成就法的忆持与熟习的慧,而不是精进。在这里,仅仅停留在听闻阶段、还没有达到审察等状态就停止的,不算闻所成慧;听闻之后审察了,但还没有达到策励等状态就停止的;听闻、审察并策励了,但还没有达到衡量等状态就停止的;听闻、审察、策励并衡量了,但还没有达到观照就停止的——这些慧也应当看作不是闻所成慧。然而,听闻之后生起净信的人进行审察,审察的人进行策励,策励的人进行衡量,衡量的人进行观照——这才应当看作叫做“闻所成慧”的慧。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ saddahitabbe satthārā desitadhamme ceva sāvakena desitadhamme ca saddahantassa veneyyassa yā vīmaṃsā, vīmaṃsantassa yā ussāhanā, ussahantassa yā tulanā, tulayantassa yā upaparikkhā, sā ayaṃ vīmaṃsādikā paññā saddhānusārena pavattanato sutamayī paññā nāma. Tattha vīmaṃsanaṃ vimaṃsā, pāḷiyā, pāḷiatthassa ca vīmaṃsā. Vīmaṃsatīti vā vīmaṃsā, padaṃ padantarena, padatthaṃ padatthantarena vicāraṇakā paññā. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ussāhanādīsupi bhāvasādhanakattusādhanāni kātabbāni. Ussāhanā ca ussāhena upatthambhikā dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayasādhikā paññā ca, na vīriyaṃ, ettha ca yā sutamatteyeva pavattā, vīmaṃsādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, sā sutamayī paññā na hoti. Yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussāhanādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussahitvā tulanādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussahitvā tulayitvā upaparikkhanabhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, sāpi paññā na sutamayī paññā hotīti daṭṭhabbā. Yā pana sutvā saddahantassa vīmaṃsā, vīmaṃsantassa ussāhanā, ussahantassa tulanā, tulayantassa upaparikkhā hoti, ayaṃ sutamayī paññā nāma hotīti daṭṭhabbā.
闻所成慧已经由老师分别说明了,我们也已经知道。因为接下来要说明“什么是思所成慧”,所以在分别说明闻所成慧之后,为了分别说明思所成慧,就说了“同样,以所闻为依止”等话。其中,“闻”是指所听闻的教法,所以叫“闻”;或者,听闻教法这个行为也叫“闻”,这两种都算“闻”。“以依止”就是以它为近依止的意思。这里“以所闻为依止”用的是具格,表示“如此这般的状态”这个含义。在这里,对种种法——比如“这远离杀生等,以戒行的意义来说是戒;这一境性,以等持的意义来说是定;这些地等所造色,以变坏的意义来说是色;这些触等,以朝向的意义来说是名;这些色等五法,以积聚的意义来说是蕴”——对这些法的逼迫等自性进行考察的慧,就叫“考察”。对这些戒、定等法,先问“戒,因为在这里安立,所以叫戒”这类词义,然后对它们的共相、作用、现起、足处加以衡量把握的慧,就叫“衡量”。对这些戒、定等法,不舍弃自性相,而以无常、苦、无我、变坏、有缘、有为等行相去思惟、观照的慧,特别应当看作“观照”。闻所成慧是依靠对所闻法的忆持和熟习而运转的,所以不说它是“策励”,好像策励已经生起一样;而思所成慧并不是依靠对所思维之法的忆持和熟习而运转的,所以不说它是“策励”。巴利
Sutamayī paññā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā cintāmayī paññā’’ti vattabbabhāvato sutamayiyā paññāya vibhajanānantaraṃ cintāmayiṃ paññaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tathā sutena nissayenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sutanti suyyate pariyattidhammoti suto, savanaṃ pariyattidhammassāti vā sutaṃ, duvidhampi sutaṃ. Nissayena upanissāyāti attho. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ ‘‘sutena nissayenā’’ti karaṇavacanaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘idaṃ pāṇātipātādiviramanaṃ sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ, ayaṃ ekaggatā samādahanaṭṭhena samādhi , imāni bhūtupādāni ruppanaṭṭhena rūpāni, ime phassādayo namanaṭṭhena nāmāni, ime rūpādayo pañca dhammā rāsaṭṭhena khandhā’’ti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ pīḷanādisabhāvassa vīmaṃsanābhūtā paññā vīmaṃsā nāma. Tesaṃyeva sīlasamādhiādīnaṃ sīlati patiṭṭhahati etthāti sīlantiādivacanatthaṃ pucchitvā sabhāgalakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānaṃ tuletvā viya gahaṇapaññā tulanaṃ nāma. Tesaṃyeva sīlasamādhiādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ avijahitvā aniccatādukkhatādinamanaruppanādisappaccayasaṅkhatādiākāre vitakketvā upaparikkhaṇapaññā eva upaparikkhā nāmāti visesato daṭṭhabbo. Sutadhammassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena pavattanato sutamayī paññā ussāhanā jātā viya na cintāmayī paññā cintitassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena appavattanatoti ‘‘ussāhanā’’ti na vuttaṃ.
闻所成慧和思所成慧已由老师分别解说,我们也已经了解了。因为接下来要说明“什么是修所成慧”,所以在展示了作为因的闻所成慧和思所成慧之后,为了分别作为果的修所成慧,而说了“以此二慧”等话。其中,“以此二慧”指的是作为因的闻所成慧和思所成慧。或者说,瑜伽行者无论安住在闻所成慧、思所成慧、还是两者之中,都可以开始修习毗婆舍那。“与作意相应”是指对色法和无色法,以把握等方式,对诸行以无常等方式,用如理作意正确而善巧地运用。通过成就见清净、度疑清净、道非道智见清净、行道智见清净和智见清净,精勤修习毗婆舍那的瑜伽行者,在其心相续中,于见地或修地生起的、以涅槃为所缘、名为智见清净的圣道智,这应当被理解为修所成慧的含义。虽然初道智因为初次见到涅槃而被称为“见”,但由于它是依修习而生起的,所以应知为“修所成慧”。“见地”指初道和初果,其余的则称为“修地”。巴利
Sutamayī paññā ceva cintāmayī paññā ca ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā bhāvanāmayī paññā’’ti vattabbabhāvato kāraṇabhūtānaṃ dvinnaṃ sutamayicintāmayipaññānaṃ dassanānantaraṃ phalabhūtaṃ bhāvanāmayiṃ paññaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘imāhi dvīhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha imāhi dvīhi paññāhīti sutamayicintāmayipaññāhi kāraṇabhūtāhi. Sutamayipaññāya vā cintāmayipaññāya vā ubhayattha vā ṭhitoyeva yogāvacaro vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti. Manasikārasampayuttassāti rūpārūpesu pariggahādivasena saṅkhāresu aniccatādivasena manasikārena sammā pakārehi yuttappayuttassa. Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhimaggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi- paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhisampādanena vipassanaṃ ussukkantassa yogāvacarassa santāne ñāṇadassanavisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ nibbānārammaṇadassanabhūmiyaṃ vā bhāvanābhūmiyaṃ vā uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāmayī paññāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Yadipi paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato ‘‘dassana’’nti vuttaṃ, bhāvanāvasena pana pavattanato ‘‘bhāvanāmayī paññā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Dassanabhūmīti paṭhamamaggaphalāni, sesāni ‘‘bhāvanābhūmī’’ti vuccanti.
8 我们的阿阇梨已经用“若是导师”等说法,把闻所成慧等一一分别说明了。这样一来,如果离开听闻,就不该有所谓思所成慧这种慧;可是对大菩萨来说,即使没有听闻,思所成慧也照样存在。考虑到这个责难,为了把它包含进去,并以另一种方式加以分别,就说了“从他人音声”等话。巴利
8. Amhākācariya tumhehi ‘‘yassa satthā vā’’tiādinā sutamayipaññādikā vibhattā, evaṃ sati sutena vinā cintāmayī paññā nāma na bhaveyya, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana sutena vinā cintāmayī paññā hotvevāti codanaṃ manasi katvā tasmiṃ saṅgahetvā pakārantarena vibhajituṃ ‘‘paratoghosā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“从他闻”是指:以从他人那里生起的说法音声为缘,所以叫“从他闻”。“自内所起”是指:各自分别在自己的内心中生起。“如理作意”是指:对那些应当思惟的色等法,以把握其变坏、弯曲等自性的方式而生起的作意,这叫作思所成慧。用这个说法,声闻弟子也被一般性地包括进来了;不过,因为这里是就“略解知者”等而说的,所以声闻弟子在此被特别纳入,因此前一种解释更合理。“从他”是指:以从说法者生起的说法音声为因,所生起的智慧;以“自内所起”和如理作意为因,所生起的智慧,这种智慧因为是依修习而转起的,所以叫作修所成慧。用这个说法,声闻弟子也被一般性地包括进来了;不过,因为这里是就“略解知者”等而说的,所以声闻弟子在此被特别纳入,因此前一种解释更合理。把以“从他”和“自内所起”等为因所生起的慧,依修习而转起的,称为修所成慧,这样分别之后,应由智者了知。想要详细了知这深义的人,应当依据《导论注》中“依此行道分别”等注疏语句来了知。巴利
Tattha paratoghosāti parato pavatto desanāghoso paccayo etissāti paratoghosā. Paccattasamuṭṭhitāti pati visuṃ attaniyeva samuṭṭhitā. Yonisomanasikārāti tesaṃ tesaṃ cintetabbānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ ruppananamanādisabhāvapariggaṇhanādinā upāyena pavattamanasikārā cintāmayī paññā nāma, iminā sāvakāpi sāmaññato gahitā, tathāpi ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃyeva vuttattā sāvakā idha gahitā, tasmā purimanayo yuttataro. Paratoti dhammadesakato pavattena dhammadesanāghosena hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, paccattasamuṭṭhitena, yonisomanasikārena ca hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāvasena pavattanato bhāvanāmayī paññā nāma, iminā sāvakāpi sāmaññato gahitā, tathāpi ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃyeva vuttattā sāvakā idha gahitā, tasmā purimanayo yuttataro. Paratoti dhammadesakato pavattena dhammadesanāghosena hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, paccattasamuṭṭhitena, yonisomanasikārena ca hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāvasena pavattanato bhāvanāmayī paññā nāmāti vibhajitvā paṇḍitehi ñeyyāti vitthārena gambhīratthaṃ ñātuṃ icchantehi ‘‘evaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgenā’’tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 9) aṭṭhakathāvacanena jānitabbo.
闻所成慧等三种慧,阿阇梨已经用种种方式加以分别,我们也已经了解。因为要问“在这三种慧当中,具有一种或两种慧的人,叫做什么补特伽罗?一种慧也没有的人,叫做什么补特伽罗?”所以,为了按行道慧的差别来分别补特伽罗,而说了“若具这些”等话,意思是:具有这种慧或这些慧的人,叫做某某补特伽罗;没有的人,叫做某某补特伽罗。巴利
Sutamayipaññādikā tisso paññā ācariyena nānānayehi vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tāsu yassa ekā vā dve vā paññā atthi, so puggalo konāmo, yassa ekāpi natthi, so puggalo konāmo’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato yassa ayaṃ paññā, imā vā atthi, so puggalo itthannāmo, yassa natthi, so puggalo itthannāmoti paṭipadāpaññāppabhedena puggalaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘yassa imā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,对于具有极锐利智慧的人来说,如果他同时具备闻所成慧和思所成慧这两种慧,那么他仅凭读诵经文就能了知,这叫做“略解知者”。对于智慧不是极锐利的人来说,如果他通过略说和广说具备闻所成慧,但不具备思所成慧,那么他依靠略说和广说了知,这叫做“广解知者”。对于智慧迟钝的人来说,他通过略说和广说既不具备闻所成慧,也不具备思所成慧,那么他必须依靠略说、广说以及反复解说才能了知,最终要被引导到详尽无余的完整教导,这叫做“可引导者”。不过在义注中说:“现在,为了说明这些慧被提出的目的,结合所化众生的分类来显示,所以说了‘若具’等话。”巴利
Tattha yassa atitikkhapaññassa sutamayī paññā ceva cintāmayī paññā ca imā dve paññā atthi, ayaṃ atitikkhapañño uddesamatteneva jānanato ugghaṭitaññū nāma. Yassa nātitikkhapaññassa uddesaniddesehi sutamayī paññā atthi, cintāmayī paññā natthi, ayaṃ nātitikkhapañño uddesaniddesehi jānanato vipañcitaññū nāma. Yassa mandapaññassa uddesaniddesehi neva sutamayī paññā atthi, na cintāmayī paññā ca, ayaṃ mandapañño uddesaniddesapaṭiniddesehi jānanato niravasesavitthāradesanāya netabbato neyyo nāmāti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni yadatthaṃ imā paññā uddhaṭā, tameva veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘yassā’tiādi vutta’’ntiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 8) vuttaṃ.
9 在这里,世尊以“略解知者”等说法来阐明教说;又以“其中,四种行道”等从行道的分别来说明,以“此即彼理趣”等从智慧的分别来说明。阿阇梨把教说分成三种所化众生,我们也已经知道了。有人问:“把教说理趣和这部教说巴利结合起来时,先前以‘诸比丘,我将为你们说法’等语,作为教说理趣的对象而安立的这部巴利教说,在由教说理趣所确定的味等义中,究竟是在说什么意思?”为了回答这个问题,先确定并显示“它说的就是这个意思”,于是开始说“此即法说”等。巴利
9. ‘‘Tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussā’’tiādinā desanaṃ vibhāveti, ‘‘tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādinā paṭipadāvibhāgehi, ‘‘svāyaṃ hāro’’tiādinā ñāṇavibhāgehi ca desanābhājanaṃ veneyyattayaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘yāya desanāpāḷiyā desanāhāraṃ yojetuṃ pubbe ‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’tiādinā desanāhārassa visayabhāvena yā pāḷidesanā nikkhittā, sā pāḷidesanā desanāhārena niddhāritesu assādādīsu atthesu kimatthaṃ desayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imaṃ atthaṃ desayatī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sāyaṃ dhammadesanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
在这里,此法说是指:先前作为教说引导的对象而被安立的那种初善等的法说。对于此法说,为了说明它在味等义中到底宣说什么,就以想要谈论的方式发问;问过之后,回答说宣说四谛。为了显示这四谛各自的真实面貌,就说苦、集、灭、道。因为它们具有流转、令流转、还灭、还灭方法的体性,而且没有颠倒,所以称为谛。巴利
Tattha sāyaṃ dhammadesanāti yā dhammadesanā ādikalyāṇādikā pubbe desanāhārassa visayabhāvena nikkhittā, sāyaṃ dhammadesanā assādādīsu kimatthaṃ desayatīti kathetukāmatāya pucchati, pucchitvā ‘‘cattāri saccāni desayatī’’ti vissajjeti, tāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti vuttaṃ. Pavattipavattakanivattinivattanupāyabhāvena aviparītabhāvato ‘‘saccānī’’ti vuttāni.
在哪一种开示里,诸谛是依开示的引导方式而被确定的,那么说这种开示宣说四圣谛,是合理的。在哪一种开示里,确定的是味等,那么就不能说这种开示宣说四圣谛。而下面已经确定了味等,所以,考虑到“也应该说‘味等’”这一责难,才说了“过患与果是苦”等话。依开示的引导方式、即依注释的方法,在开示中所确定的过患与果就是苦谛,味是集谛,出离是灭谛,方便与教令是道谛,因此,“宣说四圣谛”这句话是必定要说的。巴利
Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ saccāni desanāhārena niddhāritāni, sā desanā cattāri saccāni desayatīti yuttaṃ hotu. Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ assādādayo niddhāritā, sā desanā cattāri saccāni desayatīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Heṭṭhā ca assādādayo niddhāritā, tasmā ‘‘assādādayo’’tipi vattabbanti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘ādīnavo phalañca dukkha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇanānayena desanāyaṃ niddhārito ādīnavo ceva phalañca dukkhasaccaṃ hoti, assādo samudayasaccaṃ, nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, upāyo ceva āṇatti ca maggasaccaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘cattāri saccāni desayatī’’ti vattabbamevāti.
除渴爱之外的三地诸法就是苦,而这些法因为被无常等逼迫,所以正是过患。所谓“果”,是指开示所带来的果,属于世间,不是出世间,因此必定要说为“苦”。所谓“味”,因为这里取的是渴爱之味,所以应当说“味是集”。味的一部分就是苦,味的一部分既是苦也是集。与观相应的圣道以及世尊的教令,因为是证得开示之果的方法,所以说“方法和教令是道”;出离的一部分也应看作道。为了回答“这四圣谛,是哪一种开示特别宣说的?”这个问题,所以先确定其特别之处,再显示出来,因此说“这四圣谛,这就是法轮”。应当这样连接理解:这正在宣说的法轮,正是特别宣说这四圣谛。巴利
Taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhaṃ, te ca aniccādīhi pīḷitattā ādīnavāyeva. Phalanti desanāya phalaṃ lokiyaṃ, na lokuttaraṃ, tasmā dukkhanti vattabbameva. Assādoti taṇhāssādassa gahitattā ‘‘assādo samudayo’’ti ca vattabbaṃ. Assādekadeso dukkhameva, assādekadeso dukkhañceva samudayo ca. Saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo ca bhagavato āṇatti ca desanāya phalādhigamassa upāyabhāvato ‘‘upāyo, āṇatti ca maggo’’ti vuttaṃ, nissaraṇekadesopi maggoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Imāni cattāri saccāni yā desanā visesato desayati, katamā sā’’ti pucchitabbattā visesaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘imāni cattāri saccāni idaṃ dhammacakka’’nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuccamānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ imāni cattāri saccāni visesato desayatīti yojanā kātabbā.
有人问:那场特别开示这四圣谛的教导,世尊为什么把它叫作“法轮”呢?因为这是应当问的,所以经文接着说“如世尊所说”等等。其中,从“生也是苦”这类话来看,除渴爱之外的生等三地诸法,因为是苦的依托处,又具有苦苦等性质,所以被称为“苦”。应当这样连接理解:“由我所转起”。“比丘们”这个称呼,是为了让听法的人生起热忱而说的。“波罗奈”指波罗奈城附近。“仙人堕处”指那些因为寻求戒蕴等而被称为“仙人”的独觉佛们坠落的地方。“鹿野苑”指建在为鹿群施与无畏之处的修行林园。巴利
‘‘Yā desanā imāni cattāri saccāni visesato desayati, tassā desanāya dhammacakkabhāvaṃ kiṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādivacanato (mahāva. 14) taṇhāvajjaṃ jātiādikaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvena, dukkhadukkhādibhāvena ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuttaṃ. Meti mayā pavattitanti yojanā. Bhikkhaveti savane ussāhaṃ janetuṃ ālapati. Bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasīnagarassa avidūre. Isipataneti sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ isanato gavesanato ‘‘isī’’ti voharitānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ patanaṭṭhāne. Migadāyeti migānaṃ abhayadānaṭṭhāne kārite assameva.
“无上”是指没有比它更高的,所以叫无上、无可超越。“法轮”是指念处等法,从“持自性”等意义上是“法”,从“转起”的意义上是“轮”,所以叫法轮。“不可逆转”是指无法被遮止、无法被推翻。为什么?因为能生起这法的世尊是法自在者、正自觉者,所生的法也是无上的;而且憍陈如等人和十八俱胝梵天都证得了四圣谛。因为有人会问“为什么不可逆转?”,所以经文说“由沙门……”等。这里,“沙门”指刚刚出家的人。“婆罗门”指出身婆罗门种姓的人。对于胜义上的沙门、婆罗门来说,想要遮止它,连这种念头都不会生起。“天”指六欲界天。“梵天”指色界梵天。经文没有只说“由沙门……乃至……梵天”就停住,而是说“由任何人”,用这句话把其余刹帝利、居士等大众都包括进来了。因此应当知道,刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门、四大王天、三十三天、魔、梵天这八类大众,全都无法遮止它。“世间”指众生聚集之处,也就是法轮所依之处。巴利
Anuttaranti uttaritarābhāvena anuttaraṃ anatisayaṃ. Dhammacakkanti satipaṭṭhānādike sabhāvadhāraṇādinā atthena dhammo ceva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Appaṭivattiyanti appaṭisedhanīyaṃ. Kasmā? Janakassa bhagavato dhammissarattā sammāsambuddhattā, jaññassa ca anuttarattā koṇḍaññādīnañceva aṭṭhārasabrahmakoṭiyā ca catusaccapaṭivedhasādhanato ca. ‘‘Kena appaṭivattiya’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘samaṇena vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha samaṇenāti pabbajjamattūpagatena . Brāhmaṇenāti jātibrāhmaṇena. Paramatthānañhi samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ paṭisedhane cittuppādānuppajjanampi natthi. Devenāti chakāmāvacaradevena. Brahmunāti rūpabrahmā gahitā. ‘‘Samaṇena vā …pe… brahmunā’’ti ettakameva avatvā‘‘kenacī’’ti vuttavacanena avasesakhattiyagahapatiparisajanā saṅgahitā. Tasmā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisā aṭṭhavidhāpi paṭisedhetuṃ asamatthāyevāti veditabbā. Lokasminti sattasamūhe dhammacakkādhāre.
“十二句经”:为了配合偈颂,在分别《法轮经》里的“句”时,说了“其中无量……”等话。这里的“其中”,指的是法轮说法之中。没有说“无量的字、无量的句”,而是说“无量的句、无量的字”,通过颠倒顺序的说法,表明大多数情况下是被“句”所包含的。句、字、文,应当理解为语法上的性别错置。所谓“此义”,就是对应说之相状、即四圣谛这一意义的宣说、阐明、阐明的方式、施设的方式——这是在“有相状者”与“相状”之间用属。“如是亦”:以此方式,应知这些苦是圣谛巴利
‘‘Dvādasa padāni sutta’’nti gāthānurūpaṃ dhammacakkasutte padāni vibhajanto ‘‘tattha aparimāṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti dhammacakkadesanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13 ādayo; paṭi. ma. 2.30). ‘‘Aparimāṇā akkharā aparimāṇā padā’’ti avatvā ‘‘aparimāṇā padā aparimāṇā akkharā’’ti uppaṭipāṭivacanehi yebhuyyena padasaṅgahitānīti dasseti. Padā, akkharā, byañjanāti ca liṅgavipallāsānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Etasseva atthassāti vattabbākārassa catusaccasaṅkhātassa atthasseva saṅkāsanā pakāsanā pakāsanākāro paññattākāroti ākāravantaākārasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Saṅkāsanākāroti ca saṅkāsanīyassa atthassa ākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Itipīti iti iminā pakārenapi, iminā pakārenapi idaṃ jātiādikaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti veditabbaṃ.
“此”指欲爱等不同种类的渴爱。苦集,因为它是苦生起的因,所以叫苦集。“此”指从一切有为法中脱离出来的无为界。苦灭,因为它是生等各类苦不再生起、息灭的条件,所以叫苦灭。“此”指正见等八支圣道。苦灭道,因为它以已经证得的苦灭涅槃为所缘而运作,又是达到苦灭的修行道路,所以叫苦灭道。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Ayanti kāmataṇhādibhedā ayaṃ taṇhā. Dukkhasamudayoti dukkhanibbattanassa hetubhāvato dukkhasamudayo. Ayanti sabbasaṅkhatato nissaṭā ayaṃ asaṅkhatā dhātu. Dukkhanirodhoti jātiādippabhedassa dukkhassa anuppādananirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodho. Ayanti sammādiṭṭhādiko aṭṭhaṅgiko ariyo maggo. Dukkhanirodhabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gatattā, dukkhanirodhappattiyā paṭipadābhāvato ca dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在这段注释里,先用“此中无量”等语句把字、句、义句拆开来分析,为了说明它们彼此之间是“境”和“有境”的关系,所以接着说了“此中世尊以字开示……”等话。或者也可以这样理解:因为可以追问“世尊到底是用共通的字等来开示、阐明,还是随应场合来开示、阐明?”为了确定并显示它们之间确实是境与有境的关系,所以说了“此中世尊以字开示……”等话。那么,这里为什么说“以字开示”呢?难道不是直接用“苦谛”这样的词就能开示苦谛等含义吗?确实如此。不过,把握了作为词组成部分的字,也就等于把握了由字集合而成的词;而一旦把握了词,对苦谛等含义的理解就会产生。既然这样,靠词本身就能成立,为什么还要单独把握字呢?并非如此,因为对苦谛等含义的理解有更殊胜的生起方式。比如,通过“du”这个字,能把握到“以种种灾患为依处、所以可厌”的含义;通过“kha”这个字,能把握到“没有恒常、清净、快乐、自我性,所以是空无”的含义——像这样,殊胜的理解就会生起。因此说“对句义的把握有殊胜的安立生起”。在一句的末尾,因为并没有另立一个句末,所以用字简略显示的含义,是由词来阐明的,因此说“以词阐明”。而在句末,已经开示、阐明的含义被打开、被显露出来,所以说“以文开显”。再用各种方式把句子分开时,那个含义就被区分开来,所以说“以相状分别”。对句子的各个部分、各个词逐一作语源分析时,那个含义就被弄得明显,所以说“以语源显明”。对已经作过语源分析的句子成分,以广说的方式毫无遗漏地开示出来,就能让所教化的众生心中完全生起满足,并且智慧也被点燃,所以说“以分别开示”。巴利
‘‘Tattha aparimāṇā’’tiādinā byañjanapadaatthapadāni vibhajitvā tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ visayivisayabhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā bhagavā kiṃ sāmaññehi akkharādīhi saṅkāseti vā pakāseti vā, udāhu yathārahaṃ saṅkāseti pakāsetītiādivicāraṇāya sambhavato visayavisayibhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’ti kasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu ‘‘dukkhasacca’’ntiādīsu padeneva dukkhasaccatthattādiko saṅkāsitabboti? Saccaṃ, padāvayavassa pana akkharassa gahaṇamukheneva akkharasamudāyassapi padassa gahaṇaṃ hoti, pade gahite ca dukkhasaccatthādikāvabodho hotveva, evaṃ sati padeneva sijjhanato akkharo visuṃ na gahetabboti? Na, dukkhasaccatthādikāvabodhassa visesuppattibhāvato. Du-iti akkharena hi anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānabhāvena kucchitattho gahito, kha-iti akkharena dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahena tucchatthoti evamādikāvabodhassa visesuppatti bhavati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘padatthagahaṇassa visesādhānaṃ jāyatī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 9). Padapariyosāne vākyapariyosānābhāvato akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padehi pakāsitovāti vuttaṃ ‘‘padehi pakāsetī’’ti. Vākyapariyosāne pana saṅkāsito pakāsito attho vivarito vivaṭo katovāti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Byañjanehi vivaratī’’ti. Pakārehi ca vākyabhede kate so attho vibhatto nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ākārehi vibhajatī’’ti. Vākyāvayavānaṃ padānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo katovāti vuttaṃ ‘‘niruttīhi uttānīkarotī’’ti. Katanibbacanehi vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyasattānaṃ citte parisamantato tosanaṃ hoti, paññātejanañcāti āha ‘‘niddesehi paññapetī’’ti.
在“世尊以文字宣说”这类说法里,如果把限定词套在“唯是世尊”或“唯以文字”上,那意思就会变成“弟子不宣说,不以句等宣说”;可是弟子确实宣说,也确实以句等宣说。那么限定词该加在哪里呢?应当把限定词加在“世尊唯以文字宣说”上。这样一来,由弟子所宣说或以句等所宣说的意义也被涵盖在内,同时“义句以文字等为不同范围”这一点也得以成立。因此,在单一关联的经中,只应确定六种义句;在多种关联的经中,则应按关联的差别,分别确定各别的六种义句。巴利
‘‘Bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādīsu ‘‘bhagavā evā’’ti vā ‘‘akkharehi evā’’ti vā avadhāraṇe yojite ‘‘sāvako na saṅkāseti, padādīhi na saṅkāsetī’’ti attho bhaveyya, sāvako ca saṅkāseti, padādīhi ca saṅkāseti. Kattha avadhāraṇaṃ yojetabbanti ce? ‘‘Bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetiyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati sāvakena saṅkāsito vā padādīhi saṅkāsito vā attho saṅgahito hoti. Atthapadānañca akkharādinānāvisayatā siddhā hoti. Tena ekānusandhike sutte chaḷeva atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni, anekānusandhike sutte anusandhibhedena visuṃ visuṃ cha cha atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni.
因为会被问“在六种文句当中,以哪一种文句成办哪一种作用”,为了确定并指出“以这一种成办这一种作用,以那一种成办那一种作用”,所以说了“其中,世尊以字和句来开显”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在字等文句当中。“开显”的意思是成办开显的作用。虽然只是宣说本身就成办了开显的作用,但因为世尊是宣说的产生者,所以说他成办开显的作用。其余几处也应这样理解。巴利
‘‘Chasu byañjanapadesu katamena byañjanapadena katamaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iminā idaṃ kiccaṃ, iminā idaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭetī’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti akkharādīsu byañjanapadesu. Ugghaṭetīti ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādhetīti attho. Kiñcāpi desanāva ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādheti, bhagavā pana desanājanakattā ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādhetīti vuccati. Sesesupi evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
可能会有人问:成就开显作用的,难道只是开示本身吗?还是说,它也能成就分别和广说的作用,因而成为开示的发起者?或者,是另有其他开示,各自成就不同的作用?为了确定并指出“另有其他开示,各自成就不同的作用”,所以说了“其中,开显等”。另一种说法是,因为可能会问“什么是开显?什么是分别?什么是广说?”所以说了“其中,开显等”。“其中”是指在成就开显等作用的种种开示当中。“开显”是指成就开显作用的开示,也就是最初的开示。“分别”是指成就分别作用的开示,也就是中间的开示。“广说”是指成就广说作用的开示,也就是最后开示。应当这样理解其含义。巴利
‘‘Ugghaṭanakiccasādhikā desanāyeva kiṃ vipañcanavitthāraṇakiccasādhikā desanājanakattā, udāhu visuṃ visuṃ kiccasādhikā aññā’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato visuṃ visuṃ kiccasādhikā aññā desanāti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha ugghaṭanā ādī’’tiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘katamā ugghaṭanā, katamā vipañcanā, katamā vitthāraṇā’’ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha ugghaṭanā ādī’’tiādi. Tattha tatthāti ugghaṭanādikiccasādhikāsu desanāsu. Ugghaṭanāti ugghaṭanakiccasādhikā desanā ādidesanā hoti. Vipañcanāti vipañcanakiccasādhikā desanā majjhedesanā hoti. Vitthāraṇāti vitthāraṇakiccasādhikā desanā pariyosānadesanā hotīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
由于可能会这样问:以开显的方式略说时,作为略说所摄之义的法与律调伏哪一种人?以分别的方式广说时,作为广说所摄之义的法与律调伏哪一种人?以广说的方式极广说时,作为极广说所摄之义的法与律调伏哪一种人?所以说了“此法与律”等。而注释书则说:这样显示了“以文字宣说”等六种文辞的作用之后,现在为了显示词义的作用,才说“此法与律”等。巴利
‘‘Ugghaṭiyanto uddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, vipañciyanto niddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, vitthāriyanto paṭiniddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vinetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ ‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’tiādīnaṃ channaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetvā idāni atthapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 9) vuttaṃ.
在这里,当法与律以简要开示的方式被诵出、成为略说教理之义时,它能调伏顿悟型的人;因为能调伏顿悟型的人,所以人们称这个正在被简要开示、被诵出、作为略说教理之义的律为“初善”。当它以分别广说的方式被诵出、成为广说教理之义时,它能调伏渐悟型的人;因为能调伏渐悟型的人,所以人们称这个正在被分别广说、被诵出、作为广说教理之义的律为“中善”。当它以极广说的方式被反复开示、成为极广说教理之义时,它能调伏可引导型的人,并产生调伏作用;因为能调伏可引导型的人,所以人们称这个正在被极广说、被反复开示、作为极广说教理之义的律为“终善”。应当这样理解其连接之义。巴利
Tattha ugghaṭiyanto uddisiyamāno uddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo ugghaṭitaññupuggalaṃ vineti, tena ugghaṭitaññuno puggalassa vinayanena naṃ ugghaṭiyantaṃ uddisiyamānaṃ uddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ ‘‘ādikalyāṇo’’ti āhu. Vipañciyanto niddisiyamāno niddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo vipañcitaññupuggalaṃ vineti, tena vipañcitaññupuggalassa vinayanena naṃ vipañciyantaṃ niddisiyamānaṃ niddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ ‘‘majjhekalyāṇo’’ti āhu. Vitthāriyanto paṭiniddisiyamāno paṭiniddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo neyyaṃ puggalaṃ vineti vinayanaṃ janeti, tena neyyassa puggalassa vinayanena naṃ vitthāriyantaṃ paṭiniddisiyamānaṃ paṭiniddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ ‘‘pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti āhūti yojanatthoti daṭṭhabbo.
或者,有人提出这样的质疑:如果按照“以文字来宣说”等说法,这里展示的是六种词的作用,那么这样一来,义就成了没有作用的东西;但义从究竟意义上说,恰恰是有作用的。针对这个质疑,论师说“此法是律……”等等。通过这句话,论师表明:义本身主要在究竟层面上完成对三类应受调伏者的调伏功能,而表达义的声音则是在施设层面上完成对三类应受调伏者的调伏功能。至于执著于词句的人,因为他没有证得谛现观的立足处,所以这里没有提到他。或者,就像提到“有学”时也含摄了善凡夫一样,通过提到“可引导者”,也应当理解为含摄了执著于词句的人。在“以文字”等语句中,这是表示工具格的用法,不是表示原因的用法。因为文字等是开显等目的的手段,而不是开显等是文字等的目的,所以不能像“因食物而活”这类例子那样,把它理解为原因义。在“因食物而活”这个例子里,是以食物为原因而活,因为活而得到食物,也就是说,活的作用作为结果,同时也被理解为活的作用作为原因。“因乞求而活”等例子也是同样的道理。因此论师说:“凡是为了某种目的而起的动作,那个目的就是因。”在这里,“为了某种目的”指的是食物等目的,也就是说,食物等目的是那个活等动作的原因,应当这样理解。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādinā channaṃ padānaṃ byāpāro dassito, evaṃ sati attho nibyāpāro siyā, attho ca nippariyāyato sabyāpāroyevāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’’tiādi. Etena atthoyeva mukhyato veneyyattayassa vinayanakiccaṃ sādheti, atthavācako pana saddo ṭhānūpacārato veneyyattayassa vinayanakiccaṃ sādhetīti dasseti. Padaparamassa pana saccappaṭivedhassa patiṭṭhānābhāvato so idha na vutto. Sekkhaggahaṇena vā kalyāṇaputhujjanassa viya neyyaggahaṇena padaparamassa puggalassāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ . Akkharehītiādīsu karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, na hetvatthe. Akkharādīnañhi ugghaṭanādīni payojanāniyeva honti, na ugghaṭanādīnaṃ akkharādīni payojanānīti ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya na hetuattho gahetabbo. Tattha hi annena hetunā vasati, vasanena hetunā annaṃ laddhanti vasanakiriyāya phalaṃ vasanakiriyāya hetubhāvena gahitaṃ. ‘‘Ajjhesanena vasatī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘yadatthā ca kiriyā, so hetū’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 9). Tattha yadatthāti so annādiko attho yassā vasanādikiriyāyāti yadatthā, vasanādikiriyā, so annādiko attho tassā vasanādikiriyāya hetūti attho veditabbo.
10 在这里,先通过“Tattha aparimāṇā padā”等语句,对以“dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī”开示的巴利圣典,显示了由十二句具足所摄的三种美善;现在为了显示由六义句和六文句的差别所摄的义句与文句之美善,而说“tattha chappadāni attho”等。或者,依照“dvādasa padāni suttaṃ”所说,通过“tattha aparimāṇā”等语句,显示了以“dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī”开示的巴利圣典具有十二句;接着依照“ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ”所说,通过“tattha bhagavā akkharehi cā”等语句,显示了该圣典的三种美善;显示之后,现在为了依照“sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ”所说,显示该圣典具足六义句和六文句,而说“tattha chappadāni attho”等。
其中,“tattha”指在三种教法所摄的巴利圣典中,有六种义句。“六种义句”是哪些呢?就是:开示、显明、揭示、分别、阐明、施设——这六种就是义句。有这种义,所以是“有义的”。其中,“tattha”指在三种教法所摄的巴利圣典中,有六种文句。“六种文句”是哪些呢?就是:文字、词句、文句、形态、词源解释、详细说明——这六种就是文句。有这种文句,所以是“有文句的”——应当这样连接理解。因此,世尊以该圣典具有三种美善、具足六义句、具足六文句之义,而说了“dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave……suddhaṃ”等。这就是其含义。巴利
10. ‘‘Tattha aparimāṇā padā’’tiādinā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī’’ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā dvādasapadasampattisaṅkhātaṃ tividhakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni chaatthapadachabyañjanapadabhedena sampattisaṅkhātaṃ atthapadabyañjanapadakalyāṇataṃ dassento ‘‘tattha chappadāni attho’’tiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘dvādasa padāni sutta’’nti vuttānurūpaṃ ‘‘tattha aparimāṇā’’tiādinā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī’’ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā dvādasapadatā dassetvā ‘‘ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti vuttānurūpaṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi cā’’tiādinā tassā pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇatā dassitā, dassetvā idāni ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddha’’nti vuttānurūpaṃ tassā pāḷiyā chaatthapadabyañjanapadasampannataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha chappadāni attho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ desanāhāravisayasaṅkhātāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ chappadāni attho. Katamāni chappadāni? Saṅkāsanā, pakāsanā, vivaraṇā, vibhajanā, uttānīkammaṃ, paññatti imāni chappadāni. Attho yassa atthi tasmā sātthaṃ. Tatthāti tissaṃ desanāhāravisayasaṅkhātāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ chappadāni byañjanaṃ. Katamāni chappadāni? Akkharaṃ, padaṃ, byañjanaṃ, ākāro, nirutti, niddeso imāni chappadāni. Byañjanaṃ yassa atthīti sabyañjananti yojanā kātabbā. Tenāti tassā pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇachaatthapadasampannachabyañjanapadasampannaṭṭhena, ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave…pe… suddha’’nti bhagavā āhāti attho.
为了确定并说明“kevala”这个词具有“全部”等含义,所以说“kevala 即出世间、不与世间法混杂”。“圆满”:在所指的意义上没有缺少任何一义,在能表达的词音中也没有一个无意义的、多余的声音,所以叫“圆满”,即无缺、无减、无增。“清净”:因为远离了词音的过失、意义的过失等,所以叫“清净”;或者因为远离了贪等垢染,成为极清净、极洁白的上人法殊胜境界现起之处,所以叫“清净”“极洁白”。此法之垢已离去,所以叫“无垢”。或者因为远离词音过失等,或者因为远离贪等,从一切垢染中完全远离、周遍洁白,所以叫“极洁白”。“现起”:一切殊胜法在此现前,所以叫“现起”,就像“已踏入”一样。“已踏入”就是已经踏入之处。“殊胜”:相对于人法而殊胜,所以叫“殊胜”;一切殊胜,所以叫“一切殊胜”;或者从一切方面殊胜,所以叫“一切殊胜”,即上人法。应如此连接:此一切殊胜法现前。“此”:指包含三学的教法梵行。“如来、正等觉者的足”即“如来足”。“足”又通过修行之行或说法之行而指烦恼的执取。也被称为“覆盖后行走之处”;也被称为如来通过行处受用或修习受用而亲近、习近;也被称为如来以大金刚智、一切知智之牙所咀嚼、所咀嚼之处。因此,由于应以如来足等状态来说明的缘故,这教法梵行被称为“如此可知”。“梵行”:梵天即一切有情中最上的世尊之行,或者最上、最胜之行,即梵行。“可知”:应以上述方式而了知,这就是其义。巴利
Kevalasaddassa sakalādiatthavācakattā adhippetatthaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kevalanti lokuttaraṃ na missaṃ lokiyehi dhammehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti adhippetatthe ekopi attho ūno natthi, vācakasaddesupi anatthako ekopi saddo adhiko natthīti paripuṇṇaṃ anūnaṃ anatirekaṃ. Parisuddhanti saddadosaatthadosādivirahato vā parisuddhaṃ, rāgādimalavirahato vā pariyodātānaṃ uttarimanussadhammavisesānaṃ upaṭṭhitaṭṭhānattā parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ. Niggataṃ malaṃ etassa dhammassāti nimmalaṃ. Saddadosādivirahato vā rāgādivirahato vā sabbamalehi apagataṃ pari samantato odātanti pariyodātaṃ. Upaṭṭhitanti upatiṭṭhanti ettha sabbavisesāti upaṭṭhitaṃ yathā ‘‘padakkanta’’nti. Padakkantaṃ padakkantaṭṭhānaṃ. Visisanti manussadhammehīti visesā, sabbe visesā sabbavisesā, sabbato vā visesāti sabbavisesā, uttarimanussadhammā. Tesaṃ sabbavisesānaṃ upaṭṭhitanti yojanā. Idanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Tathāgatassa sammāsambuddhassa padanti tathāgatapadaṃ. Padanti ca paṭipattigamanena vā desanāgamanena vā kilesaggahaṇaṃ. Ottharitvā gamanaṭṭhānaṃ itipi vuccati pavuccati, tathāgatena gocarāsevanena vā bhāvanāsevanena vā nisevitaṃ bhajitaṃ itipi vuccati, tathāgatassa mahāvajirañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇadantehi ārañjitaṃ ārañjitaṭṭhānaṃ itipi vuccati, ato tathāgatapadādibhāvena vattabbabhāvato etaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ iti paññāyati. Brahmacariyanti brahmuno sabbasattuttamassa bhagavato cariyaṃ, brahmaṃ vā sabbaseṭṭhaṃ cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ. Paññāyatīti yathāvuttehi pakārehi ñāyatīti attho veditabbo.
有人会这样问:我们要怎样才能毫无疑惑地了知,这个含摄三学的教法所具有的圆满清净状态,也就是所谓的如来足处性——如来足处性、如来所亲近性、如来所体味性、以那些方式所开示性?因此说了“tenāha bhagavā”等话。意思是:你们应当凭世尊所说的、能显示这些性质的话,毫无疑惑地了知。巴利
‘‘Imassa sikkhattayassa saṅgahassa sāsanassa paripuṇṇabhāvaparisuddhabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ tathāgatapadabhāvaṃ!Tathāgatapadabhāvaṃ, tathāgatanisevitabhāvaṃ, tathāgataārañjitabhāvaṃ, tehi pakārehi ñāpitabhāvaṃ kathaṃ mayaṃ nikkaṅkhā jānissāmā’’ti vattabbato ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tabbhāvadīpakena bhagavatā vuttena vacanena tumhehi nikkaṅkhehi jānitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
如果世尊用字母和词句来揭示,用文句和行相来铺陈,用词义和详释来展开,那么在这种情况下,阿阇梨所造的教示摄受就没有用处了,因为不靠教示摄受,世尊的开示本身就能成就义利。针对这个质疑,先问“这个法教是为谁说的”,然后答“为瑜伽行者”。其中“yogīnaṃ”是指那些致力于四圣谛业处修习的人,即瑜伽行者,是为他们。因此,由我所造的教示摄受所注释的、如上所述的那种世尊开示,能成办揭示等作用,所以应当认为教示摄受对瑜伽行者是有利益的。由于有人会说“教示摄受具有功德等教示摄受性,我们怎么知道、怎么信受”,所以说“tenāha āyasmā…pe… desanāhāro”。其中,具寿大迦旃延以那显示功德等的教示摄受性,说了“assādādīnavatā…pe… desanāhāro”这番话,凭这番话,你们应当知道、信受教示摄受对瑜伽行者具有功德等教示摄受性,这就是所说的意思。巴利
Yadi bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭeti, byañjanehi ca ākārehi ca vipañcayati, niruttīhi ca niddesehi ca vitthāreti, evaṃ sati ācariyena racitena desanāhārena payojanaṃ na bhavati, desanāhārena na vinā bhagavato desanāyameva atthasijjhanatoti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘kesaṃ ayaṃ dhammadesanā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yogīna’’nti āha. Tattha yogīnanti yujjanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāyanti yogino, tesaṃ yogīnaṃ. Tena mayā racitena desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇitā ayaṃ vuttappakārā bhagavato desanā ugghaṭanādikiccaṃ sādhetīti desanāhāro yogīnaṃ sātthakoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Desanāhārassa assādādidesanāhārabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha āyasmā…pe… desanāhāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tena assādādidesanāhārabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘assādādīnavatā…pe… desanāhāro’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi desanāhārassa yogīnaṃ assādādidesanāhārabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
有人会问:“那么,仅仅这样,教示摄受就算圆满了吗?没有别的所应用了吗?”因为这样问的缘故,所以说“所应用的教示摄受”。在这里,在哪一种教说中,功德等由哪一种教示摄受所确定,就应该理解为:在那种教说中,那教示摄受确定之后便加以应用。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ pana ettāvatā desanāhāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘niyutto desanāhāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ desanāyaṃ assādādayo yena desanāhārena niddhāritā, tassaṃ desanāyaṃ so desanāhāro niddhāretvā yojitoti attho daṭṭhabboti.
因此,在教示摄受的分别中,是依照众生的能力而写成的。巴利
Iti desanāhāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当依照注释书和复注,把深奥的义理详细地分析之后再来掌握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
2. 抉择理趣分别的解说巴利
2. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
11 阿阇梨用某种特定的解说方式——也就是教示理趣的分别——把味、过患等经义逐一分别说明,这种特定的解说方式——即教示理趣的分别——到这里就完整了。因为接下来应该问“什么是抉择理趣?”,所以说了“其中,什么是抉择理趣?”等话。其中“其中”的意思是:在他们所指示的十六种教示理趣等理趣当中,哪一种特定的解说叫作抉择理趣、抉择理趣的分别?这样提问。接着用“所问与所答”等指示偈颂,把现在由我所说的“这抉择理趣抉择什么?”等特定的解说,归入名为抉择理趣的分别之中。巴利
11. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhāravibhaṅgena assādādayo suttatthā ācariyena vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vicayo hāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vicayo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayo hāro vicayahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Yaṃ pucchitañca vissajjitañcā’’tiādiniddesagāthāya idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ vicayo hāro kiṃ vicinatī’’tiādiko saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti yojanā.
“这个抉择理趣抉择什么?”用这句话,他问的是那个应当被抉择的抉择。因此,为了把应当被抉择的境域逐一确定并展示出来,就说“抉择句、抉择问”等等。他不说“什么是抉择、句抉择”等等,而是通过“抉择什么、抉择句”这样的说法,显示“抉择”这个词是作格(能作者)的用法。其中,“抉择句”是指:对九分教中所有的文句,直到结语为止,按照名词等词类、阴性等词性、以a结尾等词尾、第一格结尾等格、单数等数来抉择。“抉择问”是指:按照未见阐明等、七种所依等、共许境等、过去境等来抉择。“抉择答”是指:按照一向记答等、分别记答等、反问答等、世间记答等来抉择。“抉择前后”是指:把前文和后文对照起来抉择。“抉择乐味”是指:按照乐味之渴爱等、应当品尝的乐等来抉择。“抉择过患”是指:按照苦苦、变易苦、行苦,或者按照不可爱领受等、有终尽性等、属于杂染分等来抉择。“抉择出离”是指:按照道,或者按照涅槃,或者按照道的来至,或者按照涅槃的无为界等异名来抉择。“抉择果”是指:按照随法而行不堕恶趣,或者按照度越死亡等,这是教说的果;按照随教说而行,这是修行的果,这样来抉择。“抉择方便”是指:按照无常随观等而转起,或者按照厌离智等,或者按照信与念,来抉择清净的方便。“抉择命令”是指:按照远离恶行的命令,或者按照观照世间空性的命令来抉择。“抉择随唱”是指:按照所说的随唱,或者按照正在说的随唱,来抉择相应的唱颂。“抉择一切九部经”是指:对经、应颂等九部经,按照触及语句的方式,或者按照连贯语句的方式,或者按照已了义语句的方式,或者按照未了义语句的方式,或者按照属于杂染分等方式来抉择。巴利
‘‘Ayaṃ vicayo hāro kiṃ vicinatī’’ti iminā yo vicayo vicinitabbo, taṃ vicayaṃ vicinitabbaṃ pucchati, tasmā vicinitabbaṃ visayaṃ visuṃ visuṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘padaṃ vicinati, pañhaṃ vicinatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vicayo padavicayo’’tiādiṃ avatvā ‘‘kiṃ vicinati, padaṃ vicinatī’’tiādivacanena vicayasaddassa kattusādhanatthaṃ dasseti. Tattha padaṃ vicinatīti navavidhassa suttantassa sabbaṃ padaṃ yāva nigamanā nāmapadādijātisaddādiitthiliṅgādiākārantādipaṭhamavibhatyantādiekavacanādivasena vicinati. Pañhaṃ vicinatīti adiṭṭhajotanādisattādhiṭṭhānādisammutivisayādiatītavisayādivasena vicinati. Vissajjanaṃ vicinatīti ekaṃsabyākaraṇavissajjanādisāvasesabyākaraṇavissajjanādi sauttarabyākaraṇa vissajjanādi lokiyabyākaraṇavissajjanādivasena vicinati. Pubbāparaṃ vicinatīti pubbena aparaṃ saṃsanditvā vicinati. Assādaṃ vicinatīti assādakataṇhādiassādetabbasukhādivasena vicinati. Ādīnavaṃ vicinatīti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavasena vā aniṭṭhānubhavanādiādiantavantatādisaṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena vā vicinati. Nissaraṇaṃ vicinatīti maggavasena vā nibbānavasena vā maggassa vā āgamavasena, nibbānassa asaṅkhatadhātuādipariyāyavasena vā vicinati. Phalaṃ vicinatīti dhammacaraṇassa duggatigamanābhāvena vā maccutaraṇādinā vā desanāya phalaṃ, desanānusārena caraṇassa phalaṃ vicinati. Upāyaṃ vicinatīti aniccānupassanādivasena pavattananibbidāñāṇādivasena vā saddhāsativasena vā visuddhiyā upāyaṃ vicinati. Āṇattiṃ vicinatīti pāpaparivajjanāṇattivasena vā lokassa suññatāpekkhanāṇattivasena vā vicinati. Anugītiṃ vicinatīti vuttānugītivasena vā vuccamānānugītivasena vā anurūpaṃ gītiṃ vicinati. Sabbe nava suttante vicinatīti suttageyyādike nava sutte āhaccavacanavasena vā anusandhivacanavasena vā nītatthavacanavasena vā neyyatthavacanavasena vā saṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena vā vicinati.
虽然句的抉择已经先分别讲过了,但因为需要对经典逐句地审察,负担太重,句的抉择并不容易,所以先不取它,在分别问的抉择和答的抉择时,暂且先这样分别说:“会是如何?”等等。这里,“会是如何”的意思是:问的抉择应当以哪种方式展开,那种方式会是什么样的呢?应当这样理解。就像具寿阿耆多在《彼岸道》中向世尊提问的方式,问的抉择就应当按那种方式展开,这就是这里的意思。其中,“具寿”是亲切的称呼。“阿耆多”是婆罗门巴瓦利的十六位侍者弟子中的一位,名叫阿耆多。“彼岸道”:由此前往、到达彼岸涅槃,所以叫彼岸道,这是对《阿耆多经》等十六部经的统称。巴利
Kiñcāpi padavicayo paṭhamaṃ vibhatto, suttassa pana anupadaṃ vicinitabbatāya atibhāriyo, na sukaro padavicayoti taṃ aggahetvā pañhāvicayavissajjanavicaye tāva vibhajanto ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā kiṃ bhaveti yena pakārena so pañhāvicayo pavattetabbo, taṃ pakārajātaṃ kīdisaṃ bhaveyyāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Āyasmā ajito pārāyane bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ yathā yena pakārena pucchati, tathā tena pakārena pañhāvicayo pavattetabboti attho. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ. Ajitoti bāvarībrāhmaṇassa paricārakabhūtānaṃ soḷasannaṃ aññataro ajito. Pārāyaneti pāraṃ nibbānaṃ ayati gacchati etenāti pārāyanaṃ, ajitasuttādisoḷasasuttassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
世间被什么遮住了,(具寿阿耆多问,)
它因为什么而不显现?
你说的染着是什么?它的大怖畏又是什么?巴利
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito,) Kenassu nappakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃ su tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1) –
这首偈颂的意思是:尊者阿逸多这样问:“世间众生被什么法遮蔽、覆盖,成了圣者所呵责的对象?因为什么原因,上面所说的世间不显现?对于上面所说的世间,它的染着是什么?你所说的它的大怖畏又是什么?”他就是这样问的。巴利
Gāthāya ‘‘kena dhammena loko ariyavajjo satto nivuto paṭicchādito, iti āyasmā ajito pucchati. Kena hetunā yathāvuttaloko nappakāsati, assa yathāvuttalokassa kiṃ abhilepanaṃ iti tvaṃ brūsi, tassa yathāvuttalokassa kiṃ mahabbhayanti tvaṃ brūsīti pucchatī’’ti attho.
这样一来,按照这种分类,这四句偈颂的句子就是作为提问而被问出、被说出的,或者说是用来表明所问之义的。不过,从主要意义上看,它被认为只是“一个问题”。虽然因为是以四句来提问的方式展开,可以说有四种,但因为想要了解的只是同一个义理,所以说它是“一个问题”。由于应当说“请说出它的原因”,所以就说了原因:“因为摄于一处”。这里说的是:虽然在提问中包含了所谓遮蔽、不显现、涂染、大怖畏这四种义理,但因为摄取的是同一个所表达的义理,所以从主要意义上把它看作“一个问题”,应当这样理解。由于应当说“我们怎么能相信摄于一处呢”,所以就说了“因为世尊确实这样说过”。这样一来,正是通过摄于一处,世尊确实这样说了,因此你们应当相信摄于一处——这就是所说的意思。巴利
Iti iminā pabhedena cattāri imāni gāthāpādapadāni pucchitāni pucchāvasena vuttāni, pucchitatthadīpakāni vā, padhānavasena pana so ‘‘eko pañho’’ti mato, yadipi catunnaṃ padānaṃ pucchanavasena pavattattā catubbidhoti vattabbo, ñātuṃ pana icchitassa ekasseva atthassa sambhavato ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kāraṇaṃ vadehī’’ti vattabbattā kāraṇamāha ‘‘ekavatthupariggahā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yadipi nivāraṇāpakāsanābhilepanamahabbhayasaṅkhātā cattāro atthā pucchāyaṃ gahitā, ekassa pana abhidheyyatthassa gahaṇato ‘eko pañho’ti padhānavasena gahitoti daṭṭhabbo’’ti. ‘‘Ekavatthupariggahaṇaṃ kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabba’’nti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘evañhi āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ekavatthupariggahaṇeneva bhagavā hi yasmā āha, iti tasmā ekavatthupariggahaṇaṃ tumhehi saddahitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“世间被什么遮蔽?”——用这句话,问的是以世间为所依的遮蔽,不是以种种法为所依的遮蔽。“它因什么而不显现?”——用这句话,问的是世间本身的不显现,不是种种自性法的不显现。“你说它的涂染是什么?”——用这句话,问的是世间本身的涂染,不是种种自性法的涂染。“它的大怖畏是什么?”——用这句话,问的是那个世间本身的大怖畏,不是种种自性法的大怖畏。因此,“世间被什么遮蔽?”等问句,在单一所依与多种所依之间,属于单一所依;在法所依与有情所依之间,属于有情所依;在未显令显等方式之间,属于未显令显之问等。应当根据具体情况这样审察,这就是要旨。巴利
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko’’ti iminā lokādhiṭṭhānaṃ paṭicchādanaṃ pucchati, na nānādhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti iminā lokasseva appakāsanaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. ‘‘Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī’’ti iminā lokasseva abhilepanaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. ‘‘Kiṃ su tassa mahabbhaya’’nti iminā tasseva lokassa mahabbhayaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. Tasmā ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādipañho ekādhiṭṭhānanānādhiṭṭhānesu ekādhiṭṭhāno, dhammādhiṭṭhānasattādhiṭṭhānesu sattādhiṭṭhāno, adiṭṭhajotanādīsu adiṭṭhajotanāpañhotiādinā yathāsambhavaṃ vicinitabboti adhippāyo.
问题里说的“世间”被理解为“所依”,而这个世间有三种,所以接着说了“世间有三种”等等。这里,“这个世间有三种类别”,所以叫“三种”。其中,被贪等烦恼所染污的欲界有情,就是“烦恼”;它既是烦恼又是世间,所以叫“烦恼世间”,也就是欲界有情。因为它贪等烦恼很多,所以叫“烦恼世间”。依靠禅那和神通而存在或增长的,就是“有”;它既是有又是世间,所以叫“有世间”,也就是色界有情。因为它依靠禅那等而存在或增长。具足根的,就是“根”;它既是根又是世间,所以叫“根世间”,也就是无色界有情。因为它多安住于不动定,根极为清净。这些世间的名称,都是依属于三界的法而安立的,因此不包括圣者。巴利
‘‘Pañhassa yo loko ‘adhiṭṭhāno’ti gahito, so loko tividho’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘loko tividho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tayo vidhā etassa lokassāti tividho. Kilissati rāgādivasena kāmāvacarasattoti kileso, kileso ca so loko cāti kilesaloko, kāmāvacarasatto. So hi rāgādikilesabahulatāya kilesalokoti. Bhavati jhānābhiññāhi buddhīhīti bhavo, bhavo ca so loko cāti bhavaloko, rūpāvacarasatto. So hi jhānādibuddhīhi bhavatīti. Indriyena samannāgatoti indriyo, indriyo ca so loko cāti indriyaloko, arūpāvacarasatto. So hi āneñjasamādhibahulatāya visuddhindriyo hotīti lokasamaññā pariyāpannadhammavasena pavattā, tasmā ariyā na gahitāti.
“世间被什么遮蔽?”等偈颂中,问句的审察模式已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了解。因为应当问“答句的审察模式是在哪里对答句作了分别”,所以说了“其中,答句”等。其中,“其中”是指在那个“世间被什么遮蔽?”等问句当中——巴利
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādigāthāya pucchāvicayo hāro ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘vissajjanāvicayo hāro kattha vissajjanāya vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha vissajjanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādipucchāyaṃ –
世间被无明遮蔽,阿吉陀!世尊说,
因为悭吝和放逸,它不显现。
我说,贪爱是污垢,苦是它的大恐怖。巴利
‘‘Avijjāya nivuto loko, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsati; Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmi, dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti. (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 58, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa) –
应当知道,这首偈颂是回答。其中,“世间被无明所遮蔽”:就像在黑半月的十四日、茂密的森林深处、乌云密布、深夜这四种情况合在一起所形成的黑暗中,车队等被遮住一样,以遮蔽法之自性为特征的无明,把有情世间遮蔽、覆盖了。世尊先呼唤“阿耆多”,然后说道。“悭吝”:因为疑和放逸,如前所说的世间就不显现。世尊说:我说渴爱是如前所说世间的“涂染”。世尊对阿耆多说:我说生等轮回之苦是如前所说世间的“大怖畏”。这就是此处的意思。巴利
Ayaṃ gāthā vissajjanāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha avijjāya nivuto lokoti kāḷapakkhacatuddasī, ghanavanasaṇḍa, meghapaṭalacchādana, aḍḍharattīnaṃ vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatena andhakārena rathaghaṭādi paṭicchādito viya dhammasabhāvapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāya avijjāya sattaloko nivuto paṭicchādito. ‘‘Ajitā’’ti ca ālapanaṃ katvā bhagavā āha. Vivicchāti vicikicchāya pamādahetu yathāvuttaloko nappakāsati. Jappaṃ taṇhaṃ yathāvuttalokassa ‘‘abhilepana’’nti ahaṃ brūmīti bhagavā āha, dukkhaṃ jātiādivaṭṭadukkhaṃ assa yathāvuttalokassa ‘‘mahabbhaya’’nti ahaṃ brūmīti bhagavā ajitaṃ āhāti attho.
因为要回答“对这个答句应该怎么审察”这个问题,所以说了“这四句”等话。其中,“这四句”指的是“世间被什么遮蔽?”等问偈里的偈句。“以这四句”指的是“世间被无明所遮蔽”等答偈里所说的偈句,也就是用这些来回答。怎么回答呢?第一句由第一句来回答,第二句由第二句来回答,第三句由第三句来回答,第四句由第四句来回答。巴利
‘‘Imāya vissajjanāya kathaṃ vicineyyā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni cattāri padānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāni cattāri padānīti ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādipucchāgāthāyaṃ vuttāni gāthāpadāni. Imehi catūhi padehīti ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti vissajjanāgāthāyaṃ vuttehi gāthāpadehi vissajjitāni. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ padaṃ paṭhamena padena, dutiyaṃ padaṃ dutiyena padena, tatiyaṃ padaṃ tatiyena padena, catutthaṃ padaṃ catutthena padena vissajjitaṃ.
对于“世间被什么遮蔽?”这第一个问题,先以“世间被无明所遮蔽”作为第一个回答,而不是按颠倒次序。无明是明的对立面,所以世间因为无明而成为不知者。为了让人相信“是如何被遮蔽的”,就说“世间被诸盖所遮蔽”。如果有人提出责难说:既然这样,就应该回答“世间被盖所遮蔽”,考虑到这一点,便说“因为一切众生都以无明为盖”。由于需要说明“一切众生都以无明为盖这个道理,应该用什么话来信受?”,就说了“如世尊所说”等话。巴利
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamapañhe‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamā vissajjanā katā, na uppaṭipāṭiyā. Vijjāya paṭipakkhā avijjā, tasmā avijjāya ajānako loko bhaveyya. Kathaṃ nivuto saddahitabboti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇehi nivuto loko’’ti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘nīvaraṇena nivuto loko’’ti vissajjanā kātabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā’’ti. ‘‘Sabbasattānaṃ avijjānīvaraṇabhāvo kena vacanena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
比丘们,对一切众生、一切有情、一切存在,从教说的角度来说,我只说一种盖,那就是无明。因为一切众生确实都被无明所盖。比丘们,我说:在无明完全灭尽、舍离、弃舍之前,众生不可能没有盖。世尊是以这样的方式、这样的形式说的,你们就应当依照这种方式、依据所说的这番话,相信一切众生都有无明盖。巴利
‘‘Sabbasattānaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbapāṇānaṃ sabbabhūtānaṃ, pariyāyato ekameva nīvaraṇaṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ avijjā. Avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā. Sabbasova bhikkhave avijjāya nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā natthi sattānaṃ nīvaraṇanti vadāmī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ yathā yena pakārena bhagavā āha, tathā tena pakārena vuttena tena vacanena tumhehi sabbasattānaṃ avijjānīvaraṇabhāvo saddahitabboti.
有人提出质疑说:“‘世间被无明遮蔽’这句话回答了‘世间被什么遮蔽’这第一个问题,难道不也可能是‘它因何而不显现’这第二个问题的回答吗?”心里考虑到这个质疑,所以说了“因此”等话。在这里,用“世间被无明遮蔽”这句话来回答“世间被什么遮蔽”这第一个问题,是合适的,而且更为合适;正因为更为合适,所以对于“世间被什么遮蔽”这个问题,就应该说答案是“世间被无明遮蔽”——这就是要表达的意思。巴利
‘‘Avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti padena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamasseva padassa vissajjanā na siyā, ‘‘kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti dutiyapadassāpi vissajjanā siyāti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘tena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti padena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā yuttatarā hoti, yuttatarattā ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti pañhe ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti vissajjanāti mayā vattabbāyevāti adhippāyo.
对于“以何而不显现”这个问题,应当这样回答:“因悭吝与放逸而不显现。”意思是:由于悭吝的生起,也由于放逸,世间不显现。应当回答:被无明盖所覆蔽的世间不显现。因为需要说明“悭吝与放逸如何使世间不显现,这个回答已经作出了”,所以说了“那人”等话。其中,那个还是凡夫的人被无明盖所覆蔽,那个凡夫就以悭吝而悭吝。因为需要追问“他以什么悭吝而悭吝?这个悭吝叫什么名字?”,所以说了“悭吝就叫作疑”。因为需要说明“他为什么以那个而不显现”,所以说了“那疑惑的人”等话。以那个疑惑,那个凡夫对应当相信的事不信;对应当相信的事不信,就不会为断除不善法、证得善法而发起应当发起的精进;不发起精进,那个人就在这个世间随逐放逸而住;因为随放逸而住,放逸的人就不让白法生起;在他不让生起时,那些白法不生起,也就不显现,不能以显现的方式运转。因此,应当回答“因悭吝与放逸,世间不显现”,这就是意趣所在。巴利
‘‘Kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti imasmiṃ pañhe ‘‘vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī’’ti ayaṃ vissajjanā kātabbā, vivicchāya pavattattā, pamādā ca loko nappakāsatīti attho. Avijjānīvaraṇāya nivuto loko nappakāsatīti vissajjanā kātabbā, ‘‘kathaṃ vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatīti vissajjanā katā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yo puggalo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo puthujjanabhūto puggalo avijjānīvaraṇehi nivuto, so puthujjanabhūto puggalo vivicchāya vivicchati. ‘‘Yāya vivicchāya vivicchati, sā vivicchā katamā nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tāya kasmā nappakāsatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so vicikicchanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāya vicikicchanto so puthujjanabhūto puggalo saddahitabbesu nābhisaddahati; saddahitabbesu na abhisaddahanto akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sacchikiriyāya ārabhitabbaṃ vīriyaṃ nārabhati; anārabhanto so puggalo idha loke pamādamanuyutto viharatīti, pamādena viharanto pamatto puggalo sukke dhamme na uppādiyati; anuppādayantassa tassa puggalassa te sukkā dhammā anuppādiyamānā hutvā nappakāsanti pakāsanavasena na pavattanti; tasmā ‘‘vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatī’’ti vissajjanā kātabbāti adhippāyo.
对于这样的人,白法不显现这件事,我们要用什么话才能让人相信呢?因为必须这样说,所以接着说了“正如世尊所说”等等。在这其中——巴利
‘‘Tādisassa sukkadhammānaṃ appakāsanabhāvo amhehi kena vacanena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha –
“善人虽处远方,亦昭然显现,如同雪山之峰;”
不善者则于此隐没不现,犹如暗夜中射出的箭。
他们凭功德而显露,也凭称誉和名声而显露。巴利
‘‘Dūre santo pakāsanti, himavantova pabbato; Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā; Te guṇehi pakāsanti, kittiyā ca yasena cā’’ti. –
世尊是以某种隐晦的方式说出这首偈颂的,那么,对于这类人来说,善法之所以隐晦不显,正是通过这首以那种隐晦方式说出的偈颂来表明的,这一点你们应当相信。因此,应当这样回答:因为悭吝和放逸,世间才隐晦不显——这就是这段话的意旨。巴利
Yaṃ gāthāpāṭhaṃ bhagavā yathā yena appakāsanākārena āha, tathā tena appakāsanākārena vuttena tena gāthāpāṭhena tādisassa puggalassa sukkadhammānaṃ appakāsanabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabboyeva, tasmā ‘‘vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatī’’ti vissajjanā kātabbāvāti adhippāyo.
偈颂的含义是这样的:就像雪山虽然远在远方,对远方有眼睛的人来说也能看见;同样,善士虽然远在远方,也会因为功德所生的称誉,以及因为功德所生的名声、受用和眷属,而对远方的智者显现。就像夜里射出的箭看不见那样,在这个众生世间,随悭吝和放逸而生活的不善者也不会显现。为了说明“善者以功德而显现”,才说了“他们以功德而显现”这句。功德是内在生起的,因为需要说明“怎样以功德而显现”,所以说了“以称誉和以名声”。因功德之力而起的称誉,以及因功德之力而起的名声,以这些而显现的人,就应当说他们是以功德而显现的。巴利
Gāthāttho pana – himavanto pabbato dūre ṭhito dūre ṭhitānampi sacakkhukānaṃ puggalānaṃ pakāsati iva, evaṃ santo sappurisā dūre ṭhitānampi guṇavasena pavattāya kittiyā ca guṇavasena pavattehi yasaparibhogaparivārehi ca dūre ṭhitānaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ pakāsanti, rattikāle khittā sarā usū na dissanti yathā, ettha sattaloke vivicchāpamādānaṃ vasena viharanto asanto na dissanti. Ye santo pakāsanti, te santo guṇehi pakāsantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘te guṇehi pakāsantī’’ti vuttaṃ . Guṇā nāma abbhantare jātā, ‘‘kathaṃ guṇehi pakāsantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kittiyā ca yasena cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Guṇānubhāvena pavattāya kittiyā ca guṇānubhāvena pavattena yasena ca pakāsantā puggalā guṇehi pakāsantīti vattabbāvāti.
如果因为悭吝和放逸而不显现,那么这样一来,世间就是被遮蔽的,因此第一句也应该作出回答。把这一责难放在心上之后,就说“以此故”等话。其中,“以此”是指“因悭吝和放逸而不显现”这一句,用它来回答“以什么而不显现”这第二句,是合适的,而且更为贴切,这就是它的意思。“以句”则是说以句义来作答。“句”应当理解为所问的句义。这个道理在下面和上面也是一样。巴利
Yadi vivicchāpamādānaṃ vasena nappakāsati, evaṃ sati loko nivuto hoti, tasmā paṭhamassa padassāpi vissajjanā kātabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘tena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti ‘‘vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī’’ti padena ‘‘kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti dutiyassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā yuttatarāti attho. Padenāti ca padatthaṭṭhena vissajjanāti attho. Padassāti padatthassa pucchitabbassāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Esa nayo heṭṭhā, upari ca.
在“你说什么是涂染?”这个问题中,应该由阿耆多来理解“我说渴爱是涂染”这个回答。因为应当追问“什么叫渴爱?”,所以说了“渴爱就叫做贪爱”。那渴爱是怎样涂染世间的呢?应该这样连接起来理解。因此说了“如世尊所说”等话。其中,就像以渴爱作为涂染的性质——巴利
‘‘Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī’’ti pañhe ‘‘jappābhilepanaṃ brūmī’’ti vissajjanā tassā ajitena daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Katamā jappā nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘jappā nāma vuccati taṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā taṇhā lokaṃ abhilimpatīti kathaṃ viññāyatīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi. Tattha yathā yena taṇhāya abhilepanabhāvena –
被贪欲控制的人,看不清什么是有益的,也看不见法。
那时就是一片盲目的黑暗——当贪欲把人压倒的时候。巴利
‘‘Ratto atthaṃ na jānāti, ratto dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara’’nti. –
世尊所说的那首偈颂,就是按“涂染”这个含义来说的;通过这首偈颂,可以知道那渴爱涂染了世间——这就是(这段话的)意旨。巴利
Yaṃ gāthaṃ bhagavā āha, tathā tena abhilepanabhāvena vuttāya tāya gāthāya sā taṇhā lokaṃ abhilimpatīti viññāyatīti adhippāyo.
在这首偈颂中,“被贪染的有情”就是染者,也就是具有贪欲的有情。依于因,果才生起,这就是“果”的意思。因能持果,那个因就叫作法。“黑暗”就是盲暗。“Yaṃ”的意思是“在……时”。这里的“Yaṃ”是主格当作处格来用。当贪欲征服人、征服那个具有贪欲的人时,那时就成了盲目的黑暗——应当这样连接理解。或者也可以这样连接:因为贪欲征服人,所以那时就成了盲目的黑暗;或者:贪欲征服哪个人,对那个人来说,那时就成了盲目的黑暗;或者:贪欲征服人,它完成的那种征服、那种制伏,就是盲目的黑暗——应当这样连接理解。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ pana – rajjati sattoti ratto, rāgasamaṅgīsatto. Kāraṇaṃ paṭicca asati pavattati phalanti atthaṃ, phalaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ phalaṃ dhāreti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ dhammaṃ nāma. Andhakāraṃ andhaṃ. Yanti yamhi kāle. Yanti hi bhummatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Yamhi kāle rāgo naraṃ rāgasamaṅgiṃ sahate abhibhavati, tadā kāle andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ hotīti yojanā. Rāgo naraṃ yaṃ yasmā sahate, tasmā andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hotīti vā, rāgo yaṃ naraṃ sahate, tassa narassa andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hotīti vā, rāgo naraṃ yaṃ sahate abhibhūyate yaṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ nipphādeti, taṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ hotīti vā yojanā.
如果有人问:贪染的人既然不知道利益之类的事,那怎么还会有渴爱的涂染呢?因为必须这样回答,所以说了“此贪爱”等话。其中,对于各种所缘多有执著、多有系缚的贪爱具足者来说,他那贪爱就因为这样多所系缚,而成为欲求、成为缠缚安住的状态。因此,由于这个原因,那里的众生世间被某种胶着所涂染,就像被污垢覆盖一样,可以说就是被渴爱的涂染所涂染。这样来贯通文义。又因为必须说明“渴爱的涂染也是不显现的原因,所以对‘以何而不显现’这第二个问题也应当回答”,因此说了“以此故”等话。巴利
‘‘Yadi ratto atthādikaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ sati kathaṃ jappābhilepanaṃ bhavatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sāyaṃ taṇhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇesu āsattibahulassa āsaṅgabahulassa taṇhāsamaṅgissa puggalassa sā ayaṃ taṇhā evaṃ bahuāsaṅgavasena abhijappā pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhāyinī hoti. Iti karitvā iminā kāraṇena tattha taṇhāya sattaloko kenaci silesena abhilitto makkhito viya jappābhilepena abhilitto nāma bhavatīti yojanā. ‘‘Jappābhilepanaṃ appakāsanassapi kāraṇaṃ bhavati, tasmā ‘kenassu nappakāsatī’ti dutiyapadatthassapi vissajjanā siyā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
对于“这个世间的大恐怖是什么”这第四个问题,应该结合阿耆多的回答来看,也就是“这个世间的苦就是大恐怖”。众生因为害怕它,所以叫恐怖;巨大的恐怖,就是大恐怖。因为要问“苦有几种”,所以说了“苦有两种”等等。这苦有两种,所以叫两种。因为要问“哪两种苦”,所以说了“身苦和心苦”。因为要问“什么是身苦,什么是心苦”,所以说了“凡是身体上的苦,这是苦;凡是心上的苦,这是忧”。巴利
‘‘Tassa lokassa mahabbhayaṃ ki’’nti imasmiṃ catutthapañhe ‘‘assa lokassa dukkhaṃ mahabbhayaṃ bhave’’ti ayaṃ vissajjanā tassā ajitena daṭṭhabbā. Bhāyati loko etasmāti bhayaṃ, mahantaṃ bhayaṃ mahabbhayaṃ. ‘‘Katividhaṃ dukkha’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘duvidhaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dve vidhā assa dukkhassāti duvidhaṃ. ‘‘Katamaṃ duvidhaṃ dukkha’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kāyikañca cetasikañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamaṃ kāyikaṃ, katamaṃ cetasika’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ kāyikaṃ, idaṃ dukkhaṃ yaṃ cetasikaṃ, idaṃ domanassa’’nti vuttaṃ.
疾病、刀杖等不可爱的色法,可能会成为众生世间的大恐怖。因为必须让人相信“为什么苦是大恐怖”,所以说了“一切众生”等话。其中,一切众生对上面所说的苦感到恐惧。对众生来说,没有别的恐怖能和苦相等,更不用说有超过苦的恐怖了。确实没有,所以既然苦之外没有别的恐怖,“苦是世间的大恐怖”这句话就应当相信。这就是它的意旨。巴利
Rogādisatthādianiṭṭharūpaṃ sattalokassa mahabbhayaṃ bhaveyya, ‘‘kathaṃ dukkhaṃ mahabbhayaṃ bhaveti saddahetabba’’nti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘sabbe sattā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbe sattā yathāvuttassa dukkhassa ubbijjanti, dukkhena samasamaṃ aññaṃ bhayaṃ sattānaṃ natthi, dukkhato uttaritaraṃ vā pana bhayaṃ kuto atthi. Hi yasmā natthi, tasmā dukkhato aññassa bhayassa abhāvato ‘‘dukkhaṃ lokassa mahabbhaya’’nti vacanaṃ saddahitabbanti adhippāyo.
通过“一切众生”等这句话,说明疾病、刀杖等不可爱的色法,其根源正是苦。因为如果有人这样说:“按身体与心理来分,苦只有两种,那就只是苦受而已;如果真是这样,那么行苦和变易苦具有大恐怖这一点就说不通了。”为了回应这种说法,所以说了“三种苦性”等。巴利
‘‘Sabbe sattā’’tiādivacanena rogādisatthādianiṭṭharūpaṃ dukkhamūlamevāti dasseti. ‘‘Kāyikacetasikavasena duvidhaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhavedanāyeva, evaṃ sati saṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhānaṃ mahabbhayabhāvo na āpajjeyyā’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tisso dukkhatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为可能会有人问:三种苦性是在一切众生、一切时候都会生起,还是有时对某些众生不生起?所以说了“其中,世间”等话。其中,“其中”是指那三种苦性当中。“世间”是指具足财富又少病的众生世间。个别地、偶尔地,众生能从自己这边所造因引起的苦苦中解脱,有时也能从他人那边所造因引起的苦苦中解脱;同样,个别地、偶尔地,长寿的世间众生能从变易苦中解脱。因为可能会有人问“凭什么因缘而解脱”,所以先把问题搁下,为了显示原因而说了“那是什么原因呢”等话。在众生世间里,有些众生少病,他们因为具足财富又少病,所以能从苦苦中解脱,特别是色界众生能解脱。有些众生也长寿,他们因为长寿,所以能从变易苦中解脱;特别是无色界众生能解脱,因为无色界众生多修舍受等至。巴利
‘‘Tisso dukkhatā sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ sabbakālesu uppajjanti, kadāci kassaci na uppajjantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha loko’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tāsu tīsu dukkhatāsu. Lokoti bhogasampanno ceva appābādho ca sattaloko. Odhaso odhiso kadāci karahaci attūpakkamamūlāya dukkhadukkhatāya muccati, kadāci parūpakkamamūlāya dukkhadukkhatāya muccati, tathā odhaso odhiso kadāci karahaci dīghāyuko loko vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccati, ‘‘kena hetunā muccatī’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā hetuṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sattaloke appekacce appābādhā honti, te bhogasampannattā ceva appābādhattā ca dukkhadukkhatāya muccanti, visesato rūpāvacarasattā muccanti. Appekacce dīghāyukāpi honti, te dīghāyukattā vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanti; visesato arūpāvacarasattā muccanti arūpāvacarasattānaṃ upekkhāsamāpattibahulattā.
他们从那些苦中解脱,并不是决定性的。因此,由于还没有超越那些苦,你们所说的解脱就是非决定性的,我们也已经知道这一点。因为有人会问:“什么是决定性的解脱?”所以接着说了“然而,从行苦……”等话。其中,“从行苦”:苦受也因为是有为造作的,所以包括在诸行之中,应当理解为:从这样的行苦之中。“世间”指阿罗汉。“被执取”指由果报四蕴和业生色所组成的五蕴,这就是“执取”;执取本身作为剩余,就是“有余依”,也就是五蕴;这种五蕴在这涅槃界中不存在,所以是“无余依”。以无余依涅槃界而解脱,成为无余依涅槃界,这里的工具格是表示状态。所谓“涅槃界”,只是指五蕴的息灭,并不是指无为界。因此,因为行苦遍及整个世间,含摄一切世间,所以说一切世间都是苦。由于行苦,一切世间都具有苦的性质,因此世尊说“苦是它的大恐怖”。巴利
Tesaṃ tāhi dukkhatāhi muccanaṃ anekantikaṃ hoti, tasmā tāhi anatikkantattā anekantikaṃ muccanaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘katamaṃ ekantikamuccana’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘saṅkhāradukkhatāya panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhāradukkhatāyāti dukkhavedanāpi saṅkhatattā saṅkhārapariyāpannā, tādisāya saṅkhāradukkhatāyāti attho gahetabbo. Lokoti arahā. Upādīyati vipākakkhandhacatukkakaṭattārūpasaṅkhātaṃ khandhapañcakanti upādi, upādiyeva sesaṃ upādisesaṃ, khandhapañcakaṃ, taṃ natthi etissā nibbānadhātuyāti anupādisesā. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā anupādisesanibbānadhātu hutvā muccati, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Nibbānadhātūti ca khandhapañcakassa nibbāyanamattaṃ adhippetaṃ, na asaṅkhatadhātu. Tasmāti saṅkhāradukkhatāya sakalalokabyāpakabhāvena sabbalokasaṅgāhakattā vuttappakārasaṅkhāradukkhatāya sabbalokassa dukkhaṃ hoti, iti katvā saṅkhāradukkhatāya sabbalokassa dukkhabhāvato ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti bhagavatā vuttaṃ.
有人可能会想:既然经文说“以受为缘而有渴爱”,那么用“苦是它的大恐怖”这句话,是不是也回答了第三句“你说什么是它的染着”?因为有这种疑问,所以说“由此,对第四句的回答也是合理的”。又因为需要说明“怎样按顺序理解问答的合理性”,所以说了“因此世尊说”等话。由于世尊已经按顺序完全了知问答的合理性,所以才说“世间被无明所覆”等,因此,你们也应当了知这层合理性。巴利
‘‘Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 3, 36; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti padena ‘‘kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī’’ti tatiyapadassāpi vissajjanā siyāti āsaṅkabhāvato ‘‘tena ca catutthassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanānaṃ yuttatarabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanānaṃ yuttatarattā yuttatarajānanako bhagavā ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’tiādimāha, tasmā yuttatarabhāvo tumhehi jānitabboti.
在这里要明白:世间人被盖等烦恼遮蔽,既不了解这些盖等,又熟悉外道各宗派的说法,并且对那些宗派和盖等心存疑惑,所以只能纯粹站在众生的立场上来提问,也只能纯粹站在众生的立场上来回答。因此,这个提问就是站在众生的立场上提出的。而这个提问,是为了让不知道的人知道,为了让已经生起疑惑的人断除疑惑,所以应当回答的盖等所缘境有四种,提问也就有四种。不过,作为盖等所缘境的世间,在偈颂里是作为依处来说的,所以说“一个问题已经显示出来”。这是这里对提问的分析;至于回答的分析,则应该按照提问分析里所说的方式来了知,比如“显明未见为回答、断除疑惑为回答”等等。巴利
Ettha ca lokassa nīvaraṇādīni ajānantena ca titthiyavādesu samayantaresu paricayena ca tesu samayantaresu ceva nīvaraṇādīsu ca saṃsayapakkhandena ekaṃseneva sattādhiṭṭhānena pucchitabbattā, ekaṃseneva sattādhiṭṭhānena byākātabbattā ca sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katāti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ pucchā ajānantassa jānanatthāya, jātasaṃsayassa ca saṃsayavinodanatthāya vissajjetabbassa nīvaraṇādivisayassa catubbidhattā catubbidhā. Nīvaraṇādīnaṃ pana visayānaṃ loko ca ādhārabhāvena gāthāyaṃ vuttoti ‘‘eko pañho dassito’’ti ayamettha pucchāvicayo, vissajjanāvicayo pana ‘‘adiṭṭhajotanā vissajjanā, vimaticchedanā vissajjanā’’tiādinā pucchāvicaye vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
对于单一所依处的问答分析,亲教师们已经作了区分解说,我们也已经了解。因为还需要说明:“对于多种所依处的问答分析,哪一种分析有资格作区分?我们又如何能知道这种分析?为了让我们能够了解,请为我们区分那种分析。”所以,先把多种所依处的提问引出来加以显示:巴利
Ekādhāre pucchāvissajjane vicayo ācariyehi vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘anekādhāre pucchāvissajjane yo vicayo vibhajanāraho, so vicayo kathaṃ amhehi viññāyati, amhākaṃ viññāpanatthāya tasmiṃ vicayaṃ vibhajathā’’ti vattabbabhāvato anekādhāraṃ pucchaṃ tāva nīharitvā dassetuṃ –
一切处都有水流奔流,(尊者阿耆多问:)
什么能挡住这些流?
请说诸流的防护,用什么来关闭这些流?巴利
‘‘Savanti sabbadhi sotā, (iccāyasmā ajito,) Sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi, kena sotā pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1040; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 59, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 3) –
他诵出这首偈颂。首先要弄清这首偈颂的意思。“流转”就是流动、不断生起的意思。“一切处”是指在作为渴爱等所缘的一切色等诸处之中。“流”是指渴爱、贪欲、嗔害等。“具寿如是说”就是具寿阿耆多这样说了。“诸流”是指渴爱、贪欲、嗔害等诸流。“什么是障碍”是问:什么法会成为障碍?什么法会成为守护?“请说诸流的防护”是说:请您为了利益一切众生,为我们讲说对渴爱、贪欲、嗔害等诸流的防护和阻挡。“以什么关闭诸流”是问:以哪种能断除的法,智者能关闭渴爱、贪欲、嗔害等诸流?这些就是所问的问题。巴利
Gāthamāha . Gāthāttho tāva daṭṭhabbo. Savantīti sandanti, pavattantīti attho. Sabbadhīti taṇhādīnaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu sabbesu rūpādīsu āyatanesu. Sotāti taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādayo sotā. Iccāyasmāti iti evaṃ āyasmā ajito āha. Sotānanti taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ sotānaṃ. Kiṃ nivāraṇanti kiṃ katamaṃ dhammajātaṃ āvaraṇaṃ bhave, kā katamā dhammajāti rakkhā bhave. Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhīti sotānaṃ taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇaṃ āvaraṇaṃ idaṃ dhammajātaṃ bhaveti sabbasattahitatthaṃ amhākaṃ tvaṃ kathehi. Kena sotāpidhīyareti kena pahāyakadhammena taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādayo sotā paṇḍitehi pidhīyareti pucchatīti pucchitāni.
有人问:在以提问方式说出的“savanti……pe……pidhīyare”这个偈颂里,问到了几个词?问了几个问题?所以回答说:这里问到了四个词,它们是两个问题。又有人问:如果这个以提问方式进行的偈颂有四个词,那问题也应该有四种,为什么说是两个?于是解释说:为什么?因为它们是通过多种表述方式被问到的。这个偈颂所包含的这些含义,是通过多种表述方式被问到的。这里说的是:“savanti……pe……pidhīyare”涉及许多词语,但实际问到的只有这两个含义:名为防护的念,以及作为遮止之因的慧。所以从含义上说,称为两个问题。又有人问:怎么说是问题具有双重含义的范围?为了阐明问题具有双重含义的范围,所以说“evaṃ samāpannassa”等。其中,“evaṃ samāpannassa”的意思是:这个众生世间,或者被那些作为恶趣之因的、称为亲戚衰败等的灾祸所完全陷入、淹没,或者被杀生等灾祸所完全陷入、淹没;对于如此被淹没、陷入的。“Evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassa”的意思是:这个众生世间被亲戚衰败等,或者被杀生等,以及由十种烦恼事所转起的烦恼所染污;对于如此被染污的世间,也就是陷入、淹没的世间,什么是它的清净、出离,是什么法类。这里详细的意思是:在《阿耆多问经》中就是这样说的,应当知道问题具有双重含义的范围。巴利
‘‘Pucchāvasena kathitāya ‘savanti…pe… pidhīyare’ti imāya gāthāya kittakāni padāni pucchitāni, kittakā pañhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni cattāri padāni pucchitāni, te dve pañhā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pucchāvasena pavattāya imissā gāthāya yadi cattāri padāni siyuṃ, evaṃ santesu pañhāpi catubbidhā siyuṃ, kasmā ‘dve’ti vuttā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kasmā? Ime hi bahvādhivacanena pucchitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ime etāya gāthāya gahitā atthā bahvādhivacanena pucchitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘savanti…pe… pidhīyareti bahūni vacanāni adhikicca pavattā saṃvarasaṅkhātā sati ceva pidahanahetubhūtā paññā cāti ime dve atthāva pucchitā, tasmā atthavasena dve pañhā vuttā vā’’ti. ‘‘Pucchāya duvidhatthavisayatā kathaṃ vuttā’’ti vattabbattā pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘evaṃ samāpannassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ samāpannassāti imāhi duggatihetubhūtāhi ñātibyasanādisaṅkhātāhi āpadāhi vā, pāṇavadhādīhi āpadāhi vā, samaṃ saha, sabbathā vā ayaṃ sattaloko āpanno ajjhotthaṭo, evaṃ ajjhotthaṭassa vā samāpannassa. Evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassāti ñātibyasanādayo vā pāṇavadhādīni āgamma pavattehi dasahi kilesavatthūhi ca ayaṃ sattaloko saṃkiliṭṭho, evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassa ca lokassāti samāpannassa ajjhotthaṭassa lokassa vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ kiṃ katamaṃ dhammajātaṃ bhave. Iti evañhi saccaṃ ajitasutte āhāti vitthārattho, pucchāya duvidhatthavisayatā ñātabbāti adhippāyo.
如果有人问:诸流是在一切处为一切世间流动,还是只为某一部分流动?因为这样问的缘故,所以说:诸流在一切处流动,这是对未得定、多行贪欲、嗔恚、放逸的人说的。这里应当看出其意趣:由于多行贪欲、嗔恚、放逸,心在色等种种所缘上散乱的人,诸流才流动、生起;对于已得定、远离贪欲、嗔恚、放逸的人,则不是这样。因为要问什么是贪欲、什么是嗔恚、什么是放逸,所以说其中什么是贪欲等等。其中,tattha 指在这些贪欲、嗔恚、放逸之中。什么是贪欲?这就是贪,而不只是贪求的行为。贪是不善根,而不只是贪著的行为。什么是嗔恚?这就是嗔,而不只是嗔恚的行为。嗔是不善根,而不只是毁坏的行为。什么是放逸?这就是痴,而不只是失念。痴是不善根,而不只是迷惑的行为。这样,按照所说的这种方式,由于贪欲等是不善根,对于多行贪欲、嗔恚、放逸、未得定的人,渴爱在色等六处中流动。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ nu sotā sabbassa lokassa sabbadhi savanti, udāhu, ekaccassevā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotāti, asamāhitassa savanti abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulattā rūpādīsu nānārammaṇesu vikkhittacittasseva sotā savanti pavattanti, na samāhitassa abhijjhābyāpādappamādavirahitassāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Katamā abhijjhā, katamo byāpādo, katamo pamādo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha yā abhijjhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu abhijjhābyāpādappamādesu. Yā abhijjhā, ayaṃ lobho, na abhijjhāyanamattaṃ. Lobho ca akusalamūlaṃ, na lubbhanamattaṃ. Yo byāpādo, ayaṃ doso, na byāpajjanamattaṃ. Doso ca akusalamūlaṃ, na dūsanamattaṃ. Yo pamādo, ayaṃ moho, na sativippavāsamattaṃ. Moho ca akusalamūlaṃ, na mūhanamattaṃ. Evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena abhijjhādīnaṃ akusalamūlattā yassa abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulassa asamāhitassa chasu rūpādīsu āyatanesu taṇhā savanti.
有人问:那种渴爱有几种?所以世尊说:色渴爱……乃至……法渴爱。又有人问:对于色渴爱等六种渴爱在色处等六处中流动,我们应当根据什么言教来信受?所以说了“如世尊所说”等话。意思是:世尊以什么方式说“比丘们,它们流动……乃至……被触恼”这番话,你们就应当以那种方式、按照所说的道理来信受。在这里,因为眼等六处对色渴爱等六种流起门的作用,世尊依据“近依处”的表达方式,把眼等说成好像它们自己在流动。“Iti”的意思是:以所说的这种方式,一切从一切眼等门中流动、生起。“Sabbathā”的意思是:以一切方式,也就是以渴爱、邪执、高举等方式流动、生起。有人问:为什么从一切眼等门中流动、生起?应当以一切方式——也就是以渴爱、邪执、高举等方式——来了知流动的状态。所以说了“因此他说”等话。其中“tena”的意思是:对于未得定的人,贪求、嗔恚等从眼等门,以渴爱、邪执、高举的形态,随渴爱等而现起。了知这种现起情况的世尊便说:诸流在一切处流动。巴利
‘‘Katividhā sā taṇhā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Channaṃ rūpataṇhādīnaṃ chasu rūpādiāyatanesu savanaṃ kena ca vacanena amhehi saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Savatīti ca kho, bhikkhave…pe… paṭihaññatī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā yathā yena pakārena āha, tathā tena pakārena vuttanayena vacanena tumhehi saddahitabbanti adhippāyo. Ettha ca cakkhādīnaṃ rūpataṇhādīnaṃ channaṃ sotānaṃ dvārabhāvena pavattattā cakkhādayo nissitūpacāravasena sayaṃ savanto viya bhagavatā vuttā. Itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena sabbā sabbasmā cakkhādidvārato ca savati pavattati. Sabbathā sabbappakārena taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena savati pavattatīti attho. ‘‘Kasmā sabbasmā cakkhādidvārato ca savati pavattati, sabbappakārena taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena savanabhāvo vijānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti asamāhitassa abhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ cakkhādidvārato ca taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesaunnamanākārena taṇhādivasena pavattanato pavattajānanako bhagavā ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’ti āha.
问“诸流的障碍是什么”这句话,是在问什么?是在问诸流随眠的断除,还是问违犯的断除?由于应当这样说,所以答道:“‘诸流的障碍是什么’是问缠缚的摧毁。”由于应当说“这缠缚的摧毁是清净,还是出离?”所以答道:“这是清净。”问“请说诸流的防护,以什么遮止诸流”这句话,是在问什么?是在问诸流的缠缚,还是问违犯或根除?由于应当这样说,所以答道:“‘诸流的……遮止’是问随眠的根除。”由于应当说“这随眠的根除是清净,还是出离?”所以答道:“这是出离。”巴利
‘‘Sotānaṃ ‘kiṃ nivāraṇa’nti iminā kiṃ pucchati? Sotānaṃ anusayappahānaṃ pucchati kiṃ? Udāhu vītikkamappahānaṃ pucchatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇanti pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ pucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ vodānaṃ, udāhu vuṭṭhānaṃ ki’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘idaṃ vodāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi, ‘kena sotā pidhīyare’ti iminā kiṃ pucchati? Sotānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati kiṃ? Udāhu vītikkamanaṃ, samugghāṭaṃ vā pucchati ki’’nti vattabbattā sotānaṃ…pe… pidhīyareti anusayasamugghāṭaṃ pucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ anusayasamugghāṭaṃ vodānaṃ kiṃ, udāhu vuṭṭhānaṃ ki’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘idaṃ vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
关于“诸流在一切处流动”等问题的分析,是阿阇梨所说的,我们也已经了解;由于针对那个问题应当说“什么是解答的分析”,所以说了“其中,解答”等。在那问题中——巴利
‘‘Savanti sabbadhi sotā’’tiādipucchāvicayo ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto; tāya pucchāya ‘‘katamo vissajjanavicayo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha vissajjanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchāyaṃ –
在世间,那些流——阿耆多啊!世尊说:
正念能挡住它们。
我说,这就是对诸流的防护;它们靠智慧被关闭。巴利
‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041 cūḷani. vatthugāthā 60, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4) –
应当看作是对偈颂的回答。在那首偈颂里说到“阿耆多,世间有哪些流在流动,阻挡这些流的就是念;我说那念就是诸流的防护,这些流以智慧而被关闭”,应当这样连贯地理解。其中,“念”是指与观慧相应的念。“以慧”是指以道慧。“被关闭”是指由于不给它们生起的机会而被关闭、被切断。巴利
Gāthā vissajjanāti daṭṭhabbā. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ ajita lokasmiṃ yāni sotāni savanti, tesaṃ sotānaṃ yaṃ nivāraṇaṃ, sā sati hoti; taṃ satiṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaranti ahaṃ brūmi; ete sotā paññāya pidhīyareti yojanā kātabbā. Tattha satīti vipassanāpaññāya sampayuttā sati. Paññāyāti maggapaññāya. Pidhīyareti uppajjituṃ appadānavasena pidhīyanti pacchijjanti.
世尊说:“正念是它们的阻碍,我说是诸流的防护。”因为有人会问:“如果靠任何一种念,都能完成防护诸流的作用,那还有什么必要靠特殊的念呢?到底靠哪一种念,才能完成防护诸流的作用?”所以接着说了“身至念”等话。其中,“身至念”是指以观慧观照色身,从头发等开始,依照无常等角度观察而现起的、与观智相应的念。“已修习”是指以随观的方式,把身至念作为无常、苦、无我、厌离、离贪、灭、舍弃来修习。因为这样修习时:随观无常的人,舍断了常想;随观苦的人,舍断了乐想;随观无我的人,舍断了我想;厌离的人,舍断了欢喜;离贪的人,舍断了贪;观灭的人,舍断了集;观舍弃的人,舍断了执取。“多修习”是指按上面所说的方式,一天、一个月、一年乃至七年地反复修习。“眼”是指作为贪等生起的门而安立的眼,这里的“眼”字要理解为带有鼻音。不执取,是指对眼门生起的、与贪等相应的心相续不执取,或者说不被具有这种心的人所牵引,也就是在可意的色境上不执取;在不可意的色境上不抗拒。依靠已修习、多修习的身至念,在耳根上不执取于可意的声音……乃至在不可意的声音上不抗拒。这个义理应当根据实际情况,按照生起的次第来理解。巴利
‘‘Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti bhagavā āha – ‘‘yāya kāyaci satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddhaṃ kiṃ, visiṭṭhāya satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddhaṃ kiṃ, katamāya satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddha’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kāyagatāya satiyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyagatāya satiyāti rūpakāye gataṃ kesādikaṃ aniccādito vipassitvā pavattāya vipassanāñāṇasampayuttāya satiyā. Bhāvitāyāti kāyagataṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato nibbindanato virajjanato nirodhanato paṭinissajjanato anupassanāvasena bhāvitāya. Evañhi aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati; dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati; anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati; nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati; virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati; nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati; paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti. Bahulīkatāyāti yathāvuttappakārena divasampi māsampi saṃvaccharampi sattasaṃvaccharampi bahulīkatāya. Cakkhunti abhijjhādipavattidvārabhāvena ṭhitaṃ cakkhuṃ, niggahitāgamaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nāviñchatīti cakkhudvāre pavattaṃ abhijjhādisahitaṃ cittasantānaṃ, taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ vā nākaḍḍhati, manāpikesu rūpesu nāviñchatīti yojanā. Amanāpikesu rūpesu na paṭihaññati. Kāyagatāya satiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya sotaṃ nāviñchati. Manāpikesu saddesu…pe… amanāpikesu saddesu na paṭihaññatīti yojanā yathāsambhavato kātabbā.
有人问:“因为什么原因,它不被牵引、不被撞击?”回答:“因为诸根已被守护、已被阻挡,所以不被牵引、不被撞击。”又问:“是靠什么样的守护,它们才被守护、被阻挡?”回答:“是靠正念的守护,它们才被守护、被阻挡。”由于应当说明“我们凭什么相信,因为正念的守护而得以守护、得以阻挡”,所以说了“因此”等话。这里,“因此”的意思是:世尊因为了知由于正念的守护而得以守护、得以阻挡,才说了“正念是它们的阻挡”这句话;凭这句话,你们就应当相信,由于正念的守护而得以守护、得以阻挡。应当看到,此处所侧重说明的,正是前分慧随顺正念的功能。巴利
‘‘Kena kāraṇena nāviñchati paṭihaññatī’’ti pucchati, indriyānaṃ saṃvutanivāritattā nāviñchati na paṭihaññatīti vissajjeti. ‘‘Kenārakkhena te saṃvutanivāritā’’ti pucchati, satiārakkhena te saṃvutanivāritāti vissajjeti. ‘‘Satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti tasmā satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritattā saṃvutanivāritajānanako bhagavā ‘‘sati tesaṃ nivāraṇa’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritabhāvo saddahitabboti pubbabhāge paññā satyānugāti kiccamevettha adhikanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于“正念是它们的阻碍”这个回答,阿阇梨已经详细解说过其中的含义,我们也已经了解了。至于“它们被慧关闭”这个回答的详细含义,因为需要说明“我们该怎么了知”,所以为了展示“它们被慧关闭”这个回答的详细含义,就说了“以慧舍断随眠”等话。其中,“以慧”指的是道慧。“随眠”指的是遇到合适的因缘就能生起的欲贪随眠等。“被舍断”的意思是:以慧彻底断除随眠时,那些执取实际上也一并被舍断了。为什么说随眠被舍断后,就说是“被舍断”呢?回答:因为随眠被舍断了,所以执取也被舍断。巴利
‘‘Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇa’’nti vissajjanassa vitthārattho ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vissajjanassa vitthārattho ‘‘kathaṃ amhehi jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vissajjanassa vitthāratthaṃ dassento ‘‘paññāya anusayā pahīyantī’’tiādimāha. Tattha paññāyāti maggapaññāya. Anusayāti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjanārahā kāmarāgānusayādayo. Pahīyanti samucchedavasena anusayesu paññāya pahīnesu pariyuṭṭhānāpi atthato pahīyanti. Kissa pahīnattā ‘‘pahīyantī’’ti vuccati? Anusayassa pahīnattā pariyuṭṭhānā pahīyantīti vissajjeti.
因为要问“依靠随眠的舍断,执取的舍断像什么呢?”,所以说了“那就像有根的树”等话。其中,就像一棵有根的树,用锄头等工具把土挖开,把根毫无剩余地拔掉时,这棵树的花、果、嫩叶、新芽等相续,也同样被锄头等彻底截断;同样地,以阿罗汉道智舍断随眠时,随眠的执取相续就被截断、关闭、遮蔽了。被什么截断?被慧、被道慧所截断,应当这样理解其义。又因为要说明“如何信解被慧截断”,所以说了“因此”等话。其意思是:从“它们被慧所关闭”这句话来看,随眠的执取相续是被慧截断的,这一点应当被智者所信受。巴利
‘‘Taṃ anusayappahānena pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ kiṃ viya bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ yathā khandhavantassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha khandhavantassa rukkhassa kudālādinā bhūmiṃ khaṇitvā anavasesamūluddharaṇe kate tassa rukkhassa pupphaphalapallavaṅkurasantatipi kudālādinā samucchinnāva bhavati yathā, evaṃ arahattamaggañāṇena anusayesu pahīnesu anusayānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasantati samucchinnā pidahitā paṭicchannā bhavati. Kena samucchinnā bhavati? Paññāya maggapaññāya samucchinnā bhavatīti atthayojanā daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Paññāya paricchinnabhāvo kathaṃ saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vacanato anusayānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasantatiyā paññāya paricchinnabhāvo paṇḍitehi saddahitabboti adhippāyo.
在这些问答里,如果一个人不知道诸流的防护与关闭,或者对此有疑惑,那么由于应当问他防护与关闭的问题,所以“以法为依止而问”就是问的简择;又由于应当以念和慧来回答,所以“以法为依止而答”就是答的简择——应当这样理解。
而在这些问题当中,“世间被什么所遮蔽”等问,按障碍、疑、放逸、掉举这四种来说,虽然可以分为四种,但依世间的所依来说,就说成是一个问题。同样地,“诸流处处流”等问,按防护与关闭来说虽然有两种,但如果取它们意义相同,依同一个所依,就应当说成“一个问题”;或者因为诸流众多,也可以说成“多个问题”。然而这里并没有那样说,而是不涉及诸流,只按防护与关闭,在“诸流处处流”等当中说成“两个问题”。顺着这个道理,在“世间被什么所遮蔽”等当中,也不涉及世间,只按障碍等四种,就应当说成“四个问题”——应当这样看出这个理路。巴利
Imesu pañhāvissajjanesu sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ, pidhānañca ajānantena vā saṃsayitena vā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ pucchitabbattā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti pucchāvicayo ceva satipaññānaṃ vissajjetabbattā dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ vissajjananti vissajjanavicayo ca veditabbo. Etesu ca ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādiko pañho nīvaraṇavicikicchāpamādajappānaṃ vasena catubbidhopi lokādhiṭṭhānavasena eko pañhoti vutto, evaṃ sati ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’tiādikopi pañho saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena duvidhopi ekatthavasena gahetvā ekādhiṭṭhānavasena ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vattabbo, sotānaṃ bahubhāvato vā ‘‘bahupañho’’ti vattabbo; tathā pana avatvā sote anāmasitvā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’tiādimhi ‘‘dve pañhā’’ti vuttā. Tadanusārena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādimhipi lokaṃ anāmasitvā nīvaraṇādīnaṃ catunnaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāro pañhā’’tipi vattabbāti ayaṃ nayo dassitoti nayadassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
说法时,未把握所说法的脉络,对于所问的问题,既不搁置问题,也不先作承诺就回答——这种简择理趣,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已了知。应当这样说:说法时,把握所说法的脉络,对于所问的问题,搁置该问题,又先作承诺再回答——这种简择理趣,我们如何能理解?为了让我们理解,请就这种简择加以分别。为了显示其中应当简择的方式,在“诸流”等偈颂中显示了简择方式之后,紧接着说了“慧与念”等。巴利
Desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhimaggahetvā attanā racitaniyāmeneva pucchitapañhassa ceva pañhaṃ aṭṭhapetvā, paṭiññañca akatvā vissajjanassa ca vicayahāro ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhiṃ gahetvā pucchitapañhassa ceva taṃ pañhaṃ ṭhapetvā, paṭiññañca katvā vissajjanassa ca yo vicayo hāro vibhatto, so vicayahāro kathaṃ amhehi viññāyati, amhākaṃ viññāpanatthāya tasmiṃ vicayaṃ vibhajethā’’ti vattabbabhāvato tesu vicetabbākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yāni sotānī’’tiādigāthāya vicayākāradassanānantaraṃ ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,先要明白这首偈颂的意思:通过断除随眠而说诸流止息的那种慧,以及通过断除缠缚而说诸流止息的那种念——正是这慧和这念。当以这慧与念,使无余俱生的名与色在何处止息时,这一切就在那里无余地灭尽。贤者!我这样问你,世尊,请您为我宣说这止息。尊者阿耆多就是这样向世尊提问的。巴利
Tattha gāthāttho tāva viññātabbo – yāya paññāya anusayappahānena sotanirujjhanaṃ vuttaṃ, yāya satiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānappahānena sotanirujjhanaṃ vuttaṃ, sāyaṃ paññā ceva sāyaṃ sati ca tāhi paññāsatīhi asesaṃ sahuppannaṃ nāmañceva rūpañca, etaṃ sabbaṃ kattha nirujjhamāne asesaṃ uparujjhatīti mārisa me mayā puṭṭho tvaṃ bhagavā mayhaṃ etaṃ nirujjhanaṃ pabrūhi, iti āyasmā ajito bhagavantaṃ pucchati.
阿耆多,你问我的那个问题,问的是灭尽,我就对你宣说那个灭尽。在识灭尽的时候,与慧和念俱生的名与色,随着识的灭尽,一同无余地灭尽。在这个识灭尽当中,这一切随着识的灭尽,在同一刹那,不分先后地灭尽。这个识灭尽不超出那名色的灭尽,那名色的灭尽也不超出这个识灭尽。巴利
Ajita tvaṃ yametaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitaṃ nirujjhanaṃ maṃ apucchi, ahaṃ te tava taṃ nirujjhanaṃ vadāmi. Yattha viññāṇanirodhe paññāsatisahitaṃ nāmañca rūpañca viññāṇassa nirodhena saha ekato asesaṃ uparujjhati, ettha viññāṇanirodhe etaṃ sabbaṃ viññāṇanirodhena ekato ekakkhaṇe apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uparujjhati, etaṃ viññāṇanirodhaṃ tassa nāmarūpassa nirodho nātivattati, taṃ taṃ nāmarūpanirodhaṃ so so viññāṇanirodho nātivattatīti.
对于那个问题,这位阿逸多问的是什么?他问的只是灭尽,还是问别的?由于需要这样说,所以说了“这位在问题中问的是脉络”等等。其中,“这位”指的就是那位提出问题的具寿阿逸多。“问题”指的是“慧与念”等那个问题。如果问的是脉络,那么“这一切在哪里灭尽”这个提问就不合理了吗?并非如此,因为“通过这个灭尽而连接”的意义能够成立,所以叫脉络。因此说“问脉络者问什么……涅槃界”。因为问脉络时也问到了无余涅槃界,所以“这一切在哪里灭尽”这个提问是合理的。巴利
‘‘Tasmiṃ pañhe ayaṃ ajito kiṃ pucchati? Uparujjhanameva pucchati, udāhu aññaṃ pucchatī’’ti vattabbato ‘‘ayaṃ pañhe anusandhiṃ pucchatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayanti yo āyasmā ajito pañhaṃ apucchīti ayaṃ ajito. Pañheti ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’tiādipañhe. Yadi anusandhiṃ pucchati, evaṃ sati ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti pucchanaṃ ayuttaṃ bhaveyyāti? Na, anusandhīyati etena upanirujjhanenāti anusandhīti atthasambhavato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anusandhiṃ pucchanto kiṃ…pe… nibbānadhātu’’nti. Anusandhipucchanena anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāpi pucchanato ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti pucchanaṃ yuttameva.
有人问:无余依涅槃界要通过哪种修行道路才能证得?为了说明这条被称为“四圣谛业处修习”的道路以及它所观照的对象,所以接着说了“三谛”等内容。其中,“有为”是指由业等种种条件聚合、共同造作出来的苦等,所以叫有为。“灭法”是指:止息就是灭,法也就是灭法,因此苦等诸法以灭为其本性,应当这样理解“灭法”的含义。为了直接显示这三谛各自的样貌,所以说“苦、集、道”。苦、集、道这三谛被称为有为。因为接着要问“什么是灭谛”,所以说了“灭是无为”。这里也应当说“灭法”。由于不为业等诸条件所造作,所以是无为。由于没有生起与坏灭,所以是非灭法。因为接着要问“在所断与能断的诸谛中,由哪一种能断断除哪一种所断,已在哪一地被断除”,所以说了“其中,集在二地”等内容。其中,“在二地”是指见地与修习地。“欲贪”是指欲界有之贪。“色贪”是指色界有之贪。“无色贪”是指无色界有之贪。依结的分类,十结被断除,应当这样连接。巴利
‘‘Yā anupādisesanibbānadhātu pucchitā, taṃ katamāya paṭipadāya adhigacchatī’’ti pucchitabbattā catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ visayena saha dassetuṃ ‘‘tīṇī saccānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhatānīti kammādipaccayehi samecca sambhūya dukkhādīni karīyantīti saṅkhatāni. Nirodhadhammānīti nirujjhanaṃ nirodho, dhammopi nirodhadhammova, tasmā nirodho dhammo sabhāvo yesaṃ dukkhādīnanti nirodhadhammānīti atthova gahetabbo. Tāni tīṇi saccāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayo maggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tīṇi dukkhasamudayamaggasaccāni saṅkhatānīti vuttāni, ‘‘kiṃ nirodhasacca’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nirodho asaṅkhato’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha ‘‘nirodhadhammo’’tipi vattabbaṃ. Kammādipaccayehi asaṅkhatattā asaṅkhato. Uppādanirodhābhāvato anirodhadhammo. ‘‘Pahāyakapahātabbesu saccesu katamena pahāyakena katamo pahātabbo, katamāya bhūmiyā pahīno’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha samudayo dvīsu bhūmīsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dvīsu bhūmīsūti dassanabhāvanābhūmīsu. Kāmacchandoti kāmabhavarāgo. Rūparāgoti rūpabhavarāgo. Arūparāgoti arūpabhavarāgo. Saṃyojanabhedato dasa saṃyojanāni pahīyantīti yojanā.
12 应断的结,按见地和修习地的区别已经分别说明了,我们也已经了解。因为需要说明“按根的区别,它们是怎样分别的”,所以说了“其中,三种”等。或者,因为需要问“在应断的结当中,哪些结是以哪一根作为自己的能断而灭尽的”,所以说了“其中,三种”等。它们以各自的能断为依托,把能断作为能断之后,以不再生起的方式灭尽。因为需要问“未知当知根和已知根是结灭尽的因,具知根又是什么的因”,所以说了“然而”等。其中,阿罗汉以具知根这样了知“我生已尽”,这个了知的因——具知根,就是在尽、生尽、阿罗汉果中运作的智。阿罗汉以具知根了知“不再有未来的此世状态”,这个了知的因也是具知根。而在不生起、不产生、阿罗汉果中运作的智,被称为具知根,这是知的作用。以根智作为能断,结得以灭尽。因为需要说“那些智什么时候灭尽”,所以说了“其中,那在尽……”等。巴利
12. Pahātabbasaṃyojanāni dassanabhūmibhāvanābhūmibhedena vibhattāni, amhehipi ñātāni, ‘‘indriyabhedato kathaṃ vibhattānī’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tattha tīṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘pahātabbasaṃyojanesu katamāni saṃyojanāni katamaṃ indriyaṃ attano pahāyakaṃ katvā nirujjhantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha tīṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhāya attano pahāyakaṃ katvā nirujjhanti anuppādavasena. ‘‘Anaññātaññassāmītindriyañca aññindriyañca saṃyojanānaṃ nirujjhanahetu hotu, aññātāvindriyaṃ kissa hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yena aññātāvindriyena arahā ‘‘me jāti khīṇā’’ti evaṃ jānāti, idaṃ jānanahetu aññātāvindriyaṃ khaye jātikkhaye arahattaphale pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yaṃ yena aññātāvindriyena arahā ‘‘itthattāya aparaṃ na bhavissāmī’’ti pajānāti, idaṃ pajānanahetu aññātāvindriyaṃ. Anuppāde pana anuppajjane arahattaphale pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ aññātāvindriyaṃ jānanahetu hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Indriyañāṇāni pahāyakāni katvā saṃyojanāni nirujjhanti, ‘‘tāni ñāṇāni kadā nirujjhantī’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tattha yañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
应当这样问:未知当知根在证得已知根时灭去,已知根在证得阿罗汉果时灭去,具知根又在什么时候灭去?因此才说了“其中,那在尽……”等话。其中,“二”是按作用的差别而分为二,但从自性上说,其实只有一个。巴利
‘‘Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ pāpuṇantassa nirujjhatu, aññindriyaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇantassa nirujjhatu, aññātāvindriyaṃ kadā nirujjhatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yañca khaye’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dveti kiccabhedena dve, sabhāvato pana ekāva.
有人会说:了知的作用也只有一个,怎么会变成两个呢?所以接着说了“再者”这一段。这里的意思是:按照所缘和慧的区分,才得到两个名称。前面偈颂里以遮蔽诸流的作用所说的那个慧,因为它的自性就是以种种方式了知,所以叫慧。那个念,因为对所见到的所缘有不漂浮、能深入的作用,所以叫念。巴利
‘‘Pajānanakiccampi ekameva, kathaṃ dve siyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇapaññābhedena dve nāmāni labbhantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāti yā paññā pubbagāthāyaṃ sotapidhānakiccena vuttā, sā paññā pakārehi jānanasabhāvena paññā nāma. Yathādiṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ apilāpanaṭṭhena ogāhanaṭṭhena sati nāma.
13 “慧与念二者”这一句的意思,阿阇梨已经分析过了,我们也已经了解;但“名色”这一句的意思,我们该怎么理解呢?因为应当这样提问,所以在分析名色时,他说:“其中,那些五取蕴……”等等。第一个“其中”,是指业与果报轮转的差别,也就是在三有之中;第二个“其中”,是指被称为五取蕴的名色集合体之中。“五根”是指眼等五根。“与识相应”并不是从相应缘的意义上说的,而是就多数人未经分析便执取的那种性质来说的。不过,能够通达分别的人应当这样区分把握:“名是与识相应的,色则不与识相应,它们是俱生的。”“它的”是指与慧、念俱生的名色的“灭”,也就是无余依涅槃界。巴利
13. ‘‘Paññā ceva sati cā’’ti padassa attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’ti padassa attho kathaṃ amhehi ñātabbo’’ti vattabbattā nāmarūpaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘tattha ye pañcupādānakkhandhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti kammavipākavaṭṭabhede bhavattaye. Tatthāti pañcupādānakkhandhasaṅkhātanāmarūpasamudāye. Pañcindriyānīti cakkhādipañcindriyāni . Viññāṇasampayuttanti sampayuttapaccayattaṃ sandhāya na vuttaṃ, pacurajanassa pana avibhajitvā gahaṇīyasabhāvamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vibhāgaṃ jānantehi pana ‘‘nāmaṃ viññāṇasampayuttaṃ, rūpaṃ pana na viññāṇasampayuttaṃ, sahajāta’’nti vibhajitvā gahetabbaṃ. Tassāti paññāsatisahitassa nāmarūpassa. Nirodhanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ.
具寿阿逸多在《彼岸道品》中向世尊提问时,这样说道:“慧与念……在此处灭尽。”因为应当问的是:“‘慧与念’等偈颂所问的无余依涅槃界,要通过哪一种证得才能达到?”所以,它是通过四神足之门、通过圣道证得之门而达到的;而四神足的修习,又以四根为根本。因此,为了指出这些作为根本的四根,他说:“其中,念与慧……”等。当念——也就是对善法与不善法趣向的探寻——成就时,定就一定会成就;而且,提到念,在偈颂中就是意指断除缠缚,通过断除缠缚,定的作用也就显现了,所以他说:“念是二根,即念根与定根。”慧则是靠以四正勤为本质的精进来完成对随眠的断除,没有精进就不能完成,因此说:“慧是二根,即慧根与精进根。”巴利
Bhagavantaṃ pucchanto āyasmā ajito ‘‘paññā ceva…pe… katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti evaṃ pārāyane āha. ‘‘Paññā cevātiādigāthāya yā anupādisesanibbānadhātu pucchitā, sā anupādisesanibbānadhātu katamena adhigamena pattabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā caturiddhipādamukhena ariyamaggādhigamamukhena pattabbā, caturiddhipādabhāvanāya ca cattārindriyāni mūlabhūtāni, tasmā mūlabhūtāni tāni cattārindriyāni niddhāretvā dassento ‘‘tattha sati ca paññā cā’’tiādimāha. Kusalākusaladhammagatiyo samanvesamānāya satiyā sijjhamānāya ekantena samādhi nipphādetabbo, satiggahaṇena ca pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ gāthāyaṃ adhippetaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānappahānena ca samādhikiccaṃ pākaṭanti āha ‘‘sati dve indriyāni satindriyañca samādhindriyañcā’’ti. Paññāya anusayasamugghātaṃ catubbidhasammappadhānasaṅkhātena vīriyena sijjhati, na vinā tenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññā dve indriyāni paññindriyañca vīriyindriyañcā’’ti.
在这四种如前所说的根中,当它们在前行阶段或道刹那成就时,与它们相应的那种信解、胜解得以成就,这称为信解、胜解的法聚——也就是信根——便成就了。因为应当这样问:在那些作为根本的根成就时,是以哪一根使哪一法成就?为了说明“以这一根使这一法成就”,他说“此中,那种以信为主导的……”等。其中,“此中”是指在念等当中。“以信为主导的”是指:以作为条件的信而成就的欲,以它为主导,所以叫以信为主导;应当由以信为主导来推动的心一境性,就叫以信为主导。“欲定”是指:以欲为首而生起的定,或者与以欲为主导相应、在前行阶段生起的定,就是欲定。“断是断的因”,应当这样连接。而“断”的意思是:以这个欲定舍断已被镇伏的烦恼,所以这里的“断”应当取工具格的意义。“以思择力”是指以遍作力。“以修习力”是指以广大修习力。巴利
Imesu yathāvuttesu catūsu indriyesu pubbabhāge vā maggakkhaṇe vā sijjhantesu taṃsampayuttā yā saddahanā okappanā siddhā, idaṃ saddahanaokappanasaṅkhātaṃ dhammajātaṃ saddhindriyaṃ siddhaṃ, ‘‘tesu mūlabhūtesu indriyesu siddhesu katamena indriyena katamo dhammo siddho’’ti pucchitabbattā iminā ayaṃ siddhoti dassento ‘‘tattha yā saddhādhipateyyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti satyādīsu. Saddhādhipateyyāti paccayabhūtāya saddhāya siddho chando adhipatīti saddhādhipati, saddhādhipatinā pavattetabbā cittekaggatāti saddhādhipateyyā. Chandasamādhīti chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā chandādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā chandasamādhi, pahānaṃ pahānahetu hotīti yojanā kātabbā. Pahānanti ca pajahati vikkhambhitakilese etena chandasamādhināti pahānanti karaṇasādhanattho gahetabbo. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti parikammabalena. Bhāvanābalenāti mahaggatabhāvanābalena.
因为应当说“这欲定本身单独就是舍断”,所以接着说了“在此之中,那些入息出息”等话。这里的“在此之中”,是指在那个已得定的心、在心的生起当中。通过“在那个已得定的心的生起中,入息……”等说法,是以入息等为领头,把能产生入息等的精进行都包含进来了;而这些精进行,只要修习还没有圆满,就因为一再忆念而称为“忆念”,因为一再思惟而称为“思惟”。然而,像前面所说的“忆念与思惟,这些是行”这种欲定,或者因为镇伏烦恼以及彼分舍断,而成为舍断或舍断之因的精勤。由于应当问“这些所说的行等,是在修习什么”,所以说了“这些行……”等话。这里应当这样连接:他修习具足欲定精进行的神足,这些行以及那两者,都依于远离、依于离欲、依于灭、向于舍而转。巴利
‘‘So chandasamādhi sayaṃ kevalova pahāna’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha ye assāsapassāsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ samāhite citte cittuppāde. ‘‘Tasmiṃ samāhite cittuppāde assāsā’’tiādinā assāsādisīsena assāsādijanakā vīriyasaṅkhārā gahitā, te ca yāva bhāvanāpāripūrī, tāva punappunaṃ saraṇato ca sarā, punappunaṃ saṅkappato ca saṅkappā. Yo pana ‘‘sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā cā’’ti evaṃ vuttappakāro purimako chandasamādhi vā kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca tadaṅgappahānatāya ca pahānaṃ pahānahetupadhānaṃ vā, ‘‘ime vuttappakārā saṅkhārādayo kiṃ bhāventī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ime ca saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ime saṅkhārā ca tadubhayañca chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti yojanā.
具足欲定与勤行:欲本身就是主导,所以叫欲主导;以欲为主导的定,就是欲主导定。世尊这样说:“比丘们,如果比丘以欲为主导,就能得到定。”或者说,以欲为因的定,或以欲为首的定,就叫欲定;这里说的是以欲主导为条件而生起的定。作为勤行本身的行,就叫勤行;用“勤”这个词,排除了有为行等。欲定和勤行合在一起,就是欲定勤行;具足这些,就是具足欲……等等……具足;那……等等……已达到。能成就、能圆满、能生起,所以叫“神”;部分,就是神足;神本身就是足、就是部分,所以叫神足,这是第四神足。或者,众生靠它成就、增长、达到殊胜,所以叫“神”;靠它达到,所以叫“足”;神的足,所以叫神足。虽然从通称的意义上说是“神足”,但因为说了“具足欲定勤行”,所以应当理解为欲神足;他修习、增长那个神足、那个欲神足,这就是它的意思。巴利
Chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti chando eva adhipati chandādhipati, chandādhipatisamādhi. Tena vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘chandaṃ ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu adhipatiṃ karitvā labhati samādhi’’nti (vibha. 432). Chandahetuko vā samādhi, chandādiko vā samādhi chandasamādhi, chandādhipatissa paccayuppanno samādhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā, padhānasaddena saṅkhatasaṅkhārādayo nivattāpitā, chandasamādhi ca padhānasaṅkhārā cāti chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārā, tehi samannāgato chanda…pe… samannāgato, taṃ…pe… gataṃ. Ijjhati samijjhati nippajjatīti iddhi, koṭṭhāso, iddhi eva pādo koṭṭhāsoti iddhipādo, iddhipādacatuttho. Ijjhanti vā tāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, pajjati etenāti pādo, iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. Iddhipādoti sāmaññatthavasena vuttopi ‘‘chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata’’nti vuttattā chandiddhipādova gahetabbo, taṃ iddhipādaṃ taṃ chandiddhipādaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti attho.
依止于远离、依止于离欲:在内观刹那,从作用上说,是依止于彼分远离;从意向上说,是依止于出离远离。而在道刹那,从作用上说,是依止于正断远离;从所缘上说,是依止于出离远离。依止于离欲:在内观刹那,从作用上说,是依止于彼分离欲;从意向上说,是依止于出离远离;而在道刹那,从作用上说,是依止于正断离欲;从所缘上说,是依止于出离离欲。依止于灭:在内观刹那,从作用上说,是依止于彼分灭;从意向上说,是依止于出离灭;而在道刹那,从作用上说,是依止于正断灭;从所缘上说,是依止于出离灭。导向舍遣:在此,舍遣依舍弃舍遣与趣入舍遣而有二种。其中,在内观刹那,依彼分而有舍弃舍遣,以倾向涅槃的状态而有趣入舍遣;在道刹那,依正断而有舍弃舍遣,以作所缘而有涅槃趣入舍遣,应如此分别而取。导向如上所说的舍遣之义,或已导向而令其成熟、作成熟者,为舍遣成熟,那舍遣成熟者。巴利
Vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ. Virāganissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavirāganissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavirāganissitaṃ , ārammaṇato nissaraṇavirāganissitaṃ. Nirodhanissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅganirodhanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇanirodhanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe kiccato samucchedanirodhanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇanirodhanissitaṃ. Vossaggapariṇāminti ettha pariccāgavossaggapakkhandanavossaggavasena vossaggo duvidho. Tatthapi vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena pariccāgavossaggo, nibbānaninnabhāvena pakkhandanavossaggo, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena pariccāgavossaggo, ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanavossaggoti vibhajitvā gahetabbo. Yathāvuttavossaggatthaṃ pariṇamati, pariṇataṃ vā paripacati paripacanaṃ karotīti vossaggapariṇāmī, taṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.
老师已经讲过欲神足的修习方式,我们也已经了解了。不过,既然还应当说明“我们该怎么认识精进神足的修习方式”,所以就说了“其中,那些以精进为主导的……”等话。它的含义,应当完全按照前面所说的方式来理解。现在,我要把简略安立的文句,详细地安立出来。怎么讲呢?巴利
Chandiddhipādabhāvanākāro ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ vīriyiddhipādabhāvanākāro amhehi vijānitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tattha yā vīriyādhipateyyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayānusāreneva viññeyyo. Saṃkhittavasena pana ṭhapitaṃ pāṭhaṃ vitthārato ṭhapessāmi. Kathaṃ? –
在这里,以精进为主导的心一境性,就是精进定。当心已安定下来,通过镇伏烦恼,或者通过反复观察的力量,或者通过修习的力量,这就是断除。在这里,入出息、寻与伺、想与受、有味寻,这些就是诸行。这样一来,前面的精进定、通过镇伏烦恼而实现的断除,以及这些诸行——这两方面合起来,就构成了具备以精进定为主导的诸行的神足。他修习这个神足,依止于远离、依止于离欲、依止于灭、最终成熟为弃舍。巴利
‘‘Tattha yā vīriyādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ vīriyasamādhi. Samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca vīriyasamādhi, kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.
在这里,以心为主导的心一境性,就是心定。当心入定时,通过镇伏烦恼,或者通过简择的力量,或者通过修习的力量,这就是断除。在这里,入出息、寻与伺、想与受、有味寻,这些就是诸行。这样一来,前面的心定、通过镇伏烦恼而来的断除,以及这些诸行,这两者合起来就是具备以心定为主导的勤与诸行的神足。他修习这个神足,依止于远离、依止于离欲、依止于灭、成熟于弃舍。巴利
‘‘Tattha yā cittādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ cittasamādhi. Samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca cittasamādhi, kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ cittasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.
在这里,以审察为主导的心一境性,就是观定。当心已得定,通过镇伏烦恼,或者依靠审察的力量,或者依靠修习的力量,这就是断除。在这里,入出息、寻与伺、想、受、有味寻,这些就是诸行。这样,前面的观定、通过镇伏烦恼而实现的断除,以及这些诸行,这两方面共同构成了具备观定为主导的勤与诸行的神足。他修习这个神足,依止于远离、依止于离欲、依止于灭、最终转向于舍。巴利
‘‘Tattha yā vīmaṃsādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ vīmaṃsāsamādhi, samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca vīmaṃsāsamādhi kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ vīmaṃsāsamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmi’’nti.
这里的不同之处在于:精进定,就是把精进放在首位而运作的定,或者是前行阶段与以精进为主导的心相应而运作的定。心定,就是把心放在首位而运作的定,或者是前行阶段与以心为主导的心相应而运作的定。观定,就是把观放在首位而运作的定,或者是前行阶段与以观为主导的心相应而运作的定。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – vīriyasamādhīti vīriyaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā vīriyādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā vīriyasamādhi. Cittasamādhīti cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā cittādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā cittasamādhi. Vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā vīmaṃsādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā vīmaṃsāsamādhīti.
这里按照能力的对应关系作了简略解释。不过,具有深智的人应当依照注书和复注的方式,或者从广说的角度,或者从深义的角度,分别辨析后再来把握。巴利
Sattibalānurūpenettha saṅkhepavaṇṇanā katā, gambhīrañāṇehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānurūpena vitthārato vā gambhīrato vā vibhajitvā gahetabbā.
14 已经说到“欲定、精进定、心定、观定”这四种定。如果就这样说,那就会变成:只有观定是以智为根、以智为先导、以智为随转,而其他三种定就成了以无智为根、以无智为先导、以无智为转起。为了说明一切定都是以智为根等等,所以说了“一切定都以智为根”等话。其中,一切定,就是欲定、精进定、心定、观定这四种定。以智为根,是说它以单转向路或多转向路中生起的近行智为根。以智为先导,是说证得智是它的先导,所以叫以智为先导。以智为随转,是说省察智随它而行,所以叫以智为随转。另一种说法是:以多转向近行智或结生智为根,所以叫以智为根;以近行智为先导,所以叫以智为先导;以安止智为随转,所以叫以智为随转。还有一种说法是:一切近行智为根,所以叫以智为根;安止智为先导,所以叫以智为先导;神通智为随转,所以叫以智为随转。或者,随转就是跟随运转,智的随转就是智随转,有智作为随转,所以叫以智为随转。至于智本身,就是前面已经说过的那种。巴利
14. ‘‘Chandasamādhi vīriyasamādhi cittasamādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhī’’ti vutto, ‘‘evaṃ sati vīmaṃsāsamādhiyeva ñāṇamūlako ñāṇapubbaṅgamo ñāṇānuparivatti bhaveyya, aññe tayo samādhayo aññāṇamūlakā aññāṇapubbaṅgamā aññāṇapavattiyo bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā sabbe samādhayo ñāṇamūlakādayoyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbo samādhi ñāṇamūlako’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbo samādhīti chandasamādhi, vīriyasamādhi, cittasamādhi, vīmaṃsāsamādhīti catubbidho samādhi. Ñāṇamūlakoti ekāvajjanavīthinānāvajjanavīthīsu pavattaṃ upacārañāṇamūlako. Ñāṇapubbaṅgamoti adhigamañāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Ñāṇānuparivattīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Atha vā nānāvajjanūpacārañāṇaṃ vā paṭisandhiñāṇaṃ vā mūlaṃ assāti ñāṇamūlako, upacārañāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo, appanāñāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Sabbaṃ vā upacārañāṇaṃ mūlaṃ assāti ñāṇamūlako. Appanāñāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Abhiññāñāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti, anuparivattanaṃ vā anuparivatti, ñāṇassa anuparivatti ñāṇānuparivatti, ñāṇānuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Ñāṇaṃ pana pubbe vuttappakārameva.
过去怎样,未来也怎样。意思是:依靠欲定等四种定,以宿住随念智作为随转,对过去无数劫的成坏之中,属于自己诸蕴相续的,以及属于他人诸蕴相续的,都能彻底通达,并不难通达;同样,依靠上面所说的定,以未来分智作为随转,对未来无数劫的成坏之中,属于自己诸蕴相续的,以及属于他人诸蕴相续的,也都能彻底通达,并不难通达。未来怎样,过去也怎样。意思是:依靠上面所说的定,以他心智作为随转,对未来仅仅七天里其他有情的心,能彻底通达,并不难通达;同样,依靠上面所说的定,对过去仅仅七天里其他有情的心,也能彻底通达,并不难通达。巴利
Yathā pure tathā pacchāti yathā chandasamādhiādicatubbidhasamādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvena pure atītāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano khandhapaṭibaddhassa, paresaṃ khandhapaṭibaddhassa ca suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ tathā tathāvuttasamādhissa anāgataṃsañāṇānuparivattibhāvena pacchā anāgatāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano khandhapaṭibaddhassa, paresaṃ khandhapaṭibaddhassa ca suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā pacchā tathā pureti yathā yathāvuttasamādhissa cetopariyañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatesu sattasuyeva divasesu parasattānaṃyeva cittassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā tathāvuttasamādhissa pure atītesu sattasuyeva divasesu parasattānaṃyeva cittassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho.
“如昼,夜亦然”:就像有眼睛的众生在白天,因为太阳的光驱散了黑暗,出现在眼前的、眼所识的色,连意识也能清楚地了知;同样,在夜里,即使处在具备四种要素的黑暗中,依靠前面所说的定以天眼智随转,对色境也能透彻通达,并非难以通达。“如夜,昼亦然”:就像在夜里,即使处在具备四种要素的黑暗中,依靠前面所说的定以天眼智随转,对色境能透彻通达,并非难以通达;同样,在白天,对于微细的色境、被墙壁等遮挡的色境、或者处在极远处的色境,依靠前面所说的定以天眼智随转,也能透彻通达,并非难以通达。应当这样理解其含义。巴利
Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā cakkhumantānaṃ sattānaṃ divasabhāge sūriyālokena andhakārassa viddhaṃsitattā āpāthagataṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ rūpaṃ manoviññāṇenapi suviññeyyaṃ, tathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre vattamāne yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena rūpāyatanassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena rūpāyatanassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā divasabhāge sukhumassa rūpāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa rūpāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa rūpāyatanassa vā yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho daṭṭhabbo.
正如前面所说,依靠那种定,在天耳智随之运作的情况下,对于微细的声境,或者被墙等遮挡住的声境,或者处在极远处的声境,都能清清楚楚地通达,并不难以通达;同样,在夜里,依靠前面所说的那种定,在天耳智随之运作的情况下,对于微细的声境,或者被墙等遮挡住的声境,或者处在极远处的声境,也能清清楚楚地通达,并不难以通达。这个推论方式也应当这样理解。因此,在义注中这样说:巴利
Yathā yathāvuttasamādhissa divasabhāge dibbasotañāṇānuparivattibhāvena sukhumassa saddāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa saddāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa saddāyatanassa vā suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā rattibhāgepi yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattibhāvena sukhumassa saddāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa saddāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa saddāyatanassa vā suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti ayaṃ nayopi netabbo. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
说了“如过去,是指以宿住随念智随转于定的方式”等之后,又说“正如在色处中所说,在声处也应当以天耳智随转于定的方式如此引导”。巴利
‘‘Yathā pureti yathā samādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvenā’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘yathā ca rūpāyatane vuttaṃ, tathā samādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattitāya saddāyatane ca netabba’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 14).
因为要问的是“以智为根本等的定,连同宿住随念智的随转等,到底在修习什么?”所以才说了“iti vivaṭena”等这些话。其中,iti 就是“如此”,指上面所说的那种方式。apariyonaddhena 就是“没有遮盖”,也就是通过去除五盖等而达到的。sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ 就是“有光辉的心”,说的是与神足相应的道心,正在修习这个心。当与神足相应的道心生起时,与道心同时生起的那些善法,也就是信根、精进根、念根、定根、慧根这五根,就会生起。当道心灭去时,它们就以不再生起的方式灭去,因为只有一个心识刹那。这样,由于道识的灭,慧和念也就灭去了,应该这样连接理解。巴利
‘‘Ñāṇamūlakādisamādhinā pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvādisahitena kiṃ bhāvetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti vivaṭenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena. Apariyonaddhenāti nīvaraṇādivigamanena. Sappabhāsaṃ cittanti iddhipādasampayuttaṃ maggacittaṃ bhāveti. Iddhipādasampayutte maggacitte uppajjamāne hi maggacittasahabhūni kusalāni saddhindriyavīriyindriyasatindriyasamādhindriyapaññindriyabhūtāni pañcindriyāni uppajjanti. Maggacitte nirujjhamāne anuppajjanabhāvena nirujjhanti ekacittakkhaṇikattā. Evaṃ maggaviññāṇassa nirodhā paññā ca sati ca nirujjhatīti yojanā.
因为应当说“什么样的识灭去时,名色就灭去”,所以说了“名色也……”等话,意思就是:由于结生识的灭去,名色也灭去。或者,因为应当说“由于识的灭去,慧和念等所说的五根就这样灭去”,为了显示名色也灭去,而正在灭去的名色正是由于结生识的灭去而灭去,所以说了“名色也……”等话。其中,“名色也”指的是:在还没有用道断除渴爱、无明等烦恼时,应当生起的受等三蕴,以及四大种和所造色。“以识为因”是说:应当生起的结生识是这名色的因,所以名色是以识为因。“以识为缘而生起”是说:以识为缘而生起。“那个的”指的是应当生起的那个结生识。“因”指的是渴爱、无明等烦恼。“识”指的是应当生起的结生识。“无食”是说没有缘。“不被欢喜”是说不应被欲爱等所欢喜。“无结生”是说没有再次投生的连接。“这样的识”就是指那样的识。“无因”是说:这名色没有以结生识为因,所以是无因。“无缘”是说:因为缺少助伴,这些行没有缘。这样,由于结生识的灭去,名色也灭去。巴利
‘‘Kassa viññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpañca nirujjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā ‘‘viññāṇassa nirodhā paññā ca sati cāti vuttāni pañcindriyāni evaṃ nirujjhantī’’ti vattabbattā nāmarūpañca nirujjhati, nirujjhamānaṃ pana nāmarūpaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nirujjhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nāmarūpañcāti maggena taṇhāavijjādike anupacchinne uppajjanārahaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ, bhūtupādārūpañca. Viññāṇahetukanti uppajjanārahaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ hetu assa nāmarūpassāti viññāṇahetukaṃ. Viññāṇapaccayā nibbattanti viññāṇena paccayena nibbattaṃ. Tassāti uppajjanārahassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa. Hetūti taṇhāavijjādiko kileso. Viññāṇanti uppajjanārahaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Anāhāranti appaccayaṃ. Anabhinanditanti kāmataṇhādīhi anabhinanditabbaṃ. Appaṭisandhikanti punabbhavābhisandahanarahitaṃ. Nti tādisaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Ahetūti natthi hetusaṅkhātaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ imassa nāmarūpassāti ahetu. Appaccayanti sahāyavirahena natthi paccayā saṅkhārā imassāti appaccayaṃ. Evaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpañca nirujjhatīti.
如果有人说:“按照刚才所说的方式,慧与念以及名色的灭去,我们怎么能相信呢?”因为需要这样回应,所以说了“因此世尊说”等话。世尊以应当解说的方式,了知慧与念以及名色的灭去方式,于是说出了阐明灭去方式的偈颂:“这是……等,此处于此灭尽。”通过这首偈颂,你们应当相信我所说的灭去之理。在这里,对于慧、念与名色的灭去,因为不了解的人、或者对此有疑惑的阿耆多应当发问,所以应当判定这些问法的类别:“是未见而提问,还是已见而对照提问,还是依慧等有多种意义而提问,还是依多种安立而提问,还是依法安立而提问。”也应当判定这些答法的类别:“是显示自性的回答,还是依多种安立的回答,还是依法安立的回答。”巴利
‘‘Paññāsatīnañceva nāmarūpassa ca vuttappakārena nirujjhanabhāvo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vattabbākārena paññāsatīnañceva nāmarūpassa ca nirujjhanabhāvajānanako bhagavā yathānirujjhanabhāvadīpakaṃ ‘‘yametaṃ…pe… etthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti gāthāvacanaṃ āha. Tena gāthāvacanena tumhehi mayā vutto nirujjhanabhāvo saddahitabboyevāti. Etthāpi paññāsatināmarūpānaṃ nirujjhanaṃ ajānantena tattha vā saṃsayantena ajitena pucchitabbattā ‘‘adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā paññādīnaṃ anekatthattā dhammato vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchā’’ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo. ‘‘Sarūpadassanavissajjananti vā anekādhiṭṭhānavissajjananti vā dhammādhiṭṭhānavissajjana’’nti vā iccevamādivissajjanavicayo niddhāretabbo.
导师先把依有情安立等问答和依法安立等问答各自分开显示出来,又分别辨析了问的类别和答的类别,我们也已经了解了。因为应当问:“当依有情安立和依法安立的问答合在一起显示时,我们该怎么理解问的类别和答的类别?”所以就把依有情安立和依法安立的问提出来,在那里辨析分类,而说了“诸有为法”等话。不过在注释中——巴利
Evaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānādipucchāvissajjanāni ceva dhammādhiṭṭhānādipucchāvissajjanāni ca visuṃ visuṃ dassetvā pucchāvicayo ceva vissajjanavicayo ca ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānesu ekato dassitesu pucchāvissajjanesu kathaṃ pucchāvicayo ceva vissajjanavicayo ca amhehi viññātabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā tattha vicayaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
像这样,把带有衔接的问也显示出来之后,前面已经分别显示了依有情安立和依法安立的问;现在为了把它们合在一起显示,就引出了“诸有为法”等这一段话。(《导论注释》14)巴利
‘‘Evaṃ anusandhipucchampi dassetvā heṭṭhā sattādhiṭṭhānā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā ca pucchā visuṃ visuṃ dassitāti idāni tā saha dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 14) –
已说。它的意思是这样:在这个教法里,那些阿罗汉是有为法,而众多、大量的众生则是有学,正在修习戒等。阿耆多尊者为了问阿罗汉和有学的行仪与修行,这样说道:智者啊,请为我宣说,世尊,尊者。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tassāyaṃ attho – idha sāsane ye arahanto saṅkhatadhammā honti, puthū bahūyeva satta janā sekkhā sīlādisikkhamānā honti, tesaṃ arahantāvañceva sekkhānañca iriyaṃ paṭipattiṃ meṃ mahā puṭṭho nipako tvaṃ bhagavā pabrūhi mārisa iti āyasmā ajito pucchanto āhāti.
15 在这首偈颂里,因为需要说明“问了多少”,所以说了“这些”等话。因为应当依照词义来提问,所以说了“这三个词被问到了”。在“哪些……诸位”这首偈颂中,所问的那些问题共有三个。因为应当问“为什么、以什么、由于什么原因而有三个”,所以说了“为什么……以结合”。有学圣者和无学圣者,以及以观为先行而断除,合起来就是“有学、无学以观为先行而断除”,它们的结合就是“有学……结合”,以那个“有学……结合”。如此,因为依提问方式而说了“哪些有为法……诸位”这首偈颂,所以应当知道有三个问题。巴利
15. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ ‘‘kittakāni pucchitānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Padatthānurūpaṃ pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni tīṇi padāni pucchitānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ye ca …pe… mārisā’’ti gāthāyaṃ ye pañhā pucchitā, te pañhā tayo honti, ‘‘kissa kena kāraṇena tayo hontī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kissa…pe… yogenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhā ariyā ca asekkhā ariyā ca vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānañcāti sekhāsekhavipassanāpubbaṅgamappahānāni, tesaṃ yogoti sekhā…pe… yogo, tena sekhā…pe… yogena. Evaṃ pucchāvidhinā hi yasmā ‘‘ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse…pe… mārisā’’ti gāthamāha, tasmā tayo pañhā hontīti daṭṭhabbā.
以“诸有为法”这一句,问的是无学者的阿罗汉果;以“众多有学在此”这一句,问的是有学与无学的有学修习;以“智者啊,请为我宣说他们的行仪,尊者”这一句,问的是有学与无学在观的前分阶段的彼分断除。应当这样判定问法的分类:是未见而问、已见而对照之问、依有情安立之问,还是依多种安立之问。巴利
‘‘Ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse’’ti iminā asekkhānaṃ arahattaṃ pucchati, ‘‘ye ca sekkhā puthū idhā’’ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ sekkhasikkhanaṃ pucchati, ‘‘tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhi mārisā’’ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ vipassanā pubbabhāge tadaṅgappahānaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā’’ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo.
把“依七法安立”的提问引出来之后,阿阇梨已经分别解说了问法的判别,我们也已经了解。因为需要问“在那个提问里,哪些是回答的偈颂”,所以开始说“其中,回答……”等话。“其中”,就是指在那个偈颂里。“于诸欲……应遍行”,这是世尊所说的回答偈颂。“于诸欲”:欲就是被贪求的东西,所以叫欲,也就是在那些欲当中。对于事物欲,智者不应该以烦恼欲去贪著。“心不浑浊”:智者舍弃那些让心浑浊的嗔恚寻思等,以及身恶行等法,心不浑浊,非常清净。“善巧一切法”:因为以无常等观察一切法,所以对无常等五蕴善巧、熟练。“具念”:因为随念头发等身体部分,所以叫具念。“比丘”:因为以怖畏等观察有为法,所以叫比丘。“应遍行”:应当以彼分断、镇伏断、正断断的方式,全面远离烦恼欲和事物欲。巴利
Sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘tassaṃ pucchāyaṃ katamā vissajjanāgāthā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha vissajjanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Kāmesu…pe… paribbaje’’ti vissajjanāgāthā bhagavatā vuttā. Kāmesūti kāmīyantīti kāmā, tesu kāmesu. Vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena paṇḍitehi nābhigijjheyya. Manasā nāvilosiyāti āvilabhāvakare byāpādavitakkādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca dhamme pajahanto paṇḍito manasā anāvilo suppasanno bhaveyya. Kusalo sabbadhammānanti sabbadhammānaṃ aniccatādinā paritulitattā aniccatādīsu pañcasu khandhesu kusalo cheko. Satoti kesādīsu saratīti sato. Bhikkhūti saṅkhatadhamme bhayādito ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Paribbajeti tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānabhāvena kilesakāmavatthukāme pari samantato vajjeyya.
在问偈里,世尊用“智者”这个称赞的词说出了答偈,由此显示出世尊凭无碍智达到了最胜的境地。现在,为了把这种无碍智按身业等类别分别展示出来,所以说了“世尊的一切身业”等话。其中,以无碍智了知之后所做的一切身业,都是以智为先导、以智为随行的。语业、意业等其余各项也是同样的道理。于过去分,是指在过去世中自身与他人的蕴等部分,世尊的智见不被无知所障碍。于未来分,是指在未来世中自身与他人的蕴等部分。于现在分,是指现在世中自身与他人的蕴等部分。巴利
Pucchāgāthāyaṃ ‘‘nipako’’ti padena pasaṃsitena bhagavatā vissajjanāgāthā vuttā, tassa bhagavato yena anāvaraṇañāṇena ukkaṃsagatena pakkabhāvo dassito, taṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kāyakammādibhedehi vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha anāvaraṇañāṇena jānitvā kataṃ sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atīte aṃseti atītabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññāṇena appaṭihataṃ bhagavato ñāṇadassanaṃ. Anāgate aṃseti anāgatabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse. Paccuppanne aṃseti paccuppanne bhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse.
因为应当问“智见在什么方面有障碍”,所以先提出这个问题,再为了显示障碍的对象而说了“何处”等话。或者也可以这样理解:应当问“在现在有的自身蕴等部分中,其他人的智见也可能存在;照这样类推,在过去、未来的部分中,其他人的智见又在什么方面会有障碍”,因此先提出这个问题,为了确定并显示障碍的对象而说了“何处”等话。其中,“何处”是在问:在何处、在什么时候,其他人的智见会有障碍。巴利
‘‘Ñāṇadassanassa katarasmiṃ paṭighāto’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ko cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘paccuppannabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññesampi ñāṇadassanaṃ bhaveyya, tadanusārena atītānāgatakoṭṭhāsesupi katarasmiṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyā’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ko cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ko cāti kva katarasmiṃ samaye aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyāti pucchi.
对于无常、苦、无我这些法,其他人对它们无知、不见,这种被称为无知与不见的自性,就成了对智见的障碍,而不只是障碍对自身和他身诸蕴等的看见。通过这一点,说明了在三种特相上生起的智见,其他人很难获得,而世尊的智见则与其他人不共。因为世尊通过阐明三种特相,使应当被调伏的众生证得四圣谛。由于需要说明“用什么譬喻能让我们明白,世尊没有智见的障碍,而其他人的智见却有障碍”,所以说了“如同在此”等话。其中,就像在这世间,有眼睛的人能在空中看见星星,却无法通过计数的约定知道“有这么多”,同样,其他人对智见的障碍,就是这种无知与不见的自性。巴利
Anicce, dukkhe, anattaniye ca aññesaṃ aññāṇaṃ yaṃ adassanaṃ atthi, aññāṇādassanasaṅkhāto sabhāvo ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhavati, na saparakkhandhādidassanamattapaṭighāto. Etena aniccato lakkhaṇattaye pavattassa ñāṇadassanassa aññesaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ, bhagavato ca ñāṇadassanassa aññehi asādhāraṇataṃ dasseti. Bhagavato hi lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanena veneyyā catusaccappaṭivedhaṃ labhanti. ‘‘Bhagavato ñāṇadassanapaṭighātābhāvena aññesañca ñāṇadassanassa paṭighātabhāvo katamāya upamāya amhākaṃ pākaṭo’’ti vattabbabhāvato upamāya pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yathā idhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idha sattaloke cakkhumā puriso ākāse tārakāni passeyya, gaṇanasaṅketena ‘‘ettakānī’’ti no ca jāneyya yathā, evaṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto ayaṃ aññāṇadassanasabhāvo bhavati.
世尊并不是那样(有无明与不见),所以应当理解:世尊的智见不会被任何无明与不见所障碍。因为有人会问“为什么我们应当相信世尊的智见是无障碍的”,所以说“诸佛世尊确实具有无障碍的智见”。又因为需要说明“贤善者……世尊的无障碍智,导师已经按身业等类别分别开示,我们也已经了知;那么,在后来的偈颂中,以‘威仪’一词所问的有学与无学的行道,应当如何理解”,为了显示有学与无学的行道,所以说“其中,有学……”等语。这里所说的“有学”,是指具足有学戒的人,对于可引生贪染的色所缘等法,应当守护心而不贪染;对于易起缠犯的嗔恨事境,应当防护其心不起嗔怒。巴利
Bhagavato pana tathā abhāvato kenaci aññāṇena adassanena appaṭihataṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ bhavatīti attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Bhagavato ñāṇadassanassa appaṭihatabhāvo kasmā amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘anāvaraṇañāṇadassanā hi buddhā bhagavanto’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nipakassa…pe… bhagavato anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ kāyakammādibhedehi ācariyena vibhajitvā dassitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, pacchā gāthāya ‘iriya’nti padena pucchitā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā kathaṃ vijānitabbā’’ti vattabbattā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha sekhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ vissajjane. Sekhenāti sikkhanasīlena puggalena rajanīyesu rūpārammaṇādīsu dhammesu gedhā cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānīyesu āghātavatthūsu dosā cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ.
因为有人会问:在那些贪染和嗔怒当中,世尊在回答的偈颂里制止的是哪一种、说的是哪个词?所以说了“其中,那种欲求”等话。其中,“其中”指在贪染和嗔怒中。“欲求”指贪的欲求。“迷醉”指与贪和痴俱行的痴迷。“希求”指贪的希求。“喜爱”指渴爱的喜爱,不是慈心的喜爱。“戏乐”指贪染的戏乐。这些都是贪染的同义词。世尊为了制止那称为贪染的欲求等,就以“不应在诸欲中贪染”这样,逐一分别地宣说。巴利
‘‘Tesu gedhadosesu katamaṃ nivārento bhagavā vissajjanagāthāyaṃ katamaṃ padamāhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā icchā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti gedhadosesu. Icchāti rāgicchā. Mucchāti lobhamohasahagatamohamucchā. Patthanāti rāgapatthanā. Piyāyanāti taṇhāpiyāyanāva, na mettāpiyāyanā. Kīḷanāti gedhakīḷanā. Etāni hi gedhapariyāyavacanāni. Taṃ gedhasaṅkhātaṃ icchādikaṃ nivārento bhagavā ‘‘kāmesu nābhigijjheyyā’’ti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pakārena āha.
世尊为了遮止“缠覆”这种嗔怒,而分别地说“心应当不浑浊”,这样来连接句义。世尊为了分别遮止贪染和嗔怒,说了两个词句;因为需要说明“应当以什么含义来相信它”,所以说了“确实,有学”等话。有学对可贪染的事物生起贪染时,就会生起尚未生起的以贪为主的烦恼,并使已经生起的烦恼增长广大;有学对可缠覆的事物心浑浊时,就会生起尚未生起的以嗔为主的烦恼,并使已经生起的烦恼增长广大。因此,以这个遮止的含义,你们应当相信我的话——这就是其中的意趣。巴利
Pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ dosaṃ nivārento bhagavā ‘‘manasānāvilo siyā’’ti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pakārena āhāti yojanā. Gedhadosānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ nivārento bhagavā dve padāni āhāti vuttaṃ, ‘‘taṃ kena atthena saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tathā hi sekho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rajanīyesu abhigijjhanto sekho anuppannaṃ lobhapadhānaṃ kilesañca uppādeti, uppannaṃ kilesañca phātiṃ abhivaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, pariyuṭṭhānīyesu āvilo sekho anuppannaṃ dosapadhānaṃ kilesañca uppādeti, uppannaṃ kilesañca phātiṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, iti iminā paṭikkhepaatthena taṃ mama vacanaṃ saddahitabbanti adhippāyo.
有人问:不贪染而且心不浑浊的有学,是只做到遮止贪染和嗔怒,还是也进一步修满了上分之道呢?为了说明他也确实进一步修满了上分之道,所以接着说了“然而,心无浑浊的意图”等话。其中,“心无浑浊的意图”是说,他没有能让心浑浊的意图,也就是没有嗔恚的意图和害人的意图。由于没有欲贪等贪染,所以他不贪染,并且努力发起善的精进。有人问“他是怎样精进的”,所以说了“他对于未生……”等话。其中,“他”是指为了成就上分道位而修行的有学。“未生”等的含义,依照注疏的说法就能明白,所以不再分开解释。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ pana anabhigijjhanto, anāvilo ca sekkho agedhadosanivāraṇameva karoti, udāhu uttaripi paṭipadaṃ pūretī’’ti pucchitabbattā uttaripi paṭipadaṃ pūretiyevāti dassento ‘‘yo pana anāvilasaṅkappo’’tiādimāha. Tattha anāvilasaṅkappoti natthi āvilakarā saṅkappā byāpādasaṅkappavihiṃsāsaṅkappā etassāti anāvilasaṅkappo, icchādigedhassa abhāvena anabhigijjhanto vāyamati kusalavāyāmaṃ pavatteti. ‘‘Kathaṃ vāyamatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so anuppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha soti uparibhāvanāmaggabhāvatthāya paṭipajjamāno sekkho. Anuppannānantiādīnaṃ attho sakkā aṭṭhakathāvacaneneva (netti. aṭṭha. 15-16) jānitunti na vibhatto.
16 以随念不净等为特征的根,在贪爱所缘的对象上阻止与欲贪同时生起的寻——这个以随念不净等为特征的根就是念根。以达到广大状态的不散乱阻止嗔恚寻——这个称为不散乱的根就是定根。以正精进阻止害寻——这个称为正精进的根就是精进根。以称为正见的根,对已生起的一切……不容忍——这个称为正见的根就是慧根。在这四根同时生起时,由于心不浑浊而生起的信解与安立——这个称为信解的根就是信根。这些就是有学的五根。巴利
16.Yenāti asubhādīnaṃ anussaraṇalakkhaṇena indriyena taṇhāmayitavatthūsu kāmataṇhāya sahajātaṃ vitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ asubhādianussaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ. Yena mahaggatabhāvappattena avikkhepena byāpādavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ avikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ. Yena sammappadhānena vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ sammappadhānasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ. Yena sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātena indriyena uppannuppanne…pe… nādhivāseti, idaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Imesu catūsu indriyesu saha uppajjamānā yā saddahanā okappanā uppajjati, anāvilabhāvato idaṃ saddahanasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ saddhindriyaṃ. Imāni sekkhassa pañcindriyāni.
它们不可能在同一个对象上都具有最胜的地位,而是要在各自的对象上达到最胜,所以应当问:“哪一根在哪个对象上发挥最胜的作用?”为了说明“这一根在这一对象上起作用”,就说了“其中,信根应当在哪里见到”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在那些根当中,在四个预流支当中,应当见到信根发挥最胜的作用。其余的根也应当这样套用。有学是只以慧根被世尊称为不放逸而受到赞叹,还是以一切善法而受到赞叹?因为应当这样问,为了说明“是以一切善法、以五根为首而被说、被赞叹”,就说了“如此,有学”等话。这里,“如此”是说:通过这样显示五根的生起,有学这个人以一切善法被世尊称为不放逸而受到赞叹,因为他的心不浑浊。应当说“有学的不浑浊状态要由谁来相信”,因此说“所以世尊说:心应当不浑浊”。因为世尊说了“心应当不浑浊”,所以你们应当相信有学的不浑浊状态。巴利
Ekasmiṃyeva visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ na pāpuṇeyyuṃ, attano visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pāpuṇituṃ arahanti, ‘‘katamaṃ indriyaṃ kattha visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pavatta’’nti pucchitabbabhāvato idaṃ indriyaṃ imasmiṃ visaye pavattanti dassento ‘‘tattha saddhindriyaṃ kattha daṭṭhabba’’ntiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tesu indriyesu catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesu saddhindriyaṃ jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pavattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Kiṃ nu sekkho paññindriyeva appamatto’ti bhagavatā vutto thomito, udāhu sabbehi kusalehi dhammehīti pucchitabbattā sabbehi kusalehi dhammehi pañcindriyapamukhehi vutto thomito hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sekho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ pañcindriyānaṃ nibbattidassanena sekho puggalo sabbehi kusalehi dhammehi appamattoti bhagavatā vutto thomito anāvilatāya manasāti yojanā. ‘‘Sekkhassa anāvilatā kena saddahitabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā manasānāvilo siyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā ‘‘manasānāvilo siyā’’ti vuttattā sekkhassa anāvilatā tumhehi saddahitabbāti.
17 有学已达顶点的行道,导师已经分别阐明,我们也已经了解。为了回答“无学已达顶点的行道该怎么了解”这个问题,并且要分别开示无学已达顶点的行道,所以说了“于一切法善巧”等话。其中,“于一切法”的意思是:无学在一切法中,依已达顶点的行道而善巧、极为善巧,这是世尊所说、所赞叹的,也就是“心无浑浊”。为了显示无学在一切法中的善巧,而那种善巧的所缘境界就是一切法,所以先依“人”的角度来分别显示这一切法,因此说了“名为世间”等话。其中,由“于一切法”这句话所说的法,名为世间,分为三种:烦恼世间、有世间、根世间,这就是句义的组织。其中,处于狭劣法的立场,以生起烦恼的意义来说是烦恼,以善法等生起的意义来说是世间,这就是烦恼世间。处于广大法的立场,以修习的意义来说是有,以如前所说的意义来说是世间,这就是有世间。处于信根等法的立场,以有主宰作用的相应而成为根,以证得信根等的意义来说是世间,这就是根世间。巴利
17. Sekkhassa matthakappattā paṭipadā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ asekkhassa matthakappattā paṭipadā ñātabbā’’ti vattabbattā asekkhassa matthakappattaṃ paṭipadaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kusalo sabbadhammāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sabbadhammānanti sabbesu dhammesu matthakappattāya paṭipadāya asekkho kusalo chekataroti bhagavatā vutto thomito anāvilatāya manasāti. Asekkhassa sabbadhammesu yaṃ kosallaṃ dassetukāmo, tassa kosallassa visayabhūte sabbadhamme tāva puggalādhiṭṭhānena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘loko nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti iminā vuttadhammasaṅkhāto loko nāma kilesaloko, bhavaloko, indriyalokoti tividho hotīti yojanā. Tattha parittadhammaṭṭho kilesajananaṭṭhena kileso, kusalādipavattanaṭṭhena loko cāti kilesaloko. Mahaggatadhammaṭṭho bhavanaṭṭhena bhavo, vuttanayena loko cāti bhavaloko. Saddhindriyādidhammaṭṭho ādhipaccaṭṭhayogavasena indriyabhūto hutvā saddhindriyādipattanaṭṭhena loko cāti indriyaloko.
因为要问“在三世间中,哪一个从哪一个生起”,所以说了“于此”等话。因为要问“谁使信等诸根生起”,所以说了“他使诸根生起”。其中,“他”是指这样一个人:他依成办种种狭小之法(即烦恼世间)和广大之法(即有世间)而安住,这个人就在自己的相续中使信根等诸根生起。巴利
‘‘Tīsu lokesu katamena katamo samudāgacchatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saddhādiindriyāni ko nibbattetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so indriyāni nibbattetī’’ti vuttaṃ . Tattha soti yo puggalo kilesalokasaṅkhāte parittadhamme, bhavalokasaṅkhāte mahaggatadhamme ca taṃtaṃsampādanavasena ṭhito, so puggalo saddhindriyādīni indriyāni attasantāne nibbatteti.
因为要问“当诸根在自己的相续中,以反复生起的方式而增长、变得可爱时,有什么慧生起?”所以说了“于诸根”等话。其中,“所应知”就是应当了知的。“遍知”是指以色法与非色法的自相和因缘,通过摄受等方式而运作、了知它们的慧。因为要问“这遍知应当以几种方式观察?”所以说了“这(遍知)以两种”等话。其中,这遍知应当被智者以观察遍知和修习遍知这两种方式观察后把握。“观察遍知”应当理解为由见道之慧所产生的知遍知。因此,义注中说:“观察遍知就是知遍知。”“修习遍知”应当理解为由修道之慧所产生的,与度遍知和断遍知一起。巴利
‘‘Indriyesu attasantānesu punappunaṃ nibbattāpanavasena vuḍḍhāpiyamānesu kā paññā bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘indriyesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha neyyassāti abhiññeyyassa. Pariññāti rūpārūpadhamme salakkhaṇato, paccayato ca pariggahādivasena pavattapaññā. ‘‘Sā pariññā katividhena upaparikkhitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘sā duvidhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sā pariññā dassanapariññāya ca bhāvanāpariññāya ca duvidhena viññūhi upaparikkhitvā gahetabbāti. Dassanapariññāyāti ca dassanamaggapaññājanikāya ñātapariññāyāti attho gahetabbo. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dassanapariññāti ñātapariññā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 17). Bhāvanāpariññāyāti bhāvanāmaggapaññājanikāya tīraṇapariññāya saddhiṃ pahānapariññāyāti attho.
“此以二种”等所说的含义太过简略,无法让人理解,因为应当说“请详细解说”,所以说了“然而当”等。其中,“当”指强力观智生起的时候。“有学”是因为持学戒的缘故,既指善凡夫,也指入流等圣者。“所应知”指应当了知的色等诸行。“遍知”指以摄受等智摄受而了知,与厌离智相应。“其”指那善凡夫与入流等。“二法”指善凡夫的强力观智之法与入流等的强力观智之法。如此,见善巧依次令其生起于相续中而达见道智;修习善巧则达一来道等。巴利
‘‘Sā duvidhenā’tiādinā vutto attho atisaṅkhepo na sakkā viññātuṃ, vitthāretvā kathehī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadāti balavavipassanuppajjanakāle. Sekhoti sikkhanasīlatāya kalyāṇaputhujjano ceva sotāpannādiko ca. Ñeyyanti ñātabbaṃ rūpādikaṃ saṅkhāraṃ. Parijānātīti pariggahādiñāṇena pariggahetvā jānāti nibbidāñāṇasahagatena. Tassāti kalyāṇaputhujjanassa ceva sotāpannādikassa ca. Dve dhammāti kalyāṇaputhujjanassa balavavipassanādhammo ceva sotāpannādikassa ca balavavipassanādhammo ca. Yathākkamaṃ dassanakosallaṃ sotāpattimaggañāṇañceva bhāvanākosallaṃ sakadāgāmimaggādikañca santāne pavattāpanavasena gacchanti.
先前所说的“所应知的遍知”这个智,应当以几种方式来了知?因为需要这样问,所以说“这个智应当以五种方式来了知……证悟”。又因为需要问:“在依观智差别而分出的五种神通等当中,哪一种是神通?哪一种是遍知?哪一种是断?哪一种是修习?哪一种是证悟?”所以说“其中哪一种”等等。其中,“其中”是指在神通等当中。“了知诸法自相的智”:以所缘的方式生起,了知色法的坚硬等自相、非色法的触等自相的智,也就是了知因果、被称为法辨析的智,以及了知因果、被称为义辨析的智。这种连同自相一起了知因果的慧,就叫作神通。巴利
‘‘Pubbe yaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘neyyassa pariññā’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ñāṇaṃ katividhena veditabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ ñāṇaṃ pañcavidhena veditabbaṃ…pe... sacchikiriyā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tāsu vipassanābhedena bhinnāsu pañcasu abhiññādīsu katamā abhiññā, katamā pariññā, katamaṃ pahānaṃ, katamā bhāvanā, katamā sacchikiriyā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti abhiññādīsu. Yaṃ dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇe ñāṇanti rūpadhammānaṃ kakkhaḷādisalakkhaṇe, arūpadhammānaṃ phusanādisalakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattaṃ yaṃ ñāṇaṃ hetuphalajānanahetujānanasaṅkhātā dhammapaṭisambhidā ceva hetuphalajānanasaṅkhātā atthapaṭisambhidā ca bhavati. Ayaṃ salakkhaṇena saddhiṃ hetuphalajānanā paññā abhiññā nāma.
“如此”是指按上面所说的方式,以证智证知。所谓“遍知”等,就像这样:这是无过失的善,这是有过失的不善,这是能生起不善果报的有过失之法,这是能生起善果报的无过失之法,这是染污的、黑的,这是无染污的、白的,这是无过失等类的善,应当修习;这是有过失等类的不善,不应当修习。以这样的方式,从无常等开始,通过聚思择等方法所把握、所审察的、作为观智所缘的这些有为法,依次令生灭智等果与利益生起。由于彼所生的观智生起,便令近行定生起。以这样的次第,对所把握、已转起的那些生灭智等,这就是通达诸谛的现观,这就是其含义。这样界定之后,结合“那已转起的遍知,此即名为遍知”,即依所说的遍知之慧而遍知后,应断、应修习、应作证这三法便得以确立。“诸不善法应断”——这样转起的遍知之慧,这就是断,即断智。“诸善法应修习”——这样转起的遍知之慧,这就是修习慧。“这是无为法,应作证”——这样转起的遍知之慧,这就是作证慧。这样结合起来,应当把握与注疏要旨不相违的含义。巴利
Evanti vuttappakārena. Abhiññāñāṇena abhijānitvā. Yā parijānanātiādīsu ‘‘idaṃ anavajjaṃ kusalaṃ, idaṃ sāvajjaṃ akusalaṃ, idaṃ akusalavipākajanakaṃ sāvajjaṃ, idaṃ kusalavipākajanakaṃ anavajjaṃ, idaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ kaṇhaṃ, idaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukkaṃ, idaṃ kusalaṃ anavajjādikaṃ sevitabbaṃ, idaṃ akusalaṃ sāvajjādikaṃ na sevitabba’’nti evaṃ aniccādito kalāpasammasanādivasena gahitā sammasitā ime vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā saṅkhatadhammā idaṃ udayabbayañāṇādiphalaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ anukkamena nibbattāpenti. Tannibbattavipassanāya uppajjanato upacāraṃ uppādenti, evaṃ anukkamena gahitānaṃ pavattitānaṃ tesaṃ udayabbayañāṇādīnaṃ ayaṃ saccānubodhapaṭivedho atthoti paricchinditvā yā parijānanā pavattā, sā ayaṃ parijānanā pariññā nāmāti yojetvā, evaṃ vuttappakārāya pariññāpaññāya parijānitvā pahātabbā, bhāvetabbā, sacchikātabbā ca tayo dhammā avasiṭṭhā bhavanti. ‘‘Ye akusalā, te pahātabbā’’ti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, idaṃ pahānaṃ pahānañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ye kusalā, te bhāvetabbā’’ti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, sā bhāvanāpaññā. ‘‘Yaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, idaṃ sacchikiriya’’nti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, sā sacchikiriyāpaññāti yojetvā aṭṭhakathādhippāyena aviruddho attho gahetabbo.
导师已经分别解说了神通等五种慧,我们也已经了解。因为要说明“以这些遍知而了知的人,被称为什么?受到怎样的称赞?”,所以说了“凡……者”等话。其中,凡是按上面所说的方式来了知的人,这位了知者由于对缘所生的诸法有善巧、有适切的能力,被称为“义善巧”而受到称赞;由于对缘法有善巧,被称为“法善巧”;由于契合四种单一性等理趣而精通,被称为“善性善巧”;由于精通果等至,被称为“果善巧”;由于精通增长,被称为“增善巧”;由于精通衰减,被称为“减善巧”;当紧急事务或怖畏发生的时候,由于精通能够止息那事务或怖畏的处所和到达之因,被称为“方便善巧”;在前进等大行中具足念与正知,则被称为“具足大善巧”而受到称赞。因为要说明“这位无学者的义等善巧状态应如何被信受?”,所以说了“因此说”等话。意思是:由于说了“于一切法善巧”,所以应当信受。巴利
Abhiññādayo pañcavidhā paññā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tāhi pariññāhi jānanto puggalo ‘ki’nti vuccati thomīyatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yo eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo puggalo evaṃ vuttappakārena jānāti, ayaṃ jānanto puggalo paccayuppannesu dhammesu kusalattā chekattā ‘‘atthakusalo’’ti vuccati thomīyati, paccayadhammesu kusalattā ‘‘dhammakusalo’’ti ca catunnaṃ ekattādīnaṃ nayānaṃ yuttatāya kovidattā ‘‘kalyāṇatākusalo’’ti ca phalasamāpattīsu kovidattā ‘‘phalatākusalo’’ti ca vaḍḍhīsu kovidattā ‘‘āyakusalo’’ti ca avaḍḍhīsu kovidattā ‘‘apāyakusalo’’ti ca accāyike kicce vā bhaye vā uppanne sati tassa kiccassa, bhayassa vā tikicchanasamatthe ṭhānuppattiyakāraṇe kovidattā ‘‘upāyakusalo’’ti ca mahantesu abhikkamādīsu satisampajaññāya sampannattā ‘‘mahatā kosallena samannāgato’’ti ca vuccati thomīyati. ‘‘Tassa asekkhassa atthādīsu kusalabhāvo kathaṃ saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kusalo sabbadhammāna’’nti vuttattā saddahitabboti adhippāyo.
“于一切法善巧”这句话的含义,导师已经分别解说了,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问:“具念比丘应当游行”这句话的含义,我们又是怎样详细了知的呢?所以说了“具念比丘应当游行”等话。或者,因为世尊说过“具念比丘应当游行”,就该问:具足在前进等活动中生起的与念相应的智的具念者,到底为了什么目的而应当游行?为了确定并显示这一点,就说了“具念比丘应当游行”等话,意思是:具足在这些活动中生起的与念相应的智的具念者,就是为了这个目的而应当游行。其中,“以此”指的是:凡是具足在前进等活动中生起的与念相应的智的具念无学比丘,由于这位无学比丘已经圆满修学、再无别的需要,为了现法乐住,在前进时……中间省略……在沉默时,都应当以念、与念相应的正知、以智而安住,应当持续进行名为四威仪路活动的安住。巴利
‘‘Kusalo sabbadhammāna’’nti padassa attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’ti padassa attho kathaṃ amhehi vitthārato viññāto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’ti bhagavatā vuttaṃ, ‘‘kattha pavattena satisahitena ñāṇena sampanno sato kimatthaṃ paribbaje’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imesu pavattena satisahitañāṇena sampanno sato imamatthaṃ paribbaje’’ti niyametvā dassento ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’tiādimāha. Tattha tenāti yo abhikkamādīsu pavattena satisahitañāṇena samannāgato sato asekkhabhikkhu, tena asekkhabhikkhunā pariniṭṭhitasikkhattā aññapayojanābhāvato diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ abhikkante…pe… tuṇhībhāvena satena satisahitena sampajānena ñāṇena vihātabbaṃ catuiriyāpathaparivattanasaṅkhātaṃ viharaṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.
既然应当问“已经开示的有学与无学行道,概略来说有几种?”为了说明这些叫作行道的行为,依人简略分为两种,所以说了“这两种行”等话。其中,无论这些行是依应当修习的善法等差别、依义善巧等差别,还是依前进等时的念与正知差别而开示的,这两种行都是世尊所认可的,是以认可的方式教导的。也就是:已清净的阿拉汉是一种行,正在清净的有学是一种行,应当知道这就是依人而分的两种。巴利
‘‘Yā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā niddiṭṭhā, imā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā saṅkhepato katividhā’’ti pucchitabbattā imā paṭipadāsaṅkhātā cariyā saṅkhepato puggalavasena dveti dassetuṃ ‘‘imā dve cariyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yā cariyā bhāvetabbakusalādibhedena vā atthakosallādibhedena vā abhikkamādīsu satisampajaññabhedena vā niddiṭṭhā, imā cariyā dveti bhagavatā anuññātā anujānanavasena desitā, visuddhānaṃ arahantānaṃ ekā cariyā, visujjhantānaṃ sekkhānaṃ ekā cariyāti puggalavasena dveti daṭṭhabbā.
为什么只有无学圣者才被称为“具念前进”等等而受到称赞,而善凡夫也同样被称为“具念前进”等等而受到称赞呢?因为应当这样说,所以接着说了“因为所作已办”等话。阿拉汉的诸根已经完成了它们该做的事。由于诸根已完成了该做的事,凡是应当问的问题,那四种应当被证悟的——应当通过苦的遍知现观而证悟……乃至……应当通过灭的作证现观而证悟——这四种应当证悟的所证,无学圣者因为已经达到了念的圆满广大,所以能以遍知现观等方式了知。因此,这位无学圣者才在直接意义上被称为“为了贪的灭尽、为了嗔的灭尽、为了痴的灭尽,具念前进,具念后退”而受到称赞。有学圣者也同样以各自的遍知现观等方式了知上面所说的应当证悟的所证,所以应当知道,他也被称为“具念……乃至……痴的”而受到称赞。因此说“谁正在清净?有学众。”巴利
‘‘Asekkhoyeva kasmā ‘sato abhikkamatī’tiādinā vuccati thomīyati, kalyāṇaputhujjanopi ‘sato abhikkamatī’tiādinā vuccati thomīyatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘katakiccāni hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Arahato indriyāni katakiccāni, indriyānaṃ katakiccattā yaṃ pucchaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ catubbidhaṃ dukkhassa pariññābhisamayena bojjhitabbaṃ…pe… nirodhassa sacchikiriyābhisamayena bojjhitabbaṃ bhave. Catubbidhaṃ idaṃ bojjhaṃ bojjhitabbaṃ yo asekkho sativepullappattattā evaṃ pariññābhisamayādinā jānāti,ayaṃ asekkho nippariyāyena ‘‘rāgassa khayāya, dosassa khayāya, mohassa khayāya sato abhikkamati, sato paṭikkamatī’’ti vuccati thomīyati. Sekkhopi yathāvuttaṃ bojjhaṃ bojjhitabbaṃ attano pariññābhisamayādinā jānāti, tasmā ‘‘sato…pe… mohassā’’ti vuccati thomīyatīti veditabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ke visujjhantā? Sekkhā’’ti.
为什么有学和无学能以念与正知前进等,以及贪等灭尽,这应当被相信?因为需要这样说,所以世尊说:具念的比丘应当游行。导师已经指出,世尊的一切身业都以智为先导等,在可意的诸欲中不贪染,在不可意的诸欲中心不浑浊,在一切法中是善的,具足念与正知者应当游行。为什么我们应当相信那从无贪染等开始的状态?因为需要这样问,所以说:在诸欲中……中略……应当游行。这个偈颂中的问答审察,也应当依照先前所说的单一所依等、法所依等的方式去理解。巴利
‘‘Kasmā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ satisampajaññena abhikkamanādibhāvo, rāgādīnañca khayabhāvo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tenāha bhagavā sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’ti. ‘‘Bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgama’ntiādinā (netti. 15) manāpikesu kāmesu nābhigijjhanabhāvo, amanāpikesu kāmesu manasā anāvilabhāvo, sabbadhammesu kusalabhāvo, satisampajaññena samannāgatassa paribbajanabhāvo ācariyena niddiṭṭho, so nābhigijjhanabhāvādiko kasmā amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tenāha kāmesu…pe… paribbaje’’ti. Imissā gāthāyapi pucchāvissajjanavicayo pubbe ekādhiṭṭhānādidhammādhiṭṭhānādivasena vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
在《辨别之说》的分别中,导师已经把《阿耆多经》取出来,对问与答的审查作了分别解说,我们也已经了解了。因为需要问“在诸经中,什么是问的审查与答的审查?”,为了说明应当依照《阿耆多经》中审问与审答的方法,在其他诸经中也把问答取出来,并运用审问与审答,所以说了“应当这样问,应当这样答”。而在注释书中——巴利
Vicayahāravibhaṅge ajitasuttaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvissajjanavicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamo suttantaresu pucchāvissajjanavicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ajitasutte pucchāvissajjanavicayanayānusārena suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanāni nīharitvā pucchāvicayavissajjanavicayā yojetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
到这里为止,大长老在分别解说“辨别之说”时,先依据《阿耆多经》说明了审问的辨别和审答的辨别;现在为了说明在其他经典中审问和审答的辨别方法,而这样说道:“应当这样问,应当这样答。”巴利
Ettāvatā ca mahāthero vicayahāraṃ vibhajanto ajitasuttavasena pucchāvicayaṃ, vissajjanavicayañca dassetvā idāni suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanavicayānaṃ nayaṃ dassento evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba’nti āhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 17) –
已说。其中,“如此”是指:按照《阿耆多经》等中所说的审问考察方式,把以提问形式展开的经文提取出来,再对审问考察加以分别;同样,按照《阿耆多经》等中所说的解答考察方式,在其他经中也把以解答形式展开的经文提取出来,再对解答考察加以分别。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti ajitasutte (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) vuttapucchāvicayānusārena pucchāvasena pavattasuttaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo vibhajetabbo, evaṃ ajitasutte (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) vuttavissajjanavicayānusārena suttantaresupi vissajjanavasena pavattasuttaṃ nīharitvā vissajjanavicayo vibhajetabbo.
老师和学生之间的问答考察,阿阇梨已经分别讲解过了,我们也已经了解。因为有人问“什么是经与随偈的考察”,所以说了“经的与随偈”等话。这里说的“经的”,是指所引出的经。“随偈”,是指属于其他经教的随偈。应当从义理和文句两方面使它们相符:也就是说,应当让那段随偈在义理上和文句上,与所要注释的经一致、相似;或者反过来说,应当让那段随偈与正在被注释的经,在经义和文句上相符。因为有人问“如果义理不相符,会有什么过失”,所以说了“义理偏离的文句,就成了废话”。又因为已经说过“义理不相符的过失我们已经了解了,但文句不相符又有什么过失呢”,所以进一步设问而说:“文句放置不当,它的义理也难以通达。”因此,正因为有这种过失,在结集时应当让随偈或经具备完整的义理与文句。巴利
Pucchāvissajjanavicayā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamo suttaanugītivicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘suttassa ca anugītī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suttassāti nīharitasuttassa. Anugītīti suttantaradesanāsaṅkhātā anugīti. Atthato ca byañjanato ca samānetabbāti tassā anugītiyā atthato, byañjanato ca saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttena samānā sadisī kātabbā, tasmiṃ vā saṃvaṇṇiyamānasutte anugīti suttatthato, byañjanato ca samānetabbā . ‘‘Atthato asamāne ko nāma doso āpajjeyyā’’ti pucchitabbattā atthāpagataṃ hi byañjanaṃ samphappalāpaṃ bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthato asamāne doso vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, byañjanato asamāne pana ko nāma doso āpajjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dunnikkhittassa padabyañjanassa atthopi dunnayo bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā sadosattā anugītiyā vā suttena atthabyañjanūpetaṃ saṅgāyitabbaṃ.
随偈的考察,阿阇梨已经分别解说,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问“什么是经的考察”,所以说了“与经”等话。其中,“与经”就是指已经择定的经。应当这样仔细考察:这部已择定的经,到底是世尊亲口说出的教言,还是结集者们所说的衔接语?应当这样仔细考察:这部已择定的经,是了义,还是不了义?应当这样仔细考察:这部已择定的经,属于杂染分,还是属于净习分?应当这样仔细考察:这部已择定的经,属于决择分,还是属于无学分?这样仔细考察之后,如果是亲口教言,那就应当择定它是“亲口教言”而受持;如果是无学经,那就应当择定它是“无学经”而受持。这就是“了解”的意思。巴利
Anugītivicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamo suttassa vicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā suttañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suttañcāti niddhāritasuttañca. ‘‘Idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nāma bhagavatā vuttaṃ āhaccavacanaṃ kiṃ, udāhu saṅgāyantehi vuttaṃ anusandhivacanaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nītatthaṃ kiṃ, udāhu neyyatthaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ kiṃ, udāhu vāsanābhāgiyaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kiṃ, udāhu asekkhabhāgiyaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pavicinitvā yadi āhaccavacanaṃ bhave, evaṃ sati ‘‘āhaccavacana’’nti niddhāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Yadi asekkhasuttaṃ bhave, evaṃ sati ‘‘asekkhasutta’’nti niddhāretvā gahetabbaṃ, ñātanti attho.
先把经考察一遍,再确定这部经里作为经义的一切谛,那么应该在什么地方来看它们呢?因为需要这样提问,所以先提出这个问题;接着为了说明“应该在这个地方看”,就说“这部经的一切……在什么地方……结尾”。这里说的“这部经”,就是指为了考察而选定的那部经。因为这部经的经义离不开四谛,所以一切谛都应该在这部经的开头、中间、结尾处来看,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Suttaṃ pavicinitvā suttassa atthabhūtāni sabbāni saccāni niddhāretvā kattha padese passitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā imasmiṃ padese passitabbānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘kuhiṃ imassa suttassa sabbāni…pe… pariyosāne’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha imassa suttassāti yaṃ suttaṃ vicinituṃ niddhāritaṃ, imassa suttassa catusaccavinimuttassa suttatthassa abhāvato sabbāni saccāni tasseva suttassa ādimajjhapariyosāne passitabbānīti attho.
为了总结前面所说的对经的考察,他说了“应当这样考察经”。因为要说“像上面所说的提问等是否可考察,不是我们凭自己就能知道、就能相信的”,所以他说了“因此他说……随偈”。在这里,由于像上面所说的提问等具有可考察的性质,具寿马哈咖咤那说了“所问的……随偈”等那些话;这句话的意思就是:通过他所说的那些话,你们应当知道或相信其可考察的性质。巴利
Yathāvuttaṃ suttavicayaṃ nigamento ‘‘evaṃ suttaṃ pavicetabba’’nti āha. ‘‘Na yathāvuttapucchādīnaṃ pavicetabbabhāvo amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tenāha…pe… anugītī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tena yathāvuttapucchādīnaṃ vicetabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘yaṃ pucchitañca…pe… anugītī’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vicetabbabhāvo tumhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbovāti vuttaṃ hoti.
有人问:“像上面所说的那种考察,作为摄,是就它本身已经圆满,还是另外还有别的考察需要确定之后再运用呢?”因为这样问,所以说“考察摄已经运用”。其中,提问考察、解答考察、前后考察、随偈考察、经考察,都已经按它们各自的样子分别说明了;依靠这些,其余的味等考察也应当根据情况确定之后,再运用、连接起来,这就是这里的意趣。巴利
‘‘Yathāvuttappakāro ca vicayo hāro paripuṇṇo kiṃ, udāhu aññopi niddhāretvā yojetabbo atthi ki’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘niyutto vicayo hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchāvicayavissajjanavicayapubbāparavicayaanugītivicayasuttavicayā sarūpato vibhattā, tehi avaseso assādādivicayopi yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yutto yuñjitabboti adhippāyo.
就这样,在考察摄的分别中,是顺应自己的智力而写成的。巴利
Iti vicayahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当依据注疏和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
3. 合理理趣分别的阐释巴利
3. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
18 18. 通过种种属于注释特相的思择理趣分别,句问等已被逐一审察;这个属于注释特相的思择理趣分别就圆满了。由于应当问“什么是合理理趣分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是合理理趣”等话。那里的“其中”,是在已指出的十六种理趣当中,问哪一种注释特相是合理理趣、合理理趣分别。对于“一切理趣”等开示,现在所说的“这是合理理趣”等广释注释特相,应当理解为就叫合理理趣分别。因此说“其中,什么是合理理趣等,就是合理理趣分别”(《导论注》18)。这合理理趣,是问:究竟以合理或不合理的方式,把什么样的经义连接起来?也就是应当连接的经义。然而经义有两种:以不如实的方式被把握的,和以如实的方式被把握的。其中,只有以不如实方式被把握的义,才需要通过真实地理趣抉择来连接;另一种则只需如实陈述就可以连接。又因为这种名为“理趣寻求”的注释,若没有大教示就不可能成立,所以在分别合理理趣时,为了首先指出合理理趣的特征,就说了“四大教示”等。其中,“大教示”是指以佛陀等大者为依据而说出的根据,或者是指法的重大依据、安立处。被指示的依据叫“教示”;佛陀是这一根据的教示,所以叫“佛陀教示”。其余几种也应依此理解。意思是说:说了“我于佛前亲闻此经”之后所引出的文本,若与经和律相合,就是法;若不相合,就是非法——这是判定的根据,就叫大教示。又说“我于佛前亲闻,我于僧前亲闻,我于众多长老前亲闻,我于一长老前亲闻”,这样说了之后所引出的文本中,那些文句和义句,应当让它们进入世尊所说的经中,应当让它们与律中调伏贪等的方式相合、相应,应当依法的自性把它们放置、纳入。如果与经义、律义和法性都不相违背,那么在这种情况下,判定者就应当说“你所引出的文句是合理的”,然后接受它们,这就是这里的意趣。巴利
18. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vicayahāravibhaṅgena padapañhādayo vicitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vicayahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo yuttihāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihāro yuttihāravibhaṅgoti pucchi. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ hārāna’’ntiādiniddesassa idāni vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ yuttihāro’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihārotiādi yuttihāravibhaṅgo’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 18). Ayaṃ yuttihāro kiṃ nāma suttatthaṃ yuttāyuttivasena yojayatīti yuñjitabbaṃ suttatthaṃ pucchati. Suttattho pana duvidho atathākārena gayhamāno, tathākārena gayhamāno atthoti. Tattha atathākārena gayhamānova attho yāthāvato yuttiniddhāraṇena yojetabbo, itaro pana bhūtakathanamattena yojetabbo. Yasmā panāyaṃ yuttigavesanā nāma saṃvaṇṇanā mahāpadesehi vinā na sambhavati, tasmā yuttihāraṃ vibhajanto tassa yuttihārassa lakkhaṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ upadisituṃ ‘‘cattāro mahāpadesā’’tiādimāha. Tattha mahāpadesāti mahante buddhādayo apadisitvā vuttāni kāraṇāni, mahantāni vā dhammassa apadesāni patiṭṭhānāni. Apadisīyateti apadeso, buddho apadeso etassa kāraṇassāti buddhāpadeso. Sesesupi eseva nayo netabbo. ‘‘Buddhassa sammukhā etaṃ suttaṃ mayā suta’’nti vatvā ābhatassa ganthassa suttavinayehi saṃsandanaṃ dhammo, asaṃsandanaṃ adhammoti vinicchayakāraṇaṃ mahāpadesoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Buddhassa sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, saṅghassa sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, sambahulattherānaṃ sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, ekattherassa sammukhā mayā ābhata’’nti vatvā ābhatassa ganthassa yāni byañjanapadaatthapadāni santi, tāni padabyañjanāni bhagavatā desite sutte otarayitabbāni anuppavesitāni, vinaye rāgādivinaye sandassayitabbāni saṃsandetabbāni. Dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbāni pakkhipitabbāni. Yadi suttatthena, vinayatthena, dhammatāya ca aviruddhāni honti, evaṃ sati tava ābhatapadabyañjanāni yuttānīti vinicchayantehi vatvā gahetabbānīti adhippāyo.
老师已经说过:这些内容应当被导入经、律、法性之中,应当被对照验证,应当被安放其中。因为需要说明“在哪里导入经中,在哪里导入律中,在哪里导入法性中”,所以接着说了“在哪一部经中”等等。
其中,“在四圣谛中”,就是指在开示四圣谛的那些经中。贪依靠不净观等方法而被灭除、被止息,所以叫“贪的调伏”。那是什么呢?就是不净相等所缘。一个人拥有这个,所以说他有“贪的调伏”。那又是什么呢?就是开示不净相等内容的某一部具体经典。在“嗔的调伏”等等说法中,也按同样的道理理解。
所谓“缘起”,是指舍弃常见和断见之后,通过开示一性理趣等内容,来说明无明、行等这些具有各自本性的法,是缘以及缘所生之法。因此说:“应当安放在哪一种法性中?在缘起中。”巴利
Suttavinayadhammatāsu otarayitabbāni sandassayitabbāni upanikkhipitabbānīti ācariyena vuttāni, ‘‘kattha sutte, kattha vinaye, kattha dhammatāya’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘katamasmiṃ sutte’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha catūsu ariyasaccesūti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ dassanakesu suttesu. Rāgo vinassati vūpasamati etena asubhādināti rāgavinayaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Asubhādinimittaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti rāgavinayo, ko so? Asubhādinimittadassanako suttantaviseso. Esa nayo dosavinayotiādīsupi. Paṭiccasamuppādo nāma sassatadiṭṭhiucchedadiṭṭhiṃ vivajjetvā ekattanayādīnaṃ dīpanena avijjādisaṅkhārādisabhāvadhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvadīpakoti vuttaṃ ‘‘katamissaṃ dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbāni? Paṭiccasamuppāde’’ti.
因为要回答“当入、现对、不违于经等时,不生起什么?”所以说了“于四”等。其中,先说“我从佛等面前带来”,如果所带典籍入于四圣谛,那么这样一来,所带典籍就不生起诸漏。如果现对于贪等烦恼的调伏,那么这样一来,所带典籍就不生起诸漏。如果不违于法性,那么这样一来,所带典籍就不生起诸漏——应当这样理解其义。巴利
‘‘Suttādīsu avatarante sandissante avilomente kiṃ na janetī’’ti vattabbato ‘‘catūsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘buddhādīnaṃ sammukhā mayā ābhata’’nti vatvā ābhatagantho catūsu ariyasaccesu yadi avatarati, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janeti. Rāgādikilesavinaye yadi sandissati, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janeti. Dhammatañca yadi na vilometi, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janetīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
有人问:为什么在“理趣分别”里要引用四大教法?因为需要说明这一点,所以经文接着说“以四大教法”等等。在这里,凡是所引来的经典中,任何一种义理或任何一种法,只要与四大教法相合,就应该把它收进所要解释的经里。无论以什么理由与四大教法相合,那个理由也应该以注释的方式收进所要解释的经里。无论以什么方式与四大教法相合,那种方式也应该以注释的方式收进所要解释的经里。为了这样收录,才引用了四大教法,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Kimatthaṃ yuttihāravibhaṅge cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘catūhi mahāpadesehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ābhataganthe yaṃ yaṃ atthajātaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ dhammajātaṃ vā catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, taṃ taṃ atthajātaṃ vā taṃ taṃ dhammajātaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbaṃ. Yena yena kāraṇena ca catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvasena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā pakārena catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, so so pakāro saṃvaṇṇanāvasena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbo. Evaṃ gāhaṇatthaṃ cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatāti attho.
19 阿阇梨说:与四大教示相合、不相违背的任何一类义理,都应当采纳。因为需要说明“在哪里、由谁来做理趣的抉择”,所以说了“由被提问问题的人”等等。意思是,应该由被提问问题的人,在问题中做理趣的抉择。其中,“问题”指应当被问的自性法。“由被问者”指有能力解答的智者。“在问题中”指以提问方式呈现的文句。应当先按句为单位,彻底审察有多少句,再用合理的理趣去审思、去探究。这里所说的“所有句”,是指所问文句中的一切句,如果它们宣说的是同一个义理,那么就依这个义理而算作一个问题。其余情况中亦是此理。因此说“因为想要了知那同一义理”。因为需要问“怎样审思”,所以说了“如果所有”等巴利
19. Catūhi mahāpadesehi yuttaṃ aviruddhaṃ taṃ taṃ atthajātaṃ gahetabbanti ācariyena vuttaṃ, ‘‘kattha kena yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ kātabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchitenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañhe pañhaṃ pucchitena puggalena yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ kātabbanti. Tattha pañhanti pañhitabbaṃ sabhāvadhammaṃ. Pucchitenāti vissajjetuṃ samatthena paṇḍitapuggalena. Pañheti pucchāvasena pavattapāṭhe. Padāni kati kittakāni hontīti padaso paṭhamaṃ pariyogāhitabbaṃ yuttihārena vicetabbaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ vicetabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yadi sabbānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbāni padānīti pucchitapāṭhe niravasesāni padāni ekaṃ samānaṃ atthaṃ yadi abhivadanti, evaṃ sati atthavasena eko pañho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tadatthassekassa ñātuṃ icchitattā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 19).
从义理的角度说,这是同一类的问题。审察思惟的人应当了知它、坚定地了知它。因为要问“了知的方式是什么”,为了显示这个了知的方式,就说了“这些法是什么”等等。在这里,“那些应当被解释的教理之法,是义理不同,还是文句不同?或者这些教理之法是义理为一,只是文句有差异呢?”——应当这样依理推究而了知,这就是文句的连结。因为要问“如所说的那个问题是什么”,为了显示如所说的那个问题的一部分,就问“如同什么”,然后说了“如同那……”等等。巴利
Ekanti atthavasena ekavidhaṃ pañhaṃ. Upaparikkhamānena puggalena aññātabbaṃ daḷhaṃ jānitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ko ājānanākāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ājānanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘kiṃ ime dhammā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ye hi pariyattidhammā saṃvaṇṇetabbā, ime pariyattidhammā nānatthā honti kiṃ, nānābyañjanā honti kiṃ, udāhu imesaṃ pariyattidhammānaṃ eko attho hoti, byañjanameva nānaṃ hoti ki’’nti yuttito vicetvā aññātabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Yathāvutto pañho kiṃ bhave’’ti pucchitabbattā yathāvuttaṃ pañhaṃ ekadesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yathā sā’’tiādimāha.
在那首提问偈颂里,应当这样连接理解:就像盗贼被刽子手砍杀一样,众生世间恒常被什么法所砍杀?就像藤蔓缠绕、覆盖住它所依附的树一样,众生世间恒常被什么法所缠绕、覆盖?就像被涂了毒的利箭射入、穿透一样,众生世间恒常被什么箭射入、穿透?众生世间恒常被什么熏得如烟一般、被什么烧灼?巴利
Tassaṃ pucchāgāthāyaṃ – coraghātakena manussena coro abbhāhato viya kena dhammena sattaloko sadā abbhāhato, māluvalatāya attano nissitarukkho parivārito ajjhotthaṭo viya kena dhammena sattaloko sadā parivārito ajjhotthaṭo, visappītakhurappena sallena otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho viya kena sallena sattaloko sadā otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho, kissa kena kāraṇena sattaloko sadā dhūpāyito santāpitoti yojanā.
因为要回答“这个提问偈颂里有多少个词句”,所以说了“这些”等话。其中,所问到的词句有四个。因为要回答“有多少个问题”,所以说了“那三个问题”。巴利
‘‘Imāya pucchāgāthāya kittakāni padānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchitānīti pucchitatthāni padāni cattāri honti. ‘‘Kittakā pañhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘te tayo pañhā’’ti vuttaṃ.
世尊确实是为那位天神作解答,因此,从这一解答就可以知道是“三个问题”。由于应当问“哪一首是解答偈”,所以说——巴利
Bhagavā devatāya hi yasmā vissajjeti, iti tasmā vissajjanato ‘‘tayopañhā’’ti viññāyati. ‘‘Katamā vissajjanagāthā’’ti pucchitabbattā –
世间被死亡击倒,又被衰老团团围住;
为渴爱之箭所贯穿,恒为贪欲之烟所熏。’巴利
‘‘Maccunābbhāhato loko, jarāya parivārito; Taṇhāsallena otiṇṇo, icchādhūpāyito sadā’’ti. –
已宣说。在那首解答偈中,应当这样连接理解:就像盗贼被刽子手打得半死,众生世间也始终被死亡打击;就像树木被缠绕自己的蔓藤团团覆盖,众生世间也始终被衰老缠绕覆盖;就像被涂了毒的利箭射入穿透,众生世间也始终被渴爱之箭射入穿透;众生世间始终被欲望熏得烟雾弥漫、烧灼不堪。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ – coraghātakena manussena coro abbhāhato viya maccunā sattaloko sadā abbhāhato, māluvalatāya attano nissitarukkho parivārito ajjhotthaṭo viya jarāya sattaloko sadā parivārito ajjhotthaṭo, visappītakhurappena sallena otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho viya taṇhāsallena sattaloko sadā otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho, icchāya sattaloko sadā dhūpāyito santāpitoti yojanā.
20 因为有人问“什么是死,什么是老”,所以说了“其中,老”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在那个解答偈里。第二句里说的老,和第一句里说的死,这两者是有为的五蕴聚的有为相;离开有为的五蕴聚,就不能单独找到它们,这就是这段话的意思。因为要说明“老和死这两种有为相该怎么区分了知”,所以说了“于老中,住立者的变异”等话。这里,“于老中,住立者的变异”是指安住着的蕴相续的变异,这叫作明显的、粗显的老,不是刹那安住的老。“死是灭尽”,是指世俗共许的死,也就是死没而已,不是刹那死,也不是断灭死。因此说:“生起可了知,灭尽可了知,安住者的变异可了知。”巴利
20. ‘‘Katamaṃ maccu, katamā jarā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha jarā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ. Dutiyapade vuttā jarā ca paṭhamapade vuttaṃ maraṇañca imāni dve saṅkhatassa khandhapañcakassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni honti, saṅkhataṃ khandhapañcakaṃ muñcitvā visuṃ na upalabbhatīti attho. ‘‘Saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ jarāmaraṇānaṃ kathaṃ bhedo jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘jarāyaṃ ṭhitassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattanti ṭhitassa khandhappabandhassa yaṃ aññathattaṃ, ayaṃ pākaṭajarā nāma, na khaṇaṭṭhitijarā. Maraṇaṃ vayoti sammutimaraṇaṃ cutiyeva hoti, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, na samucchedamaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.38; a. ni. 3.47; kathā. 214).
如果死亡只是针对还活着的人,那么老和死之间的差别就说不通了;如果说不通,那“那三个问题”这个说法本身也就说不通了。正因为要这样说明,才说了“其中,老与……”等话。这里说的“其中”,是指在那一首解答偈里所说的老和所说的死,从意义上讲,两者的差别是说得通的。巴利
Yadi ṭhitasseva maraṇaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ yuttaṃ na siyā, ayutte sati ‘‘te tayo pañhā’’ti vacanampi ayuttamevāti vattabbato ‘‘tattha jarāya cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ vuttāya jarāya ca vuttassa maraṇassa ca atthato nānattaṃ yuttaṃ.
因为要说明“凭什么道理说是相应的,凭什么道理应当接受老与死的差别”,所以接着说了“即使还在母胎里的众生也确实会死”。既然连还没到衰老阶段的、还在母胎里的众生都会死,那就应当接受老与死是有差别的。因为要说明“即使还在母胎里的众生也可能已经衰老”,所以接着说了“但他们并不会变老”。即使已经到了衰老的阶段,由于衰老并不明显,也就是还没到明显衰老的地步就死了;这样一来,这里所说的,就是没有明显衰老的死亡确实可能发生,因此应当知道:衰老是一回事,死亡是另一回事。因为要说明“并不是只有还在母胎里的众生才会在还没到明显衰老时就死去,其他众生也一样”,所以接着说了“而且诸天也会死”。因为要说明“诸天由于存在的时间很长,也可能已经衰老”,所以接着说了“但他们的身体并不会衰老”。因为要说明“老与死有差别的原因并不只是这些”,还要显示另有原因,所以接着说了“能对治……”等话。其中,明显的衰老是可以对治的,而死亡却无法对治;凭这个道理,也应当接受老与死是有差别的,这就是这里的意思。有人责难说:“为什么说死亡无法对治?难道通过修习神足通、达到自在之后,连死亡也不能对治吗?”考虑到这个责难,所以接着说了“除了具神通者的神通境界之外”。巴利
‘‘Kena kāraṇena yuttaṃ, kathaṃ kāraṇena nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘gabbhagatāpi hi mīyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jaraṃ appattā gabbhagatāpi sattā hi yasmā mīyanti, tasmā nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. ‘‘Gabbhagatāpi jarappattā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘na ca te jiṇṇā bhavantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jarappattāpi ajiṇṇattā jiṇṇajaraṃ appattāva mīyanti, evaṃ idhādhippetassa jiṇṇajarāvirahitassa maraṇassa sambhavato aññā jarā, aññaṃ maraṇanti ñātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Na gabbhagatānaṃyeva jiṇṇajaraṃ appattaṃ maraṇaṃ atthi, aññesampi atthī’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘atthi ca devānaṃ maraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Devāpi cirakālasambhavato jaraṃ pattā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘na ca tesaṃ sarīrāni jīrantī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānatte kāraṇaṃ ettakamevā’’ti vattabbattā aññampi atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sakkate vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jiṇṇajarāya paṭikammaṃ kātuṃ sakkateva, maraṇassa pana paṭikammassa kātuṃ na sakkateva, imināpi kāraṇena jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbamevāti attho. ‘‘Na sakkate maraṇassa paṭikammaṃ kātu’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu iddhipādabhāvanāya vasībhāve sati sakkā maraṇassāpi paṭikammaṃ kātunti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘aññatreva iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayā’’ti vuttaṃ.
老师已经开示了老和死是彼此不同的,我们也已经知道了。既然接着要说“那么,渴爱和老、死怎么会是不同的呢”,为了说明渴爱跟它们的不同,就说了“然而,即使……”等话。因为即使没有渴爱,离贪的人也一样会老、会死,这是可以见到的,所以应当承认渴爱和老、死是不同的。巴利
Jarāmaraṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ nānābhāvo ācariyena dassito, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ pana taṇhāya jarāmaraṇehi nānābhāvo’’ti vattabbato tehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ panāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhāya avijjamānāyapi jīrantāpi mīyantāpi vītarāgā yasmā dissanti, tasmā taṇhāya jarāmaraṇehi nānābhāvo sampaṭicchitabbo.
有人会说:“渴爱确实具有衰老和坏灭的特征。”如果他们认为渴爱跟老死没有区别,那会有什么过失呢?为了指出这个过失,所以说了“如果……”等话。老死以衰老、坏灭为特征,这是显而易见的;同样,如果渴爱也以衰老、坏灭为特征而显而易见,那么照这样说,连那些正值青春年华的所有青年也都应该没有渴爱了,可他们并非没有渴爱,所以必须承认两者是不同的。为了显示还会引出别的过失,又说了“又如渴爱是苦的……”等话。其中,如果老死跟渴爱没有区别,那么就像渴爱(有爱)是苦的起因一样,老死也应当成为苦的起因。正因为老死并不是苦的起因,所以应当知道老死跟渴爱是不同的。巴利
‘‘Taṇhāya jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇaṃ atthīti tehi taṇhāya anaññatte ko nāma doso siyā’’ti vattabbato dosaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ yathā yena jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇena pākaṭaṃ, evaṃ jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇena taṇhāpi pākaṭā. Yadi ca siyā; evaṃ sante yobbanaṭṭhāpi sabbe māṇavā vigatataṇhā siyuṃ, na ca vigatataṇhā, tasmā nānābhāvo sampaṭicchitabbo. Tato aññopi doso āpajjeyyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā ca taṇhā dukkhassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jarāmaraṇānaṃ taṇhāya anaññatte sati taṇhāya bhavataṇhāya dukkhasamudayo hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi dukkhasamudayo siyā. Yasmā na jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasamudayo, tasmā jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
为了说明:如果它们之间没有差别,就会有这样的过失,所以说了“又如渴爱是道所断……”等话。其中,如果它们之间没有差别,那么就像渴爱是道所断的一样,老死也应该是道所断。然而,就像老死不是道所断一样,渴爱也不应该是道所断;但事实并非如此,因为渴爱是应当断除的,老死不是应当断除的。因此也应当知道,老死与渴爱是不同的。巴利
Tehi tāya anaññatte sati evampi doso āpajjeyyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā ca taṇhā maggavajjhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tehi tāya anaññatte sati yathā taṇhā maggavajjhā hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi maggavajjhaṃ siyā. Yathā jarāmaraṇaṃ maggavajjhaṃ na hoti, evaṃ taṇhāpi maggavajjhā na siyā, tathā ca na hoti pahātabbāpahātabbabhāvato, tasmāpi jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
既然“如果……”等语所说的理证和理由本身就已经说明,应当从老死与渴爱中探求差别,那么为了表明也应当从其他理由来探求,所以说了“以此理证……”等语。其中,“以此理证”是指以“如果……”等语所说的这种理证、这种理由。“以种种理由”的意思是:应当以种种作为理由的理证,从老死与渴爱中探求差别。为什么说“应以种种理由来探求”呢?难道不是已经从理证和意义上见到了差别吗?考虑到这一问难,便说了“如果也见到……”等语。其中,如果从理证所成立的意义上,也见到了老死与渴爱的差别,那么从文句上也同样应当探求差别,这就是其含义。巴利
‘‘Yadi cātiādinā vuttāya yuttiyā upapattiyā eva jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya aññattaṃ gavesitabba’’nti vattabbattā aññehipi kāraṇehi gavesitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘imāya yuttiyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāya yuttiyāti yā yutti ‘‘yadi cā’’tiādinā vuttāya imāya yuttiyā upapattiyā. Aññamaññehi kāraṇehi aññehi aññehi kāraṇabhūtehi upapattīhi jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya aññattaṃ gavesitabbanti attho. ‘‘Aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu yuttiyā, atthato ca aññattaṃ sandissatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘yadi ca sandissatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yuttisamāruḷhaṃ atthato ca maraṇehi taṇhāya ca aññattaṃ yadi ca sandissati, byañjanatopi aññattaṃ gavesitabbamevāti attho.
因为需要说明“如何从文句上探求差别”,所以说了“箭……”等话。其中,以“箭”或“烟熏”这两种文句所说的这些名为欲、渴爱的法,从意义上说,同一、一致是合理的,并非不同。不以“箭”或“烟熏”这两种文句所说的老死与渴爱,同一则不合理。为了阐明这个道理,说了“因为不……”等话。其中,欲与渴爱从意义上说,不同不合理,只有同一才合理,这就是它们的关联。因为欲与渴爱有老、坏的生起,所以老死与渴爱可能同一。由于需要说明“为何不同是合理的”,所以说了“当渴爱的意图……”等话。其中,当渴爱的意图未满足时,在九种嗔恨事中,忿怒会生起,怨恨也会生起。当老死未满足时,在九种嗔恨事中,忿怒不会生起,怨恨也不会生起。因此,应当知道,以这个理证,老与死和渴爱从意义上说,不同确实是合理的。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ byañjanato aññattaṃ gavesitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘salloti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sallo’’ti vā ‘‘dhūpāyana’’nti vā dvīhi byañjanehi vuccamānānaṃ imesaṃ icchātaṇhāsaṅkhātānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthato ekattaṃ samānattaṃ yujjati, na aññattaṃ. ‘‘Sallo’’ti vā ‘‘dhūpāyana’’nti vā dvīhi byañjanehi avuccamānānaṃ jarāmaraṇānaṃ taṇhāya ekattaṃ na yujjati. Tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha icchāya ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattaṃ na yujjati, ekattameva yujjatīti yojanā. Icchāya ca taṇhāya ca jīraṇabhijjanasambhavato jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya ekattaṃ siyā, ‘‘kasmā aññattaṃ yutta’’nti vattabbato ‘‘taṇhāya adhippāye’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhāya adhippāye aparipūramāne navasu āghātavatthūsu kodho ca uppajjati, upanāho ca uppajjati. Jarāmaraṇesu aparipūramānesu navasu āghātavatthūsu kodho ca na uppajjati, upanāho ca na uppajjati. Iti imāya yuttiyā jarāya ca maraṇassa ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattaṃ yujjatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如果“欲求”和“渴爱”在意义上确实是同一的,那么既然如此,世尊为什么在“世间被死神所袭”等偈颂中,用两种方式说“被渴爱之箭所贯穿,常被欲求之烟所熏”呢?为了回应这个责难,说了“然而,世尊所说的这个……”等话。其中,以“欲求”和“渴爱”这两个名称所说的这个言说,是世尊依据外在的、可欲可求的事物——即色等所缘的种种差别——而以“欲求”和“渴爱”两个名称来说的,是作为言说而作的,因此同一才是合理的,并非不同,应知这就是其含义。巴利
Yadi icchā taṇhāya atthato ekattaṃ yuttaṃ, evaṃ sati kasmā bhagavatā ‘‘maccunābbhāhato loko’’tiādigāthāyaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsallena otiṇṇo, icchādhūpāyito sadā’’ti dvidhā vuttāti codanaṃ pariharanto ‘‘yaṃ panidaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘icchā’’tipi ‘‘taṇhā’’tipi dvīhi nāmehi yaṃ panidaṃ abhilapitaṃ yaṃ panidaṃ abhilapanaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ abhilapanaṃ bhagavatā bāhirānaṃ icchitabbatasitabbānaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādiārammaṇānaṃ bhedānaṃ vasena ‘‘icchā’’tipi ‘‘taṇhā’’tipi dvīhi nāmehi abhilapitaṃ abhilapanavasena katanti ekattaṃ yuttameva, na nānattanti attho daṭṭhabbo.
有人会说:“欲、渴爱等虽然按名称分成两种,凭什么相信它们在本质上是同一个?”所以接着说了“一切……”等话。这里的意思是:一切欲等渴爱虽然按不同名称而有种种区分,但都以执取为共同特征,因此即使名称不同,也应当相信它们以同一特征而成为同一个,应这样理解。因为有人会问:“怎么合理呢?”所以说了“如同一切……”等话。这里的意思是:就像依木柴火、草火等而分出的种种火,虽然种类很多,但都以热性为共同特征;同样,这些也都以执取为共同特征,应这样连接理解。为了说明一切火依其所依之物而有种种名称,从它们本身的样子来显示,所以说了“又……”等话。这段话的意思很清楚。应这样连接理解:渴爱是依其所缘对象而被世尊用种种不同名称来说的,火则是依其所依之物而被用种种不同名称来说的。巴利
‘‘Nāmavasena dvidhā vuttānaṃ icchātaṇhādīnaṃ kena ekattaṃ yuttanti saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘sabbāhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nānānāmavasena pabhedā sabbā icchādikā taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇā hi yasmā yuttā, tasmā nāmavasena bhinnānampi ekalakkhaṇena ekattaṃ yuttanti saddahitabbanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Kimiva yutta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā sabbo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kaṭṭhaggiādivasena aneko sabboaggi uṇhattalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇo yathā, evaṃ ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇāti yojanā. Sabbassa aggino upādānavasena anekāni nāmāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho pākaṭo. Ārammaṇavasena taṇhā aññehi aññehi nāmehi bhagavatā abhilapitā, upādānavasena aggi aññehi aññehi nāmehi abhilapitoti yojanā kātabbā.
在回答偈中,以其中出现的名称,难道渴爱仅仅被称说了吗?由于这是应当问的,为了说明它以许多名称被称说,所以说了“欲求”等这一段。其中,应当被欲求的种种对象,也就是色等所缘,众生通过它来欲求,所以叫欲求。通过它来渴求,所以叫渴爱。像箭一样刺入、穿透、扩散开来,所以叫箭;或者它带来热恼,所以叫箭;或者它使热恼生起,所以叫箭。它熏烧、热恼、遍烧,所以叫熏烧。它像急流一样流动、牵引、夺走,所以叫流;或者它流动、刺入,所以叫流。它扩散开来,所以叫扩散。以喜的方式润泽,所以叫润泽。在种种趣中产生疲劳,所以叫疲劳。众生通过它来认为色等所缘,所以叫认为。它系缚于有,所以叫系缚。它被希望、被渴求,所以叫希望;或者它希望、渴求,所以叫希望。它被渴望,所以叫渴望;或者它渴望所缘的滋味,所以叫渴望。它被欢喜,所以叫欢喜;或者它欢喜,所以叫欢喜。详细内容应依据注疏《导论注》第20节来了知。巴利
‘‘Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ āgatanāmehi eva taṇhā abhilapitā’’ti pucchitabbattā anekehi nāmehi abhilapitāti dassetuṃ ‘‘icchāitipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha icchitabbāni atthāni rūpādīni ārammaṇāni sattā icchanti etāyāti icchā. Tasanti etāyāti taṇhā. Sallati pavisati visappītaṃ sallaṃ viyāti sallā, santāpaṃ lāti ādadātīti vā sallā, santāpaṃ lāti pavattetīti vā sallā. Dhūpāyati santāpeti paridahatīti dhūpāyanā. Sarati ākaḍḍhati avaharati sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā, sarati sallatīti vā saritā. Visaratīti visattikā. Pītivasena sinehatīti sineho. Tāsu tāsu gatīsu kilamathaṃ uppādetīti kilamatho. Sattā rūpādiārammaṇāni maññanti etāyāti maññanā. Bhavaṃ bandhatīti bandho. Āsīyate patthīyateti āsā. Āsiyati patthetīti vā āsā. Pipāsīyateti pipāsā, ārammaṇarasaṃ pipāsatīti vā pipāsā. Abhinandīyateti abhinandanā, abhinandatīti vā abhinandanā. Vitthārato aṭṭhakathāvasena (netti. aṭṭha. 20) veditabbo.
因为必须说“渴爱以欲求等种种方式被称说,凭什么能让人信受?”所以才说了“如于同义词”等话。在同义词引导的分别中,“希望与欲……同义词”(《导论》37)——渴爱以某种方式被说,就应当信受那以同样方式被说的渴爱,是以欲求等种种方式被称说。因为必须说“即使导师在同义词分别中说过,若世尊未曾说,凭什么能让人信受?”所以才说了“如世尊所说”等话。世尊以某种方式说了“于诸色有彼”等语,就应当依那以同样方式说出的那句话而信受。这样才讲得通。也就是说,应当这样理解:按上面所说的道理,欲与渴爱在意义上是一回事,老、死与渴爱在意义上则各不相同,所以“三问”那句话是讲得通的。巴利
‘‘Taṇhāya icchādippakāravasena ālapitabhāvo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā ca vevacane’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vevacanahāravibhaṅge ‘‘āsā ca pīhā…pe… vevacana’’nti (netti. 37) yā taṇhā yathā yena pakārena vuttā, tathā tena pakārena vuttāya taṇhāya icchādippakāravasena ālapitabhāvo saddahitabbo. ‘‘Vevacanavibhaṅge ācariyena vuttopi bhagavatā avutte kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena bhagavā ‘‘rūpe tissā’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanamāha, tathā tena pakārena vuttena tena vacanena saddahitabbo vāti. Evaṃ yujjatīti evaṃ vuttanayena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato ekattā , jarāya ca maraṇassa ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattā ca ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vacanaṃ yujjatīti attho gahetabbo.
21 第21颂“世间被什么所害”等偈颂里提出了三个问题,导师已经分别解说了三问成立的道理,我们也已经了解。由于还需要说明“用其他方式又该怎么理解这个道理”,为了显示也应当用其他方式去寻求道理,所以接着说了“一切苦的现行”等话。其中,一切苦的现行以欲渴和行作为根本,这是说得通的;一切厌离的现行以欲渴和资具作为根本,就说不通了。从词义上说,苦的现行、苦的生起,就是苦的现行;以欲渴为缘而生起的行,是它的根本,所以叫欲渴行之根。厌离的现行、厌离的生起,就是厌离的现行;作为欲渴之资具的欲,是它的根本,所以叫欲渴资具之根。在这里,被称为不乐的厌倦,也就是厌离,若说它以欲渴资具为根本,是说得通的;但由智慧所生的厌离若说以欲渴资具为根本,就说不通了。因此说:并非一切厌离的现行都以欲渴资具为根本,所以说它说不通。巴利
21. ‘‘Kenassubbhāhato lokotiādigāthāya tayo pañhā vuttā’’ti pañhattayabhāve yutti ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā. ‘‘Tato aññehi pakārehi yutti kathaṃ ñātabbā’’ti vattabbabhāvato aññehi pakārehipi yuttigavesanaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbo dukkhūpacāro’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbo dukkhūpacāro kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlakoti yujjati, sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na yujjati. Vacanatthato pana dukkhassa upacāro pavattīti dukkhūpacāro. Kāmataṇhāpaccayā pavatto saṅkhāro mūlaṃ etassāti kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlako. Nibbidāya upacāro pavattīti nibbidūpacāro. Kāmataṇhāya parikkhārabhūto vatthukāmo mūlaṃ etassāti kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti. Tattha anabhiratisaṅkhātā ukkaṇṭhā nibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā yujjati, ñāṇanibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā na yujjati, tasmā sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na pana yujjatīti vuttaṃ.
有人会说:在三问的存在以及苦的现行和厌离的现行中,导师已经分别说明的道理,难道只应当观察这一种道理,还是也应当依这一道理去寻求其他道理?为了指出这个方法,所以说了“依此……”等话。这里说的是:在三问的存在以及苦的现行和厌离的现行中,我所分别说明的道理,应当随顺这一道理,在各种巴利经文段落里,也运用其他种种理据去寻求道理。巴利
‘‘Pañhattayabhāve ceva dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāre ca yā yutti ācariyena vibhattā, sāva yutti sallakkhetabbā kiṃ, udāhu imāya yuttiyā aññāpi yutti gavesitabbā ki’’nti vattabbato nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imāyā’’tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pañhattayabhāve ceva dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāre ca yā yutti mayā vibhattā, imāya yuttiyā anusārena aññamaññehi kāraṇehi tesu tesu pāḷippadesesu yuttipi gavesitabbāti.
应当说:“这个方法的展示是简略的,无法详尽地加以探究。”因此,为了把这种方法的展示展开来详细分别说明,便开始了“正如世尊……”这一段。
由于不净是可厌离的,贪的生起就不合理,所以为贪行者说不净法来对治贪,是合理的。由于慈心是嗔的对治,为嗔行者说慈法来对治嗔,是合理的。由于缘起是智慧的领域,为痴行者说缘起法来对治痴,是合理的。
又因为应当说“对贪行者来说,慈等法也可能合理,因为它遍及一切众生”,所以才说了“如果世尊……”等。这是指烦恼炽盛的贪行者:如果对那样的人说慈心解脱,那么因为依慈也会生起贪,所以说法就不合理了。或者,如果为他说乐行道,那么由于贪行者适合苦行道,所以说法也不合理。又或者,如果为他说以观为前导的断,那么由于贪行者舍弃不净随观而做以观为前导的断是难以做到的,所以说法也不合理。这段文句就是这样连接起来的。巴利
‘‘Idaṃ nayadassanaṃ saṃkhittaṃ, na sakkā vitthārato gavesitu’’nti vattabbato taṃ nayadassanaṃ vitthārato vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hi bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Asubhassa jigucchanīyabhāvato rāguppādo na yutto, tasmā rāgacaritassa puggalassa asubhadesanā rāgavinayāya yuttā. Mettāya dosapaṭipakkhattā dosacaritassa puggalassa mettādesanā dosavinayāya yuttā. Paṭiccasamuppādassa paññāvisayattā mohacaritassa puggalassa paṭiccasamuppādadesanā mohavinayāya yuttā. ‘‘Rāgacaritassāpi mettādidesanā yujjeyya sabbasattasādhāraṇattā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadihi bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tibbakilesassa rāgacaritassa adhippetattā tādisassa puggalassa mettaṃ cetovimuttiṃ yadi deseyya, evaṃ sati mettāvasenapi rāguppajjanato desanā na yujjati. Sukhaṃ paṭipadaṃ vā yadi deseyya, evaṃ sati rāgacaritassa dukkhāpaṭipadāyujjanato desanā na yujjati. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānaṃ vā yadipi deseyya, evaṃ sati rāgacaritassa asubhānupassanaṃ vajjetvā vipassanāpubbaṅgamassa pahānassa dukkarato desanā na yujjatīti yojanā.
“世尊对贪行者”等说法,并不是以穷尽一切的方式把合理性一一分别说明,而只是显示方法本身。为了说明依照所显示的方法,还应当去寻求其他情形,所以接着说了“如此,无论什么”等话。也就是说,对于贪,无论开示了哪一种随顺断;对于嗔,无论开示了哪一种随顺断;对于痴,无论开示了哪一种随顺断——所有这些随顺断,在作为智慧生起基础的诸巴利文段范围内,都应当以简择的方式加以拣择,再以理则的方式加以贯通,这就是贯通。巴利
‘‘Bhagavā rāgacaritassā’’tiādinā niravasesavasena yutti na vibhattā, nayadassanamevāti yo nayo dassito, tena nayena aññāpi gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ yaṃ kiñcī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rāgassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ, dosassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ, mohassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ anulomappahānaṃ yattakā pāḷippadesā ñāṇassa bhūmi, tattakesu vicayena hārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabbanti yojanā.
应当以断除贪等来探求其中的道理,因为需要这样说明,所以为了进一步以慈等梵住的果定以及九次第定的自在来分别展示如何探求道理,就开始了“住于慈者”等这一段。
其中,对于住于慈者,也就是获得慈住的人,既然这个人真实存在,而慈又是嗔恚的直接对治,那么说“嗔恚会占据他的心”就不合理;说“住于慈者,嗔恚的断除已经彻底完成”才合理。
对于住于悲者,也就是获得悲住的人,既然这个人真实存在,而悲又是恼害的直接对治,那么说“恼害会占据他的心”就不合理;说“住于悲者,恼害的断除已经彻底完成”才合理。
对于住于喜者,也就是获得喜住的人,既然这个人真实存在,而喜又是不乐的直接对治,那么说“不乐会占据他的心”就不合理;说“住于喜者,不乐的断除已经彻底完成”才合理。
对于住于舍者,也就是获得舍住的人,既然这个人真实存在,而舍又是贪的直接对治,那么说“贪会占据他的心”就不合理;说“住于舍者,贪的断除已经彻底完成”才合理。巴利
‘‘Rāgādippahānavasena yutti gavesitabbā’’ti vattabbabhāvato aññehipi mettādibrahmavihāraphalasamāpattinavānupubbasamāpattivasībhāvehi vibhajitvā yuttigavesanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mettāvihārissā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mettāvihārissa mettāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa mettāya byāpādapaṭipakkhattā byāpādo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjatīti ca, mettāvihārissa sato byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Karuṇāvihārissa karuṇāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa karuṇāya vihesāya paṭipakkhattā vihesā cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, karuṇāvihārissa sato vihesā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Muditāvihārissa muditāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa muditāya aratiyā paṭipakkhattā arati cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, muditāvihārissa sato arati pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Upekkhāvihārissa upekkhāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa upekkhāya rāgassa paṭipakkhattā rāgo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, upekkhāvihārissa sato rāgo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati.
对于以无常随观为入口、获得果定住的无相住者来说,说“由于他具念而现前,识就借着随逐诸行相的相,在已被断除的常等相上继续运转”,这样的开示不合理;而说“因为无相随观是常等颠倒想的对治,所以对无相住者来说,相的断除已彻底完成”,这样的开示才合理。对于被执为“我”的五蕴,不见“这五蕴就是我”;然而即使不作这样的观见,说“我是什么?我是怎样?”的疑与疑箭会占据其心,这也不合理;因为疑属于应当断除的法,所以说“对不见‘这五蕴就是我’的人来说,疑与疑箭的断除已彻底完成”,这样的开示才合理。巴利
Animittavihārissa aniccānupassanāmukhena paṭiladdhaphalasamāpattivihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa nimittānusāri tena teneva saṅkhāranimittānusāreneva niccādīsu pahīnena nimittena viññāṇaṃ pavattatīti desanā na yujjati, animittānupassanāya niccādivipallāsapaṭipakkhattā animittavihārissa sato nimittaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. ‘‘Asmī’’ti maññitaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ attavigataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ khandhapañcako ahaṃ asmī’’ti na samanupassāmi, atha ca pana asamanupassane satipi ‘‘me kiṃ asmī’’ti ‘‘kathaṃ asmī’’ti vicikicchā kathaṃkathāsallaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, vicikicchāya pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato ‘‘ayaṃ khandhapañcako ahaṃ asmī’’ti asamanupassantassa vicikicchā kathaṃkathāsallaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati.
“难道只应依据果定来探求理则吗?”因为会有这样的问难,为了显示也须依据禅定来探求理则,便以“又如初禅”等作为开端。或者:“难道只应依据果定住者来探求理则吗?”因为会有这样的问难,为了显示也须依据禅定住者来探求理则,便以“又如初禅”等作为开端。在这里,正如对于入初禅的果定住者应探求理则,同样地,对于禅定住者也应探求理则。如何探求呢?对于入初禅者——也就是具备初禅的补特伽罗,说“由镇伏诸盖,欲贪与嗔恚能导向第二禅的殊胜”,这是不合理的;而说“欲贪与嗔恚能导向禅定的退失”,这则是合理的。说“伴随寻的想与作意,连同近行法,与第二禅法一起能导向禅定的退失”,这是不合理的;而说“伴随寻的想与作意能导向上分禅的殊胜”,这则是合理的。巴利
‘‘Phalasamāpattivaseneva yutti gavesitabbā ki’’nti vattabbattā jhānasamāpattivasenapi yutti gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā pana paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘phalasamāpattivihārisseva yutti gavesitabbā ki’’nti vattabbattā jhānasamāpattivasenapi yutti gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā pana paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yathā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa phalasamāpattivihārissa yutti gavesitabbā, evaṃ jhānasamāpattivihārissapi yutti gavesitabbā. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya dutiyajjhānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, kāmarāgabyāpādā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha dutiyajjhānadhammā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati.
对于已入第二禅、具念而现存的补特伽罗,说“与寻伺俱行的想和作意,连同近行法,与初禅诸法一起能导向上分禅的殊胜”,这样的开示不合理;说“与寻伺俱行的想和作意能导向无寻禅的退失”,这样的开示才合理。说“与舍俱行的想和作意,连同近行法,与第四禅诸法一起能导向禅的退失”,这样的开示不合理;说“与舍俱行的想和作意能导向上分禅的殊胜”,这样的开示才合理。其余各处也应依照同样的道理来配合理解。在如上所说的各种定中,由于以自在力修习、以堪任力修习,这样的心就称为善修习的心。巴利
Dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa vitakkavicārasahagatā vā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha paṭhamajjhānadhammā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, vitakkavicārasahagatā saññāmanasikārā avitakkajhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Upekkhāsahagatā vā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha catutthajjhānadhammā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, upekkhāsahagatā saññāmanasikārā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Sesesupi atthānurūpaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Yathāvuttasamāpattīsu vasībhāvena paricitaṃ kallatāparicitaṃ cittaṃ nāma.
不应该只做这么一点理则的探求。为了说明在九种经中也应当依照所获得的理则去探求,所以说了“如此,一切”等话。因为要问“对于一切理趣,按照所说的地和行境,用抉择理趣加以抉择之后,应当以理则相结合——这该由谁来信受呢?”所以说了“因此说”等话。其中,具寿马哈咖咤那以应当结合的方式说出“一切”等话,意思就是应当凭那番话来信受。巴利
Ettakameva yuttigavesanaṃ na kātabbaṃ, navavidhasuttantesu yathāladdhayuttigavesanampi kātabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sabbe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ yathāvuttabhūmigocarānaṃ vicayahārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabbabhāvo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena yojetabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘sabbesa’’ntiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
智者应当依据义注和复注的传承,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来加以掌握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
4. 依处理趣分别的阐释巴利
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
22 22. 凡是作为特定解释、属于理趣分别的解说,通过它已经分别说明了问答等合理与不合理的情况,这个作为特定解释的理趣分别就圆满了。因为还需要问“什么是句所依处的分别”,所以接着开始了“其中,什么是句所依处理趣”等解说。这里的“其中”,是在前面已指出的十六种教示理趣等理趣当中,问:作为特定解释的句所依处理趣——也就是句所依处的分别——是哪一个?对于“胜者教导了法”等开示,现在由我所说的“这是句所依处理趣”等,应当理解为:这是作为特定解释而详细展开的句所依处分别。因此说:“其中,什么是句所依处理趣等,就是句所依处的分别。”(《导论注》22)现在,为了说明这个正在被详细讲述的句所依处理趣,到底在三藏所教导的诸法当中教导、解释了哪一种法,先提出这个问题,然后为了确定并分别“这个近因就是那个近果的句所依处”,便说了“这是句所依处”等。它的意思是:对一切应当了知的法不能如实通达,这是无明的特相,所以无明就是以对一切法不能如实通达为特相;对于那个无明来说,把不净执为净等颠倒想,就是它的句所依处,也就是近因。有颠倒想存在时,无明就会活动,不断向上增长而不会减退,因此颠倒想成为无明的句所依处,即近因。由于无明是轮回的根本,所以应当知道,是以它为起点来分别句所依处的。巴利
22. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena yuttihāravibhaṅgabhūtena pañhāvissajjanādīnaṃ yuttāyuttabhāvo vibhatto, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto yuttihāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhāno hāro padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgoti pucchati. ‘‘Dhammaṃ desesi jino’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno hāro’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgoti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārotiādi padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 22). ‘‘Ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthārabhūto padaṭṭhāno hāro piṭakattaye desitesu dhammesu kiṃ nāma dhammaṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇetī’’ti pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘idaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ imassa āsannaphalassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti niyametvā vibhajituṃ ‘‘ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – sabbesu viññeyyadhammesu yāthāvato asampaṭivedho lakkhaṇaṃ etissā avijjāyāti sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā, avijjā, tassā avijjāya asubhe ‘‘subha’’ntiādivipallāsā padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ. Vipallāse sati avijjā vattati uparūpari jāyati na hāyati, tasmā vipallāsā avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavanti. Avijjāya vaṭṭamūlakattā taṃ ādiṃ katvā padaṭṭhānaṃ vibhattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
渴爱也是轮回的根本,所以接下来为了分别渴爱的近因,说了“以执取为特相”等话。其中,“可爱色、可意色”指的是具有可爱本性、可意本性的眼等法。当可爱、可意、可乐的眼等存在时,渴爱就会活动起来,并且一再地生起。因此,可爱色、可意色就是渴爱的近因,是直接促成它生起的条件。巴利
Taṇhāyapi vaṭṭamūlakattā tadanantaraṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘ajjhosānalakkhaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti piyasabhāvaṃ sātasabhāvaṃ cakkhādidhammajātaṃ. Piyanīyasātanīye cakkhādike sati taṇhā vattati uparūpari jāyati, tasmā piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavati.
只要存在不与取,贪就在运作,所以不与取是贪的近因。因为不与取即使只生起一次,由于看不到它的过患,它就确实会成为贪的近因。巴利
Adinnādāne sati lobho vattati, tasmā adinnādānaṃ lobhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Adinnādānañhi ekavāraṃ uppannampi anādīnavadassanato lobhassa āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavatveva.
即使是在头发等不净之物上生起的净想,由于它的特相就是执取青色等颜色、长短等形状、微笑等细节表现,所以眼根等诸根的不守护,就成为净想的近因。巴利
Kesādīsu asubhesu pavattāyapi subhasaññāya nīlādivaṇṇadīghādisaṇṭhānahasanādibyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇattā cakkhundriyādīnaṃ asaṃvaro subhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.
即使是在苦苦等(苦受)当中生起的乐想,由于它的特相是接近有漏触,所以对色等(五欲对象)的贪著就成为乐想的近因。巴利
Dukkhadukkhādīsu pavattāyapi sukhasaññāya sāsavaphassūpagamanalakkhaṇattā rūpādīsu assādo sukhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
对于色蕴等无常法,即便常想也在其中生起,但由于它的特相是不随观具有有为特征的诸法,所以执取色蕴等为常的识,就是常想的近因。巴利
Rūpakkhandhādīsu aniccesu pavattāyapi niccasaññāya saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ asamanupassanalakkhaṇattā rūpakkhandhādīsu niccaggahaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ niccasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
即使我想的生起是发生在被称为无常、苦、无我的诸蕴等当中,但由于它的特相是不随观无常想和苦想,所以以“我”“我所”等方式生起的名身,是我想的近因。巴利
Aniccadukkhānattasaṅkhātesu khandhādīsu pavattāyapi attasaññāya aniccasaññādukkhasaññānaṃ asamanupassanalakkhaṇattā ahaṃmamādivasena pavatto nāmakāyo attasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
像这样显示了无明等不善一方的诸法的近因之后,现在为了显示与它们相对立的明等诸法的近因,就说了“以通达一切法为特相”等话。由于明在一切所知法中生起,并且以通达一切法为特相,所以一切所知都是明的近因。巴利
Evaṃ avijjādīnaṃ akusalapakkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassetvā idāni tappaṭipakkhānaṃ vijjādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbadhammasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbesu ñeyyadhammesu pavattāya vijjāya sabbadhammasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇattā sabbaṃ neyyaṃ vijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
不净观之所以能成为奢摩他的近因,是因为奢摩他的特相就是镇伏掉举(也就是心的散乱),而不净观正是似相。因为不净观能对治渴爱,而渴爱一旦不存在,奢摩他就能安住。巴利
Samathassa cittavikkhepasaṅkhātauddhaccapaṭisaṃharaṇasaṅkhātavikkhambhanalakkhaṇattā paṭibhāganimittabhūtā asubhā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Asubhāya hi taṇhāpaṭipakkhattā, taṇhāya ca abhāve samatho tiṭṭhatīti.
由于以远离不与取的方式生起的无贪,具有收摄欲贪所行境的特相,所以远离不与取是无贪的近因。巴利
Adinnādānā veramaṇivasena pavattassa alobhassa icchāvacarapaṭisaṃharaṇalakkhaṇattā adinnādānā veramaṇī alobhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
因为离杀生是以远离杀生的方式生起的无嗔,而它的特相就是不恼害,所以离杀生是无嗔的近因。巴利
Pāṇātipātā veramaṇivasena pavattassa adosassa abyāpajjalakkhaṇattā pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adosassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
正行是以正确的方式生起的,无痴的特相就是于事物不颠倒而行,因此正行是无痴的近因。巴利
Sammāpaṭipattivasena pavattassa amohassa vatthuavippaṭipattilakkhaṇattā sammāpaṭipatti amohassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
不净想是以厌离的方式生起的,它的特相是执取青瘀相和脓烂相,所以厌离是不净想的近因。因为依靠厌离智,不喜乐才会生起;而依靠不喜乐,不净想才能安住。巴利
Nibbidāvasena pavattāya asubhasaññāya vinīlakavipubbakagahaṇalakkhaṇattā nibbidā asubhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbidāñāṇena hi anabhirati pavattati, anabhiratiyā ca asubhasaññā ṭhitāti.
以苦受的方式生起的苦想,因为它的特相是遍知有漏触,所以受是苦想的近因。巴利
Dukkhavedanāvasena pavattāya dukkhasaññāya sāsavaphassaparijānanalakkhaṇattā vedanā dukkhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
无常想是依生灭而运作的,它的特相是随观诸有为法的特相,所以生灭是无常想的近因。因为随观了生灭之后,无常想才生起。巴利
Uppādavayavasena pavattāya aniccasaññāya saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ samanupassanalakkhaṇattā uppādavayā aniccasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Uppādavayañhi samanupassitvā aniccasaññā pavattā.
以唯法想的方式生起的无我想,因为它的特征是执取一切法,所以法想是无我想的近因。巴利
Dhammamattasaññāvasena pavattāya anattasaññāya sabbadhammaabhinivesalakkhaṇattā dhammasaññā anattasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
欲贪以颜色等五种欲乐对象为所缘,所以五欲就是欲贪的近因。巴利
Kāmarāgassa rūpādipañcakāmaguṇārammaṇattā pañca kāmaguṇā kāmarāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以色身为所缘而生起的色贪,因为是随着眼等五根而生起的,所以五根所对的色境是色贪的近因。巴利
Rūpasaṅkhāte kāye ārabbha pavattassa rūparāgassa cakkhādipañcindriyānaṃ anusārena pavattanato pañcindriyāni rūpāni rūparāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以“有之欲乐”的方式生起的有贪,以六处为近因。所谓“观察已生起的有”,就是像这样生起的对色的欢喜:“这样的不可爱之色不要生起,这样的可爱之色要生起;这样的苦受不要生起,这样的乐受要生起。”它是以这类方式进行的,是五取蕴的近因。巴利
Bhavanikantivasena pavattassa bhavarāgassa chaḷāyatanaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbattabhavānupassitāti ‘‘edisaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ mā nibbattatu, edisaṃ iṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ nibbattatu edisī dukkhā vedanā mā nibbattatu, edisī sukhā vedanā nibbattatū’’ti evamādinā pakārena pavattā rūpābhinandanā, sā pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ.
宿住随念智与见是业自性智的近因,因为它随顺于业自性智。巴利
Kammassakataññāṇassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānugatattā pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇadassanaṃ kammassakataññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
信以趣入为特相,所以信具有趣入的特相。信以胜解为现起,所以信具有胜解的现起。净以不浑浊为特相,所以净具有不浑浊的特相。净以澄净为现起,所以净具有澄净的现起。不过要知道,这种净其实只是信的一种不同状态。不动净信是以希求为特相的信的立足处,以趣入为特相的信是不浑浊特相的净的立足处,四正勤是以策励为特相的精进的立足处,身念处等是以不漂浮为特相的念的立足处,因为与禅那相应的定具有一境性,所以寻等禅支是定的立足处,因为慧以了知作用和了知所缘为特相,所以诸谛是慧的立足处。巴利
Okappanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yassā saddhāyāti okappanalakkhaṇā saddhā. Adhimutti paccupaṭṭhānaṃ yassā saddhāyāti adhimuttipaccupaṭṭhānā ca saddhā. Anāvilaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yassa pasādassāti anāvilalakkhaṇoti pasādo. Sampasīdanaṃ paccupaṭṭhānaṃ yassa pasādassāti sampasīdanapaccupaṭṭhāno ca pasādo. So pana pasādo saddhāya eva avatthāvisesoti veditabbo. Aveccapasādo abhipatthiyanalakkhaṇāya saddhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, okappanalakkhaṇā saddhā anāvilalakkhaṇassa pasādassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, catubbidhaṃ sammappadhānaṃ vīriyaṃ ārambhalakkhaṇassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, kāyādisatipaṭṭhānaṃ apilāpanalakkhaṇāya satiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ, jhānasahitassa samādhissa ekaggalakkhaṇattā vitakkādijhānāni samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, paññāya kiccapajānanaārammaṇapajānanalakkhaṇattā saccāni paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
因为老师已经分别解说了无明等的近因,接下来有人会问:那些无明等又是哪些法的近因?为了说明那些无明等也是这些法的近因,所以说了“另一种理路”等话。无明是以执取滋味作意为特征的非如理作意的近因,因为无明遮盖了过患,非如理作意才生起。以迷惑真谛为特征的无明,是福行、非福行、不动行的近因;以再生为特征的三地思,是异熟识的近因;以结生识为缘而生起的有之状态、具有结生相者,是名色的近因,因为它是俱生等缘;以名身和色身聚合为特征的名色,是六处的近因,因为它是依止等缘;以眼等六根转起为特征的六处,依次是六种触的近因,因为它是依止等缘;以眼净色、色所缘、眼识等和合为特征的六种触,那触依次是与那六种触俱生的六种受的近因,因为它是俱生等缘;以领纳可爱、领纳不可爱、领纳非可爱非不可爱为特征的三种受,那受是依那三种受而转起的渴爱的近因,因为它是亲依止等缘;以在自他相续中执取为特征的渴爱,那渴爱是依那渴爱而转起的四种取的近因,因为它是亲依止等缘。应该读作“那受”、“那渴爱”、“那取”,也可能是性倒错的表述。巴利
‘‘Yesaṃ avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni ācariyena vibhattāni, te avijjādayo katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānī’’ti pucchitabbattā te avijjādayopi imesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānāti dassetuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjā assādamanasikāralakkhaṇassa ayonisomanasikārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjāya hi ādīnavacchādanato ayonisomanasikāro jātoti. Saccasammohanalakkhaṇā avijjā puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, punabbhavavirohanalakkhaṇā tebhūmakacetanā saṅkhārā vipākaviññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, opapaccayikasaṅkhātena upapattibhavabhāvena nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ nāmarūpassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmakāyarūpakāyasaṅghātalakkhaṇaṃ nāmarūpaṃ chaḷāyatanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sahajātādipaccayabhāvato, cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ pavattānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ chaḷāyatanaṃ chabbidhassa phassassa yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nissayādipaccayabhāvato, cakkhupasādarūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādisannipātalakkhaṇo chabbidho phasso, taṃ vedanāya tena chabbidhena phassena sahajātāya chabbidhāya vedanāya yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ sahajātādipaccayabhāvato, iṭṭhānubhavanaaniṭṭhānubhavanaiṭṭhāniṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā tividhā vedanā, taṃ taṇhāya tāya tividhāya vedanāya vasena pavattāya taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādipaccayabhāvato, saparasantānesu ajjhosānalakkhaṇā taṇhā, taṃ upādānassa tāya taṇhāya vasena pavattassa catubbidhassa upādānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādipaccayabhāvato. ‘‘So vedanāyā’’ti ca ‘‘sā taṇhāyā’’ti ca ‘‘sā upādānassā’’ti ca pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, liṅgavipallāsaniddeso vā siyā.
能产生结生蕴的取,这种取是两种有的近因。以名身和色身的生起为特征的业有,这种业有是生的近因。已经成为投生状态的生,以蕴的显现为特征,这种生是老死的近因。以所依蕴的成熟为特征的衰老,这种衰老是死的近因。无论对谁而言,命根断绝为特征的世俗意义上的死,这种世俗的死也是忧愁的近因。因为思念所爱者之死时,大多数情况下会生起忧愁,所以那种对亲友等所爱者操心牵挂的忧愁,是悲泣的近因。以哀号哭泣为表现的悲泣,是身体痛苦的近因。以身逼迫为特征的身苦,是心中忧恼的近因。以心逼迫为特征的忧恼,是热恼的近因。以烧灼、煎熬为表现的热恼,这种热恼是有的近因,也就是热恼所依相续的有的近因。巴利
Yaṃ upādānaṃ opapaccayikaṃ upapattikkhandhanibbattakaṃ, taṃ upādānaṃ duvidhassa bhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo kammabhavo nāmakāyarūpakāyasambhavanalakkhaṇo, so kammabhavo jātiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yā upapattibhūtā jāti khandhapātubhāvalakkhaṇā, taṃ sā jāti jarāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yā jiṇṇajarā upadhikkhandhaparipākalakkhaṇā, taṃ sā jiṇṇajarā maraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yampi yassa sammutimaraṇaṃ jīvitindriyupacchedalakkhaṇaṃ, tampi tassa sammutimaraṇaṃ sokassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Piyassa maraṇaṃ cintentassa yebhuyyena sokuppajjanato yo soko ñātiādipiyesu ussukkakārako, taṃ so soko paridevassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo paridevo lālappakārako, taṃ so paridevo kāyikadukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ kāyasampīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ domanassaṃ cittasampīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ domanassaṃ upāyāsassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo upāyāso odahanakārako avadahanakārako, taṃ so upāyāso bhavassa upāyāsassa nissayasantānabhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
为了说明前面所说的“有”,才接着说了“这些”等话。其中,有支:烦恼是有的支分,是它的原因;业轮和异熟轮则是称为“有”的支分、组成部分。当它们在现在等时候和合生起时,那被称为烦恼轮、业轮、异熟轮的法聚,在这里就应当看作“有”。那称为“有”的烦恼轮、业轮、异熟轮这三者,是轮回的近因,因为借着前前一个由烦恼等轮所成就的(生命),轮回才不间断地生起。而那个以出离为特征的圣道,就是灭、涅槃的近因,因为它是使人证得涅槃的原因。巴利
Bhavassāti vuttabhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhavaṅgāni kileso bhavassa aṅgaṃ kāraṇaṃ kammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭāni bhavasaṅkhātāni aṅgāni avayavāni. Yadā paccuppannādikāle samaggāni nibbattāni bhavanti, tadā so kilesavaṭṭakammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭasaṅkhāto dhammasamūho ‘‘bhavassā’’ti ettha bhavoti daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ bhavasaṅkhātaṃ kilesavaṭṭakammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭattayaṃ saṃsārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ purimaṃ purimaṃ jātinipphannakilesādivaṭṭena saṃsārassa abbocchinnuppajjanato, yo ariyamaggo niyyānikalakkhaṇo, taṃ so ariyamaggo nirodhassa nibbānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sampāpakahetubhāvato.
多闻的人是一切弟子的依靠处,就像渡口一样,所以叫“渡口”;他能了知,所以叫“知者”;了知渡口的人,就叫“渡口知者”。渡口知者的状态就是渡口知性,也就是正确地亲近善士。这是喜知性的直接原因。因为多闻的人通过正确地亲近善士,会生起与法相应的喜悦;有了喜悦,就会生起对业处的修习。所以,他通过听闻适合自己的法而了知喜,这就是喜知者;喜知者的状态就是喜知性,也就是业处的修习。这是得知性的直接原因。因为通过修习业处,就会生起了知修证所得的状态,所以叫得知性。了知修证所得的状态,是自知性的直接原因。因为通过了知修证所得的状态,具足五种勤支的人就会生起了知自己的状态,所以叫自知性。自知性是过去所造福德的直接原因。巴利
Bahussuto sabbasissādīnaṃ patiṭṭhānattā titthaṃ viyāti titthaṃ, jānātīti ñū, titthaṃ ñūti titthaññū, titthaññuno bhāvo titthaññutā, sammāpayirupāsanā, sā pītaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bahussutassa hi sammāpayirupāsanāya dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pāmojjena ca kammaṭṭhānabrūhanā jāyatīti sappāyadhammassavanena pītiṃ jānātīti pītaññū, pītaññuno bhāvo pītaññutā, kammaṭṭhānassa brūhanā, sā pattaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānabrūhanāya hi bhāvanāpattajānanatā jāyatīti pattaññutā. Bhāvanāpattajānanatā attaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhāvanāpattajānanatāya hi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatassa attano jānanatā jāyatīti attaññutā pubbekatapuññatāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
在精进支中,由于要了知自己是否具足这些支分,所以先要有过去所修的福业;过去已造的福业,是投生到适宜之处的近因。因为过去所造的福业,才得到投生到适宜之处;投生到适宜之处,是亲近善士的近因。因为投生到适宜之处,才得到亲近善士;亲近善士,是自我正确立志的近因。因为亲近善士,才生起自我正确立志;自我正确立志,是持戒的近因。因为自我正确立志,戒才得以确立;戒,是无后悔的近因。因为观察自身已确立的戒时,根本不会有后悔;由无后悔而生起喜悦,所以无后悔是喜悦的近因。由喜悦而生起喜,所以喜悦是喜的近因。由喜而生起轻安,所以喜是轻安的近因。由轻安而生起乐,所以轻安是乐的近因。由乐而生起定,所以乐是定的近因。由定而生起如实知见,所以定是如实知见的近因。由如实知见而生起厌离智,所以如实知见是厌离的近因。由厌离而生起离欲,所以厌离是离欲的近因。由离欲而生起解脱,所以离欲是解脱的近因。由解脱而生起解脱知见,所以解脱是解脱知见的近因。这样,按照上面所说的方式,任何法作为亲依止缘,任何法作为缘,这一切法都应看作是其自身所生起的缘生法的近因。巴利
Padhāniyaṅgesu samannāgatattajānanatāya hi pubbe puññakaraṇaṃ jātaṃ, pubbekatapuññatā patirūpadesavāsassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pubbe hi katena puññena patirūpadesavāso laddho, patirūpadesavāso sappurisūpanissayassapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Patirūpadesavāsena hi sappurisūpanissayo laddho, sappurisūpanissayo attasammāpaṇidhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sappurisūpanissayena hi attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ jātaṃ, attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ sīlānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attasammāpaṇidhānena hi sīlāni sampatiṭṭhitāni, sīlāni avippaṭisārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attani hi sampatiṭṭhitaṃ sīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa vippaṭisāro natthevāti, avippaṭisārena pāmojjaṃ jāyati, tasmā avippaṭisāro pāmojjassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāmojjena pīti jāyati, tasmā pāmojjaṃ pītiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pītiyā passaddhi jāyati, tasmā pīti passaddhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Passaddhiyā sukhaṃ jāyati, tasmā passaddhi sukhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sukhena samādhi jāyati, tasmā sukhaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samādhinā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ jāyati, tasmā samādhi yathābhūtañāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanena nibbidāñāṇaṃ jāyati, tasmā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ nibbidāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbidāya virāgo jāyati, tasmā nibbidā virāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Virāgena vimutti jāyati, tasmā virāgo vimuttiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ jāyati, tasmā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ yathāvuttanayena yo koci dhammo upanissayo hoti, yo koci dhammo paccayo hoti, sabbo so dhammo attano paccayuppannassa dhammassa padaṭṭhānanti daṭṭhabbo.
对于亲依止法、缘法或缘所生法来说,它们作为足处的情况,应该由谁来相信呢?因为需要这样说,所以接着说了“因此”等话。其中,“因此”的意思是:对于任何亲依止法、缘法以及缘所生法,只要具寿马哈咖咤那以“胜者宣说法”等语句,说明了它们作为足处的情况,那么通过这些话,就应该相信那些亲依止法和缘法具有足处的作用。又因为需要这样说:“上面所说的足处义理已经圆满了吗?还是另有其他内容需要确定并连接上去呢?”所以说了“已连接的足处义理”。在这里,虽然巴利原文中没有加以区分,但按照所获得的内容,把足处义理提取出来并连接之后,应当加以连接、加以区分来说明。巴利
‘‘Upanissayadhammassa, paccayadhammassa vā paccayuppannadhammassa padaṭṭhānabhāvo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti yassa kassaci upanissayadhammassa, paccayadhammassa ca paccayuppannadhammassa padaṭṭhānabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘dhammaṃ deseti jino’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tesaṃ upanissayadhammapaccayadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo saddahitabboti. ‘‘Yathāvutto padaṭṭhāno hāro paripuṇṇo kiṃ, udāhu añño niddhāretvā yojetabbo atthi ki’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto padaṭṭhāno hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha pāḷiyaṃ avibhattampi yathālābhavasena padaṭṭhāno hāro nīharitvā yutto yujjitabbo, vibhajitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
就这样,在“足处”义理的分别中,是依照众生的根机与能力而撰写的。巴利
Iti padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当依据注释书和复注,把深奥的义理详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
5. 相论分别的阐释巴利
5. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
23 23. 通过那种具有特定注释性质的足处分别,无明等的足处已被分别解说,这一具有特定注释性质的足处义理分别就圆满了。因为接下来应当问“什么是相义理分别”,所以说出“其中,什么是相义理”等话。其中,“其中”一词的意思前面已经说过。他问:什么是具有特定注释性质的相义理、相义理分别?应当知道:现在我要说的“诸法”等广分别的特定注释,就名为相义理、相义理分别。现在所说的这种广义的相义理,在三藏所宣说的诸法中,以何相来相知所相之法?为了略示相义理所考量的诸法,故说“诸法”等。这里,“诸法”指的是种种缘合而生之法;“同一相”指的是相同的相状;“那些法”指的是那些具有相同相状的缘合法,此为别出之义;“于一法中”指的是:在具有相同相状的某一法中,当世尊于圣典中宣说此法时,其余具有相同相的法,即因相同相而被宣说。因此说:“其中,什么是相义理等,名为相义理分别。巴利
23. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena padaṭṭhānavibhaṅgena avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni vibhattāni, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha-saddassa attho vuttova. Katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgoti pucchati. ‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ye dhammā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyoti. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārotiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23). Ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthārabhūto lakkhaṇo hāro piṭakattaye desitesu dhammesu kiṃ nāma lakkhitabbaṃ dhammaṃ lakkhīyatīti pucchitvā pucchite lakkhaṇahāravicaye dhamme saṅkhepena dassetuṃ ‘‘ye dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ye dhammāti ye samūhā dhammā. Ekalakkhaṇāti samānalakkhaṇā. Tesaṃ dhammānanti samānalakkhaṇānaṃ tesaṃ samūhadhammānaṃ, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ. Ekasmiṃ dhammeti samānalakkhaṇe ekasmiṃ dhamme, pāḷiyaṃ bhagavatā vutte sati vuttadhammato avasiṭṭhasamānalakkhaṇā dhammā samānalakkhaṇena vuttā bhavantīti attho.
在相义理的范围内,当此法被广说时,这些具有相同相的法也就被说了。为了确定并显示这一点,所以说了“如同什么存在?”等话。它的意思是:问的是“如同以哪种方式被说,那种方式是什么存在?”——“如同以哪种方式被说,那种方式就是相同相的状态”,这就是它的意思。世尊是怎么说的呢?世尊说了“诸比丘,眼”等话。当说到“诸比丘,眼不安住”等时,“诸比丘,耳不安住”等话也就同样被说了。巴利
Lakkhaṇahāravisaye dhamme vitthārato imasmiṃ dhamme vutte ime samānalakkhaṇā dhammāpi vuttā bhavantīti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yathā yena pakārena vuttā bhavanti, so pakāro kiṃ bhaveti pucchati. Yathā yena pakārena vuttā bhavanti, so pakāro samānalakkhaṇāti bhāvo bhaveti attho. Kinti bhagavā āha? ‘‘Cakkhuṃ bhikkhave’’tiādiṃ bhagavā āha. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ, bhikkhave, anavaṭṭhita’’ntiādimhi vutte ‘‘sotaṃ, bhikkhave, anavaṭṭhita’’ntiādivacanampi vuttameva bhavati.
因为可以这样说:以“不安住”等特征为共同特征,或者以内处的性质为共同特征,所以仅从处的角度就应当说它们是同一特征。为了说明从蕴的角度也能显示同一特征,所以说了“如同所说”等这一段。当说到“罗陀,对过去色应无期待,对未来色不应欢喜,应当为了对现在色的厌离、离欲、灭尽、舍断、放下而修行”时,也应当说“罗陀,对过去受应无期待,对未来受不应欢喜,应当为了对现在受的厌离、离欲、灭尽、舍断、放下而修行”等等。巴利
‘‘Anavaṭṭhitādilakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vā ajjhattikāyatanabhāvena samānalakkhaṇattā vāti āyatanavaseneva ekalakkhaṇaṃ vattabba’’nti vattabbattā khandhavasenapi ekalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atīte, rādha, rūpe anapekkho hoti, anāgataṃ rūpaṃ mā abhinandi , paccuppannassa rūpassa nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya cāgāya paṭinissaggāya paṭipajjā’’ti vutte ‘‘atītāya, rādha, vedanāya anapekkho hoti, anāgataṃ vedanaṃ mā abhinandi, paccuppannāya vedanāya nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya cāgāya paṭinissaggāya paṭipajjā’’tiādi vuttaṃ bhave.
或者,因为与“不期待”的特征有共同的特征,或者因为与“蕴”的特征有共同的特征,所以诸法应当被说为仅依蕴和处而具有同一特征。为了说明“由于应当被说,所以依念处也应当被说”,而说了“正如所说”等。其中意思是:正如世尊以某种同一特征而说,同样地,以那种同一特征,即使未被说的诸法也成为已被说的。那些修观的人,如果对五蕴恒常已善精勤,恒常修习身至念,这些修观者就不从事不应做的事,比如净相、乐等,也不从事农耕、经商等事业,而对于应做的事,比如不净、苦等,或者身等,他们成为持续精勤者——世尊如此说。这是连接。巴利
‘‘Anapekkhanīyalakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vā khandhalakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vāti khandhāyatanavaseneva ekalakkhaṇadhammā vattabbā’’ti vattabbattā satipaṭṭhānavasenāpi vattabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā yena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā ca tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca avuttāpi dhammā vuttā bhavantīti attho. Ye vipassakā puggalā pañcasu khandhesu niccaṃ susamāraddhā niccaṃ kāyagatāsatiṃ bhāventi, te vipassakā akiccaṃ subhasukhādikaṃ, kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ vā na sevanti, kicce asubhāsukhādike, kāyādike vā sātaccakārino hontīti bhagavā āhāti yojanā.
这里,iti 这个词省略了一个音节。也就是说,在“yesañca”等偈颂中,当世尊已经如实说明了念在发等身体部分上生起、运作的身至念时,由于念处具有同一特征,其余那些受所摄的念、心所摄的念和法所摄的念也就同样被说成了念处。简而言之,应当说:恒常已善精勤,恒常受所摄的念……恒常心所摄的念……恒常法所摄的念。巴利
Itisaddassa cettha ekassa lopo. Iti evaṃ ‘‘yesañcā’’tiādigāthāya kesādike kāye gatāya pavattāya satiyā bhagavatā sarūpena vuttāya vijjamānāya tadavasesā vedanāgatā sati ca cittagatā sati ca dhammagatā sati ca satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattena vuttā bhavantīti saṅkhepato niccaṃ susamāraddhā niccaṃ vedanāgatā sati ca…pe… niccaṃ cittagatā sati ca…pe… niccaṃ dhammagatā satīti vattabbāti.
因为必须说“正是依念处的方式,诸法才应被说为具有同一特征”,所以才说了“同样地,无论什么……”等话。其中,无论什么色处,被眼识所见;无论什么声处,被耳识所闻;无论什么香、味、触处,被鼻识等三种识所了知——如此,当世尊以自性如实说示了所见等三类之后,其余任何被了知的、属于法所缘的色,由于作为世尊所缘境的缘故,具有同一特征,因此也被说为已被世尊宣说,这就是含义。或者,无论什么色处“所见”已被世尊说出,当这话说出时,其余“所闻”等也随之被说出——这些含义应分别对应连接。因此说:“或所见,或所闻,或所觉知。”巴利
‘‘Satipaṭṭhānavaseneva ekalakkhaṇā dhammā vattabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tathā yaṃ kiñcī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kiñci rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇena sutaṃ, yaṃ kiñci gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ ghānaviññāṇādittayena viññāṇena mutaṃ, iti evaṃ diṭṭhādittaye bhagavatā sarūpena vutte sati tadavasesaṃ yaṃ kiñci viññātaṃ dhammārammaṇapariyāpannaṃ rūpaṃ bhagavatā ālambitabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā vuttaṃ bhavatīti attho. Atha vā yaṃ kiñci rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vutte sati tadavasesaṃ sutādikampi vuttaṃ hotīti ādiattho visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā mutaṃ vā’’ti.
有人可能会问:说到“身至念”的时候,是不是也该说剩下那些属于受的念等等?为了说明三十七菩提分法也因此被说到,所以讲了“正如世尊所说”这一段。这里的含义是:世尊以能导向解脱的特征、以同一特征而说,同样地,以这样的同一特征,它们也就成为被说到的。世尊说:“因此,比丘,在我的教法中,你要热诚、正知、具念,通过彼分断或镇伏断来调伏世间的贪忧,于身——从头发等所成的色身——安住于身随观,观这从头发等所成的身而住。”既然这样说了,那么“因此,比丘,你于受安住于受随观而住,热诚、正知、具念,调伏世间的贪忧;因此,比丘,你于心安住于心随观而住……调伏贪忧;因此,比丘,你于法安住于法随观而住……调伏贪忧”也就随之被说到了——应当知道这就是略义。至于详细含义,注释书里已经多处讲过,我们这里就不再展开。巴利
‘‘Kāyagatāya satiyā vuttāya tadavasesā vedanāgatāsatiādayoyeva vattabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammāpi vuttā bhavantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā yena niyyānikalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca vuttā bhavantīti attho. ‘‘Tasmā abhijjhādomanassena abhibhūtattā iha mama sāsane, bhikkhu, tvaṃ ātāpī sampajāno satimā hutvā loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ tadaṅgappahānena vā vikkhambhanappahānena vā vineyya vinayitvā kāye kesādirūpakāye kāyānupassī kesādirūpakāyānupassī hutvā viharāhī’’ti bhagavatā vutte sati ‘‘tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ, tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, citte cittānupassī viharāhi…pe… domanassaṃ, tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, dhammesu dhammānupassī viharāhi…pe… domanassa’’nti vuttaṃ bhavatīti saṅkhepattho veditabbo. Vitthārattho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 23) bahudhā vuttoti amhehi na vitthārito.
有人会问:如果只说到一个念处,为什么却说了四个念处呢?因为需要这样回答,所以说了“热诚即精进根”等话。其中,用“热诚”这个词,说的是在身、受、心、法当中生起的精进根;用“正知”这个词,说的是在身、受、心、法当中生起的慧根;用“具念”这个词,说的是在身、受、心、法当中生起的念根;用“调伏世间的贪忧”这个词,说的是在身、受、心、法当中生起的定根,而不是只在身当中生起的。这样一来,如果有人说:以这种方式,对于在身当中随观身的修行者来说,四念处就达到了修习圆满。那么在这种情况下,因为精进、慧、念、定这四根是成就四念处的因素,它们具有同一相、同一特征,所以就说它们达到了圆满——这就是这里的衔接方式。因此,注释书里说:“成就四念处的这些根,因为自性上没有差别,所以是同一特征。”巴利
‘‘Ekasmiṃ satipaṭṭhāne vutte kasmā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā vuttā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘ātāpīti vīriyindriya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ātāpī’’ti iminā padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sampajāno’’ti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ paññindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Satimā’’ti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ satindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ samādhindriyaṃ vuttaṃ, na kāyeyeva pavattaṃ. Evaṃ pakārena kāye kāyānupassino yogāvacarassa cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti ce vadeyya, evaṃ sati catunnaṃ vīriyapaññāsatisamādhīnaṃ indriyānaṃ catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ sādhakabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā samānalakkhaṇattā pāripūriṃ gacchantīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘catusatipaṭṭhānasādhane imesaṃ indriyānaṃ sabhāvabhedābhāvato samānalakkhaṇattā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23).
24 有人这样问:既然这样说,那应该只讲四念处才对,怎么能讲三十七菩提分法呢?因为需要这样说明,所以就说了“于四念处中”等话。在这里,当瑜伽行者修习四念处时,他的四正勤就达到修习圆满。其余各项也应这样配合理解。了悟四谛就叫“觉”,也就是圣道智;趋向于觉的,叫“觉支”。属于觉——圣道智——的分支,就叫“菩提分”。巴利
24. ‘‘Evaṃ vuttepi cattāro satipaṭṭhānāyeva vattabbā bhaveyyuṃ, kathaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā vattabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu yena yogāvacarena bhāviyamānesu tassa yogāvacarassa cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bujjhanaṃ bodhaṃ, ariyamaggañāṇaṃ, bodhaṃ gacchantīti bodhaṅgamā. Bodhassa ariyamaggañāṇassa pakkhe bhavāti bodhipakkhiyā.
因为有人会问:“难道只有善法以同一特征被简择出来,不善法就不是吗?”所以说了“如是,不善法也……”等话。这里的意思是:正如善法以同一特征被确定,不善法也应当以同一特征被确定。因为有人会问“怎样确定呢?”为了说明应当以“同属应断”这一特征来确定,就说“以同一特征,断除而趣向灭尽”。其中,“以同一特征”是指因为同属应断而具有相同的特征。因为有人会问“什么是断除而趣向灭尽?”就说了“于四念处中……”等话。巴利
‘‘Kusalāyeva dhammā ekalakkhaṇabhāvena nīharitā kiṃ, udāhu akusalāpi dhammā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘evaṃ akusalāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kusalā dhammā ekalakkhaṇattena niddhāritā yathā, evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattena niddhāritabbāyevāti attho. ‘‘Kathaṃ niddhāretabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā pahānekaṭṭhabhāvena niddhāretabbāti dassento ‘‘ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti āha. Tattha ekalakkhaṇattāti pahānekaṭṭhabhāvena samānalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Katamaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,对于四念处……当瑜伽行者修习身至念处时,他对头发等不净色身所起的“净”颠倒想就被断除,这位瑜伽行者的段食就得到遍知。因为经上说“食集故色集”,所以当他对色身的欲贪断除时,对作为其生起条件的段食的欲贪也就断除,这就是这里的意思。当修习受至念处时,对苦所起的“乐”颠倒想就被断除,这位瑜伽行者的触食就得到遍知。因为经上说“触缘受”,所以当他对受的欲贪断除时,对作为其条件的触食的欲贪也就断除。当修习心至念处时,对无常所起的“常”颠倒想就被断除,这位瑜伽行者的识食就得到遍知。当修习法至念处时,对无我所起的“我”颠倒想就被断除,这位瑜伽行者的意思食就得到遍知。这样一一对应地说明每一种应当断除的情况时,其余应当断除的也就随之得到说明,因为它们同属应当断除这一共同特征。应当这样理解其中的含义。巴利
Tattha catūsu…pe… pariññaṃ gacchantīti kāyāgatāsatipaṭṭhāne yogāvacarena bhāviyamāne sati tena yogāvacarena asubhe kesādike rūpakāye ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa kabaḷīkārāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, ‘‘āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.56) vuttattā rūpakāye chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa samudaye kabaḷīkārāhārepi chandarāgo pahīyatīti attho. Vedanāgatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne sati dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa phassāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vuttattā vedanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa paccaye phassāhāre chandarāgo pahīyati. Cittagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa viññāṇāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati. Dhammagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa manosañcetanāhāro pariññaṃ gacchatīti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā ekekasmiṃ pahātabbe vutte tadavasesā pahātabbā vuttā bhavanti pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti attho gahetabbo.
在“他的诸食走向遍知”这句话里,所领会的意思是:在诸食中生起的欲贪、嗔、痴被彻底去除了。因为只要缘段食而生起的欲贪还存在,对段食的遍知就根本不可能有;而当那欲贪被断除时,遍知才会生起。对其余几种食的知解也是同样的道理。某位瑜伽行者修习了四念处,颠倒了被断除,对食的遍知已经生起,这位瑜伽行者就从诸取中成为无取。因为对于被想成“净”的身体,欲取会特别生起,所以被想成“净”的身体是欲取的所依;而通过身至念应当随念的身体,被想成不净的头发等,绝不是欲取的所依。由于以乐受的滋味为门而见取会生起,所以被想成“乐”的受是见取的所依;而通过受至念应当随观的受,绝不是见取的所依。由于以执取“心是常”的见解为门,会执取“通过这样那样的自己的戒和禁行而清净”,所以心是戒禁取的所依;而通过心至念应当随观的心,绝不是戒禁取的所依。对于没有以名色分别如实照见诸法的人,在诸法中有对我的执著,所以诸法是执我语取的所依;而通过法至念应当随观的诸法,绝不是执我语取的所依。因此,当四念处被修习时,就从诸取中成为无取——应当领会这就是那句话的意思。巴利
‘‘Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti vacane āhāresu pavattā kāmarāgadosamohā byantīkatā hontīti attho gahito. Kabaḷīkārāhārañhi ārabbha pavatte kāmarāge vijjamāne kabaḷīkārāhārassa vijānanā nattheva, tasmiṃ kāmarāge pana pahīne parijānanā bhavatīti. Sesāhārajānanampi eseva nayo. Yassa yogāvacarassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, vipallāsā pahīnā, āhāraparijānanā uppannā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno bhavati. Subhasaññite hi kāye kāmupādānaṃ visesena bhavatīti subhasaññito kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, kāyagatāya satiyā anusaritabbo asubhasaññito kesādi kāmupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Sukhavedanāya assādavasena diṭṭhupādānaṃ bhavatīti sukhasaññitā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. ‘‘Cittaṃ nicca’’nti diṭṭhigahaṇavasena tassa tassa attano sīlavatavasena parisuddhīti parāmasanaṃ hotīti cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Dhamme nāmarūpaparicchedena yathābhūtaṃ apassantassa dhammesu attābhiniveso hotīti dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu na honti eva. Tasmā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatīti vuttanti adhippāyo gahetabbo.
有人问:修习念处的瑜伽行者,是不是只从执取中解脱,却仍被诸轭束缚?为了说明他也从诸轭中脱离,所以说了“从诸轭中脱离”等话。其中,“从诸轭中”是指从欲轭、有轭、见轭、无明轭中。“脱离”是指通过彼分断、镇伏断、正断断而远离、解脱的意思。因为被执为“净”的色身是欲贪的所依,但以身至念应当随观的身,绝不是欲贪的所依。被执为“乐”或“乐因”的有,是有贪的所依;但以受至念应当随观的有,不是有贪的所依。应被执为“我”的心,是见轭的所依;但以心至念应当随观的心,不是见轭的所依。由于难以分析,且诸法唯是法性而难以通达,所以不应被分析、不应被唯以法性通达的诸法,是无明轭的所依;但以法至念应当随观的诸法,不是无明轭的所依。因此,四念处随观者被称为“从诸轭中脱离”。这个道理也应套用到“从诸漏中成为无漏”“从诸暴流中成为已渡”等处。巴利
‘‘Yena yogāvacarena satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehiyeva anupādāno bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā yogādīhipi visaṃyutto bhavatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yogehi ca visaṃyutto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yogehi cāti kāmayogabhavayogadiṭṭhiyogaavijjāyogehi ca. Visaṃyuttoti tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanappahānasamucchedappahānavasena vigato, vimutto ca bhavatīti attho. Subhasaññito hi rūpakāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu hoti, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu na hotveva. ‘‘Sukho’’ti vā ‘‘sukhahetū’’ti vā gahaṇīyo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu hoti, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu na hoti. ‘‘Attā’’ti abhinivisitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu hoti, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu na hoti. Vinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā avinibbhujitabbā, dhammamattatāya appaṭivijjhitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu honti, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu na honti. Tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako ‘‘yogehi ca visaṃyutto’’ti vutto. Ayaṃ nayo āsavehi ca anāsavo bhavati, oghehi ca nitthiṇṇo bhavatīti etthāpi yojetabbo.
被称为“从诸结缚中脱离”这句里:被看成清净的色身,是贪欲身结缚的所依;但以身至念来随观的色身,并不是贪欲身结缚的所依。具有苦苦、变易苦、行苦性质的受,是嗔恚身结缚的所依,因此说“于苦受中,嗔随眠潜在”(中部1.465);但以受至念来随观的受,并不是嗔恚身结缚的所依。由于执著“心是常”,常见者便执取“由自己的戒得清净,由自己的禁行得清净”,所以被执为“常”的心,是戒禁取身结缚的所依;但以心至念来随观的心,并不是戒禁取身结缚的所依。由于不见诸法具有缘与名色的自性,就生起有见和无有见,所以被执取为“这是真实”的诸法,是执此真实身结缚的所依;但以法至念来随观的诸法,并不是执此真实身结缚的所依。因此,修习四念处随观的人,被称为“从诸结缚中脱离”。巴利
Ganthehi ca vippayutto bhavatīti ettha pana subhasaññito rūpakāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo rūpakāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu na hoti. Dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu honti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu na hoti. ‘‘Cittaṃ nicca’’nti abhinivesavasena sassatassa ‘‘attano sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti parāmasanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘nicca’’nti gahitaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsakāyaganthassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsassa vatthu na hoti. Dhammānaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpasabhāvassa adassanato bhavadiṭṭhivibhavadiṭṭhi hoti, tasmā ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti abhinivisitabbā dhammā idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthassa vatthu na honti, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako ‘‘ganthehi ca vippayutto’’ti vutto.
把身体看成清净美妙的,身体就是贪欲之箭的所依;但以随身念而应当被观察的身体,就不是贪欲之箭的所依。把感受看成快乐的,嗔恨就由此而生,所以感受是嗔恨之箭的所依;但以随受念而应当被观察的感受,就不是嗔恨之箭的所依。执取“心是我”,再以“我更殊胜”等方式生起慢心之箭,心就是它的所依;但以随心念而应当被观察的心,就不是慢心之箭的所依。由于不了解诸法具有缘与名色各自的性质,诸法就成了愚痴之箭的所依;但以随法念而应当被观察的诸法,就不是愚痴之箭的所依。因此,修习四念处随观的人,被称为“从诸箭中成为无箭者”。巴利
Subhasaññito ca kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu na hoti. Sukhasaññitāya vedanāya doso hoti, tasmā vedanā dosasallassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā dosasallassa vatthu na hoti. ‘‘Cittaṃ attā’’ti gahetvā ‘‘attā seyyo’’tiādivasena pavattassa mānasallassa cittaṃ vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ mānasallassa vatthu na hoti. Dhammānaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpasabhāvassa ajānanato dhammā mohasallassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā mohasallassa vatthu na honti, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako ‘‘sallehi ca visallo bhavatī’’ti vutto.
老师说过:“他的诸食会得到遍知。”有人可能会问:“难道只有诸食才会被这位修行者遍知,别的就不会吗?”为了说明这位修行者的识住也会得到遍知,所以接着说:“他的识住也会得到遍知。”如果有人说:修习了四念处的那位修行者,只有身、受、心、法会得到遍知,识住不会得到遍知——那么,当他通过身随观等修法遍知了身、受、心、法时,想也应该得到遍知。因为当被称为受和心的诸法得到遍知时,由于想与它们不相分离,想也就得到了遍知。巴利
‘‘Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti ācariyena vuttaṃ, ‘‘kiṃ pana āhārāva assa yogāvacarassa pariññaṃ gacchanti, udāhu aññepī’’ti pucchitabbattā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo ca assa yogāvacarassa pariññaṃ gacchantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yogāvacarena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, tassa yogāvacarassa kāyavedanācittadhammāva pariññaṃ gaccheyyuṃ, na viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti ce vadeyya kāyānupassanādīhi ca kāyavedanācittadhammesu pariññātesu saññāyapi pariññātabbabhāvato. Sā hi vedanācittasaṅkhātena dhammesu pariññātesu avinābhāvato pariññātāvāti.
修习了四念处的那位瑜伽行者,从诸取中解脱而成为无取者,从诸轭中脱离而成为离轭者,从诸蕴中脱离而成为离蕴者,从诸漏中脱离而成为无漏者,从诸暴流中渡出而成为已渡越者,从诸箭中脱离而成为无箭者——这段话已经说过了。因为有人会问“他仅仅是这样呢,还是也有别的情况”,所以为了说明他也不会走向非行处,就说“他不会走向诸非行处”。对于被看作清净美妙等的色身还抱有期待的人,会走向欲的非行处;因此,被看作清净美妙等的色身特别成为欲非行处的所依。然而,以入出息等为所缘、应当通过身随观念处来随观的身,不会成为欲非行处的所依;所以,修习身随观念处的人不会走向欲非行处。以乐受的滋味而感受的人,因为乐受变坏而生起嗔恚;因此,乐受成为嗔非行处的所依。然而,应当通过受随观念处来随观的受,不会成为嗔非行处的所依;所以,修习受随观念处的人不会走向嗔非行处。由于相续密集而被执取为“常、恒”的心,成为痴的所依。然而,应当通过心随观念处来随观的心,不会成为痴的所依;所以,修习心随观念处的人不会走向痴非行处。对不分别、不了知诸法自性的人生起恐惧;因此,不分别、不了知自性的诸法成为恐惧的所依。然而,应当通过法随观念处来随观、应当分别了知的诸法,不会成为贪的所依;所以,修习法随观念处的人不会走向恐惧非行处。像这样,以应当断除的方式,把同一种特相的、即使是不善的诸法也举出来之后,现在为了总结,又说了“像这样,即使是不善的诸法,也因为同一种特相而走向断除、走向消失”。巴利
Yena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno ca, yogehi visaṃyutto ca, khandhehi vippayutto ca, āsavehi anāsavo ca, oghehi nitthiṇṇo ca, sallehi visallo ca bhavatīti vutto, ‘‘kiṃ pana tathāvidhova hoti, udāhu aññathāpī’’ti pucchitabbattā agatimpi na gacchatīti dassento ‘‘agatigamanehi ca na agatiṃ gacchatī’’ti āha. Subhādisaññite rūpakāye apekkhamāno puggalo chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti subhādisaññito rūpakāyo visesato chandāgatiyā vatthu hoti, kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbo assāsapassāsādiko kāyo chandāgatiyā vatthu na hoti, tasmā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo chandāgatiṃ na gacchati. Sukhavedanassādavasena vedayamāno tadabhāvena byāpādaṃ āgacchatīti sukhavedanā dosāgatiyā vatthu hoti, vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbā vedanā dosāgatiyā vatthu na hoti , tasmā vedanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo dosāgatiṃ na gacchati. Santatighanavasena ‘‘niccaṃ, dhuva’’nti gahitaṃ cittaṃ mohassa vatthu hoti, cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ mohassa vatthu na hoti, tasmā cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo dosāgatiṃ na gacchati. Vibhajitvā dhammasabhāvaṃ ajānantassa bhayaṃ jāyatīti vibhajitvā ajāniyasabhāvā dhammā bhayassa vatthu honti, dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbā vibhajitvā jānitabbā dhammā rāgassa vatthu na honti, tasmā dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo bhayāgatiṃ na gacchati. Evaṃ pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇe akusalepi dhamme nīharitvā idāni nigametuṃ ‘‘evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti puna vuttaṃ.
导师说过:讲到应当修习的诸法时,如果只说了其中一部分,那么其余也应当修习的法,因为具有同一特相,也应当提出来说明;讲到应当断除的诸法时,如果只说了其中一部分,那么其余也应当断除的法,因为具有同一特相,也应当提出来说明。这是我们已了知的。为了用另一种方式展示特相摄的实例,所以说“又或者,于任何处……”——因为如果还有别的应当说的,你们也应当说出来。其中,“于任何处”:在讲色的一分时,世尊讲了色根,即具有变坏特相的眼根等直到命根的八种根,这是色的一分。就在那讲色一分的教说中,具有变坏特相的眼界等直到触界的十种色界,也因为变坏这一同一特相而被讲了;整个色蕴也被讲了;具有变坏特相的眼处等直到触处的十种处,也因为变坏这一同一特相而被世尊讲了。巴利
Bhāvetabbesu dhammesu ekadesesu vutte tadavasesāpi bhāvetabbā dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā nīharitvā vattabbā, pahātabbesupi dhammesu ekadese vutte tadavasesāpi dhammā pahātabbā ekalakkhaṇattā nīharitvā vattabbāti ācariyena vuttā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘aññathāpi yadi vattabbā siyuṃ, tepi vadathā’’ti vattabbabhāvato aññenapi pariyāyena lakkhaṇahārassa udāharaṇāni dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha yattha yassaṃ rūpekadesadesanāyaṃ rūpindriyaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhundriyādijīvitindriyapariyosānaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriyaṃ rūpekadesaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ. Tattheva tassaṃ rūpekadesadesanāyaṃ rūpadhātu ruppanalakkhaṇā cakkhudhātādiphoṭṭhabbadhātupariyosānā dasavidhā rūpadhātu ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā desitā. Sabbo rūpakkhandho ca desito. Rūpāyatanaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhāyatanādiphoṭṭhabbāyatanapariyosānaṃ dasavidhaṃ āyatanaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā bhagavatā desitaṃ.
或者,在某一种关于受的部分教说中,世尊如果说了乐受,那么在这种关于受的部分教说中,也就说了乐根,说了喜根,还说了苦集圣谛,因为乐受与它们具有同一特相。或者,在某一种关于受的部分教说中,世尊如果说了苦受,那么在这种关于受的部分教说中,也就说了苦根,说了忧根,还说了苦圣谛,因为苦受与它们具有同一特相。或者,在某一种关于受的部分教说中,世尊如果说了不苦不乐受,那么在这种关于受的部分教说中,也就说了舍根,还说了整个缘起。应当这样连接理解。巴利
Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ sukhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ sukhindriyañca desitaṃ, somanassindriyañca desitaṃ, dukkhasamudayo ariyasaccañca desitaṃ sukhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ dukkhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ dukkhindriyañca desitaṃ domanassindriyañca desitaṃ, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccañca desitaṃ dukkhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ upekkhindriyañca desitaṃ, sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo ca desitoti yojanā kātabbā.
在哪一部教法中宣说了不苦不乐受,在那部教法中就应当也宣说了舍根,因为它们具有相同的特征。有人会问:“缘起是依靠什么而宣说的呢?”为了说明这个理由,先问“以什么因缘”,然后为了显示因缘,说出了“不苦不乐受……”等话。在这里,因为无明随眠于不苦不乐受,所以宣说了无明。而一旦宣说了无明,以无明为根本的整个缘起也就应当被视为已经宣说了,正如“无明缘行……乃至苦蕴的集起”所说的那样。应当这样理解其意趣。巴利
Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā desitā, tassaṃ desanāyaṃ upekkhindriyaṃ desitaṃ hotu samānalakkhaṇattā, ‘‘kena paṭiccasamuppādo desito bhaveyyā’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘kena kāraṇenā’’ti pucchitvā kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya hi yasmā avijjā anuseti, tasmā avijjā desitā hoti. Avijjāya ca desitāya avijjāmūlako sabbopi paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti desitova hotīti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo.
阿阇梨说:“以顺转方式展开的缘起,也就是‘无明缘行……乃至(苦蕴的)集起’,是已被宣说的。”他心里考虑到这样的责难:“如果这样展开的那个缘起已被宣说,那么照这样说,整个缘起就都被宣说了”——这话不该说。于是说出“那个……”等文。在这里,顺转方式展开的那个(缘起),应当从有贪、有嗔、有痴的杂染一边来牵引阐明。而逆转方式展开的那个缘起,也就是以“由于无明的无余离贪灭尽,所以行灭”等为开端的那个,应当从离贪、离嗔、离痴的圣法一边来牵引阐明。至于顺转和逆转两种方式展开的那个缘起,则应当从这两边来牵引阐明。因此,应当说“整个缘起都已宣说”,这个意趣要这样把握。巴利
‘‘Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti anulomavasena pavatto yo paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘yadi tathā pavatto so ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito, evaṃ sati sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito’’ti na vattabboti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘so cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo ca anulomavasena pavatto, so ca sarāgasadosasamohasaṃkilesapakkhena hātabbo. Yo ca paṭilomavasena ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādiko pavatto, so ca vītarāgavītadosavītamohaariyadhammehi hātabbo. Yo ca anulomapaṭilomavasena pavatto, so ca tadubhayehi hātabbo. Tasmā ‘‘sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito’’ti vattabbovāti adhippāyo gahetabbo.
阿阇梨依据“凡是法具有同一相,对那些法中的某一法加以说明时,其余的法也就被说明了”等等(《导论》23),所说的“相摄的应用”,就应当这样来做,不应另作别的方式来做。由于有人会问是否也能另作别的方式,为了表明“也可以作其他方式的相摄应用”,所以说了“如是,凡是法……”等文。在这里,地等色法、触等非色法,从执持作用、碰触作用等来说是同一相;对那些色法与非色法中的某一法加以说明时,其余的色法与非色法也就被说明了。地等色法、触等非色法,从坚硬相等相、碰触等相来说是同一相;对那些色法与非色法中的某一法加以说明时,其余的色法与非色法也就被说明了。凡是法,从坏灭的共相、倾向的共相、无常等的共相,或者从蕴、处等的共相来说是同一相;对那些有为法中的某一有为法加以说明时,其余的法也就被说明了。凡是有为法,从坏与生是有为、死与生是有为、同灭与生是有为,或者从死与生来说是同一相;对那些有为法中的某一有为法加以说明时,其余的有为法也就被说明了——应当这样作义理上的贯通。巴利
‘‘Ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā dhammā vuttā bhavantītiādinā (netti. 23) ācariyena yā lakkhaṇahārayojanā vuttā, sāva kātabbā, na aññathā kātabbā’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato aññathāpi lakkhaṇahārayojanā kātabbāyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ ye dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ye pathavīādayo rūpadhammā, ye phassādayo arūpadhammā sandhāraṇādikiccato saṅghaṭṭanādikiccato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā rūpārūpadhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye pathavīādayo rūpadhammā, ye phassādayo arūpadhammā kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇato phusanādilakkhaṇato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā rūpārūpadhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye dhammā ruppanasāmaññato namanasāmaññato aniccādisāmaññato vā khandhāyatanādisāmaññato vā ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ saṅkhatadhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā dhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye saṅkhatadhammā bhaṅguppādato saṅkhato cutūpapātato samānanirodhuppādasaṅkhatato vā cutūpapātato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ saṅkhatadhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā saṅkhatadhammā vuttā bhavantīti atthayojanā kātabbā.
在“依作用与依相”等说法里,应当知道:通过“与”这个字,已经把俱行、同等因等含义包括进来了。而在俱行等当中应当说明的内容,正是像“种种身、种种想者,由于不作意种种想”等经文里那样,已经依据俱行的性质,辨明了与想俱行的诸法——这一点前面已经说过。巴利
Kiccato ca lakkhaṇato cātiādīsu ca-saddena sahacaraṇasamānahetutādayo saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā . Sahacaraṇādīsu ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘nānattakāyanānattasaññino (dī. ni. 3.341, 357, 359; a. ni. 9.24), nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā’’tiādīsu sahacāritāya saññāsahagatā dhammā niddhāritātiādinā vuttameva.
有人可能会问:当一法依自相被宣说时,凭什么说其余诸法也依同一相等而被宣说了呢?我们怎么知道、怎么信受这一点?正因为这样,才说了“因此”等话。这里的意思是:由于其余诸法也已被宣说,具寿马哈咖咤那所说的“于一法已说时”等话,就是用这句话告诉你们:应当知道、应当信受其余诸法也已被宣说。巴利
‘‘Ekasmiṃ dhamme sarūpato vutte ekalakkhaṇādito avasiṭṭhadhammānampi vuttabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena avasiṭṭhadhammānampi vuttabhāvena ‘‘vuttamhi ekadhamme’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āyasmā mahākaccāno āha, tena vacanena tumhehi avasiṭṭhānampi vuttabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
到这里,相牵引已经圆满,再没有别的安立了。因为应当这样说,所以说了“安立的相牵引”。其中,如果某部经里说了一法时,其余诸法也由这种相牵引而被简别出来,那么在这部经里,这个相牵引就是被安立了,是在简别之后而作结合的——应当这样理解它的意思。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā ca lakkhaṇahāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto lakkhaṇo hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhadhammāpi yena lakkhaṇahārena niddhāritā, tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so lakkhaṇo hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yojitoti attho daṭṭhabboti.
有智慧的人应当依照注释书和复注,先详尽地分析,然后再把握其中的深义。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
四阵牵引分别的阐释巴利
6. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
25 用种种解说特相的方式,也就是相牵引分别,把与经义相同的部分分别说明之后,这个作为解说特相的相牵引分别就讲完了。因为接下来会被问到“什么是四阵牵引分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是四阵牵引”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在前面已经指出的十六种示导牵引等当中。“什么是”应当理解为:什么是作为解说特相的四阵牵引,也就是名为四阵牵引分别的那个。因此说:“其中,什么是四阵牵引?就是四阵牵引分别。”因为接着会被问“依这四阵牵引,应当寻求文法等什么”,所以说了“依文句”等话。这里“依文句”的意思是:四阵牵引的经文特别具有考察文句的性质,所以被称为“文句”;依照这四阵牵引,做解说的人应当寻求经文的文法、经文的意趣、经文的因缘、经文前后文的衔接。巴利
25. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgena suttatthehi samānatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo catubyūho hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu. Katamoti katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūho hāro catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamo catubyūho hāroti catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 25). ‘‘Iminā catubyūhahārena katamassa neruttādayo gavesitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘byañjanenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha byañjanenāti catubyūhahārassa suttassa visesato byañjanavicayabhāvato ‘‘byañjanā’’ti vohāritena iminā catubyūhahārena suttassa neruttañca, suttassa adhippāyo ca, suttassa nidānañca, suttassa pubbāparasandhi ca saṃvaṇṇentehi gavesitabboti attho.
因为会被问“在应当用四种阵列方式去探寻的语义解释等当中,哪一种是经文应当探寻的语义解释”,所以说了“其中,什么是语义解释”等话。它的意思是:在那些应当用这四种阵列方式去探寻的语义解释等当中,如果有人问“哪一种是经文的语义解释,也就是词源解释”,那就应当回答:经文经过拣择之后说出的自性施设,也就是语言表达,是应当探寻的;这种属于自性语言表达的词源解释,就叫作语义解释。因为会被问“所谓语言表达就叫作语义解释,那语言表达又是什么”,所以说了“词语的组合”。词语之间相互结合、连贯,就是词语的组合。应当这样连接理解:经文的意义应当怎样解说,自性语言表达就怎样生起,那生起的自性语言表达本身就叫作语言表达。又因为会被问“那自性语言表达又是什么”,所以说了“对诸法以名称而有的智”。意思是:以某种作为原因的名称施设,对于应当了知的诸法,善巧的人凭借名称——比如地的名称、触的名称、蕴的名称等——以种种名称对诸法生起智,那作为原因的名称施设,就叫作自性语言表达。文中的“yaṃ”是词性变格,实际意思是“yāya”。因为应当说“请开示对词性、原性和诸法以名称而生起的智”,所以说了“yadā hi”等话。不过注释书里说,以“yadā hi,诸比丘”等文,是在解释“对诸法以名称而有的智”这一句的含义。它的意思在注释书里已经分析说过了,所以这里不再讨论。巴利
‘‘Catubyūhahārena gavesitabbesu neruttādīsu katamaṃ suttassa gavesitabbaṃ nerutta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nerutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – tattha tesu iminā catubyūhahārena gavesitabbesu neruttādīsu katamaṃ suttassa neruttaṃ nibbacanaṃ nāmāti ce puccheyya? Suttassa yā nirutti niddhāretvā vuttā sabhāvapaññatti gavesitabbā, idaṃ sabhāvaniruttibhūtaṃ nibbacanaṃ neruttaṃ nāmāti. ‘‘Yā nirutti neruttaṃ nāmāti vuttā, kā pana sā niruttī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘padasaṃhitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Padesu saṃhitā yuttā padasaṃhitā. Yathā yathā suttattho vattabbo, tathā tathā yā sabhāvanirutti pavattā, sā pavattā sabhāvaniruttiyeva nirutti nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Kā pana sā sabhāvaniruttī’’ti pucchitabbattā ca ‘‘yaṃ dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ yāya kāraṇabhūtāya nāmapaññattiyā dhammānaṃ neyyānaṃ nāmaso pathavīnāmādinā vā phassanāmādinā vā khandhanāmādinā vā vividhena nāmena atthadhammādīsu kusalassa puggalassa ñāṇaṃ pavattati, sā kāraṇabhūtā nāmapaññatti sabhāvanirutti nāmāti attho. Yanti ca liṅgavipallāso, yāyāti attho. ‘‘Liṅgapakatidhammānaṃ nāmaso pavattamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ vivaritvā kathehī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yadā hi bhikkhūtiādinā ‘dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’nti padassa atthaṃ vivaratī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 25) vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vibhajitvā vuttovāti na vicārito.
26 26. 词源解释已由导师分别解说,我们也已经知道。因为有人问“经中应当探寻的世尊意趣是哪一个”,所以说了“其中,什么是意趣”等话。这些话的意思很明显。另外,在“法确实保护”等经文里,如果一个人希望依靠自己所护持的法而得到保护,那么世尊的意趣就是:他应当护持法。如果一个人希望从恶趣中解脱,那么世尊的意趣就是:他应当护持法。巴利
26. Neruttaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ ‘‘katamo sutte gavesitabbo bhagavato adhippāyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo adhippāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho pākaṭo. Apica ‘‘dhammo have rakkhatī’’tiādīsu yena puggalena attanā rakkhitena dhammena rakkhitabbabhāvo icchito, so dhammaṃ rakkhissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo. Yo puggalo duggatito muccitukāmo, so dhammaṃ rakkhissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
就像“盗贼在破门处被抓住”等经文里说的,如果有个盗贼想免于一死,世尊的意思是:他就不会再干盗贼的勾当。如果有人想从地狱等苦处解脱出来,世尊的意思是:他就不会再造恶业。巴利
Coro yathā sandhimukhe gahitotiādīsu yo coro ghātanato muccitukāmo, so corakammaṃ na karissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo. Yo puggalo apāyādidukkhato muccitukāmo, so pāpakammaṃ na karissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
在“渴望快乐”等经文中,世尊的意思是:那些想要得到快乐的人,将会远离伤害他人。巴利
Sukhakāmānītiādīsu ye puggalā sukhaṃ icchanti, te parahiṃsanato vivajjissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
在“昏沉且贪食”等经文里,那些想要从一再发生的生、老、死中解脱出来的人,世尊的用意是:他们会在饮食上知量,会知足,会过清净的生活,会具足波罗提木叉防护之戒,会不懈怠,会修观,会怀有恭敬与尊重。巴利
Middhī yadā hoti mahagghaso cātiādīsu ye puggalā punappunaṃ pavattamānajātijarāmaraṇato muccitukāmā, te bhojane mattaññuno bhavissanti, santuṭṭhā bhavissanti, suddhājīvā bhavissanti, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasampannā bhavissanti, atandino bhavissanti, vipassakā bhavissanti, sagāravā sappatissā bhavissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
在“不放逸是不死之道”等这类经文里,世尊的意思是:那些害怕死亡、想要涅槃的人,应当在布施、持戒、修习这些事上保持不放逸。巴利
Appamādo amatapadantiādīsu ye puggalā maccuno bhāyanti, nibbānamicchanti, te puggalā dānasīlabhāvanākammesu appamattā bhavissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
27 27. 经中应当探寻的意趣,老师已经分别解说,我们也已经了知。因为有人问“什么是经中应当探寻的因缘”,所以说了“其中,什么是因缘”等话。其中,因缘是指能取出果来给予,所以叫因缘。那是什么?就是原因。有财者,是指致力于财富增长之因的人,所以叫有财者。牧牛者,是指以主宰的身份守护、保护牛的人,所以叫牧牛者。依着,是指儿子、牛等。人的,是指有儿子的男子或牧牛者的。这里依据词性、依据多数情况、或依据在偈颂中出现的方式来表述。也应当看到,女人确实也有依着于儿子、牛等而产生的喜悦。巴利
27. Sutte gavesitabbo adhippāyo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca viññāto, ‘‘katamaṃ suttassa gavesitabbaṃ nidāna’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nidāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nidānanti phalaṃ nīharitvā detīti nidānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Kāraṇaṃ. Dhaniyoti dhanavaḍḍhanakāraṇe niyuttoti dhaniyo. Gopālakoti gāvo issarabhāvena pāleti rakkhatīti gopālako. Upadhīhīti puttagoṇādīhi (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.33). Narassāti puttimantassa vā gopālakassa vā narassāti ca padaṭṭhānavasena vā yebhuyyavasena vā gāthāyaṃ āgatavasena vā vuttaṃ, nāriyāpi upadhīhi nandanā atthevāti daṭṭhabbā.
用这个事物,也就是这个被称为依着的儿子、牛等事物。儿子、牛等事物在这里存续、活动,是让人欢喜的地方。有财者取了这样的意思:把欢喜拿出来给人,就是以儿子、牛等为起因,所以说依着是人的欢喜。世尊则取了这样的意思:儿子、牛等事物在这里存续、活动,是让人忧愁的地方,把忧愁拿出来给人,就是以儿子、牛等为起因,所以说依着是人的忧愁。所执取的就是执取。那是什么?就是儿子、牛等,这种执取称为依着,不是指烦恼的依着,也不是指蕴身的依着。巴利
Iminā vatthunāti upadhisaṅkhātena imināva puttagavādinā vatthunā. Vasati pavattati nandanā ettha puttagoṇādiketi vatthu. Nandanaṃ nīharitvā deti puttagoṇādikanti nidānanti atthaṃ gahetvā dhaniyo ‘‘upadhīhi narassa nandanā’’ti āha. Bhagavā pana ‘‘vasati pavattati socanā ettha puttagoṇādikehi vatthu, socanaṃ nīharitvā deti puttagoṇādikanti nidāna’’nti atthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘upadhīhi narassa socanā’’ti āha. Pariggahīyateti pariggahaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Puttagoṇādikaṃ, taṃ pariggahaṃ ‘‘upadhī’’ti āha, na kilesūpadhikāyakhandhūpadhinti.
所谓“所依”,就是指被称为诸蕴的身体。这里把身体说成“所依”,不是指儿子、牛之类的,也不是指所拥有的财物。巴利
Upadhīsūti khandhasaṅkhātesu kāyesu. Kāyaṃ ‘‘upadhī’’ti āha, na puttagavādikaṃ, na pariggahaṃ.
在外在的事物中,也就是在珠宝、耳环、儿女、妻子等事物中。巴利
Bāhiresuvatthūsūti maṇikuṇḍalaputtadārādīsu vatthūsu.
所谓欲乐,就是面对可意的对象时,以贪著其乐的方式生起的渴爱。对于以外部事物为对象的渴爱,就是面对可意的外部事物时,以贪著其乐的方式生起的渴爱。巴利
Kāmasukhanti kāmanīyesu assādasukhavasena pavattā taṇhā. Bāhiravatthukāya taṇhāyāti kāmanīyesu bāhiravatthūsu assādasukhavasena pavattāya taṇhāya.
对于以内在事物为依托的渴爱,是指在称为色身的这个内在事物上,以欢喜的方式生起的渴爱。巴利
Ajjhattikavatthukāyāti rūpakāyasaṅkhāte ajjhattikavatthumhi abhinandanavasena pavattāya.
再说,关于“内在事物之身”,是指在称为五蕴的内在事物中,以爱染的方式生起的渴爱。巴利
Puna ajjhattikavatthukāyāti pañcakkhandhasaṅkhāte ajjhattikavatthumhi sinehavasena pavattāya.
应当探寻的因缘已经分别解说了,我们也已经知道。因为有人问“应当探寻的前后连贯是什么”,所以说了“其中,什么是前后连贯”等话。那里的“于彼处”,就是指那些语义解释、意趣、因缘和前后连贯当中。“如同”,是指以黑暗等那样的体性。世尊说“为欲所盲……乃至……母亲”时,所指的就是这个欲爱;这个欲爱就是以那黑暗等的同一体性,与“为欲所盲……乃至……母亲”这首偈颂相连接。巴利
Gavesitabbaṃ nidānaṃ vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘katamo gavesitabbo pubbāparasandhī’’ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo pubbāparasandhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu neruttādhippāyanidānapubbāparasandhīsu. Yathāti yena andhakārādinā sabhāvena ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… mātara’’nti yaṃ kāmataṇhaṃ bhagavā āha, ayaṃ kāmataṇhā tathā tena andhakārādinā sabhāvena ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… mātara’’nti gāthā vuttāti yojanā.
偈颂的含义是这样的:想要、贪求,就叫“欲”,也就是欲爱。因为对义理无知、对法不能照见,所以是盲,称为“欲盲者”。被名为欲爱的网所覆盖、缠裹,因为对义理与法无知、不能照见,所以叫“网所覆者”。被名为渴爱的盖所遮蔽、掩盖,同样因为对义理与法无知、不能照见,所以叫“渴爱盖所蔽者”。那些被名为放逸的放逸束缚所绑、应当被绑的人,在义理与法上追随老死,就像在浅水里游动的鱼追随死亡,又像喝奶的小牛追随母牛一样,如此追随老死。应当这样理解。巴利
Gāthāttho pana – kāmetīti kāmo, kāmataṇhā, kāmena atthassa ajānanatāya dhammassa, apassanatāya ca andhāti kāmandhā. Kāmataṇhāsaṅkhātena jālena atthadhammānaṃ ajānanāpassanena sañchannā paliguṇṭhitāti jālasañchannā. Taṇhāsaṅkhātena chadanena tesaṃyeva atthadhammānaṃ ajānanāpassanena chāditā pihitāti taṇhāchadanachāditā. Atthadhammesu pamattasaṅkhātena pamādena bandhanena baddhā bandhitabbā puggalā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi, kumināmukhe pavattā macchā maraṇaṃ anventi iva ca, khīrapako vaccho mātaraṃ anveti iva ca, tathā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventīti gahetabbo.
“为欲所盲……中略……母亲”这个开示或偈颂里说到了欲爱,那么,它跟后面哪一个作为开示的文句相契合呢?因为需要这样问,所以这样问了之后,为了显示“它跟这个开示或偈颂相契合”,就说了“它跟哪一个……”等话。其中,“它”指的是“为欲所盲……中略……追随”这个开示或偈颂。“前后”是指在这个开示之前的那段开示文句或偈颂文句,以及之后的那段开示文句或偈颂文句。“相契合”,就是在问:是否互相连接、互相吻合、互相一致。巴利
‘‘Kāmandhā…pe… mātara’nti yāya desanāya, gāthāya vā kāmataṇhā vuttā, sā desanā, gāthā vā katamena desanābhūtena aparena yujjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā imāya desanāya, gāthāya vā yujjatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sā katamenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāti ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… anventī’’ti desanā, gāthā vā. Pubbāparenāti tato desanāto pubbena desanāvacanena, gāthāvacanena vā aparena desanāvacanena, gāthāvacanena vā. Yujjati yujjanaṃ eti sametīti pucchati.
所谓“如”,是指通过这种让人盲目、制造黑暗等的方式。世尊说的“染者……中略……人”这句偈语,正是与这种让人盲目、制造黑暗等的方式相契合,这就是衔接。偈语的意思是:染者,也就是正在被染着的人,不知道义理——不知道自利的目标和利他的目标。染者,也就是正在被染着的人,不能用智慧之眼看见法——看不见前面所说的义理的因。当贪控制住那个人的时候,那个人就有盲、有黑暗、有愚痴、有无明,应当这样理解。巴利
Yathāti yena andhakaraṇādinā. ‘‘Ratto…pe… nara’’nti yaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ bhagavā āha, tena gāthāvacanena tathā andhakaraṇādinā yujjatīti yojanā. Gāthāttho pana – ratto rañjanto puggalo atthaṃ attahitapayojanaṃ parahitapayojanaṃ na jānāti. Ratto rañjanto dhammaṃ yathāvuttassa atthassa hetuṃ paññācakkhunā na passati. Rāgo yaṃ naraṃ yadā sahate, tadā tassa narassa andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ aññāṇaṃ hotīti gahetabbo.
所谓“如是”,就是“如此”。因为盲、造成盲、被覆盖、造成覆盖。那同一个渴爱,就是“欲盲者……中略……母”这偈语所说的欲爱,也就是那欲爱。“被说示”是指:由后面那首偈语“染者……中略……人”,被世尊以言说方式说出、通过言说而使人知道。由于被说示的意义相同,所以前面的教示与后面的教示能够相合,这就是这段话要表达的意思。巴利
Itīti evaṃ. Andhatāya andhakaraṇatāya sañchannatāya sañchannakaraṇatāya. Sāyeva taṇhāti ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… mātara’’nti gāthāvacanena yā kāmataṇhā vuttā, sāyeva kāmataṇhā. Abhilapitāti ‘‘ratto…pe… nara’’nti aparena gāthāvacanena bhagavatā vohāritā voharaṇena ñāpitā, abhilapitassa atthassa samānatā pubbadesanā aparadesanāya yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
有人问:在两首偈颂里,是以哪些词句说到了同一个渴爱?为了确定地指出“是以这些词句说到的”,所以说了“且彼所说……”等话。其中,第一首偈颂里说的“欲盲者……中略……所蔽”这个词句,以及第二首偈颂里说的“染者……中略……不见”这个词句——世尊就是以这些显示烦恼现行的词句,即“欲盲者……中略……不见”,说到了第一首偈颂里所说的同一个欲爱。巴利
‘‘Dvīsu gāthāsu katamehi padehi sāyeva taṇhā abhilapitā’’ti pucchitabbattā imehi abhilapitāti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yañcāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… chāditā’’ti yañca padaṃ āha, dutiyagāthāyañca ‘‘ratto…pe… na passatī’’ti yañca padaṃ āha. Pariyuṭṭhānehi pariyuṭṭhānadīpakehi imehi ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… passatī’’ti padehi sāyeva paṭhamagāthāya vuttā kāmataṇhā ca bhagavatā abhilapitā.
因为要回答“所说的黑暗是什么?所说的导致再生的渴爱是什么?”这两个问题,所以说了“所谓黑暗……”等话。其中,所说的黑暗就是无明,这属于苦集;所说的导致再生的渴爱,这也属于苦集。这就是文句之间的连接关系。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ andhakāraṃ vuttaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yā taṇhā ponobhavikā vuttā, katamā sā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ andhakāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha andhakāraṃ yaṃ aññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo bhave. Yā ca taṇhā ponobhavikā vuttā, ayañca dukkhasamudayo bhaveti yojanā.
世尊说的“欲”这个词,指的就是这些烦恼欲。世尊说的“被网覆盖”这个词,是用它来显示:正是通过烦恼欲的加行和现行,心被它们控制、笼罩。因此——因为渴爱在某个心相续中生起后,不让那个心相续从轮回中出离,反而用色等所缘来引诱它,使心被烦恼占据并停留——所以渴爱会占据心,停留在心相续中。“以烦恼力”,是指以违犯烦恼的力量。“以现行力”,是指以尚未达到违犯就已生起的力量。“他们”,是指被渴爱之缚所系、如此安住者,也就是与上述具有渴爱的人同类。“追随老死”,是指不能超越老死;世尊以“追随老死”此语显示了老死的随转起,这就是文句连接。巴利
‘‘Kāmā’’ti yañca padaṃ bhagavā āha, tena padena ime kilesakāmā vuttā. ‘‘Jālasañchannā’’ti yañca padaṃ bhagavā āha, tena padena tesaṃyeva kilesakāmānaṃ payogena samudācārena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ bhagavā dasseti. Tasmāti yasmā yasmiṃ santāne taṇhā uppannā, taṃ santānaṃ saṃsārato nissarituṃ adatvā rūpārammaṇādīhi palobhayamānā hutvā cittaṃ kilesehi pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, tasmā taṇhāya cittaṃ pariyādāya santāne tiṭṭhamānattā. Kilesavasenāti vītikkamakilesavasena. Pariyuṭṭhānavasenāti vītikkamanaṃ appatvā uppajjamānavasena. Yeti vuttappakārataṇhāsahitapuggalasadisā. Teti te taṇhābandhanabaddhā ca edisakā ca puggalā. Jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi jarāmaraṇaṃ atikkamituṃ na sakkuṇanti. Ayanti jarāmaraṇānuppavatti ‘‘jarāmaraṇamanventī’’ti iminā vacanena bhagavatā dassitāti yojanā.
“欲盲者”等偈颂和“染者”等偈颂的前后连接,阿阇梨已经分别解说过了,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问:“‘彼之戏论与住立……’等偈颂中的前后连接,我们该怎么理解?”所以说了“彼之戏论……”等话。那首偈颂的意思是:那位牟尼没有戏论,也就是没有渴爱、慢和见;没有由渴爱、慢、见所造作的诸行;没有住立,也就是没有随眠和渴爱;没有像锁链一样的渴爱缠缚;没有像门闩一样的愚痴。这样的牟尼,被称为已经超越、已经越过戏论等一切的人。无渴爱、无慢、无见、无系缚、无门闩,在世间行走,那位牟尼不被包括诸天在内的、与渴爱俱行的世间所了知。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Kāmandhā’’tiādigāthāya ceva ‘‘ratto’’tiādigāthāya ca pubbāparasandhi ācariyena vibhatto , amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ ‘yassa papañcā ṭhitī cā’tiādigāthāsu pubbāparasandhi amhehi viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā yassa papañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā gāthāya – yassa munino papañcā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhī ca natthi, taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi abhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā ca natthi, ṭhitī anusayā taṇhā ca natthi, sandānasadisaṃ taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ natthi, palighasadiso moho ca natthi, so muni papañcādikaṃ sabbaṃ vītivatto atikkantoti vuccati. Nittaṇhaṃ nimānaṃ nidiṭṭhiṃ nisandānaṃ nipalighaṃ loke carantaṃ taṃ muniṃ sadevako taṇhāsahito loko na vijānātīti attho.
在偈颂里,世尊说到了戏论等,因为有人会问“那些是什么”,所以接着说了“名为戏论”等等。爱、慢、见这三种烦恼,会让它们所依止的人长久地在轮回中漂泊、受煎熬,所以叫戏论;由这些爱、慢、见作为俱生条件或支持条件所造作出来的种种行,也叫戏论。爱在相续中没有被断除,因此成为众生得以安住的因,所以叫“住”。当爱正在活动时,它的缠缚,以及三十六种爱网中所说的种种游走,这一切都以束缚所依之人的方式起作用,像锁链一样,所以叫“锁链”。无明因为阻挡所依之人进入涅槃之城,像门闩一样,所以叫“门闩”。因为有人会问“没有戏论等的那个存在,他超越了什么呢”,所以接着说了“那些……”。凡是上面说的那类戏论和诸行,上面说的那种住,上面说的那种锁链,上面说的那种门闩,如果这些都不存在,那么这位牟尼就已经超越了这一切戏论等。应当知道,这样的牟尼就被称为“无渴爱者”。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ papañcādayo bhagavatā vuttā, ‘‘katame te’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘papañcā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attano ādhārapuggalaṃ saṃsāre ciraṃ papañcantāpentī taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo ca, tāhi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi sahajātavasena vā upatthambhanavasena vā abhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā ca papañcā nāma. Santāne appahīnaṭṭhena anusayā taṇhā sattānaṃ tiṭṭhanahetuttā ṭhitī nāma. Pavattamānāya taṇhāya yaṃ pariyuṭṭhānañca chattiṃsataṇhāya jāliniyā yāni vicaritāni ca vuttāni, idaṃ sabbaṃ attano ādhāraṃ puggalaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena sandānasadisattā sandānaṃ nāma. Moho attano ādhārassa puggalassa nibbānanagarappavesanassa paṭisedhakattā palighasadisattā paligho nāma. ‘‘Yassa papañcādayo natthi, so kiṃ vītivatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ye cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye vuttappakārā papañcā saṅkhārā, yā ca vuttappakārā ṭhiti, yaṃ vuttappakāraṃ sandānañca, yaṃ vuttappakāraṃ palighañca natthīti vuttā, sabbaṃ etaṃ papañcādikaṃ yo muni samatikkanto, ayaṃ muni ‘‘nittaṇho’’ti vuccatīti daṭṭhabbo.
28 在“凡戏论等”这首偈颂里,提到了戏论等这些法。有人会问:在这些法当中,以渴爱、慢、邪见为因的诸行,什么时候、以几种方式给出果报?与那些行相应的渴爱,又什么时候、以几种方式给出果报?为了回答这个问题,所以说了“其中,缠缚行”等话。其中“其中”是指那些戏论行等当中。“缠缚行”是指以违犯的方式生起的缠缚,也就是不善的行思。现法受等:在现见之法、即今生的自体上感受果报的,叫现法受;或者,在现法中感受果报的,也叫现法受。那是什么?就是在“不可责难”等当中,以极度责难等方式生起的第一速行思。在下一世受生时感受果报的,叫生受,也就是第七速行思。在之后的种种转生、自体上感受果报的,叫后后受,也就是中间生起的五个速行思。由于给出三种果报,行就有这三类。同样,与这三类行思相应的三类渴爱,也给出三种果报:或者在现法自体上,或者在下一世投生时,或者在之后的转生中,使它生起。世尊就是这样宣说了能生果报的行,或者与那些行相应的渴爱。巴利
28. ‘‘Yassa papañcātiādigāthāyaṃ ye papañcādayo vuttā, tesu taṇhāmānadiṭṭhihetukā saṅkhārā kadā katividhaṃ phalaṃ denti, taṃsaṅkhārasampayuttā taṇhā kadā katividhaṃ phalaṃ detī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu papañcasaṅkhārādīsu. Pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārāti vītikkamavasena pavattā pariyuṭṭhānā akusalasaṅkhārā cetanā. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīti diṭṭhe passitabbe dhamme attabhāve vedanīyaṃ phalaṃ detīti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā, diṭṭhe dhamme phalaṃ vedetīti vā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā. Kā sā? Apadussanīyādīsu atidussanādivasena pavattā paṭhamajavanacetanā. Upapajje phalaṃ vedetīti upapajjavedanīyā, sattamajavanacetanā. Aparāpariyāye attabhāve phalaṃ vedetīti aparāpariyāyavedanīyā, majjhe pavattā pañca javanacetanā. Tiphaladānavasena tividhā saṅkhārā. Evaṃ imāya tividhāya saṅkhāracetanāya sampayuttā tividhā taṇhā tividhaṃ phalaṃ diṭṭhe vā dhamme attabhāve , upapajje vā anantarabhave, apare vā pariyāye bhave deti nibbattetīti evaṃ phalanibbattakasaṅkhāraṃ vā taṃsampayuttaṃ taṇhaṃ vā bhagavā āha.
有人问:世尊说能生果报的行,是用哪种开示或偈颂说的?那种开示或偈颂又和哪种开示或其他哪一种开示相合?为了回答这个问题,就说了“凡由贪所造之业”等。所说的“凡……世间”这一开示,和所说的“凡由贪所造之业……或于后转起中”这一开示,世尊这两种开示彼此相合、相应、相符——前面的和后面的相合,后面的和前面的相合,就像恒河水与耶牟那河水互相汇合、彼此交融一样。“凡……世间”的开示与“凡由贪所造之业……于后转起中”的开示相合、相符;“凡由贪所造之业……于后转起中”的开示也与“凡……世间”的开示相合、相符。应当这样理解其含义。有人问“怎么相合?”为了回答这个问题,就说了“其中,缠缚”等。意思是说,以能产生现法受等三种果报之义而相合。巴利
‘‘Yāya desanāya, gāthāya vā phalanibbattakaṃ saṅkhāraṃ āha, sā desanā, gāthā vā katamena desanābhūtena vā aparena yujjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ karotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘yassa…pe… loko’’ti desanā ca yā ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ…pe… apare vā pariyāye’’ti desanā ca vuttā, bhagavato idaṃ desanādvayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pubbāparena pubbaṃ aparena aparaṃ pubbena yujjati yujjanaṃ eti sameti, yathā gaṅgodakaṃ yamunodakena, yamunodakampi gaṅgodakena saṃsandati sameti. ‘‘Yassa…pe… loko’’ti desanā ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ…pe… pariyāye’’ti desanāya saṃsandati sameti, ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ…pe… pariyāye’’ti desanāpi ‘‘yassa…pe… loko’’ti desanāya saṃsandati sametīti attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Kathaṃ yujjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha pariyuṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādiphalattayanibbattakaṭṭhena yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
世尊所教导的每一部经,都是前后连贯、彼此相应的。为了把这一点展示出来,就把那些经一一举出来,说明它们前后如何互相吻合,所以才说了“如说”等这些话。至于吻合的方式,应当按照前面讲过的方法来理解。这里说的“其中”,是指在那些缠缚、行和渴爱的活动当中。“缠缚”是指由于不如理作意,以色等为所缘,在众生的心相续中生起的渴爱习性。所谓“以审察力”,就是依靠观见不净、无常等的力量,通过彼分断的方式应当断除。“诸行”是指应当以见来断除的诸行。“以见力”,就是依靠称为见的初道智之力应当断除。“三十六种渴爱活动”,是指除了应当以见断除的渴爱活动之外,其余那三十六种渴爱活动。渴爱已经出离的人,就是无渴爱者;无渴爱者的状态就是无渴爱性。那是什么?就是有余涅槃界。巴利
Yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ pubbāparena yujjati, taṃ taṃ suttampi nīharitvā pubbāparasaṃsandanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃsandanākāro vuttanayānusārena gahetabbo. Tatthāti tesu pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārataṇhāvicaritesu. Pariyuṭṭhānanti rūpārammaṇādīni ayonisomanasikārena ārabbha sattasantāne pavattaṃ taṇhācaritaṃ. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti asubhāniccādidassanabalena tadaṅgappahānavasena pahātabbaṃ. Saṅkhārāti dassanapahātabbā saṅkhārā. Dassanabalenāti dassanasaṅkhātapaṭhamamaggañāṇabalena pahātabbā. Chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritānīti dassanena pahātabbataṇhāvicaritehi avasesāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni. Niggatā taṇhā yassa so nittaṇho, nittaṇhassa bhāvo nittaṇhatā, kā sā? Saupādisesā nibbānadhātu.
戏论、行、爱喜这三者,虽然从含义上来说是同一个,但为了显示在教说中因字句等而有差别,所以说了“再者”等这些话。巴利
Papañcasaṅkhārābhinandanattayaṃ yadipi atthato ekaṃ samānaṃ, desanāya pana padakkharādīhi viseso atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
有人问:“老师已经解说的这个前后连接,到底有几种?”因为要回答这个问题,所以说了“而这个是前后连接”等话。不过,义注里说:“并非只有经与经之间的相合才是前后连接,为了说明还有别的种类,才说了‘而这个’等话。”其中,义连接就是按动作、作者等,用意义与意义相连。句连接就是名词句等与名词句等相连。教说连接就是一种教说与另一种教说相连。解说连接就是一种解说与另一种解说相连。巴利
‘‘Yoyaṃ pubbāparasandhi ācariyena vibhatto, soyaṃ katividho’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so cāyaṃ pubbāparo sandhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘na kevalaṃ suttantarasaṃsandanameva pubbāparasandhi, atha kho aññopi atthīti dassetuṃ ‘so cāya’ntiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 28). Tattha atthasandhīti kiriyākārakādivasena atthassa atthena sandhi. Padasandhīti nāmapadādikassa nāmapadādikantarena sandhi. Desanāsandhīti vuttappakārassa desanantarassa vuttappakārena desanantarena sandhi. Niddesasandhīti niddesantarassa niddesantarena sandhi.
所谓“连接”,除了义等之外,并没有别的自性法存在;而义等又都包含在六义句等里面,所以说“义连接是六句”等等。巴利
Sandhi ca nāma atthādayo muñcitvā añño sabhāvadhammo nāma natthi, atthādīnañca chaatthapadādīsu avarodhanato ‘‘atthasandhi chappadānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
义连合和文连合已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了解。因为应当问“什么是说法连合”,所以说了“说法连合,非依地”等。其中,在“禅修者非依地而修禅,禅修者亦修禅”这句里,应当这样理解其义:具禅那的禅修者不是依地、不是以地为所缘而修禅,而是依出离一切行的涅槃、以涅槃为所缘而入果等至,如此修禅。在“非依水”等句中,也应当用同样的方式套用。因为证得果等至的人,是舍弃了地等之后,只以涅槃为所缘而入果等至。这里,由于地等大种受制于色法而转起,故包含了欲有与色有;以空无边处等也包含了无色有,意思是排除三有而修禅。如果禅修者不依地等修禅而又修禅,既然如此,可能会怀疑禅修者是否依名为此世的众生相续、或名为他世的众生相续、或非根相续而修禅,为了遣除这一疑虑,故说“非此世”等。这里,所谓“此世界”,就是指令名为此世、现见自身的众生相续,禅修者不是依此而修禅,禅修者亦修禅;所谓“彼世界”,就是指异于此世、名为他有的众生相续,禅修者不是依彼而修禅,禅修者亦修禅。巴利
Atthasandhibyañjanasandhayo ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā desanāsandhī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘desanāsandhi na ca pathavi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha na ca pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati cāti ettha jhāyī jhānasamaṅgī puggalo pathaviṃ nissāya ālambitvā na ca jhāyati, sabbasaṅkhāranissaṭaṃ pana nibbānaṃ nissāya ālambitvā phalasamāpattiṃ jhāyati samāpajjati evāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Na ca āpantiādīsupi esa nayo yojetabbo. Phalasamāpattisamaṅgī puggalo hi pathavīādayo muñcitvā nibbānameva ārabbha phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjatīti. Ettha ca pathavīādīhi mahābhūtehi kāmabhavarūpabhavā gahitā rūpapaṭibaddhavuttitāya. Ākāsānañcāyatanādīhipi arūpabhavo gahito, bhavattayaṃ vajjetvā ca jhāyatīti adhippāyo. Yadi pathavīādayo nissāya na jhāyī jhāyati ca, evaṃ sati idhalokasaṅkhātaṃ sattasantānaṃ vā paralokasaṅkhātaṃ sattasantānaṃ vā anindriyasantānaṃ vā nissāya jhāyī jhāyatīti āsaṅkanīyattā taṃ pariharanto ‘‘na ca imaṃ loka’’ntiādimāha. Tattha imaṃ lokanti idhalokasaṅkhāto diṭṭho attabhāvo sattasantāno vutto, tasmiṃ nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca. Paralokanti idhalokato añño bhavantarasaṅkhāto sattasantāno vutto, tasmiṃ nissāya na ca jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca.
在“此二者”等句里,应当这样连接理解:排除此世与彼世这二者之后,凡是所见之色处,那也是色处;凡是所闻之声处,那也是声处;凡是所觉之香处、味处、触处,那也是香处、味处、触处;凡是所知的水界、空界、相色、称为食素的法处一分色,那也是水界等法处一分色;凡是已寻求或未寻求、已到近处的事物,那也是事物;凡是已到或未到、已寻求、值得寻求的妙好事物,那也是事物;凡是已寻思、应以寻思之力作为所缘的事物,那也是事物;凡是已伺察、应以伺察之力作为所缘的事物,那也是事物;凡是以意、以心随念、应以随念之力作为所缘的事物,禅修者不依那事物而修禅,禅修者仍然修禅——应当这样连接理解。巴利
Yamidaṃ ubhayantiādīsu idaṃ ubhayaṃ idhalokaparalokadvayaṃ antarena vajjetvā yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ rūpāyatanampi. Yaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ, taṃ saddāyatanampi. Yaṃ gandhāyatanarasāyatanaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, taṃ gandhāyatanarasāyatanaphoṭṭhabbāyatanampi. Yaṃ āpodhātu ākāsadhātu lakkhaṇarūpaṃ ojāsaṅkhātaṃ dhammāyatanekadesarūpaṃ viññātaṃ, taṃ āpodhātādikaṃ dhammāyatanekadesarūpampi. Yaṃ vatthu pariyesitaṃ vā apariyesitaṃ vā santike pattaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ pariyesanārahaṃ sundaraṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu vitakkitaṃ vitakkanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu vicāritaṃ anumajjanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu manasā citteneva anucintitaṃ anucintanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati cāti yojanā kātabbā.
在这里,只应取“所见”等外在的色,因为这里指的是不属于根所系的色。所以注释师说:“脱离那两者,就是不属于根所系的色相续。”有人会问:“如果一位入禅者不依靠上面所说的地等来入禅,却仍然在入禅,那么在这种情况下,这位入禅者到底是依靠什么在入禅?世间有谁能够知道,还是根本没人知道?”为了说明“没人知道”,就说“在这个包括天界在内的世间”等等。这里的含义应当这样理解:这位漏尽者以果等至之禅入禅,在包括天界在内的世间……乃至……在包括天众和人类在内的众生当中,无论在哪里,都以无所依着的心入禅,所以在包括天界在内的世间……乃至……在包括天众和人类在内的众生当中,没有任何人知道。因此说:巴利
Ettha diṭṭhādikaṃ bahiddhārūpameva gahetabbaṃ anindriyabaddharūpassa adhippetattā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo – ‘‘tadubhayavinimutto anindriyabaddho rūpasantāno’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 28). ‘‘Yadi jhāyī puggalo yathāvutte pathavīādayo nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca, evaṃ sati ayaṃ jhāyī puggalo idaṃ nāma nissāya jhāyatīti loke kenaci ñāyati kiṃ, udāhu na ñāyatī’’ti pucchitabbattā na ñāyatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ sadevake loke’’tiādimāha. Tattha phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyanto ayaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalo sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya yattha katthacipi anissitena cittena jhāyatīti sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya kenaci na ñāyatīti attho gahetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ –
礼敬你,人中良骏!礼敬你,人中最胜者!
我们不知道你依靠什么来禅修。巴利
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te nābhijānāma, kiṃ tvaṃ nissāya jhāyasī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.79; netti. 104);
有人问:“不为任何人所了知的状态,应该用哪部经来说明?”为了指出应当用《瞿低迦经》来说明,所以说了“如魔”等话。不过,注释书里则说:“现在为了用《瞿低迦经》和《婆迦梨经》来说明漏尽者之心在任何地方都无所依止的状态,所以说了‘如魔罗’等。”其中,在布施等造福业的人当中,或者在福业当中,进行杀害、阻止的,就是魔罗;或者,在自利利他当中进行杀害的,也是魔罗。因为具有恶心生起的缘故,所以叫魔。前世曾经是杀蜥蜴的人,因此得到“瞿低迦”这个名字;这位善男子般涅槃之后,魔罗寻找他的结生识等,却不知道、看不见。因为应当说“能知他心的魔罗为什么不知道呢”,所以说了“因为彼”等话。因为这位瞿低迦已经超越了戏论,所以由于断除渴爱,这位瞿低迦也没有见的依止,因此魔罗不知道。巴利
‘‘Kenaci aviññāyabhāvo kena suttena vibhāvetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā iminā godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vibhāvetabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā māro pāpimā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni khīṇāsavacittassa katthacipi anissitabhāvaṃ godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vakkalisuttena (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘yathā māro’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 28) vuttaṃ. Tattha dānādipuññakārake, puññe vā māreti nivāretīti māro, attahitaparahite māretīti vā māro. Pāpacittuppādavantatāya pāpimā. Pubbattabhāve godhassa ghātakattā ‘‘godhiko’’ti laddhanāmassa parinibbāyantassa kulaputtassa parinibbānato uddhaṃ paṭisandhādi viññāṇaṃ samanvesanto na jānāti na passati. ‘‘Paracittajānanako māro kasmā na jānātī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So godhiko hi yasmā papañcātīto, tasmā taṇhāpahānena diṭṭhinissayopi assa godhikassa yasmā natthi, tasmā ca na jānātīti.
有人问:“是不是只该用《瞿低迦经》来说明?”所以接着说了“又如”等话。因为可能会有人这样想:“《瞿低迦经》和《婆迦梨经》已经说明了无余涅槃界的无所依止,那么有余涅槃界的无所依止又要靠什么来了知呢?”为了表明“即使在那时也仍然不被了知”,就说了“与包括天在内的世间”等话。这里应当这样连接理解:这些漏尽者以有余涅槃界的果等至禅那而安住时,有时以无所依止的心而安住,因此不被包括天在内的世间了知,不被包括魔在内的……不被包括天、人在内的世间了知。在“无所依止的心不被了知”这句话里,“不”字不应和“安住”这个词连在一起,因为那样会变成“不安住”的意思;它应当和“不被了知”连在一起,因为下面的注释里正是说“在世间中不被任何人了知”。应当这样把握其中的含义:这个教说连接,就像通过《瞿低迦经》和《婆迦梨经》彼此在义理上的对照而确定下来的契合,以及通过“不依于地”等教说和“不依于此世”等教说,按该教说的义理而确定下来的契合一样;由这个教说可以理解:无论在哪里,依靠任何所依而安住的人,就不是真正在安住;只有依靠涅槃而安住的人,才是在真正安住。巴利
‘‘Godhikasutteneva vibhāvetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Godhikasuttavakkalisuttehi anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā anissitabhāvo vibhāvito, evaṃ sati saupādisesanibbānadhātuyā anissitabhāvo kena viññāyatīti attho bhaveyyā’’ti vattabbattā tadāpi na viññāyatiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevakena lokenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyamānā ime khīṇāsavā katthaci anissitacittā jhāyantīti sadevakena lokena na ñāyanti samārakena…pe… sadevamanussāya na ñāyantīti yojanā kātabbā. Anissitacittā na ñāyantīti ettha hi na-kāro ca ‘‘jhāyamānā’’ti pade na sambandhitabbo ‘‘na jhāyamānā’’ti atthassa sambhavato. ‘‘Na ñāyantī’’ti pana sambandhitabbo heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ eva ‘‘loke kenacipi na ñāyatī’’ti vuttattā. Ayaṃ desanāsandhīti godhikasuttavakkalisuttānaṃ aññamaññaṃ atthavasena saṃsandanā niddhāritā viya ‘‘na ca pathaviṃ nissāyā’’tiādidesanāya ca ‘‘na ca imaṃ loka’’ntiādidesanāya ca yāya desanāya atthavasena saṃsandanā niddhāritā, tāya desanāya yattha katthaci yaṃ kiñci nissāya jhāyī na jhāyati, nibbānaṃ nissāya jhāyī jhāyatīti atthavasena niddhāritā, ayaṃ saṃsandanā desanāsandhi nāmāti attho gahetabbo.
老师已经分析过教说连接,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问“什么是释义连接”,所以说了“其中,什么是释义连接?就是依止心”等等。其中“其中”的意思是:在义连接、文连接、教说连接、释义连接这四种连接当中,已经被举出为“释义连接”的那种连接,从释义的角度来说,究竟是指什么?这是在发问。“依止心”的意思是:凡夫的心,或者以与渴爱、邪见同时生起的方式,或者以亲依止的方式,是有所依止的,所以叫“依止心”;这里应当理解为凡夫这个人,因为这段开示是以人为立足点来说的。如果开示是以法为立足点,那么在这种情况下,就应该说:在这些经文段落里,所宣说的是依止的心,所以叫“依止心”,这些经文段落就是为了让人了解依止心而宣说的。“无依止心”的意思是:圣者的心是无依止的,所以叫“无依止心”;这里应当理解为圣者这个人,因为这段开示是以人为立足点来说的。但如果是以法为立足点,那么在这些经文段落里,所宣说的是无依止的心,所以叫“无依止心”,这些经文段落就是为了让人了解无依止心而宣说的。巴利
Desanāsandhi ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā niddesasandhī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā niddesasandhīti nissitacittā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu catūsu atthasandhibyañjanasandhidesanāsandhiniddesasandhīsu yā sandhi ‘‘niddesasandhī’’ti uddiṭṭhā, sā niddesato katamāti pucchatīti attho. Nissitacittāti taṇhādiṭṭhisahajātavasena vā upanissayavasena vā nissitaṃ cittaṃ yesaṃ puthujjanānanti nissitacittā, puthujjanā puggalā niddisitabbā imāya desanāya puggalādhiṭṭhānattā. Yadi desanā dhammādhiṭṭhānā, evaṃ sati nissitaṃ cittaṃ ettha suttappadesesu desitanti nissitacittā nissitacittajānanatthāya desitā suttappadesā. Anissitaṃ cittaṃ yesaṃ ariyapuggalānanti anissitacittā, ariyapuggalā niddisitabbā imāya desanāya puggalādhiṭṭhānattā. Dhammādhiṭṭhānāya pana anissitaṃ cittaṃ yattha suttappadesesu desitanti anissitacittā, anissitacittajānanatthāya desitā suttappadesā.
因为要问“依止心应当用哪种释义来说明,无依止心应当用哪种释义来说明”,所以说了“依止心应当用不善这一类来说明”等等。也就是应当用不善这一类的释义来说明。在“用善这一类”等等当中,也应套用同样的道理。先用不善类的共同特征和善类的共同特征来说明,之后为了说明不善的具体差别和善的具体差别,又说了“依止心以杂染”等等。这就是释义连接:就依止心来说,把前面“不善类”等释义和后面“杂染”等释义对应结合起来,这种结合就叫释义连接;就无依止心来说,把前面“善类”等释义和后面“清净”等释义对应结合起来,这种结合也叫释义连接。应当这样分别理解。巴利
‘‘Nissitacittā kena niddesena niddisitabbā, anissitacittā kena niddesena niddisitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nissitacittā akusalapakkhena niddisitabbā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Akusalapakkhena niddesena niddisitabbā. Kusalapakkhenātiādīsupi esa nayo yojetabbo. Akusalapakkhasāmaññakusalapakkhasāmaññehi dassetvā akusalavisesakusalavisesehi dassetuṃ ‘‘nissitacittā saṃkilesenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ niddesasandhīti akusalapakkhādikassa purimaniddesassa saṃkilesādikena pacchimena niddesena nissitacittavasena ayaṃ saṃsandanā ca niddesasandhi nāma. Kusalapakkhādikassa purimassa niddesassa vodānādikena pacchimena niddesena anissitacittavasena ayaṃ saṃsandanā ca niddesasandhi nāmāti vibhajitvā veditabbā.
应当这样提问:“四聚摄句应当被分别的状态,既要依照词源、意图、因缘、前后连接的分类,也要依照义连接、文连接、释义连接、教说连接的分类,我们怎么才能了知、怎么才能信受呢?”因此说了“因此他说”等话。这里的意思是:具寿马哈咖咤那以那样应当被分别的状态,说出了“词源、意图”等话(《导论》第4摄句概要),通过这句话,就是在说:你们应当了知、应当信受四聚摄句如此应当被分别的状态。巴利
‘‘Catubyūhahārassa neruttamadhippāyanidānapubbāparasandhippabhedena ceva atthabyañjanasandhiniddesasandhidesanāsandhippabhedena ca vibhajitabbabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena tathā vibhajitabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘neruttamadhippāyo’’tiādikaṃ (netti. 4 hārasaṅkhepa) yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi catubyūhahārassa tathā vibhajitabbabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
到这里,四聚理趣就已经圆满了,没有别的需要结合的内容。因为应当这样说,所以就说“已结合的四聚理趣”。在这里要这样理解其含义:在任何一部巴利圣典中,凡是属于四种类别的内容,相应的四聚理趣就按照实际遇到的情况加以结合;在那部巴利圣典中,把那种四种类别的四聚理趣这样确定下来之后,就已经结合、已经运用了。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā ca catubyūhahāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto catubyūho hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ yo yo catubbidho, so so catubyūhahāro ca yathālābhavasena yojito, tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so so catubbidho catubyūhahāro tathā niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
有智慧的人应当依据义注和复注,把其中深奥的含义详细地分析开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
第七,转摄句分别的详细阐明巴利
7. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
29 29. 通过那以种种注释殊胜为本质的四聚摄句分别,词源等已被分别说明;当那……四聚摄句分别圆满之后,因为应当问“什么是转摄句分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是转摄句”等话。其中“其中”是指,在那些已列出的十六种教说摄句等当中,哪一种是注释殊胜的转摄句,也就是名为转摄句分别——他这样提问。对于“在一个立足处”等解释,现在我要说的“开始”等详细的注释殊胜,就被认为是名为转摄句分别。因为应当说:“在教说摄句中,在一个立足处——即教说所安立的立足处,寻求其余的立足处;寻求之后,如何转向它的对立面?”所以——巴利
29. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena catubyūhahāravibhaṅgena neruttādayo vibhattā, so…pe… catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo āvaṭṭo hāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭo hāro āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ekamhi padaṭṭhāne’’ntiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahito. ‘‘Tattha desanāyaṃ ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesati, pariyesitvā kathaṃ paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭetī’’ti vattabbattā –
要发起精进,要向前迈进,要在佛陀的教法中专心投入。
抖落死神的军队,就像大象摧毁芦苇屋一样。巴利
‘‘Ārambhatha nikkamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane; Dhunātha maccuno senaṃ, naḷāgāraṃva kuñjaro’’ti. –
偈颂已经说了。在这里的偈颂中,当某一个所依处已经在开示中出现时,就要去寻求其余的所依处——这就是这里要表达的意思。而这首偈颂的义理,已经在注释书(《导论注》29)中讲过了。巴利
Gāthā vuttā. Idha gāthāyaṃ ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāthāttho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 29) vutto.
在“应当开始”等偈颂中,因为需要说明“在已开示的所缘中,哪一个是近因?应当寻求的其余近因又是什么”,所以说了“应当开始、应当出发,是精进的近因”等等。其中,“精进的近因”虽然是按一般说法讲的,但应当这样去寻求理解:称为“发勤界”的精进,是称为“出离界”的精进的近因;称为“出离界”的精进,是称为“勇猛界”的精进的近因;称为“勇猛界”的精进,是与止修习相应的精进的近因。“应当专精”这句话所说的与止修习相应的精进,是“在佛陀的教法中”这句话所说的广大定的近因;已开示的乐等其他近因也应当去寻求。以“抖落死魔之军”这一句所包含的与观相应的精进,是能断除烦恼的慧的近因;已开示的定等其他近因也应当去寻求。巴利
‘‘Ārambhathā’tiādigāthāyaṃ katarasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe katamaṃ sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti sāmaññavasena vuttampi ārambhadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ nikkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, nikkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ parakkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, parakkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ samathabhāvanāsahitassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānantiādinā pariyesitabbanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yuñjathā’’ti iminā vuttaṃ samathabhāvanāsahitaṃ vīriyaṃ ‘‘buddhasāsane’’ti iminā vuttassa mahaggatasamādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, desanāruḷhaṃ sukhādikaṃ sesakampi padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. ‘‘Dhunātha maccuno sena’’nti padena gahitaṃ vipassanāsahitaṃ vīriyaṃ kilesadhunane samatthāya paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, desanāruḷhaṃ samādhiādikaṃ sesakampi padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ.
如果说“开始吧”等所说的精进,只是共通意义上的精进、定与慧的足处,那么这样的话,他们又怎么能断除轮回之根而达到还灭呢?因此又说了“开始吧、前进吧,是精进根的足处”等。因为即使与增上作用相应,它也是以精进为主的足处,所以说正在开始的瑜伽行者能断除轮回之根而达到还灭。“开始吧”等既然是关于精进发勤事等的开示,因此,考虑到有人会责难说“发勤事等本身才是所解释的足处”,便说“这些足处就是开示”。“开始吧”等是如前所说的足处的开示,而不是精进发勤事等,所以应当看作只是解释了足处。巴利
‘‘Yadi ‘ārambhathā’tiādikaṃ vuttaṃ vīriyaṃ sāmaññabhūtānaṃ vīriyasamādhipaññānaṃyeva padaṭṭhānaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati kathaṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpessantī’’ti vattabbattā puna ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyindriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ādhipaccakiccatāya yuttassāpi vīriyādhikassa padaṭṭhānattā ārabhantā yogāvacarapuggalā vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpentīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ārambhathā’’tiādikā pana yasmā vīriyārambhavatthuādidesanā hoti, tasmā ārambhavatthuādīniyeva saṃvaṇṇitāni padaṭṭhānanti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘imāni padaṭṭhānāni desanā’’ti. ‘‘Ārambhathā’’tiādikā yathāvuttapadaṭṭhānāni desanā hoti, na vīriyārambhavatthuādīni, tasmā padaṭṭhānaṃyeva saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这样,依照“要开始努力”等教导,从近因的角度已经把含义分别解释清楚了,我们也已经了解。由于接着应当说明“怎样从同一教导的对立面来解释其含义”,所以说了“或者,对于那些没有投入修行的人”等话。其中,对于那些在修行中没有投入、智慧尚未成熟的众生,为了让他们将来能够了知,就随顺着与修行之因相关的习气分,发起了“要开始努力”等教导。而对于那些已经投入修行、智慧已经成熟的众生,为了让他们在当下就能遍知发勤的因,也发起了“要开始努力”等教导。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādidesanāya padaṭṭhānavasena attho vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ tassāyeva desanāya paṭipakkhavasena attho vibhajitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayuñjantānaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yoge bhāvanāyaṃ ayuñjantānaṃ sattānaṃ aparipakkañāṇānaṃ yoge yogahetu vāsanābhāgiyavasena āyatiṃ jānanatthāya ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādidesanā āraddhā. Yuñjantānaṃ paripakkañāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ ārambhe ārambhahetu diṭṭheva dhamme parijānanatthāya ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādidesanā āraddhā.
在这里,那些在修行中努力和不努力、智慧已成熟和未成熟的众生当中,凡是智慧未成熟、不努力修行的众生,他们以放逸为根本,在修行中因为放逸而不去用功。这种放逸有两种:以渴爱为根本的放逸,和以无明为根本的放逸。在这两种放逸当中,被无知遮蔽的、以无明为根本的众生,因为放逸而不了知应当了知的领域,也就是“这些具有生灭性质的五蕴,就是应当了知的领域”。这种以无知为原因的放逸,就叫作以无明为根本的放逸。以渴爱为根本的放逸则有三种:渴爱的众生为了生起还没有得到的财富而寻求,因此陷入的放逸,这是一种;渴爱的众生为了守护已经得到的财富而保护,以守护为因而陷入的放逸,这是第二种;渴爱的众生享用已有的财富,以享用为因而陷入的放逸,这是第三种。这样一来,在世间,这放逸共有四种:一种以无明为近因,三种以渴爱为近因。在这无明和渴爱两者当中,名身,也就是触等名法的集合,是无明的近因;色身,也就是地等色法的集合,是渴爱的近因。这里要说的是:应当确定,被称为发勤界、出离界的精进,它所对治的就是这四种放逸;确定之后,一种放逸以无明为近因,三种放逸以渴爱为近因。无明以名身为近因,渴爱以色身为近因,应当在对立面回转而寻求近因。巴利
Tattha tesu yuñjantāyuñjantesu paripakkāparipakkañāṇesu ye aparipakkañāṇā sattā na yuñjanti, te aparipakkañāṇā sattā pamādamūlakā hutvā yoge bhāvanāyaṃ yena pamādena na yuñjanti, so pamādo taṇhāmūlako pamādo, avijjāmūlako pamādoti dubbidho hoti. Tattha tasmiṃ dubbidhe pamāde aññāṇena nivuto avijjāmūlako satto yena pamādena ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘ime uppādavayadhammā pañcakkhandhā ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti nappajānāti, ayaṃ aññāṇahetuko pamādo avijjāmūlako pamādā nāma. Yo pamādo taṇhāmūlako, so pamādo tividho anuppannānaṃ bhogānaṃ uppādāya pariyesanto taṇhiko satto yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo ca, uppannānaṃ bhogānaṃ ṭhitatthāya rakkhanto taṇhiko satto ārakkhanimittaṃ yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo ca, ṭhitaṃ bhogaṃ paribhuñjanto taṇhiko satto paribhoganimittaṃ yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo cāti tividho hoti. Iti loke ayaṃ pamādo catubbidho avijjāpadaṭṭhāno ekavidho pamādo, taṇhāpadaṭṭhāno tividho pamādoti catubbidho hoti. Tattha tāsu avijjātaṇhāsu nāmakāyo phassādināmasamūho avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, rūpakāyo pathavīādirūpasamūho taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ārambhadhātunikkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa paṭipakkho catubbidho pamādo niddhāretabbo, niddhāretvā ekavidhassa pamādassa avijjā padaṭṭhānaṃ, tividhassa pamādassa taṇhā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjāya nāmakāyo padaṭṭhānaṃ, taṇhāya rūpakāyo padaṭṭhānanti paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭetvā padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbanti.
有人会问:为什么名身成为无明的近因,色身成为渴爱的近因?为了回答这个问题,先问“这是什么原因”,然后说:“在有色生存中是对色法的执著,在无色生存中是对名法的迷惑。”在有色生存中,对于色法,众生以我、我所等方式生起执著,也就是渴爱的偏执,所以色身成为渴爱的近因。因为在无始轮回中,男人和女人确实以彼此的美色为乐。在无色法中,比如触等,由于它们极其微细,众生容易陷入迷惑,所以名身成为无明的近因。应当这样贯通理解。这里说的是:因为渴爱和无明以色身和名身为所缘而生起,所以可以得出结论——色身是渴爱的近因,名身是无明的近因。巴利
‘‘Kasmā nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘rūpīsu bhavesu ajjhosānaṃ, arūpīsu sammoho’’ti vuttaṃ. Rūpīsu bhavesu rūpadhammesu ahaṃmamādivasena ajjhosānaṃ taṇhābhiniveso sattesu patiṭṭhito yasmā hoti, tasmā rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Anamatagge hi saṃsāre itthipurisā aññamaññarūpābhirāmā bhavanti. Arūpīsu phassādīsu sukhumabhāvato sammoho sattesu patiṭṭhito yasmā hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavatīti yojanā kātabbā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – rūpakāyanāmakāyesu ārammaṇakaraṇavasena taṇhāya ca avijjāya ca uppajjanato rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānanti nīharitabbāvāti.
因为有人问“什么是色身,什么是名身”,所以回答说:“其中,色身就是色蕴,名身就是四种无色蕴。”这里的意思是:在色身和名身这两者当中,色身是色的聚集,也就是色蕴;名身是名的聚集,也就是四种无色蕴。这五蕴以无明和渴爱为所缘,所以成为有取。又因为有人问“它们以哪种取而成为有取”,所以同样先这样问,然后回答:“这五蕴以哪种取而成为有取?以渴爱和无明。”这里应当这样贯通理解:这五蕴因为作为取的渴爱和作为取的无明,而被称为有取。巴利
‘‘Katamo rūpakāyo, katamo nāmakāyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha rūpakāyo rūpakkhandho, nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu rūpakāyanāmakāyesu rūpakāyo rūpasamūho nāma rūpakkhandho hoti, nāmakāyo nāmasamūho nāma cattāro arūpino khandhāti. Ime pañcakkhandhā avijjātaṇhānaṃ ārammaṇattā saupādānā bhaveyyuṃ, ‘‘katamena upādānena saupādānā bhavantī’’ti pucchitabbattā tatheva pucchitvā vissajjetuṃ ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā katamena upādānena saupādānā? Taṇhāya ca avijjāya cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha upādānabhūtāya taṇhāya ca upādānabhūtāya avijjāya ca ime pañcakkhandhā saupādānā nāma bhavantīti yojanā kātabbā.
因为有人问“有多少种取属于渴爱,有多少种取属于无明”,所以说了“其中,渴爱有两种”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在渴爱和无明这两者当中。欲取和戒禁取这两种取,属于渴爱。因为正是依着渴爱,才会产生“这是我的戒,这是我的禁行”这样的执取。见取和我论取这两种取,属于无明。因为正是依着无明,才会产生常见以及“我、我所”之类的见解。因为有人问“以这四种取来说,有取五蕴在四谛中属于哪一谛”,所以说了“以这些”等话。凡是世间的五蕴,就是有取蕴;因为取本身也是被取着的对象,所以这有取五蕴就是苦,叫做苦谛。那四种取是造成苦的原因,这四取就是集,叫做集谛。“五蕴”,就是有取五蕴,因为是苦的所依处,所以是苦。“于彼”,是指那些有取五蕴。“说法”,是指世尊随顺所教化的对象,宣说“开始”等法。虽然前面已经笼统地说过,但为了从义理上显示差别,又再次说“为了遍知苦,为了断除集”。巴利
‘‘Kittakāni upādānāni taṇhā nāma bhavanti, kittakāni upādānāni avijjā nāma bhavantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha taṇhā dve’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu taṇhāavijjāsu. Kāmupādānañca sīlabbatupādānañca dve upādānāni taṇhā nāma bhavanti. Taṇhāvasena hi ‘‘mama sīlaṃ, mama vata’’nti parāmasanaṃ bhavati. Diṭṭhupādānañca attavādupādānañca dve upādānāni avijjā nāma bhavanti. Avijjāvasena hi sassatadiṭṭhi ceva ahaṃmamādidiṭṭhi ca bhavanti. ‘‘Imehi catūhi upādānehi saupādānakkhandhā catūsu saccesu kittakaṃ saccaṃ nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye lokiyakkhandhā saupādānā khandhā bhavanti, upādānena hi upādānānipi bhavanti, idaṃ saupādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ nāma. Yāni cattāri upādānāni dukkhakāraṇāni bhavanti, ayaṃ upādānacatukko samudayo samudayasaccaṃ nāma bhavati. Pañcakkhandhāti saupādānā pañcakkhandhā dukkhavatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tesanti saupādānānaṃ pañcakkhandhānaṃ. Dhammaṃ desetīti ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādikaṃ dhammaṃ veneyyānurūpaṃ bhagavā deseti. Sāmaññena pubbe vuttampi atthavasena visesaṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya, samudayassa pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
30 前二谛已经被阿阇梨依“与放逸相对立”这一点阐明了,我们也已经知道。由于还需要说明“另外二谛应当如何阐明”,为了显示那二谛同样可以依放逸这一门来阐明,所以说了“其中,那三种”等话。这里,“其中”是指在那些以渴爱为根和以无明为根的放逸当中。“它的”,是指那以渴爱为根的三类放逸。“通达”,是通过了知味等。“守护”,是指守护自己的心。“收摄”,是指对前面所说的那种放逸,以与它相对立的不放逸的勤修来收摄、舍弃。这种由与放逸相对立的不放逸勤修所引生的、称为舍弃的修习,就叫作止。这样,又通过放逸的对治这一角度转回来,阐明了止。巴利
30. Ārambhapaṭipakkhabhūtapamādavasena purimasaccadvayaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘itarasaccadvayaṃ kathaṃ niddhāritabba’’nti vattabbattā taṃ dvayampi pamādamukheneva niddhāritabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yo tividho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu taṇhāmūlakaavijjāmūlakesu pamādesu. Tassāti tividhassa taṇhāmūlakassa pamādassa. Sampaṭivedhenāti assādādīnaṃ parijānanena. Rakkhaṇāti attacittassa rakkhaṇasaṅkhātā. Paṭisaṃharaṇāti ‘‘tassā’’ti iminā vuttassa pamādassa paṭipakkhabhūtena appamādānanuyogena saṃharaṇā yā khepanā atthi, ayaṃ pamādassa paṭipakkhabhūtena appamādānuyogena pavattā khepanasaṅkhātā bhāvanā samatho nāmāti pamādassa paṭipakkhamukhena puna āvaṭṭetvā samatho niddhāritoti.
有人问:这个止(奢摩他)是怎样生起的?靠什么方法生起?因为需要这样问,所以先这样问,然后为了说明方法,就说了“它怎样”等话。这里说的“怎样”,就是靠什么方法。所谓“欲求所以叫欲,或者被欲求所以叫欲”,针对这两种欲所生起的滋味,以及依据“诸欲滋味少、苦多”等说法所生起的过患——这里“欲”这个词是业格意义的所有格,表示具格的意义,所以说“依止于欲”。依据“这是诸欲的出离,也就是出离”这句话,这里的“出离”指的是初禅。在“vokāraṃ”这个词里,va是插入音,o表示低劣。“利益”,指的是四遍净戒等。当他了知这些的时候,止就是靠那个方法生起的,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘So samatho kathaṃ kena upāyena bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā upāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kathanti kena upāyena. ‘‘Kāmentīti kāmā, kāmīyantīti vā kāmā’’ti vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ kāmānaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ assādañca, ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.235) vacanato appassādanīyānaṃ kāmānaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ ādīnavañca. Kāmānanti ca kammatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘kāme paṭiccā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30). ‘‘Kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72) vacanato nissaraṇanti idha paṭhamajjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vokāranti ettha va-kāro āgamo, o-kāraṃ lāmakabhāvaṃ. Ānisaṃsanti catupārisuddhisīlādikaṃ. Yadā jānāti, tadā tena upāyena samatho bhavatīti attho.
老师已经解说了止,我们也已经了解。因为接下来要问“什么是观”,为了解说观,所以说了“其中,那审查”等话。或者也可以这样说:前面已经讲过,当一个人了知诸欲的滋味等时,止就生起;因为接下来还要问“当那个止生起时,什么是观”,所以说了“其中,那审查”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在那个止生起时,对滋味等以无常等角度进行的审查、伺察和慧生起,这种审查、伺察和慧,因为能殊胜地看见,所以叫观。又或者,对以渴爱为根本的三种放逸,通过通达而守护、收摄,这就是老师所说的止;因为接下来要问“什么是观”,所以说了“其中,那审查”等话。这里的“其中”,是指当有如上所说的止时,对如上所说的放逸,以无常等角度生起的审查、伺察和慧,这种审查、伺察和慧,因为能殊胜地看见,所以叫观。区别在于:审查比较弱,伺察比较有力。巴利
Samatho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā vipassanaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha yā vīmaṃsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā kāmānaṃ assādādayo yadā jānāti, tadā samatho bhavatīti vutto, ‘‘tasmiṃ samathe bhavamāne sati katamā bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā vīmaṃsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ samathe bhavamāne sati assādādīnaṃ yā aniccādivīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā bhavati, ayaṃ vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā visesena passanato vipassanā nāma. Atha vā tividhassa taṇhāmūlakassa pamādassa sampaṭivedhena rakkhaṇā paṭisaṃharaṇā, ayaṃ samathoti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘katamā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā vīmaṃsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte samathe sati yathāvuttassa pamādassa aniccādivasena yā vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā uppannā, ayaṃ vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā visesena passanato vipassanā nāma. Vīmaṃsāva dubbalā, upaparikkhā balavatīti viseso.
老师已经明确指出,止和观这两种法。因为需要说明“这两种已经指出的法,会趣向什么”,所以接着说了“这两种”等等。止会趣向止的修习圆满,观会趣向观的修习圆满。因为需要说明“在修习这两种法的时候,瑜伽行者断除哪些法”,所以说了“在这两种”等等。在修习止这种法的时候,瑜伽行者断除渴爱;在修习观的时候,瑜伽行者断除无明。这样一来,这两种应当断除的法,也就是渴爱和无明,就被断除了。因为需要问“在这两种法被断除的时候,哪些法会灭尽”,为了显示取等也会灭尽,也就是显示整个轮回之苦的灭尽,所以说了“在这两种法被断除的时候”等等。其中,当渴爱通过修止而被断除、无明通过修观而被断除时,也就是当这两种法通过这两种修习而被断除时,欲取等四种取会以镇伏和正断的方式灭尽,而不是以刹那坏灭的方式灭尽。巴利
Samatho ceva vipassanā ca dve dhammā ācariyena niddhāritā, ‘‘ime niddhāritā dve dhammā kiṃ gacchantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ime dve’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samatho samathabhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati, vipassanā vipassanābhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati. ‘‘Imesu dvīsu dhammesu bhāviyamānesu katame yogāvacarena pahīyantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘imesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathe dhamme bhāviyamāne taṇhā yogāvacarena pahīyati, vipassanāya bhāviyamānāya avijjā yogāvacarena pahīyatīti ime dve pahātabbā dhammā pahīyanti taṇhā ceva avijjā ca. ‘‘Imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīyamānesu katame dhammā nirujjhantī’’ti pucchitabbattā upādānādayopi nirujjhantīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhanirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīnesū’’tiādimāha. Tattha taṇhāya samathabhāvanāya pahīyamānāya, avijjāya vipassanābhāvanāya pahīyamānāya imesu dvīsu dhammesu dvīhi bhāvanāhi pahīnesu kāmupādānādīni cattāri upādānāni vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena nirujjhanti, na bhaṅgakkhaṇavasena.
这里有人问:既然经上说“渴爱灭所以取灭”,那么说“渴爱被断除时诸取就灭尽”,这是说得通的;可是无明被断除时,诸取怎么会灭尽呢?因为在“渴爱灭所以取灭”这个读法中,可以理解为:与无明相伴的渴爱灭了,所以取灭,这个意思能够成立。就像与渴爱相伴的无明是诸行的缘一样,与无明相伴的渴爱也是诸取的缘。因此应当这样理解:与无明相伴的渴爱灭尽,所以取灭尽,这个意思能够成立。以镇伏和正断的方式,取灭所以有灭,其余各支也是同样的道理。这样,整个苦蕴的灭尽,在这里也应当看作已经包含了与渴爱相伴的无明灭所以行灭等等。如此,以异分和同分的方式回转,确定了前二谛;而止与观这二法就是道、道谛,轮转的灭尽就是灭谛、涅槃。这样,四谛就确定下来了。巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho’’ti vuttattā ‘‘taṇhāya pahīyamānāya upādānāni nirujjhantī’’ti vacanaṃ yuttaṃ hotu, kathaṃ avijjāya pahīyamānāya upādānāni nirujjhantīti? ‘‘Taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho’’ti pāṭhe avijjāsahitataṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti atthasambhavato. Yathā hi taṇhāsahitāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, evaṃ avijjāsahitāva taṇhā upādānānaṃ paccayo hotīti avijjāsahitataṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti attho sambhavatīti gahetabbo. Vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena upādānanirodhā tatheva bhavanirodhoti esa nayo sesesupi. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhoti etthāpi taṇhāsahitaavijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodhotiādiko gahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Itīti evaṃ visabhāgasabhāgadhammānaṃ āvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni ca purimakāni dve saccāni ca, samatho ca vipassanā ca ime dve dhammā maggo ca maggasaccañca, vaṭṭanirodho vaṭṭanirodhasaccañca nibbānanti cattāri saccāni niddhāritāni.
有人会说:如果是以与精进相反的放逸等法为角度,或者以同类的放逸等法为角度来转动、确定四谛,那我们凭什么相信呢?因为对方这样质疑,所以接着说了“因此说”等话。世尊就是依据这种应当确定四谛的方式,说出了“要发起努力,要向前迈进”等偈颂。也就是说,通过“要发起努力,要向前迈进”等偈颂,说明了你们应当相信这种确定四谛的方式。巴利
‘‘Vīriyapaṭipakkhabhūtassa pamādādidhammassa vasena vā sabhāgabhūtassa pamādādidhammassa vasena vā āvaṭṭetvā catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabbabhāvo amhehi kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tathā niddhāritabbabhāvena bhagavā ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathā’’tiādigāthāvacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathā’’tiādigāthāvacanena tathā catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabbabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
有人问:“‘应当精勤,应当出离’等话,只是安立了清净分,只以清净分的异分法和同分法来回转,从而确定四谛——这该怎么理解?”为了回答这个问题,就也要安立杂染分,也要以杂染分的异分法和同分法来回转,从而显示四谛的确定,于是说出“如于根”等偈颂。不过在义注中——巴利
‘‘Ārambhatha nikkamathā’tiādinā vodānapakkhaṃyeva nikkhipitvā tasseva vodānapakkhassa visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammavaseneva āvaṭṭetvā catusaccaniddhāraṇaṃ kātabba’’nti pucchitabbattā saṃkilesapakkhampi nikkhipitvā tasseva saṃkilesassa visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammavasenapi āvaṭṭetvā catusaccaniddhāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāpi mūle’’tiādigāthāvacanamāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
像这样,先放下清净分,显示它以异分法和同分法回转之后,现在再放下杂染分,为了显示它以异分法和同分法回转,而说出“如于根”这首偈颂。(《导论义注》30)巴利
‘‘Evaṃ vodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena, sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetvā idāni saṃkilesapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena, sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yathāpi mūle’ti gāthamāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) –
已经说过了。偈颂的含义在义注里也讲过了。尽管如此,为了那些修行人的利益,我还是依照义注来讲说。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Gāthātthopi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto. Tathāpi yatipotānaṃ atthāya aṭṭhakathānusāreneva kathayissāma.
树聚在一起,以根立在地面上,靠这个立在地面之上的部分,所以叫“根”。那是什么呢?就是立在地面上、被称为根的那个树的部分。在这个根上,没有危险,没有斧头砍伐之类的障碍,所以叫“无危险”。因为无危险,从自性上说坚固,所以叫“坚固”。被砍断,就叫“已断”。那是什么被砍断呢?是立在地上、连着根的树的部分,不是砍下来拿走的树的部分。生长、增长,所以叫“树”。那个立在地上、连着根的树的部分,也被叫作“树”,就像说“看见海”一样。再次生长,是指再生出新芽。在渴爱随眠——也就是被称为自身的这棵树的根上,如果还没有被拔除,也就是还没有被阿罗汉道智断除,那么这个被称为自身的苦,就会以苦为因,一次又一次不间断地生起,根本不会灭尽。这就是这首偈颂的意思。巴利
Samūho rukkho mūlati patiṭṭhāti etena avayavena bhūmibhāge ṭhitenāti mūlaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Bhūmibhāge ṭhito mūlasaṅkhāto rukkhāvayavo, tasmiṃ mūle. Natthi upaddavo pharasuchedādiantarāyo assa mūlassāti anupaddavo. Daḷheti upaddavābhāvena sabhāvato thire sati. Chindīyatīti chinno, ko so? Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitamūlasahito rukkhāvayavo, na chinditvā gahito rukkhāvayavo. Ruhati vaḍḍhatīti rukkho. So ca bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitamūlasahito rukkhāvayavo rukkhoti vutto yathā ‘‘samuddo diṭṭho’’ti. Punareva rūhatīti puna aṅkuruppādanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṇhānusayeti attabhāvasaṅkhātassa rukkhassa mūle. Anūhateti arahattamaggañāṇena anupacchinne sati idaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhahetu punappunaṃ abbocchinnaṃ nibbattati na nirujjhatiyevāti gāthāttho.
在这里的偈颂中,有人问:所谓“以未被拔除的状态而成为苦生起之根的渴爱随眠”,这个渴爱随眠是哪一种渴爱的随眠?回答:因为渴爱有欲爱等多种,所以它是有的渴爱的随眠,因为是有乐味渴爱的状态。作为有爱这一法的缘的随眠,就是无明随眠。如果有人要说“随眠有多种,凭什么应该相信这是无明随眠”,那就应回答“因为以无明为缘才有有爱”。由于无明是有爱的缘,所以应当相信这是无明随眠。因为以无明看不见诸有的过患,所以才有有乐味渴爱。对于这两种烦恼等,应依照前面所说的方式,确定四谛之后,了知异分法与同分法的转起;而止观则应只取与道相应者。巴利
‘‘Idha gāthāyaṃ yo taṇhānusayo anūhatabhāvena dukkhassa nibbattanassa mūlanti vutto, ayaṃ taṇhānusayo katamassā taṇhāya anusayo’’ti pucchati, ‘‘taṇhāya kāmataṇhādivasena bahuvidhattā bhavataṇhāya anusayo’’ti vissajjeti bhavassādataṇhābhāvato. Yo anusayo etassa bhavataṇhāsaṅkhātassa dhammassa paccayo hoti, ayaṃ anusayo avijjānusayo hoti. ‘‘Anusayo bahuvidho, kasmā avijjānusayoti saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘avijjāpaccayā hi bhavataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya bhavataṇhāya paccayattā avijjānusayo saddahitabbo. Avijjāya hi bhavesu ādīnavassa adassanavasena bhavassādataṇhā bhavatīti. Ime dve kilesātiādimhi heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena cattāri saccāni niddhāretvā visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanaṃ viññātabbaṃ, samathavipassanā pana maggasampayuttāva gahetabbā.
“一切恶”等语的衔接含义,在《指导论注》第30节中已经说过。“一切恶”是指已经达到业道状态和未达到业道状态的一切不善。“不作”是指在自他相续中不令它生起。“善”是指已经达到业道状态和未达到业道状态的三地善以及出世间善。“具足”是指以在相续中生起的方式而成就。“自心”就是自己的心,令自心清净、洁白,以证得阿拉汉果,所以叫“自心清净”。而阿拉汉道的生起,已经被“善的具足”这个词所涵盖。这里阐明了不作等三事,是诸佛、正自觉者的教法、教诫,这就是偈颂的义理。巴利
‘‘Sabbapāpassā’’tiādikassa anusandhyattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 30) vutto. Sabbapāpassāti kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa niravasesassa akusalassa. Akaraṇanti saparasantānesu anuppādanaṃ . Kusalassāti kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa tebhūmakakusalassa ceva lokuttarakusalassa ca. Upasampadāti santāne uppādanavasena sampadā. Sassa attano cittanti sacittaṃ, sacittassa pariyodāpanaṃ vodānaṃ arahattaphaluppattiyāti sacittapariyodāpanaṃ. Arahattamagguppādo pana ‘‘kusalassa upasampadā’’ti padena gahito. Etaṃ akaraṇādittayadīpanaṃ buddhānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādoti gāthāttho.
偈颂里说“不造作恶”,那恶要按恶行和业道来分类说明,所以说“名为一切恶”等等。“嗔所等起”是就大多数情况说的,也有贪所等起的情况。“贪所等起”也是就大多数情况说的,也有嗔所等起的情况。“痴所等起”也同样如此说。应当知道,贪所等起和嗔所等起也会同时发生。一切恶已经按恶行业道的分类作了分别,因为有人会问“只凭这一种方式分类,还是用别的方式分类”,所以又用另一种方式,即按不善根和趣向恶趣的分类来分别,而说“凡有贪欲”等等。不过在注疏里,衔接的意思是这么说的:“这样按恶行、不善业道和业的分类,把‘一切恶’中所说的恶分别之后,现在为了显示它按不善根和趣向恶趣的分类,而说‘不善根’等等。”(《指导论注》第30节)因为愚痴而对事物的自性无所知的人,会有怖畏产生,所以由于怖畏和愚痴而走向恶趣,这称为“痴所等起”。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ yassa pāpassa akaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pāpaṃ duccaritakammapathavasena vibhajituṃ ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dosasamuṭṭhānanti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, lobhasamuṭṭhānampi bhavati. Lobhasamuṭṭhānantipi yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, dosasamuṭṭhānampi bhavati. Mohasamuṭṭhānampi tatheva vuttaṃ. Lobhasamuṭṭhānadosasamuṭṭhānampi sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbapāpo duccaritakammapathappabhedena vibhatto, ‘‘ettakeneva vibhajitabbo, udāhu aññena vibhajitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā aññena akusalamūlaagatigamanabhedenapi vibhajituṃ ‘‘yā abhijjhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ duccaritaakusalakammapathakammavibhāgena ‘sabbapāpa’nti ettha vuttapāpaṃ vibhajitvā idānissa akusalamūlavasena agatigamanavibhāgampi dassetuṃ ‘akusalamūla’ntiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) anusandhyattho vutto. Mohavasena sabhāvaṃ ajānantassa bhayasambhavato yaṃ bhayā ca mohā ca agatiṃ gacchati, idaṃ mohasamuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ.
一切恶已被阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了知;因为应当问“什么是一切恶的不作”,所以针对这一点说了“其中,贪以不净……”等。然而在注疏中——巴利
Sabbapāpo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamaṃ sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti pucchitabbattā tattha lobho asubhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
到这一步,先指出了“一切恶的不作”当中的恶,现在为了说明它的不作,就说“贪……乃至……慧”,这是以三种善根,通过断除三种不善根,来说明一切恶的不作和不令生起。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā ‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’nti ettha pāpaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa akaraṇaṃ dassento ‘lobho…pe… paññāyā’ti tīhi kusalamūlehi tiṇṇaṃ akusalamūlānaṃ pahānavasena sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ anuppādanamāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) –
已说。以执取净相为因而生起的贪,通过不净观和不净修习所引生的无贪,依靠彼分断和镇伏断而被断除;以对众生忿怒、损害为因而生起的嗔,通过慈和慈心修习所引生的无嗔,依靠彼分断和镇伏断而被断除;以对众生和诸行迷惑为因而生起的痴,通过慧、审察慧和修道慧,依靠彼分断、镇伏断和正断而被断除。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Subhādhimuttavasena pavatto lobho asubhāya asubhabhāvanāya tathāpavattena alobhena tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānena pahīyati, sattesu kujjhanadussanavasena pavatto doso mettāya mettābhāvanāya tathāpavattena adosena ca tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānena pahīyati, sattesu ceva saṅkhāresu ca muyhanavasena pavatto moho paññāya vicāraṇapaññāya ca bhāvanāmaggapaññāya ca tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānena pahīyati.
如果有人问:如果只靠三善根就能断除不善根,那这样一来,舍、悲、喜不就没用了吗?因为需要这样回答,所以才说“同样,贪以舍……”等。这里说的“以舍”,是指通过“一切有情都是业的所有者”等修法所修成的舍。喜在止息了不满之后,也断除了以不满为根源的痴,正是考虑到这一点,才说“痴以喜而断除、趣向灭尽”。又因为有人会问:“不善根应当由善根等来断除,这凭什么让我们相信?”所以才说“因此说”等。世尊正是以这种应当断除的方式,说出了“不造一切恶”这句话;通过“不造一切恶”这句话,就是在说:你们应当相信,它就是应当这样被断除的。巴利
‘‘Yadi tīhi kusalamūleheva akusalamūlāni pahīyanti, evaṃ sati upekkhākaruṇāmuditā niratthakā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tathā lobho upekkhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upekkhāyāti ‘‘sabbe sattā kammassakā’’tiādinā bhāvitāya upekkhāya. Muditā aratiṃ vūpasametvā aratiyā mūlabhūtaṃ mohampi pajahatīti manasi katvā ‘‘moho muditāya pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Akusalamūlānaṃ kusalamūlādīhi pahātabbattaṃ kena amhehi saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tathā pahātabbattena bhagavā ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti vacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti vacanena tathā pahātabbattaṃ tumhehi saddahitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
31 有人可能会说:到这里,一切恶已经分别解说了,那么“不做一切恶”也应该已经分别解说过了;如果真是这样,那“不做八邪”岂不是就没有被遮止、没有被说明?正因为有这种疑问,所以才说“所谓一切恶,就是八邪”等等。所谓邪念,是指对无常等法,以随念、思惟等方式执取为“常”等而生起的不善法。巴利
31. ‘‘Ettāvatā ca sabbapāpo vibhatto, tassa akaraṇañca vibhattaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati aṭṭhamicchattānaṃ akaraṇaṃ anivāritaṃ siyā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāma aṭṭha micchattānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Micchāsatīti aniccādīsu ‘‘nicca’’nti anussaraṇacintanādivasena pavattaakusalappavatti.
“不造作一切恶”已经被阿阇梨以多种方式分别解说,我们也已经知道。因为应当说“善的圆满该如何分别、如何了知”,所以为了显示善的圆满而作分别解说,说了“当八种邪性已被断除时”等话。八种正性就是正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定;这八种正性是通过对治种种对立面之法而成就的。“过去的”是指过去正自觉者所宣说的。这波罗提木叉教诫偈确实是毗婆尸世尊的。心清净时,与心相连的五蕴也就清净了。因为应当说“心清净则五蕴清净,这一点我们该如何相信”,所以说了“确实如此”等话。按这样说的方式,世尊说了“诸比丘,为心清净故,梵行住于如来处”这句话,以此“心……住……”之语,就是说你们应当相信。因为应当说“清净有几种”,所以说了“有两种”等话。通过止与观断除诸盖,通过修习圣道拔除随眠,由于清净有这两种,所以五蕴得以清净,这就是意思。因为已经断除盖和随眠的人,具有令人生起净信的外表。巴利
Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ bahudhā ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca viññātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ kusalassa sampadā vibhajitabbā viññātabbā’’ti vattabbattā kusalassa sampadaṃ vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘aṭṭhasu micchattesu pahīnesū’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭha sammattānīti sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhīti aṭṭhasammattāni visabhāgaparivattanadhammavasena sampajjanti. Atītassāti atītena sammāsambuddhena desitassa. Vipassino hi bhagavato ayaṃ pātimokkhuddesagāthā. Citte pariyodāpiteti cittapaṭibaddhā pañcakkhandhāpi pariyodāpitā bhavanti. ‘‘Cittapariyodāpitena pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ pariyodāpitabhāvo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena bhagavā yaṃ ‘‘cetovisuddhatthaṃ bhikkhave tathāgate brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti vacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘ceto…pe… vussatī’’ti vacanena tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pariyodāpanā katividhā bhavantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘duvidhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathavipassanāya nīvaraṇappahānañca ariyamaggabhāvanāya anusayasamugghāto cāti pariyodāpanassa duvidhattā pañcakkhandhā pariyodāpitā bhavantīti attho. Pahīnanīvaraṇānusayā hi puggalā pasādanīyavaṇṇā honti.
因为有人会问“清净的层次有多少种”,所以说了“有两种清净的层次”等。因为有人会问“在《诸恶莫作》等偈颂所开示的诸法中,哪个是苦谛,哪个是集谛,哪个是道谛,哪个是灭谛”,所以说了“其中,通过证悟……”等。其中,是指在偈颂所开示的诸法中,通过证悟、通过遍知现观而使五蕴从渴爱杂染中清净——这五蕴就是苦,就是苦谛。由于渴爱杂染而使五蕴清净——这渴爱杂染就是集,就是集谛。通过圣道支而使五蕴清净——这圣道就是道,就是道谛。通过已证得无为界的个人而使五蕴清净——这无为界法就是灭,就是灭谛。这四谛是依照偈颂所开示诸法的同类与异类运作方式而确定的。“因此说”等的含义,应按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
‘‘Pariyodāpanassa kittikā bhūmiyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve pariyodāpanabhūmiyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’ntiādigāthāya desitesu dhammesu katamaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, katamaṃ samudayasaccaṃ , katamaṃ maggasaccaṃ, katamaṃ nirodhasacca’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yaṃ paṭivedhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti gāthāya desitesu dhammesu yaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paṭivedhena pariññābhisamayena pariyodāpeti, idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ bhave. Yato taṇhāsaṃkilesato khandhapañcakaṃ pariyodāpeti, ayaṃ taṇhāsaṃkileso samudayo samudayasaccaṃ. Yena ariyamaggaṅgena pariyodāpeti, ayaṃ ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Yaṃ asaṅkhatadhātuṃ adhigatena puggalena pariyodāpitaṃ, ayaṃ asaṅkhatadhātudhammo nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ bhave. Imāni cattāri saccāni gāthāya desitadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādikassa attho heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbo.
在《诸恶莫作》等偈颂所开示的诸法中,老师依据同类法和异类法的运作方式,确定了四圣谛,我们也已经理解了。巴利
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādigāthāya desitānaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena cattāri saccāni ācariyena niddhāritāni, amhehi ca viññātāni.
法确实会守护依法而行的人,就像雨季里的一把大伞。
这就是善行于法的功德:行法的人不会堕入恶趣。巴利
‘‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāriṃ, chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāle; Esānisaṃso dhamme suciṇṇe, na duggatiṃ gacchati dhammacārī’ti –
对于通过偈颂所开示的诸法,即以异分法与同分法的转起方式,如何确定了四圣谛——因为应当这样说,所以说了“法确实……”等语。为了把该偈颂所开示的诸法分别加以显示,又说了“所谓法……”等语。其中,所谓法,就是善法。根律仪,是指以意根为第六的六根律仪等一切律仪。因此说:“应当知道,这里以根律仪为首,把一切戒都包括在内了。”(《指导论注》31)四种苦界,因为是造作恶业者所去之处,所以是恶趣。而一切投生,因为是具足苦苦、行苦、坏苦者所去之处,所以也叫做恶趣。巴利
Gāthāya desitānaṃ dhammānaṃ visabhāgasabhāgadhammānaṃ āvaṭṭanavasena kathaṃ cattāri saccāni niddhāritānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘dhammo have’’tiādimāha. Tāya gāthāya desite dhamme vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘dhammo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha dhammo nāmāti puññadhammo nāma. Indriyasaṃvaroti manacchaṭṭhindriyasaṃvarasīlādiko sabbo saṃvaro. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘indriyasaṃvarasīsena cettha sabbampi sīlaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabba’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 31). Cattāro apāyā dukkaṭakammakārīnaṃ gatibhūtattā duggati. Sabbā upapattiyo pana dukkhadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasamaṅgīnaṃ gatibhūtattā duggati nāma.
应当问:“在这两种法当中,根律仪法安住在哪里?怎样才算善修习?它从哪里守护?”因此说了“其中,那住于律仪戒的……”等话。其中,就是指在这两种法当中。住于律仪戒时那种不毁坏的状态,应当以不毁坏来实行。住于律仪戒、善加行持、善加修习的善法,会决定性地守护那位以自身为依止的人,使他免于四恶趣;而非决定性地,仅仅受到守护的善法本身也能守护。应当这样理解其含义。所谓“免于恶趣”,是就主要方面说的,其实也能守护人免于疾病等障碍。或者,疾病等障碍因为是从恶趣分离出来的,应当看作包含在恶趣之中。巴利
‘‘Tasmiṃ duvidhe dhamme indriyasaṃvaradhammo kattha ṭhito, kathaṃ suciṇṇo, kuto rakkhatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā saṃvarasīle’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ duvidhe dhamme. Saṃvarasīle ṭhitā yā akhaṇḍakāritā hoti, ayaṃ akhaṇḍavasena kātabbo saṃvarasīle ṭhito suṭṭhu āciṇṇapariciṇṇo puññadhammo catūhi apāyehi attano ādhāraṃ attānaṃ rakkhantaṃ puggalaṃ ekantikabhāvena rakkhati, anekantikabhāvena pana rakkhitamatto puññadhammopi rakkhatīti attho gahetabbo. Apāyehīti ca padhānavasena vuttaṃ, rogādiantarāyatopi rakkhati. Rogādiantarāyo vā ayato apagatattā apāyantogadhoti daṭṭhabbo.
有人会说:“他那样守护,我们凭什么相信?”因为需要这样说明,所以接着说了“如是,世尊……”等话。这里的“如是”,指的是以此现在将说的方式,同时亦应了知前述的含义。世尊用刚才所说的这种方式,展示了具戒者的特征和情形,他说:“诸比丘,具戒者有两条去向:天和人。”通过“两条……人”这句话,就是在说你们应当相信。又因为需要说明:“对于安住在律仪戒中、应当做到不毁坏、已经善加实践的善法,它能决定性地守护人免于恶趣,这应该用哪部经来证明?”所以接着说了“如是,在那烂陀……”所谓在那烂陀,是指住在名为那烂陀的聚落中、名为阿西班德卡之子的村长,对世尊说了被转述的“尊者,婆罗门……”等话语。巴利
‘‘Tathā rakkhatīti kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena lakkhaṇapakāradassanaṃ bhagavā ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, sīlavato gatiyo devā ca manussā cā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘dvemā…pe… manussā cā’’ti vacanena tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Saṃvarasīle ṭhitassa akhaṇḍakātabbassa suciṇṇassa puññadhammassa apāyehi rakkhaṇe ekantikabhāvo kena suttena dīpetabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘evañca nāḷandāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evañcāti iminā idāni vuccamānena pakārenapi vuttappakāro attho veditabbo. Nāḷandāyanti nāḷandanāmake nigame nisinno asibandhakanāmassa putto gāmaṇi gāmajeṭṭhako bhagavantaṃ etaṃ vuccamānaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇā, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
婆罗门,指的是外道的婆罗门。尊者,是村长对世尊的称呼。后方住者,指坐在西边的人。令上升,指让人从人间往生到天界去。巴利
Brāhmaṇāti bāhirakā brāhmaṇā. Bhanteti bhagavantaṃ gāmaṇi ālapati. Pacchābhūmakāti pacchimadisāya nisinnakā. Uyyāpentīti manussalokato uddhaṃ devalokaṃ yāpenti pāpenti.
这里“于此”是指在这个世界里,如果有这样的人。应当这样连接文义:如果有杀生……中略……持邪见的人。其余内容,应当依据巴利原文和前面所说的来理解。巴利
Idhassāti idhaloke assa bhaveyya. Puriso pāṇātipātī…pe… micchādiṭṭhiko assa bhaveyyāti yojanā. Sesaṃ pāḷito ceva vuttānusārena ca ñeyyaṃ.
32 有人会说:通过异分法与同分法的回转,四圣谛的确定究竟要靠什么才能让我们相信?正因为有这句话要说,所以才说马哈咖咤那在《一处所缘》中如此说道。巴利
32. ‘‘Visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha mahākaccāno ekamhi padaṭṭhāne’’ti vuttaṃ.
因为到这里,“回转理趣”已经完整,没有别的要结合,所以说了“已结合的回转理趣”。应当这样理解其含义:在每一部经典中,凡是按照所获得的内容而结合的任何回转理趣,就在那一部经典中,被如此确定下来、结合并应用。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā ca āvaṭṭo hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto āvaṭṭo hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Yassaṃ yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ yo yo āvaṭṭo hāro yathālābhavasena yojito, tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so so āvaṭṭo hāro tathā niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
智者应当完全依照注疏和复注的传统,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来加以掌握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusāreneva gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
分别导向的分别的阐明巴利
8. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
33 以各种属于特定解释的回转引导分别,把应当回转的处所等作了分别,这样,那属于特定解释的回转引导分别就圆满了。因为应当问“其中,什么是分别引导的分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是分别引导”等。这里,“其中”是就对已指出的那十六种宣说引导等发问:什么是名为分别引导分别的特定解释?应当这样理解:现在我要说的“两部经”等详细展开的特定解释,就是名为分别引导分别的特定解释。巴利
33. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgena āvaṭṭetabbā padaṭṭhānādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘tattha katamo vibhattihāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vibhattihāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihāro vibhattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Dhammañca padaṭṭhānaṃ bhūmiñcā’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘dve suttānī’’tiādiko vitthārabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihāro vibhattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo.
有人问:在这些经里,用这种分别导向的方式所分析的那些法句基础之地,到底有多少部经?为了先指出这些经,所以说:有两部经——习气分和决择分。其中,习气分:福德的修习就叫习气,习气的部分或类别就是习气分;从能表达的角度说,与习气分相关联的经,就是习气分。那是哪一部呢?如果一部经里,世尊开示了三种福业事,那部经就是习气分。决择分:对贪蕴等的刺破、破除就是决择,决择的部分或类别就是决择分;从能表达的角度说,与决择分相关联的经,就是决择分。那是哪一部呢?如果一部经里,世尊开示了有学法和无学法,那部经就是决择分。巴利
‘‘Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo iminā vibhattihārena vibhattā, tāni suttāni kittakānī’’ti pucchitabbattā tāni suttāni paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dve suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vāsanābhāgiyanti puññabhāvanā vāsanā nāma, vāsanāya bhāgo koṭṭhāso vāsanābhāgo, vāsanābhāge vācakabhāvena niyuttaṃ suttanti vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yasmiṃ sutte tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni bhagavatā desitāni, taṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyanti lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho, nibbedhassa bhāgo koṭṭhāso nibbedhabhāgo, nibbedhabhāge vācakabhāvena niyuttaṃ suttanti nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yasmiṃ sutte sekkhāsekkhadhammā bhagavatā desitā, taṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ.
因为要问“那些经的接受者是以哪些行道而成就的?那些行道有多少种?”,所以说了“二行道”等等。在布施、持戒、修习所成的福德部分中存在的行道,就是福分行道;在果的部分中存在的行道,就是果分行道。因为要问“那些接受者站在哪些戒上修行?那些戒有多少种?”,所以说了“二戒”等等。用这个来防护,所以叫防护。这防护有五种:巴帝摩卡防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。所有这些都因为防护诸恶而叫防护,又因为是一切世间与出世间成就的立足处,所以叫戒。用这个来舍断应当舍断的,所以叫舍断;舍断的行为也叫舍断。这舍断有五种:彼分舍断、镇伏舍断、正断舍断、止息舍断、出离舍断。其中,除了出离舍断以外,其余四种舍断按照上面所说的方式,也叫戒。巴利
‘‘Tesaṃ suttānaṃ paṭiggāhakā puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi sampajjanti, tā paṭipadā kittikā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve paṭipadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dānasīlabhāvanāmayapuññabhāge bhavā paṭipadāti puññabhāgiyā. Phalabhāge bhavā paṭipadāti phalabhāgiyā. ‘‘Yesu sīlesu ṭhitā paṭiggāhakā paṭipajjanti, tāni sīlāni kittakānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve sīlānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃvarati etena saṃvarenāti saṃvaro, so saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Sabbopi pāpasaṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, lokiyalokuttarasampattiṭṭhānattā sīlaṃ nāma. Pajahati etena pahātabbeti pahānaṃ, pajahanaṃ vā pahānaṃ, tañca pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭipassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha nissaraṇappahānaṃ vajjetvā catubbidhaṃ pahānaṃ vuttanayena sīlaṃ nāma.
有人要问:在那些经典等当中,世尊开示哪一部经、用哪一种行道来开示?站在哪一种戒上的人,以哪一种戒而成为梵行者?为了把这些问题分别清楚、展示出来,所以说了“其中,世尊”等话。这里应当这样连接理解:在那些习气分经典等经典当中,对于习气分经典,在那些福分等行道当中,世尊以福分行道为某个人开示;那位接受习气分经典的人,在那些防护戒等当中,站在防护戒上,以那称为防护戒的梵行,也就是最胜的行为,而成为梵行者,也就是最胜行为的圆满实践者。在那些习气分经典等经典当中,对于决择分经典,在那些福分等行道当中,世尊以果分行道为某个人开示;那位接受决择分经典的人,在那些防护戒等当中,依正断与止息断除的力量,站在断除戒上,以那称为断除戒的殊胜梵行,也就是道,而成为梵行者。巴利
‘‘Tesu suttādīsu bhagavā katamaṃ suttaṃ katamāya paṭipadāya desayati, katarasmiṃ sīle ṭhito puggalo katamena sīlena brahmacārī bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu vāsanābhāgiyādīsu suttesu vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tattha tāsu puññabhāgiyādipaṭipadāsu puññabhāgiyāya paṭipadāya bhagavā yassa puggalassa desayati, so vāsanābhāgiyasuttapaṭiggāhako puggalo tattha saṃvarasīlādīsu saṃvarasīle ṭhito hutvā tena saṃvarasīlasaṅkhātena brahmacariyena seṭṭhacariyena brahmacārī seṭṭhācārapūrako bhavati. Tattha tesu vāsanābhāgiyādīsu suttesu nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tattha tāsu puññabhāgiyādipaṭipadāsu phalabhāgiyāya paṭipadāya yassa puggalassa bhagavā desayati, so nibbedhabhāgiyasuttapaṭiggāhako puggalo tattha saṃvarasīlādīsu pahānasīle samucchedappassaddhippahānavasena ṭhito hutvā tena pahānasīlasaṅkhātena visesabhūtena maggasaṅkhātena brahmacariyena brahmacārī bhavatīti yojanā kātabbā.
有人问“在习气分经典等之中,哪一部是习气分经典”,所以说了“其中,哪一部”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在那些习气分经典等之中。“布施论”,是关于善士的布施与布施果报、非善士的布施与布施果报的论说。“戒论”,是关于五戒等戒及其果报的论说。“天论”,是关于天界成就之乐的论说,也是关于能使人投生天界的福德的论说。“过患”,是显示过失的经典。“功德”,是显示功德的经典。应当这样连接:这些就称为习气分经典。巴利
‘‘Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu. Dānakathāti sappurisadānadānaphalaasappurisadānadānaphalakathā. Sīlakathāti pañcasīlādisīlaphalakathā. Saggakathāti saggasampattisukhakathā ceva sagge nibbattāpakapuññakathā ca. Ādīnavoti ādīnavadassako suttanto. Ānisaṃsoti ānisaṃsadassako suttanto. Vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti yojanā.
在“其中,哪一部”等语句里,承接的意义就像前面所说的那样。应当这样连接:凡是开示四圣谛的教说,那教说就称为决择分经典。这样一来,习气分经典也会变成决择分经典,因为它同样开示四圣谛。考虑到这个质疑,才说了“在习气分经典中”等话。在习气分经典中,没有那种作为出起观、作为圣道立足处的了知,没有道与圣道,也没有果与圣果。但在决择分经典中,了知等是有的,在习气分经典中则没有。通过“了知”等说法,表明开示四圣谛的布施论等包含在决择分经典中,而另一部分才称为习气分经典。有人问:那些经典中所说的、作为法句立足处的诸地已被分析,那些经典并不只有两部,为什么说“仅二经被确定”?回答:因为在不混杂的情况下,经典中所说的、应当被分析的法句立足处诸地很容易了知。若有人说:既然如此,杂染分经典与无学分经典也应被确定,因为它们同样不混杂。回答:并没有被确定。因为当习气分经典被确定时,杂染分经典也随之被确定,因为从杂染法中出离的法正是习气分法;而当决择分经典被确定时,无学分经典也随之被确定,因为并无差别。巴利
‘‘Tattha katama’’ntiādīsu anusandhyattho vuttanayova. Yā desanā catusaccappakāsanā, sā desanā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Evañca sati vāsanābhāgiyasuttassapi nibbedhabhāgiyasuttabhāvo āpajjeyya catusaccappakāsanatoti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘vāsanābhāgiye sutte’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vāsanābhāgiye sutte pajānanā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā ariyamaggapadaṭṭhānabhūtā paññā natthi, maggo ariyamaggo natthi, phalaṃ ariyaphalaṃ natthi. Nibbedhabhāgiye sutte pana pajānanādayo atthi, vāsanābhāgiye sutte natthi. ‘‘Pajānanā’’tiādinā catusaccappakāsanā dānakathādikā nibbedhabhāgiye sutte antogadhā, itaraṃyeva vāsanābhāgiyasuttanti nāmāti dasseti. Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo vibhattā, tāni suttāni dveyeva na honti, kasmā ‘‘dveyeva suttāni niddhāritānī’’ti ce vadeyyuṃ? Asaṅkarato sutte vuttānaṃ dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmīnaṃ vibhajitabbānaṃ suviññeyyattā. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttānipi niddhāritāni asaṅkarattā’’ti ce vadeyyuṃ? No niddhāritāni, vāsanābhāgiyasutte niddhārite saṃkilesabhāgiyasuttampi niddhāritaṃ, saṃkilesadhammato nissaṭṭhadhammānaṃyeva vāsanābhāgiyadhammattā nibbedhabhāgiyasutte ca niddhārite asekkhabhāgiyasuttampi niddhāritaṃ anaññattā.
有人问:那些经典里说到的、作为法句立足处的地,已经按分类的方式分析过了,这些经典应该用哪种果来配合?因为需要这样问,所以说了“这四部经”等话。其中,“这四部经”指的是:前面已经确定下来的习气分经和决择分经,以及通过这种确定而一并确定的杂染分经和无学分经。这四部经,应该按照它们各自教导的方式和所引出的果,从一切方面、以一切部分,用防护戒和断除戒的梵行来配合。而在配合的时候,应当从一切方面、以一切部分,通过分析词句等的方式,先辨明防护戒等果,再以合理的方式寻找与之相应的果,然后想:“这个果是这个人的果,这个果是这部经的果”,把每部经各自与果配合起来。应当这样理解其中的意思。巴利
‘‘Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo vibhattihārena vibhattā, tāni suttāni katamena phalena yojayitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni cattāri suttānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāni cattāri suttānīti yathāniddhāritāni vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni ceva taṃniddhāraṇena niddhāritāni saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttāni cāti cattāri suttāni imesaṃyeva catunnaṃ suttānaṃ desanāya nayena nītena phalena sabbato sabbabhāgena saṃvarasīlappahānasīlena brahmacariyena yojayitabbāni. Yojentena ca sabbato sabbabhāgena ca padādivicayena hārena saṃvarasīlādikaṃ phalaṃ vicinitvā yuttihārena yuttaṃ phalaṃ gavesitvā ‘‘idaṃ phalaṃ imassa puggalassa phalaṃ, idaṃ phalaṃ imassa suttassa phala’’nti suttāni visuṃ visuṃ phalena yojayitabbānīti attho gahetabbo.
有人问:“应当用多少种果来配合梵行?”所以回答说:“以智慧之地的范围为准。”凡是依靠世尊所教导的习气分经而成立的福德分行道等,能够成为分别智之地和所缘,那么就有多少地,就应该用那些地来配合习气分经。凡是依靠决择分经而成立的果分行道等,能够成为分别智之地和所缘,那么就有多少地,就应该用那些地来配合决择分经。其余两部经也应当按各自相应的情况来配合。由此说明,智慧之地和经义是多种多样的。巴利
‘‘Kittakena phalena brahmacariyena yojetabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā desitena vāsanābhāgiyasuttena siddhā yāvatikā puññabhāgiyā paṭipadādayo vibhajanañāṇassa bhūmi ārammaṇā bhavitumarahanti, tāvatikāhi bhūmīhi vāsanābhāgiyasuttaṃ yojayitabbaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyasuttena siddhā yāvatikā phalabhāgiyā paṭipadādayo vibhajanañāṇassa bhūmi ārammaṇā bhavitumarahanti, tāvatikāhi bhūmīhi nibbedhabhāgiyasuttaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Itaradvayampi suttaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Etena ñāṇassa bhūmīnaṃ suttatthānaṃ bahuvidhattaṃ dasseti.
34 在《习气分经》等经里所说的那些法,阿阇梨已经从习气分和决择分的角度作了分析,我们也已经了解了。因为还需要问“应当怎样从杂染分与无学分、共与不共的角度来分析”,所以就开始了“其中,哪些法是共的?”等提问。而在注释书里则说:巴利
34. Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu vuttā dhammā vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhābhāgiyabhāvehi asādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāya pana –
像这样,先按习气分和决择分,对法做了一部分的分析;现在为了再按杂染分和无学分、共与不共,来分析它们,就开始了“其中,哪些法是共的?”等提问。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi dhamme ekadesena vibhajitvā idāni tesaṃ kilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyabhāvehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajituṃ ‘tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) –
已说。其中,“于其中”是指:对于那些在经中已说、应当按分类方式加以分析的诸法,问:在这些法当中,哪些法是共通的?回答:二法是共通的。为了把那二法按其自身相状显示出来,所以说“名共通、事共通”。其中,“名共通”是指:以名称、以名之施设而共通、相同——以“善”这个名称,二十一种心生起是相同的;以“不善”等名称,十二种心生起是相同的;那些可被善等名称之施设言说的义,就说为善等名共通。因此,在复注中说:巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti ye dhammā sutte vuttā vibhattihārena vibhajitabbā, tesu dhammesu katame dhammā sādhāraṇāti pucchati, dve dhammā sādhāraṇāti vissajjeti. Te dve dhamme sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘nāmasādhāraṇā, vatthusādhāraṇā cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha nāmasādhāraṇāti nāmena nāmapaññattiyā sādhāraṇā samānā, ‘‘kusalā’’ti nāmena ekavīsati cittuppādā samānā, ‘‘akusalā’’tyādināmena dvādasa cittuppādā samānā, kusalādināmapaññattivacanena vacanīyā atthā kusalādināmasādhāraṇāti vuttā. Tena ṭīkāyaṃ –
名就是名的施设,正是通过那个名称本身,从音声而得知其义。而且,音声只是以共相的方式把握这样的义,不是以别相的方式。因此,可以被音声言说的诸义,由于它们可被把握是依赖于共相之名,所以说它们是名共。巴利
‘‘Nāmaṃ nāmapaññatti, taṃmukheneva saddato tadatthāvagamo. Saddena ca sāmaññarūpeneva tathārūpassa atthassa gahaṇaṃ, na visesarūpena. Tasmā saddavacanīyā atthā sādhāraṇarūpanāmāyattagahaṇīyatāya nāmasādhāraṇā vuttā’’ti –
已说。所谓“事共”,就是依作为立足处的事而共。意思是:那些在作为立足处的相续中,或者在心生起等当中现起的法,这些法就和那个相续、那件事,或者那个心生起等是共的、相同的。虽然因为是在同一相续中现起,从触等自性来说各有不同,但事共者仍然是同一事,所以说“依分别门来分析”。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Vatthusādhāraṇāti patiṭṭhānabhūtena vatthunā sādhāraṇā. Yasmiṃ patiṭṭhānabhūte santāne vā cittuppādādimhi vā ye dhammā pavattanti, te dhammā tena santānena vā vatthunā tena cittuppādādinā vā sādhāraṇā samānāti attho. Ekasantāne patitattā phusanādisabhāvato bhinnāpi vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāyeva bhavantīti vibhattihārena vibhajitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
有人应该问:是不是只应该按“名共”和“事共”来分别,除此之外就没有别的可分别了?所以接着说了“或复有其他”等话。意思是:除了名共和事共之外,还有其他属于作用共、缘共、对治共等的法类,这一切也都要通过审察的方式去审查,通过合理的方式去探求,然后按分别的方式把合理的共相分别出来。因为应该问:“在这些名共等当中,哪些是名共,哪些是事共?”所以接着说了“对于决定邪性的众生”等话。对于杀母等六种造作决定邪性业的众生,以及恶趣无因、善趣无因、二因、三因这四种造作不定业的凡夫众生,在他们相续中生起的见所断烦恼,就是见所断名共,因为即使有身见、疑、戒禁取等在体性上各有不同,也超不出“见所断”这个名称。由于它们是上述决定和不定众生的见所断烦恼所依止的事,所以也是事共,意思是共同依止于同一事。对于凡夫的恶趣无因等四种众生以及入流者,在他们相续中生起的欲贪和嗔恚烦恼,就是欲贪、嗔恚名共,因为即使是斯陀含道所断、阿那含道所断而在体性上各有不同,也超不出“欲贪、嗔恚”这个名称。应当理解:由于它们是上述凡夫和入流者的欲贪、嗔恚所依止的事,所以也是事共,意思是共同依止于同一事。对于凡夫和阿那含,在他们相续中生起的上分结,就是上分结名共,因为即使是色贪等而在体性上各有不同,也超不出“上分结”这个名称。也应当理解:由于它们是凡夫和阿那含的上分结所依止的事,所以也是事共,意思是共同依止于同一事。因此注疏中说:“见所断烦恼正如决定邪性众生的生起依止处一样,不定众生也是如此。”总之,在杂染这一方面,应看作:在断除上属于同一类的烦恼是名共,在同一事上生起的烦恼是事共。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ nāmasādhāraṇavatthusādhāraṇāyeva vibhajitabbā, aññaṃ vibhajitabbaṃ natthī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nāmasādhāraṇavatthusādhāraṇehi aññaṃ yaṃ vā pana kiccasādhāraṇapaccayasādhāraṇapaṭipakkhādisādhāraṇampi dhammajātaṃ evaṃjātiyaṃ sādhāraṇajātiyaṃ, tampi sabbaṃ vicayahārena vicinitvā yuttihārena gavesitvā yuttaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ vibhattihārena vibhajitabbanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tesu nāmasādhāraṇādīsu katame nāmasādhāraṇā, katame vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘micchattaniyatānaṃ sattāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Mātughātakādīnaṃ channaṃ micchattaniyatakammakarānaṃ sattānañca duggatiahetukasugatiahetukaduhetukatihetukānaṃ catunnaṃ puthujjanānaṃ aniyatakammakarānaṃ sattānañca santāne pavattā dassanapahātabbā kilesā dassanapahātabbanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmasanavasena bhinnasabhāvānampi dassanapahātabbanāmanātivattanato. Vuttappakārānaṃ niyatāniyatasattānaṃ dassanapahātabbānaṃ kilesānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā ca samānavatthukāti attho. Puthujjanassa duggatiahetukādicatubbidhasattassa, sotāpannassa ca santāne pavattā kāmarāgabyāpādā kilesā kāmarāgabyāpādanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti sakadāgāmimaggappahātabbaanāgāmimaggappahātabbavasena bhinnasabhāvānampi kāmarāgabyāpādanāmanātivattanato. Vuttappakārassa puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāti attho ca gahetabbo. Puthujjanassa, anāgāmissa ca santāne pavattā uddhaṃbhāgiyā saṃyojanā uddhambhāgiyanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti rūparāgādivasena bhinnasabhāvānampi uddhaṃbhāgiyanāmanātivattanato. Puthujjanassa, anāgāmissa ca uddhaṃbhāgiyānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāti attho ca gahetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ – ‘‘dassanapahātabbānañhi yathā micchattaniyatasattā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ aniyatāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhepato pana saṃkilesapakkhe pahānekaṭṭhā kilesā nāmasādhāraṇā honti, sahajekaṭṭhā kilesā vatthusādhāraṇāti daṭṭhabbā.
在杂染分这边,共通的(内容)已由阿阇梨分别说明,我们也已经知道。因为有人会问“在清净分这边,共通的部分又是怎么分别说明的”,所以说了“凡任何圣弟子”等话。其中,“凡任何”是以笼统的方式说的,指的是初禅等至等世间等至。“圣弟子”应当说是圣者世尊的弟子,也就是证得禅那的人和住于果位的人,而不是住于道位的人。因为住于道位的人不入任何世间等至。所有那些世间等至——色界、无色界、天住、梵住、初禅等至等等,用这些同义词来说都是共通的,因为它们不超出“世间等至”这个名称,而且离欲者和未离欲者都能进入。由于有人会说“圣弟子进入世间等至时,是一个一个次第进入的,既然如此,怎么能相信它和离欲者是共通的呢”,所以说了“因为诸法是共通的”等话。而在义注中则说:“‘他们是怎么一个一个取的?又该怎么一个一个取?怎么是共通的?’——在心里生起这样的追问后,为了澄清这一点,他说:‘因为诸法如此相互共通’等等。”巴利
Saṃkilesapakkhe sādhāraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ vodānapakkhe sādhāraṇā vibhattā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci ariyasāvako’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kiñcīti sāmaññavasena vuttā paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādikā lokiyā samāpattiyeva gahitā. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa bhagavato sāvako ariyasāvakoti vattabbo, jhānalābhī ca phalaṭṭho ca puggalo, na maggaṭṭho. Maggaṭṭho hi lokiyaṃ yaṃ kiñci samāpattiṃ na samāpajjati. Sabbā sā lokiyasamāpatti rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā dibbavihāro brahmavihāro paṭhamajjhānasamāpattīti evamādīhi pariyāyehi sādhāraṇā taṃsamaṅgīhi vītarāgāvītarāgehi sādhāraṇā lokiyasamāpattināmanātivattanato ca vītarāgāvītarāgehi samāpajjitabbato ca. ‘‘Ariyasāvako ca lokiyaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjanto odhiso odhiso samāpajjati, evaṃ sati kathaṃ vītarāgehi sādhāraṇāti saddahitabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sādhāraṇā hi dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘kathaṃ te odhiso gahitā, atha odhiso gahetabbā, kathaṃ sādhāraṇāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā taṃ visodhento āha – ‘sādhāraṇā hi dhammā evaṃ aññamañña’ntiādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
在这里,那些被离欲者和未离欲者各自按不同层次、不同层次依次进入的法,也就是后后生起的法类,因为确实不会超越各自前前生起的、名为“世间等至”的特定范围,它们彼此之间不会越过,所以应当相信、应当理解为“共通的”——这就是意思所在。因为需要说明“依次进入时,怎么会不超越呢?”,为了让“不超越”变得清楚,所以说了“即使……”等话。无论是圣弟子还是未离欲者,只要具备这些世间等至法,那位圣弟子或未离欲者即使依次进入,也不会超越那法——世间等至法,也就是不会越过它而进入别的法。应当看出:所具备的这些世间等至法,这些世间等至法就是共通的。巴利
Tattha evaṃ vītarāgāvītarāgehi odhiso odhiso samāpajjitabbā dhammā paraṃ paraṃ pacchā pacchā pavattiyamānaṃ dhammajātaṃ sakaṃ sakaṃ pubbe pubbe jātaṃ ‘‘lokiyasamāpattī’’ti nāmaṃ niyatavisayaṃ aññamaññaṃ hutvā hi yasmā nātivattanti, tasmā sādhāraṇāti saddahitabbā gahetabbāti attho. ‘‘Paraṃ paraṃ samāpajjanto kathaṃ nātivattatī’’ti vattabbattā nātivattanaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo ariyasāvako vā avītarāgo vā. Imehi lokiyasamāpattidhammehi samannāgato, so ariyasāvako vā avītarāgo vā paraṃ paraṃ samāpajjantopi taṃ dhammaṃ lokiyaṃ samāpattidhammaṃ nātivattati, aññaṃ upagantvā nātikkamatīti attho. Yehi lokiyasamāpattidhammehi samannāgato, ime lokiyasamāpatti dhammā sādhāraṇāvāti daṭṭhabbā.
在《随习分》等经里所说的那些法,已经按这个分别的理路作了分别。因为应当问“在这些法当中,哪些法是不共的”,所以说了“其中哪些法是不共的”等等。这里问的是:在那些应当分别的法当中,哪些法是不共的?问过之后,应当依着开示去寻求不共的法,或者应当寻求“有学、无学”,或者应当寻求“堪能、不堪能”。又或者,开示只说到“有学、无学、堪能、不堪能”为止,所以就依着这个开示去寻求不共的法。应当怎么寻求呢?在圣者当中,就有学法和无学法来说,“有学”这个名称与无学不共,“无学”这个名称与有学不共;在非圣者当中,“堪能”这个名称与不堪能不共,“不堪能”这个名称与堪能不共。应当这样寻求。欲贪结和嗔恚结因为还没有断除,能以随眠的方式生起,所以是第八者——住在入流道上的人——和住在入流果上的人所共的;而法性、法的自相则是不共的。这里说的是:第八者住在入流道上,这对入流果者是不共的;入流果者住在入流果上,这对第八者——住在入流道上的人——是不共的。或者,第八者正在断除的烦恼,对入流果者是不共的;入流果者已经断除的烦恼,对第八者是不共的。巴利
‘‘Vāsanābhāgiyādisuttesu vuttā ye dhammā iminā vibhattihārena vibhattā, yesu dhammesu katame dhammā asādhāraṇā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katame dhammā asādhāraṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu vibhajitabbesu dhammesu katame dhammā asādhāraṇāti pucchati, pucchitvā yāva desanaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇā dhammā gavesitabbā, ‘‘sekkhāsekkhā’’ti vā gavesitabbā, ‘‘bhabbābhabbā’’ti vā gavesitabbā. Atha vā yāva ‘‘sekkhāsekkhā bhabbābhabbā’’ti desanā vuttā, tāva desanaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇā gavesitabbā. Kathaṃ gavesitabbā? Ariyesu sekkhāsekkhadhammavasena ‘‘sekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ asekkhena asādhāraṇaṃ, ‘‘asekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ sekkhena asādhāraṇanti vā, anariyesu ‘‘bhabbā’’ti nāmaṃ abhabbena asādhāraṇaṃ, ‘‘abhabbā’’ti nāmaṃ bhabbena asādhāraṇanti vā gavesitabbā. Kāmarāgabyāpādā saṃyojanā appahīnattā anusayabhāvena uppajjanārahattā aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassa ca sotāpannassa phalaṭṭhassa ca sādhāraṇā bhavanti, dhammatā dhammasabhāvo asādhāraṇo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhatā sotāpannassa asādhāraṇā, sotāpannassa sotāpannaphalaṭṭhatā ca aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassa asādhāraṇā. Aṭṭhamakassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā sotāpannassa asādhāraṇā, sotāpannassa pahīnakilesatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā’’ti.
由于上分结还没断除,它们仍能以随眠的方式生起,所以第八者(以住于道位的身份)与类似第八者的住阿那含道位者、以及住阿那含果位者,这三者在这一点上是共同的;但法性、法的自相则是不共的。这里要表达的意思是:第八者所处的阿那含道位,对住阿那含果位者来说是不共的;住阿那含果位者的果位,对第八者来说也是不共的。或者说:第八者正在断除的烦恼,对住阿那含果位者是不共的;住阿那含果位者已经断除的烦恼,对第八者也是不共的。也可以这样说:住道位对住果位是不共的,住果位对住道位也是不共的。七种有学之人共同拥有的“有学”这个名称是共的,但法性是不共的。也就是说:四位住道者各自的住道性,对其他住道者来说是不共的。下三果的住果者也是如此:下三果住果者各自的住果性,对其他住果者以及四位住道者来说都是不共的。也可以这样说:有学之人各自的住道性对住果性是不共的,各自的住果性对住道性也是不共的。凡是行道者——也就是为了证果而修行的人——这四位具足道的人共同拥有的“行道者”这个名称是共的,但法性,也就是各自的住道性,是不共的。所有七种有学者的戒是共的,但法性,也就是各自的住道性和住果性,是不共的。在《随习分》和《杂染分》等经中所说的“由见所断”等法,以及在《决了分》和《无学分》等经中所说的有学等法,都应该按照共与不共的分别方式来分析——这就是这里要表达的意思。巴利
Uddhambhāgiyā saṃyojanā appahīnattā anusayabhāvena uppajjanārahattā aṭṭhamakassa maggaṭṭhabhāvena aṭṭhamakasadisassa anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassa ca anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa ca sādhāraṇā, dhammatā dhammasabhāvo asādhāraṇā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aṭṭhamakassa anāgāmimaggaṭṭhatā anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa asādhāraṇā, anāgāmissa anāgāmiphalaṭṭhatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā. Aṭṭhamakassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā anāgāmissa asādhāraṇā, anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa pahīnakilesatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā’’ti. ‘‘Maggaṭṭhatā phalaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā, phalaṭṭhatā ca maggaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbesaṃ sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ‘‘sekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ. Dhammatā asādhāraṇāti catunnaṃ maggaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā aññamaññaṃ maggaṭṭhānaṃ asādhāraṇā. Heṭṭhimaphalattayaṭṭhānañca asādhāraṇā, heṭṭhimaphalattayaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatā ca aññamaññaṃ phalaṭṭhānaṃ asādhāraṇā, catunnaṃ maggaṭṭhānañca asādhāraṇāti attho. ‘‘Sekkhānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā, taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatā ca taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā’’ti vattumpi vaṭṭati. Sabbesaṃ paṭipannakānanti phalatthāya paṭipajjantīti paṭipannakā, tesaṃ maggasamaṅgīnaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ ‘‘paṭipannakā’’ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, dhammatā taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā asādhāraṇā. Sabbesaṃ sekkhānaṃ sattannaṃ puggalānaṃ sekkhānaṃ sīlaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, dhammatā taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhatā asādhāraṇāti. Vāsanābhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyasuttesu vuttā dassanenapahātabbādayo ceva nibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttesu vuttā sekkhādayo ca dhammā sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhedena vibhattihārena vibhajitabbāti adhippāyo veditabbo.
“第八者等”这句话,是论师对圣者中不共法的分别说明,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问“在非圣者中,不共法又是怎样分别的”,为了说明应当依照圣者中所述的方式,在非圣者中也作分别并加以探求,所以说了“如是随观差别”等话。而注释书中则说:“如是,以‘第八者等’指出圣者中的不共法之后,为了显示其余非圣者的理则,所以说‘如是随观差别’等。”因此,依照圣者中所述的方式,在堪能与不堪能的非圣者中,随观差别的智者应当从不共的角度随观差别,在堪能与不堪能者中也应依劣、胜、中来探求。怎样探求呢?因杀母等而转起的、与嗔恚相应及与邪见相应的第七速行心,其决定邪性对具有这些心的人是共的;而同样转起的初速行心等不定法,以与嗔恚相应等的方式来说是共的;决定邪性的法,因为只在一心生起中存在,所以是不共的。正如心不能说成“与心相杂”,决定邪性也不能说成“与决定邪性共”。在决定邪性者中,对于具有决定邪见、即拥有与邪见相应第七速行心的人,不定的与邪见相应初速行心等法,以与邪见相应等的方式来说是共的;而决定邪见,因为只在一心生起中具备,所以是不共的。因此注释师说:巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhamakassā’’tiādinā ariyesu puggalesu asādhāraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ anariyesu asādhāraṇā vibhattā’’ti pucchitabbattā ariyesu vuttanayānusārena anariyesupi vibhajitvā gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ visesānupassinā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ ‘aṭṭhamakassā’tiādinā ariyapuggalesu asādhāraṇadhammaṃ dassetvā itaresu nayadassanatthaṃ ‘evaṃ visesānupassinā’tiādi vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ariyesu vuttanayānusārena bhabbābhabbesu anariyesu visesānupassinā asādhāraṇato visesaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ anupassinā gavesakena paṇḍitena bhabbābhabbesupi hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāya gavesitabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Mātughātādivasena pavattānaṃ paṭighasampayuttadiṭṭhisampayuttasattamajavanacittuppādānaṃ micchattaniyatānaṃ taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ vā tathāpavattā paṭhamajavanacittupādādayo aniyatā dhammā paṭighasampayuttādibhāvena sādhāraṇā, micchattaniyatā dhammā ekacittuppādattā asādhāraṇā. Yathā hi cittaṃ ‘‘cittasaṃsaṭṭha’’nti na vattabbaṃ, evaṃ micchattaniyatāpi ‘‘micchattaniyatasādhāraṇā’’ti na vattabbā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ diṭṭhisampayuttasattamajavanacittuppādasamaṅgīnaṃ aniyatā diṭṭhisampayuttapaṭhamajavanacittuppādādayo dhammā diṭṭhisampayuttādibhāvena sādhāraṇā, niyatamicchādiṭṭhi ekacittuppādasamaṅgībhāvato asādhāraṇā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo –
对于决定邪性者来说,不定法是共通的,决定邪性法是不共的。即使在决定邪性者当中,对于持有决定邪见的人,不定法是共通的,决定邪见是不共的——随观差别的人应当按这个方法来理解。巴利
‘‘Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇa, micchattaniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā, niyatamicchādiṭṭhi asādhāraṇāti iminā nayena visesānupassinā veditabbā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34).
在这里,“依此理则”是指:对于邪性决定者,能生起的不定法是共通的,不能生起的不定法是不共通的——这样来理解。因此说“堪能与不堪能”。同样,劣者的劣,以劣性为共通,中和胜则不共通;中者的中,以中性为共通,劣和胜则不共通;胜者的胜,以胜性为共通,劣和中则不共通——也应当这样去探求。因此说:“应当依劣、胜、中来探求。”巴利
Tattha ‘‘iminā nayenā’’ti iminā micchattaniyatānaṃ uppajjituṃ bhabbā aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā, uppajjituṃ abhabbā aniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇāti gahitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhabbābhabbā’’ti. Tathā hīnassa hīno hīnabhāvena sādhāraṇo, majjhimukkaṭṭhā asādhāraṇā. Majjhimassa majjhimo sādhāraṇo, hīnukkaṭṭhā asādhāraṇā. Ukkaṭṭhassa ukkaṭṭho ukkaṭṭhabhāvena sādhāraṇo, hīnamajjhimā asādhāraṇātipi gavesitabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāya gavesitabba’’nti.
在这里,以“其中哪些法是共通的”等种种分别理趣的方式,把诸法分别开示出来,我们也已经知道了。由于应当问“怎样以分别理趣的方式把地的近因分别开示出来”,所以在分别诸法之后,为了分别开示地的近因,就说了“见地”等。
其中,见地:在这里,也就是在初道上有见,所以叫见地,就是入流道。入正性决定:决定就是正性决定,那是什么?就是到达正性决定;进入就是入,也就是入流果;对正性决定的进入,就是入正性决定,由这(入正性决定)。名为见地的入流道,是名为入正性决定的入流果之得的近因。因为初道具足者名为入正性决定者,而果具足者则名为已入正性决定者,所以由入正性决定一词,初果的生起已被包含。修地:即上三道。对于更上者:是指对于各个道之上的各各果之得的近因,应当分别配对理解。巴利
‘‘Tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’’tiādinā nānāvidhena vibhattihāranayena dhammā vibhajitvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ bhūmipadaṭṭhānāni vibhattihāranayena vibhajitvā dassitānī’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato dhammavibhajanānantaraṃ bhūmipadaṭṭhānāni vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘dassanabhūmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha dassanabhūmīti dassanaṃ bhavati ettha paṭhamamaggeti dassanabhūmi, sotāpattimaggo . Niyāmāvakkantiyāti niyamanaṃ niyāmo, ko so? Sampattaniyāmo, avakkanaṃ avakkanti, sotāpattiphalaṃ, niyāmassa avakkanti niyāmāvakkanti, tāya. Dassanabhūmināmako sotāpattimaggo niyāmāvakkantināmakassa sotāpattiphalassa pattiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Paṭhamamaggasamaṅgī puggalo hi niyāmaṃ okkamanto nāma, phalasamaṅgī pana niyāmaṃ okkanto nāma hoti, tasmā niyāmāvakkantisaddena paṭhamaphaluppatti gahitā. Bhāvanābhūmīti uparimaggattayaṃ. Uttarikānanti tassa tassa maggassa uparipavattānaṃ taṃtaṃphalānaṃ pattiyā padaṭṭhānanti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
苦行道且通达迟缓,因为在钝慧的人心中生起,所以能带来止,并成为止的近因;乐行道且通达迅速,因为在智慧增上的人心中生起,所以能带来观,并成为观的近因;其余两种行道,也应理解为因为在并非极慧的人心中生起,所以是止的近因。因此,义注中说:“然而其余三种行道也都能带来止”等等(《导论义注》34)。布施所成的福德事,本身并不绝对只是听法的近因,礼敬、祈请、提问等也是近因,所以由这些原因而成为共通的,成为从他闻的近因;而从他闻则是以听法、解答问题等方式进行的。因为在施舍应施之物、礼敬、祈请的时候,大多会说法;在提问等时候,则会解答,或者反问、讨论等。戒所成的福德事,以欢悦、喜、轻安、乐、定作为近因的方式而成为共通的,成为思所成慧的近因。因为具戒的人在省察自己的戒时,会生起欢悦等;而心得定的人,则有能力思惟法。巴利
Dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā mandapaññassa uppajjanato samathaṃ āvahantī hutvā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā ñāṇādhikassa uppajjanato vipassanāvahantī hutvā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, avasesā dve paṭipadāpi nātipaññassa uppajjanato samathassa padaṭṭhānanti gahetabbā. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘itarā pana tissopi paṭipadā samathaṃ āvahantī’’tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 34). Dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu sayameva ekantena dhammassavanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ na hoti, vandanayācanapañhāpucchanādayopi padaṭṭhānaṃ honti, tasmā tehi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā paratoghosassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, paratoghoso ca dhammassavanapañhāvissajjanādivasena pavatto. Dātabbavatthupariccajanavandanayācanakālesu hi yebhuyyena dhammaṃ desenti, pañhāpucchanādikālesu ca vissajjenti, paṭipucchasākacchādīni vā karonti. Sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu pāmojjapītipassaddhisukhasamādhīhi padaṭṭhānabhāvena sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā cintāmayiyā paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sīlavantassa hi sīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa pāmojjādayo honti, samāhito ca dhammacintane samattho hoti.
修所成的福行事:前面那些奢摩他修习和毗婆舍那修习,以布施、持戒等作为原因而与它们共通,因此成为后面修所成慧、后面奢摩他修习和毗婆舍那修习的近因。所以义注中说:“所谓共通,并不是像种子对芽那样,也不是像见地等对入决定等那样各别专属,而是共通,也以其他那些原因作为近因。”又说:“布施所成、戒所成、修所成的福行事,对于从他闻、思所成、修所成慧的近因地位,阿阇梨已经分别解说了;如果真是这样,那么那些布施所成等,依次对于教法、多闻、业处实践、道正见的近因地位,就不应该存在了。”因此,为了也说明这样转起的近因地位,才说了“布施所成的福行事,对于从他闻和闻所成慧……”等。而在义注中——巴利
Bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthūti purimā purimā samathabhāvanā ceva vipassanābhāvanā ca puññakiriyavatthudānasīlādīhi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya pacchimāya pacchimāya samathabhāvanāya ceva vipassanābhāvanāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘sādhāraṇanti na bījaṃ viya aṅkurassa, dassanabhūmiādayo viya niyāmāvakkantiādīnaṃ āveṇikaṃ , atha kho sādhāraṇaṃ tadaññakāraṇehipī’’ti. ‘‘Dānamayasīlamayabhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ paratoghosacintāmayibhāvanāmayipaññānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo ācariyena vibhatto, evaṃ sati tesaṃ dānamayādīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo na bhaveyyā’’ti vattabbattā tathāpavattaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvampi dassetuṃ ‘‘dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu parato ca ghosassa sutamayiyā ca paññāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
现在,因为布施、持戒和世间修习并不只是像前面所说的那样,仅仅以从他闻法等为条件,而是依次也成为教法、多闻、业处实践和道正见的缘,所以,为了也显示这一理趣,又用“布施所成”等说法把教说进一步展开。巴利
‘‘Idāni yasmā dānaṃ, sīlaṃ, lokiyabhāvanā ca na kevalaṃ yathāvuttaparatoghosādīnaṃyeva, atha kho yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnampi paccayā honti, tasmā tampi nayaṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘dānamaya’ntiādinā desanaṃ vaḍḍhesī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) –
已说。其中,布施所成福行事的近因,与从他闻共通,这一点应当按前面所说的方式来了知。不过,一个人布施之后,听闻教说,再依照所听闻的内容展开思惟,这时生起的闻所成慧,就和礼敬、祈请等共通,成为近因。戒所成福行事与思所成慧共通的近因状态,也已经说过了。不过,一个人依止清净戒,这样省察:“我要生起禅那,我要生起道果”,这时生起的如理作意,就和欢悦等共通,成为近因。修所成福行事与修所成慧共通的近因状态,也已经说过了。不过,以称为奢摩他修习的禅那作为基础,或者依止已经成熟的毗婆舍那状态,这时生起的正见,就和清净戒等共通,成为近因。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tattha dānamayapuññakiriyavatthuno paratoghosassa sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvo heṭṭhā vuttanayena ñātabbo. Dānaṃ pana datvā desanaṃ sutvā sutānusārena vitthāretvā cintentassa pavattamānāya sutamayiyā paññāya vandanayācanādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sīlamayapuññakiriyavatthunopi cintāmayiyā paññāya sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoyeva. Parisuddhasīlaṃ pana nissāya ‘‘jhānaṃ nibbattessāmi, maggaphalaṃ nibbattessāmī’’tiādinā paccavekkhantassa pavattamānassa yonisomanasikārassa pāmojjādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Bhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthuno bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvopi vuttoyeva. Samathabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ pana jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vā paripākaṃ vipassanābhāvaṃyeva vā nissāya pavattamānāya sammādiṭṭhiyā parisuddhasīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
布施所成福行事等,以及从他人听闻等,它们作为近因的情况,阿阇梨已经一再分别解说了,我们也已经知道。因为有人这样说:“如理住处等也是这些法的近因,应当按所分别的那样,由我们所了知的那样,分别之后开示出来”,所以为了把那些也分别开示出来,就说了“如理住处”等。不过在注释书里说:“同样地,为了显示如理住处等是身远离、心远离等的原因这一理趣,而说了‘如理住处’等。”因为依止如理住处而住的人,身远离和心远离会增长,定也会增长,所以如理住处成为身远离、心远离以及近行定、安止定的近因,并且与戒等共通。善士亲近,是指亲近善士时,在善士相续中生起的、可以作为所缘的信;或者,依此得到依止缘之后,在亲近者相续中生起的先前之信。这样的善士亲近,对于具信者于三宝所生的三种不坏净来说,成为与三宝功德等共通的近因;亲近了能授予止的得相的善士之后,依他所给的理趣而住、应当修习的止,其善士亲近则成为与戒、欢喜、喜悦等共通的近因。由于自正愿者能生起厌离恶行等,所以自正愿成为与生、老等审察共通的惭的近因;由于自正愿者能生起厌离等,所以自正愿成为与戒等共通的毗婆舍那的近因。巴利
Dānamayapuññakiriyavatthuādīnaṃ paratoghosādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo punappunaṃ ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘patirūpadesavāsādayopi imesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānīti yathā vibhajitabbā, amhehi ca viññātabbā, tathā vibhajitvā dassethā’’ti vattabbattā tepi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘patirūpadesavāso’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘tathā patirūpadesavāsādayo kāyavivekacittavivekādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hontīti imaṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘patirūpadesavāso’tiādimāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) vuttaṃ. Patirūpadesaṃ nissāya vasantassa kāyavivekacittavivekavaḍḍhanato, samādhivaḍḍhanato ca patirūpadesavāso kāyacittavivekassa ca upacārasamādhiappanāsamādhissa ca sīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sappurisūpanissayoti sappurisasantāne pavatto payirupāsato ālambitabbo pasādo, tato vā upanissayaṃ labhitvā payirupāsantānaṃ santāne pavatto pubbapasādo yathāvidho sappurisūpanissayo payirupāsantassa saddhāsampannassa ratanattaye tiṇṇaṃ aveccappasādānaṃ ratanattayaguṇādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ, samathassa labhananimittadāyakaṃ sappurisaṃ payirupāsitvā tena dinnanaye ṭhatvā pavattetabbassa samathassa sappurisūpanissayo sīlapāmojjapītādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attasammāpaṇihitassa pāpajigucchādīnaṃ sambhavato attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ jātivayādipaccavekkhaṇena sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā hiriyā ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, attasammāpaṇihitassa nibbidādīnaṃ sambhavato sīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā vipassanāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以彼分断等方式舍弃不善,成为与厌离智等共通的善思择、省察随观、慧以及圣道定根的近因。法善说性,就是随顺听闻善说之法而生起的善根,这叫作善根种植,它成为由那种善根所生的世间和出世间成就以及果等至的近因。僧善行性,由于僧团的善行,成为僧团护持者们行善、恭敬、接受教言的近因。师圆满,由于不了知导师和法等的功德,成为令未生信者生信、已生信者以及仅有少许信者之信更加增广和增长的近因。无碍巴帝摩卡防护,在僧团中或大众中,成为折伏恶性、恶口、恶戒之人的近因,也成为具足巴帝摩卡防护等戒的可爱之人安住的近因。不过应当知道,这些也是与其他相应的种种原因共通而成为近因的。巴利
Tadaṅgādivasena akusalapariccāgo nibbidāñāṇādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā kusalavīmaṃsāya paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya paññāya ca ariyamaggasamādhindriyassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammasvākkhātatā svākkhātadhammassavanānusārena pavattakusalamūlakā lokiyalokuttarasampatti kusalamūlaropanā nāma, tāya ca tathāvidhakusalamūlakāya phalasamāpattiyā ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghasuppaṭipannatā saṅghasuṭṭhutāya saṅghassa upaṭṭhākānaṃ suṭṭhubhāvāya sappatissavāya vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Satthusampadā satthari ceva dhammādīsu ca guṇaajānanatāya appasannānañca pasādāya pasannānañca appamattakapasādānañca bhiyyobhāvāya vaḍḍhanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Appaṭihatapātimokkhatā saṅghamajjhe vā parisamajjhe vā dummaṅkūnaṃ dummukhānaṃ dussīlānaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, pesalānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarādisīlasampannānaṃ puggalānaṃ phāsuvihārāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Honto pana yathānurūpehi aññehi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā hotīti veditabbo.
在《随顺分经》等经里说到的法地、近因,它们应当被分别说明的情况,我们怎么知道、怎么相信呢?因为需要这样问,所以说了“因此他说”等话。它的意思应当按前面说的方式来了知。巴利
‘‘Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu vuttadhammabhūmipadaṭṭhānānaṃ vibhattihārena vibhajitabbabhāvo amhehi kena jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
到这里,分别理趣就已经完整了,再没有别的要加进去,因为应当这样说,所以才说“已运用分别理趣”。在每一部经里,凡是说到种种法等等的地方,就按照在那一部经中所说的那些法等等,随其所能适用的方式,配上某一种分别理趣;那一种分别理趣就是经过拣择、运用、结合起来的——应当这样理解这个意思。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā ca vibhattihāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vibhattihāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Yattha yattha sutte ye ye dhammādayo vuttā, tattha tattha sutte vuttesu tesu tesu dhammādīsu yathālābhavasena yo yo vibhattihāro yojito, so so vibhattihāro niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
就这样,在《分别理趣分别》中,是随能力所及而造的。巴利
Iti vibhattihāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当只按照注疏和复注的传承,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解把握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusāreneva gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
转换理趣分别的阐明巴利
9. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
35 以各种不同的解说方式,也就是用分别理趣的分别方法,把经中所说的法等等加以分别,这个不共的解说性分别就圆满了。因为接下来应该问“什么是转换理趣的分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是转换理趣”等话。这里的“其中”,是在前面已经指明的十六种说示理趣等当中,问哪一种不共的解说叫作转换理趣、转换理趣分别。“于善不善法”等指示,就是现在由我所说的“于有正见的补特伽罗”等,这种详细的不共解说就叫作转换理趣、转换理趣分别。应当这样理解其含义。巴利
35. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇāvisesabhūtena vibhattihāravibhaṅgena sutte vuttā dhammādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo parivattanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo parivattano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro parivattanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Kusalākusale dhamme’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro parivattanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo.
有人问:“在所要解说的经中,已经指出的应当修习的善,它的对立面是什么?又该怎么转换?”为了回答这个提问,就要说明:这个应当修习的善,它的对立面就是这个,而且应当按应当断除的方式来进行转换。于是说出了“有正见的男子”等话。不过在注释书里——巴利
‘‘Saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte niddiṭṭhassa katamassa bhāvitabbassa kusalassa katamo paṭipakkho, kathaṃ parivattetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā imassa bhāvitabbassa kusalassa ayaṃ paṭipakkho, evaṃ pahātabbabhāvavasena parivattetabboti dassento ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassā’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
在这里,因为对所解说的经中已经指出的善法、不善法,要依据它们各自的对立面——不善法与善法——以应当断除等的方式来进行辨别,这就是从对立面作转换。因此,论中开始说“对于有正见的男子,邪见已经灭尽”等。巴利
‘‘Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yathāniddiṭṭhānaṃ kusalākusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūte akusalakusaladhamme pahātabbabhāvādivasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ, tasmā ‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatī’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 35) –
已说。对于能断除的法,是依它应当被断除的性质来简择;对于应当被断除的法,则是依它能断除的性质来简择,这就叫作从对立面转变过来。其中,正见者是指某个人拥有正确、美好、值得称赞的见。因为这一开示是依人而说的,所以说了士夫、人。而正见,不论是依对业与业果等的信仰而转起,还是依对无常等的观照而转起,或是依道之正见而转起,都毫无遗漏地被统摄了。当这正见被修习时,应当断除的邪见就被灭尽;如果只有邪见被灭尽,那么其余的不善法就还没有被灭尽。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Pahāyakassa hi dhammassa pahātabbabhāvavasena niddhāraṇaṃ, pahātabbassa ca dhammassa pahāyakabhāvavasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha sammādiṭṭhissāti sammā sundarā pasatthā diṭṭhi yassa puggalassāti sammādiṭṭhi. Puggalapadaṭṭhānā hi ayaṃ desanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘purisapuggalassā’’ti. Sā pana sammādiṭṭhi kammakammaphalādisaddahanavasena vā aniccādivipassanāvasena vā maggasammādassanavasena vā pavattā niravasesāva gahitā. ‘‘Yāya bhāvitāya sammādiṭṭhiyā pahātabbā micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavati, yadi kevalā micchādiṭṭhiyeva nijjiṇṇā bhavati, evaṃ sati tadavasesā akusalā dhammā ajiṇṇā
因为可以这样说:“它们可能存在”,所以说了“凡是以邪见为缘……”等。以邪见为缘,许多恶的、不善的法可能生起、有能力生起;而这些不善法,对于这位具足正见的士夫、人来说,已经被灭尽、应当被断除,其本性就是不再生起。因此世尊说:“以取灭故,有灭。”巴利
Bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘ye cassa micchādiṭṭhipaccayā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalāyeva dhammā ca uppajjeyyuṃ uppajjanārahā bhaveyyuṃ, te ca akusalā dhammā assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa nijjiṇṇā pahātabbārahā anuppajjanasabhāvā honti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho’’ti (udā. 2; mahāva. 1).
如果认为“对于有正见的男子、个人来说,邪见以及由它引起的那些不善法已经被灭尽,那么这样一来,以正见为缘的善法就应当不可能生起”,所以才说了“以正见为缘……”等这些话。对于这位具足正见的男子、个人,应当生起的、以正见为缘的许多善法——止观或者菩提分法——会生起;而这些已经生起的法,在这位具足正见的男子、个人的心相续中,因为一再地现起,而达到修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Yadi sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi, tappaccayā akusaladhammāyeva nijjiṇṇā bhavanti, evaṃ sati sammādiṭṭhipaccayā kusalā dhammā na sambhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhipaccayā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa uppajjanārahā sammādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke kusalā samathavipassanā vā bodhipakkhiyā vā dhammā sambhavanti, uppannā ca te dhammā assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa santāne punappunaṃ pavattanavasena bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
正见所对治的邪见,以及以邪见为缘的种种不善法,其转变的方式已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了解。因为可以这样说:“正思惟这一法的对立面法,应当怎样转变呢?”所以说了“正思惟的士夫、人……”等话。其中的连接关系等,应依照前面所说的方式来了知。所谓正语,就是某位士夫、人的语言善良、美好、值得称赞,这就是他的正语。“士夫、人”等的含义也应依照前面所说的方式来了知。不过这里有一个特别的含义:正解脱智见,就是某位士夫、人具有不颠倒的、正确的解脱智见,这就是他的正解脱智见。对于这位具足正解脱智见的士夫、人——也就是具足观察智见的人——那种“我们其实没有解脱,却以为已经解脱了”的、由邪执而生起的邪解脱智见,就被灭尽、消失了。“凡彼……”等的衔接关系等,应依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiyā paṭipakkhānaṃ micchādiṭṭhiyā, tappaccayānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ parivattanabhāvo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘sammāsaṅkappassa dhammassa paṭipakkho dhammo kathaṃ parivattetabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sammāsaṅkappassa purisapuggalassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yojanattha ādayo vuttanayānusārena veditabbā. Sammā sundarā pasatthā vācā yassa puggalassāti sammāvāco, tassa sammāvācassa. ‘‘Purisapuggalassā’’tiādīnaṃ atthopi vuttanayena veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana visesatthosammā aviparītato vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ yassa puggalassāti sammāvimuttiñāṇadassano, tassa sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇadassanasampannassa purisapuggalassa ‘‘avimuttāva samānā vimuttā maya’’nti micchābhinivesavasena pavattaṃ micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ vigataṃ bhavati. ‘‘Ye cassā’’tiādīnaṃ anusandhyādiko vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
36 应当这样提问:“按照‘正见者’等说法,正见等诸善法的对立面——邪见等不善法,应当以应断的方式翻转过来。”为了说明离杀生等诸善法的对立面——杀生等不善法,也应当以应断的方式翻转过来,所以说了“或彼离杀生者……”等话。而义注中说:“如此,以正见等为切入点显示了邪见等之后,再为了以离杀生、离不与取、离欲邪行等显示杀生等的翻转,所以开始说‘彼……’等。”(《导论义注》36)它通过彼分断等方式而被断除。时语者,就是在应当说话的时候,依戒而说应当说的话的人,就是那位时语者。巴利
36. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhissātiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā micchādiṭṭhādikāyeva akusalā pahātabbabhāvena parivattetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā pāṇātipātādikāpi akusalā pahātabbabhāvena parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa vā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādimukhena micchādiṭṭhiādiṃ dassetvā puna pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācārādito veramaṇiyādīhi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yassā’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Tadaṅgādivasenapahīno hoti. Kālavādissāti vaditabbakāle vaditabbaṃ vadati sīlenāti kālavādī, tassa.
因为应当这样问:是不是只能按照上面所说的方式翻转?为了说明也可以用其他方式翻转,所以说了“凡有任何……”等话。不过,义注里说:“通过‘凡有任何……’等话,是以正见等为切入点,显示邪见等只能以另一种方式翻转。”(《导论义注》36)
其中,有些持邪见、邪思惟等的人,会诽谤其他圣者的圣八支道。现见者,就是致力于现见的人;同法者,就是依法、依理而行的人。应被呵责者,就是具足应被呵责之相的人。论诘和随诘,就是论诘与随诘;这些贤者诽谤正见法。由于这种诽谤,他们就不应被供养、不应被尊敬,不应被称赞、不应被赞叹。
在这些话里应当这样连接:这些贤者诽谤正思惟法,或者正语法等,各别各别地诽谤正思惟法。因此,那些邪思惟者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞……中间省略……这些贤者诽谤正解脱法。因此,那些邪语者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞。这些贤者诽谤正解脱智见法。因此,那些邪解脱者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞。这些贤者诽谤正解脱智见法。因此,那些邪解脱智见者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞。应当这样连接。另有一种文本写作“邪解脱智见”。巴利
‘‘Yathāvuttappakāreneva parivattetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā aññena pakārenapi parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca kho kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ye ca kho kecītiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādimukheneva micchādiṭṭhiādīhi eva parivattanaṃ pakārantarena dassetī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Tattha keci micchādiṭṭhikamicchāsaṅkappādikāyeva puggalā paresaṃ ariyānaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ garahanti. Sandiṭṭhikā sandiṭṭhe niyuttā, sahadhammikā saha dhammena kāraṇena ye vattanti sahadhammikā. Gārayhā garahitabbākāre yuttā . Vādā ca anuvādā ca vādānuvādā, te bhavanto sammādiṭṭhiñca dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena garahaṇena. Pujjā pūjitabbā ca na bhavanti, pāsaṃsā pasaṃsitabbā ca na bhavanti. Evantiādīsu sammāsaṅkappaṃ vā sammāvācādikaṃ vā visuṃ visuṃ sammāsaṅkappañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāsaṅkappikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca…pe… sammāvimuttiñca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchādiṭṭhivācikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāvimuttikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā cāti yojanā kātabbā. ‘‘Micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanā’’tipi pāṭho atthi.
应当这样说:“只有依对圣道正见等的呵斥,才能翻转邪见等,而不是依对其余诸法的称赞。”为了说明对欲乐等的称赞也应翻转出欲乐的对立面——离欲等,所以说了“若复有人这样说”等话。其中,“应受用的诸欲、应遍受用的诸欲、应亲近的诸欲、应依止的诸欲”:在这里,以“被欲求故为欲”这种业成就的方式,指的是事欲;不太微妙的诸欲是“应受用的”,过于微妙的诸欲是“应遍受用的”(即从各方面受用)。更加微妙的诸欲是“应极亲近的”,即决定应亲近的。“应修习的诸欲、应多作的诸欲”:在这里,以“欲求故为欲”这种作者成就的方式,指的是烦恼欲;以一再令生起的方式应修习、应增长、应转起的烦恼欲,以多番一再令生起的方式应作、应增长的烦恼欲。若任何凡夫、被欲所支配的人这样说,对于这些被欲所支配的凡夫中的某些人,以对立的方式,远离他们诸欲的善思心所,便会成为非法、不可亲近。应当把握这个意思。巴利
‘‘Ariyamaggasammādiṭṭhādīnaṃ garahavaseneva micchādiṭṭhādayo ca parivattetabbā, nāvasesānaṃ pasaṃsāvasenā’’ti vattabbattā kāmādīnaṃ pasaṃsāvasenapi kāmānaṃ paṭipakkhā veramaṇiyādayopi parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca kho keci evamāhaṃsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhuñjitabbā kāmā, paribhuñjitabbā kāmā, āsevitabbā kāmā, nisevitabbā kāmāti ettha kāmīyanteti kāmāti kammasādhanavasena vatthukāmā gahitā, nātipaṇītā kāmā bhuñjitabbā, atipaṇītā kāmā pari samantato bhuñjitabbā. Atipaṇītatarā kāmā ā bhuso sevitabbā, niyatā sevitabbā. Bhāvayitabbā kāmā, bahulīkātabbā kāmāti ettha pana kāmentīti kāmāti kattusādhanavasena kilesakāmā gahitā, punappunaṃ uppādanavasena bhāvayitabbā vaḍḍhāpetabbā pavattetabbā kilesakāmā, bahūnaṃ punappunaṃ uppādanavasena kātabbā vaḍḍhāpetabbā kilesakāmāti ye ca kāmavasikā puthujjanā keci evamāhaṃsu tesaṃ kāmavasikānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ kesañci tādisehi kāmehi veramaṇī kusalacetanā paṭipakkhavasena adhammo asevitabbo nāma āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo gahetabbo.
为了显示依两种极端而转动的情形,才说了“或者又有某些人”等话。如果那些依五火等苦行来修行的人这样说:“随顺自苦行是法,是能导向解脱的”,那么对这些人来说,被称为中道、伴随观慧的圣道,就会变成非法、不能导向解脱、不应修习的。为了显示依苦乐而转动的另一种情形,才说了“而某些人”等话。那些以“我们要让恶业消尽”等想法自我折磨而修行的人,他们所生起的身热恼之苦法,被认为是能导向解脱的。巴利
Antadvayavasena parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye vā pana kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attakilamathānuyogo dhammoti niyyānikoti ye vā pana pañcātapādipaṭipannakā tatthiyā evamāhaṃsu, tesaṃ pañcātapādipaṭipannakānaṃ niyyāniko dhammo majjhimāpaṭipadāsaṅkhāto vipassanāsahito ariyamaggo adhammo aniyyāniko abhāvetabbo nāma āpajjeyyāti. Sukhadukkhavasenapi parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pāpaṃ nijjarāpessāmā’’ti attahiṃsanādivasena paṭipannakānaṃ pavatto sarīratāpano dukkho dhammo niyyānikoti.
如果有人这样修行,还说出这种话,那么对他们这些这样修行的人来说,以无过失的资具受用为缘而生起的身苦止息之乐法,就会变成非法、不应生起的法。巴利
Ye ca tathāpaṭipannakā keci evamāhaṃsu, tesaṃ tathāpaṭipannakānaṃ anavajjapaccayaparibhogavasena pavatto sarīradukkhūpasamo sukho dhammo adhammo appavattetabbo āpajjeyyāti.
导师已经依二边等门类分别说明了翻转,我们也已经了解。但因为还应当问“如何依不净想等来翻转”,为了显示应当如此依不净想等来翻转净想等,所以说了“或又如”等话。而在义注中则说:“现在为了显示依不净想等门来翻转净想等,所以说了‘或又如’等。”(《导论义注》36)于一切诸行中:即于三地诸行中。对于已经起观的人,三地的法因为流出烦恼的不净,所以显现为不净。巴利
Antadvayādivasena parivattanaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ asubhasaññādivasena parivattetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā evaṃ asubhasaññādivasena subhasaññādikā parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni asubhasaññādimukhena subhasaññādiparivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yathā vā panā’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhāresūti tebhūmakasaṅkhāresu. Āraddhavipassakassa hi tebhūmakā dhammā kilesāsucipaggharaṇakattā asubhato upaṭṭhahanti.
如果有人主张:“如果这些法仅仅因为各自的自性,就只能是各自的对立面,那就不该能翻转;这样一来,就无法翻转一切对立面,那又怎么能翻转呢?”为了说明翻转的特征,所以说了“或无论何法”等话。这里,一位想要翻转某个善法或不善法的导师,内心喜欢它、以见解接受它,那么对于这个他所喜欢、所接受的善法或不善法,其对立面就是那个对立法;这个对立法相对于该法,是从不可意、相违的角度被把握、被认清的。一位想要翻转某个可意法或不可意法的导师,内心喜欢它、以见解接受它,那么对于这个他所喜欢、所接受的可意法或不可意法,其对立面就是那个对立法;这个对立法相对于该法,是从不可意、相违的角度被把握、被认清的。这就是说:想要翻转的人,应当依照所想要翻转的法,以其相应的对立面来进行翻转。这就是在翻转中以对立面为特征。因此,义注中说:“阐明对立面的特征。”巴利
‘‘Yadi sarūpatoyeva imesaṃ ime paṭipakkhāti aparivattetabbā siyuṃ, evaṃ sati niravasesā ca paṭipakkhā na sakkā parivattetuṃ, kathaṃ sakkā parivattetu’’nti vattabbattā parivattanalakkhaṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ vā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ parivattetukāmo ācariyo cittena rocayati diṭṭhiyā upagacchati, kusalassa vā akusalassa vā tassa tassa rucikassa upagatassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkho, so paṭipakkhadhammo asaddhammo assa dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkato ajjhāpanno pariññāto. Iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ parivattetukāmo ācariyo cittena rocayati diṭṭhiyā upagacchati, iṭṭhassa vā aniṭṭhassa vā tassa tassa rucikassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkho, so paṭipakkhadhammo assa dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkadhammato ajjhāpanno pariññāto bhavatīti parivattetukāmena icchitabbadhammānurūpapaṭipakkhavasena parivattanaṃ kātabbanti parivattane paṭipakkhalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāvetī’’ti.
有人会说:像这样所说的翻转,我们怎么能相信呢?为了回应这个说法,就说了“因此说”等这些话。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ vuttappakāraṃ parivattanaṃ amhehi kathaṃ saddahitabba’’nti vattabbatā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为“到此为止,翻转理趣已经圆满,没有别的关联了”这句话应当被说出来,所以才说“已关联:翻转理趣”。在哪部经里,善与不善被指明,就依对立面把它们引出来,然后随情况把相应的翻转理趣关联起来;在那部经里,当善与不善被指明时,依对立面引出来,把每一个相应的翻转理趣确定下来、关联起来、结合起来——应当这样理解这个意思。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā parivatto hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto parivattano hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ sutte kusalākusale niddiṭṭhe paṭipakkhavasena nīharitvā yathāsambhavaṃ yo yo parivattano hāro niyutto, tasmiṃ sutte niddiṭṭhe paṭipakkhavasena nīharitvā so so parivattano hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,在翻转摄句的分别中,是随众生根机之力而造的。巴利
Iti parivattanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当依照义注和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解并掌握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
同义语门的分别解说巴利
10. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
37 37. 凡是应当被翻转的经义,都已经通过那种作为特别赞叹的转起摄句分别加以分别清楚了,所以这个作为特别赞叹的转起摄句分别也就完整了。因为接下来应当问“什么是同义语摄句分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是同义语摄句”等话。那里的“其中”,是指在前面已经指出的十六种说示摄句等当中。他问的是:在这些当中,哪一种作为特别赞叹的同义语摄句、同义语摄句分别,才叫做同义语摄句分别?对于“同义语有多种”等开示,现在由我来说明的“一法,世尊”等详细的特别赞叹,就应当理解为同义语摄句、同义语摄句分别。因为应当问“哪些同义语已经被确定?那些同义语是什么”,所以说了“如同一”等话。意思是:像“一法”这样应当了知的法、自性法,或者应当让人了知的法,世尊用各种方式和各种同义语彼此对照地指示出来,这些各种方式的同义语就应当被了知。因为应当说“那些同义语,世尊是怎么说的”,所以说了“如世尊说”等话。就像那些各种方式的同义语——巴利
37. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena pavattanahāravibhaṅgena parivattetabbā suttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto parivattanahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vevacanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vevacano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro vevacanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Vevacanāni bahūnī’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ekaṃ bhagavā dhamma’’ntiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro vevacanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Yāni vevacanāni niddhāritāni, katamāni tāni vevacanānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā eka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ viññātabbaṃ dhammaṃ sabhāvadhammaṃ paññāpetabbaṃ vā dhammaṃ aññamaññehi yathā yehi pakārehi ceva vevacanehi ca bhagavā niddisati, tathāpakārāni vevacanāni viññātabbānīti attho. ‘‘Tāni vevacanāni kinti bhagavā āhā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yaṃyaṃpakārāni vevacanāni –
期望、贪求与欢喜,以及种种界中的箭,都已扎下根。
一切由无明为根而生起的渴求,我都已经连根拔除了。巴利
‘‘Āsā ca pihā ca abhinandanā ca, anekadhātūsu sarā patiṭṭhitā; Aññāṇamūlappabhavā pajappitā, sabbā mayā byantikatā samūlikā’’ti. –
世尊说:应当了知各种不同形式的同义词,这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Bhagavā āha, taṃtaṃpakārāni vevacanāni viññātabbānīti attho.
同一个法用许多不同的同义词、别名来指称,这在注释书(《导论》注第37条)里已经用多种方式说过了,所以我们这里不再展示。因为有人会问“什么是望?什么是欲?”,所以才说了“所谓‘望’”等等。对于未来之事,心里盼着“一定会来”,这种盼头在期盼的人心里生起,这个人的这种期盼就叫做“望”。对于现在之事生起的希求,在希求的人心里生起;或者看到别的更好的东西后,生起“愿我也能那样”的羡慕,在羡慕的人心里生起,这种希求就叫做“欲”。缘未来之事而生起的渴爱叫做“望”,缘未来和现在之事而生起的渴爱叫做“欲”,但两者本质上都是渴爱,所以是一回事,就是同一个法。所想要的事得以实现,就是事成就;靠这个渴爱去守护,就是守护;对事成就的守护,就是事成就守护。在守护的人心里生起的那个渴爱,就叫做“欢喜”。巴利
Ekasseva dhammassa anekehi pariyāyabhūtehi vevacanehi niddisane phalaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 37) bahudhā vuttaṃ, tasmā amhehi na dassitaṃ. ‘‘Katamā āsā, katamā pihādī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘āsā nāma vuccatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā bhavissassa atthassa āsīsanā avassaṃ āgamissatīti yā āsā assa āsīsantassa puggalassa uppajjati, tassa āsīsanā ‘‘āsā nāmā’’ti vuccati. Vattamānassa yā patthanā assa patthayantassa uppajjati, seyyataraṃ vā aññaṃ disvā ‘‘ediso ahaṃ bhaveyya’’nti yā pihā assa pihayantassa uppajjati, sā patthanā ‘‘pihā nāmā’’ti vuccati. Anāgatatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā taṇhā ‘‘āsā’’ti vuccati, anāgatapaccuppannatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā taṇhā ‘‘pihā’’ti vuccati, tathāpi taṇhābhāvena ekattā eko dhammova atthassa icchitassa nipphatti atthanipphatti, paṭipāleti etāya taṇhāyāti paṭipālanā, atthanipphattiyā paṭipālanāti atthanipphattipaṭipālanā. Yā taṇhā assa pālayantassa puggalassa uppajjati, sā taṇhā ‘‘abhinandanā’’ti vuccati.
有人问:“渴爱所守护的、由渴爱护持的事成就,是哪种事成就?”为了回答这个问题,就从有情和行作两个方面来分析这种事成就,于是说“可爱的亲戚,或可爱的法”等等。其中,“亲戚”这个词也包含了朋友、结拜兄弟等。而“法”则指可爱的色所缘等六种。渴爱者以渴爱对它们欢喜,这种渴爱就称为“欢喜”。对于可厌的亲戚或法,由于颠倒想而当成不可厌的亲戚或法,或者从自性上当作不可厌,渴爱者以渴爱对它们欢喜,这种渴爱也称为“欢喜”——应当这样连接起来理解其含义。巴利
‘‘Yā atthanipphatti taṇhāya paṭipāletabbā, katamā sā atthanipphattī’’ti pucchitabbattā taṃ atthanipphattiṃ sattato vā saṅkhārato vā vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘piyaṃ vā ñātiṃ, piyaṃ vā dhamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ñāti’’nti iminā mittabandhavādayopi gahitā. Dhammaṃ pana piyarūpārammaṇādikaṃ chabbidhampi yāya taṇhāya taṇhiko abhinandati, sā taṇhā ‘‘abhinandanā nāmā’’ti vuccati. Paṭikkūlaṃ ñātiṃ vā dhammaṃ vā vipallāsavasena appaṭikkūlaṃ ñātiṃ vā dhammaṃ vā sabhāvavasena appaṭikkūlato yāya taṇhāya taṇhiko abhinandati , sā taṇhā vā ‘‘abhinandanā nāmā’’ti vuccatīti yojetvā attho gahetabbo.
世尊在众多界中,把所描述的那种渴爱说为“流”。有人会问:那些界究竟是哪些界?为了说明那些界的自相,所以说“眼界”等。巴利
‘‘Yāsu anekāsu dhātūsu vuttappakārā taṇhā ‘sarā’ti bhagavatā vuttā, katamā tā dhātuyo’’ti pucchitabbattā tā dhātuyo sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhudhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
对于“在这些界当中,哪一种流依止、生起于哪一种界?”这个问题,为了确定并指出“这个流依止、生起于这个界”,所以说了“流,就是某些胜解色的人”等话。其中——“其中”是指在色等六种之中——“某些”指的是被称为“流”的色渴爱的那些有渴爱的人。“胜解色”是指对被称为色界的所缘胜解、执著。通过这句话,就表达了被称为色渴爱的流依止、生起于色界。同样,通过“某些胜解声”等话,被称为声渴爱等的流依止、生起于声界等,也同样被取为流。“某些胜解法”在这里,通过“法”这一词,摄取了眼界、耳界、鼻界、舌界、身界、意界、意识界、法界,因此,十八界虽然以依止的方式被摄取,但应知只是以六种方式被摄取。对于“在胜解色等当中,有多少词是渴爱方面的渴爱的同义词?”这个问题,为了确定并指出“这些词有这么多,是渴爱方面的渴爱同义词”,所以说了“其中,哪些是六种依在家者的”等话。“其中”是指在色等六种当中。“六种依在家者的忧”是指依止于在色等六种当中生起的渴爱与爱染而生的六种忧。其余诸项也是如此。对于“六种依在家者的舍也由世尊说过,为什么没有取?”这个问题,说了“哪些是六种依在家者的舍,这是见品”,因为属于见品,所以没有取,这是意思。巴利
‘‘Tāsu dhātūsu katamāya dhātuyā katamā sarā patiṭṭhitā pavattā’’ti pucchitabbattā imāya dhātuyā ayaṃ sarā patiṭṭhitā pavattāti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sarāti keci rūpādhimuttā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kecīti sarāsaṅkhātāya rūpataṇhāya taṇhikā puggalā. Rūpādhimuttāti rūpadhātusaṅkhāte ārammaṇe adhimuttā ajjhositā. Iminā padena rūpataṇhāsaṅkhātā sarā rūpadhātuyā patiṭṭhitā pavattāti gahitā, ‘‘keci saddādhimuttā’’tiādīhipi saddataṇhāsaṅkhātādayo sarā saddadhātuyādīsu patiṭṭhitā pavattā sarāva gahitā. Keci dhammādhimuttāti ettha dhammaggahaṇena cakkhudhātusotadhātughānadhātujivhādhātukāyadhātusattaviññāṇadhātudhammadhātuyo gahitā, tasmā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo patiṭṭhānabhāvena gahitāpi chabbidhāva gahitāti daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Rūpādhimuttādīsu kittakāni padāni taṇhāpakkhe taṇhāya vevacanā’’ti pucchitabbattā etādisāni ettakāni padāni taṇhāpakkhe taṇhāvevacanānīti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yāni cha gehasitānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu chasu rūpādīsu. Cha gehasitāni domanassānīti chasu rūpādīsu pavattaṃ taṇhāpemaṃ nissāya pavattāni cha domanassāni. Esa nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Cha upekkhā gehasitāpi bhagavatā vuttā, kasmā na gahitā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yā cha upekkhā gehasitā, ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkho’’ti vuttaṃ, diṭṭhipakkhattā na gahitāti attho.
38 因为需要说明“前面所说的那种渴爱本身就是被取著的对象”,所以接着说了“正是它以希求的方式”等内容。正是前面所说的那种渴爱,因为它以希求的方式生起,所以用“期望”等别名来宣说;因为它在色等所缘的法上欢喜,所以用“法喜”这个别名来宣说;因为它在色等所缘的法上像是吞下去、彻底抓住一样执著而住,所以用“法执著”这个别名来宣说。因此,这些都是渴爱的同义词。巴利
38. ‘‘Kathaṃ vuttappakārā taṇhā eva gahitā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sāyeva patthanākārenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sā vuttappakārā eva taṇhā patthanākārena pavattanato āsādipariyāyena vuttā, rūpādiārammaṇadhammesu nandanato ‘‘dhammanandī’’ti pariyāyena vuttā, rūpādiārammaṇadhammesu gilitvā pariniṭṭhapeti viya ajjhosāya tiṭṭhanato ‘‘dhammajjhosāna’’nti pariyāyena vuttā, tasmā taṇhāya vevacanāni honti.
渴爱的同义词已由阿阇梨指出,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问“什么是心的同义词”,所以说了“心、意”等。而“思虑所缘,所以是心;了知,所以是意;识别,所以是识”等含义,在诸论注(《法集论注》第5条)中已经说过,因此我们没有详细解释。这些本身就是同义词,是它的同义词,我们只说到这里。“慧根、慧力”等则是慧的同义词。巴利
Taṇhāya vevacanāni ācariyena niddiṭṭhāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, ‘‘katamāni cittassa vevacanānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘cittaṃ mano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti cittaṃ. Manati jānātīti mano. Vijānātīti viññāṇa’’ntiādinā attho pakaraṇesu (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 5) vuttova, tasmā amhehi na vitthārito. Vevacanāniyeva imāni imassa vevacanānīti ettakāniyeva kathayissāma. ‘‘Paññindriyaṃ paññābala’’ntiādīni paññāvevacanāni.
“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等是佛陀的同义词。因为有人会问“这些是在哪里说的?”,所以接着说了“如佛随念中所说”等语。在佛随念的教导中,世尊以“彼世尊即是阿拉汉……乃至……世尊”这样的方式所说的种种同义词,应当理解为:这些同义词就是佛随念中的同义词,也就是佛陀的同义词。“如法随念中所说”等处,也应当同样地连接理解。巴利
‘‘Arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādīni buddhassa vevacanāni. ‘‘Tāni kattha desitānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā ca buddhānussatiyaṃ vutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Buddhānussatidesanāyaṃ yathā ca yaṃyaṃpakāraṃ vevacanaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ…pe… bhagavato’’ti vuttaṃ, etaṃpakāraṃ vevacanaṃ buddhānussatiyā vevacanaṃ buddhassa vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathā ca dhammānussatiyaṃ vutta’’ntiādīsupi evameva yojanā kātabbā.
“故说”等语的衔接义,以及“同义词句是已结合的”等语的衔接义,都应按照前面所说的方法来了知。巴利
‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva ‘‘niyutto vevacano hāro’’tiānusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
就这样,在同义词句分别这一部分中,是随众生根机与能力而造的。巴利
Iti vevacanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当依据注释书和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
11. 施设句分别的阐释巴利
11. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
39 凡是已经按照某种注释类别,把同义词逐一分别解说完毕,这种作为注释类别的分别就算完整了。因为接下来应当问“什么是施设的分别?”,所以说了“其中,什么是施设句?”等话。这里的“其中”,是在前面已经指出的十六种说示方式等当中,问哪一种作为注释类别的分别是施设句、是名为施设句的分别。对于“世尊以一种法,用种种施设来开示”等这一开示,现在由我来说明的、名为“以平常言语开示”等详细注释类别的施设句,就应当理解为名为施设句的分别。巴利
39. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena vevacanāni vibhattāni, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo paññattihāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo paññattihāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññattihāro paññattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ paññattīhi vividhāhi desetī’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘yā pakatikathāya desanā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññattihāro paññattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.
因为要问“世尊用哪些种种施设来教导一种法?那些种种施设是什么?”,所以才说了“以通常之语”等话。其中,“以通常之语”的意思是:不去特别区分“味著”等词义的差别,而是顺着义理本身自然展开的言说,也就是善巧作意的法谈。这种开示能把所指向的义理,安放、建立、清楚地让所教化的众生心中了知,所以叫安立施设;世尊就是用这种施设来教导法,这就是它的意思。因为要问“被称为‘以通常之语而说’的施设是什么?”,所以这样提问之后,为了详细说明,才说了“什么是通常之语而说?”等话。注释书里说:“这样,为了把简略说到的‘以通常之语而说’之义详细展开,先问‘什么是通常之语而说?’,然后说了‘四谛’等。”其中,开示和所应开示的内容虽然有所区别,但用不加区别的说法来讲“开示就是四谛”,意思是:四谛的施设就叫做开示。巴利
‘‘Yāhi vividhāhi paññattīhi ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhagavā deseti, katamā tā vividhā paññattiyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yā pakatikathāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pakatikathāyāti assādādipadatthavisesaṃ aniddhāretvā atthasabhāvena pavattāya kathāya sādhukaṃ manasikāradhammakathāya yā desanā yathādhippetamatthaṃ veneyyasantāne nikkhipati patiṭṭhapeti pakārena ñāpeti, tasmā nikkhepapaññatti, tāya paññattiyā dhammaṃ desetīti attho. ‘‘Yā paññatti ‘pakatikathāya desanā’ti vuttā, katamā sā’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –‘‘iti ‘pakatikathāya desanā’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajituṃ ‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā’ti pucchitvā ‘cattāri saccānī’tiādimāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 39) vuttaṃ. Tattha desanādesetabbassa bhedabhāvepi abhedopacārena ‘‘desanā cattāri saccānī’’ti vuttaṃ, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paññatti desanā nāmāti attho.
因为有人应该问“世尊是怎样说这个谛施设的”,所以说“如世尊所说”。世尊以某种方式说了哪种施设,那种施设就应该以那种方式被理解。世尊说“这是苦”这个施设,应当这样理解:这是五蕴的安立施设,是六界的安立施设,是十八界的安立施设,是十二处的安立施设,是十根的安立施设。而蕴、界、处、根都只是世间法。以逼迫、有为、热恼、变坏这些共同含义把它们归为一类,说为“这是苦”。十根,就是眼根、耳根、鼻根、舌根、身根、女根、男根、命根、意根、受根这十种。因为受根以领纳为特征,与它们有共同的特征,所以受根被算作一根;而信根等因为属于道支,所以没有算进去。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ taṃ saccapaññattiṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā bhagavā āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena bhagavā yaṃ yaṃ paññattiṃ āha, tathā tena pakārena sā paññatti jānitabbā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’nti yaṃ paññattiṃ bhagavā āha, ayaṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti paññatti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, channaṃ dhātūnaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, dasannaṃ indriyānaṃ nikkhepapaññattīti yojanā kātabbā. Khandhadhātuāyatanindriyāni ca lokiyāneva. Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmatthatāsāmaññena ekattaṃ upanetvā ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti vuttā. Dasannaṃ indriyānanti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyaitthipurisajīvitamanavedanindriyānaṃ dasannaṃ. Anubhavanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā vedanindriyaṃ ekanti gahitaṃ, saddhindriyādīni pana maggapariyāpannattā na gahitāni.
在抟食中:对于按处所譬喻的方式而被称为食素、名为营养的食,贪因为不能被圣道断除,所以以随眠的方式,或以漏的方式,或以渴求的方式而存在喜。有爱——这里也是同样的道理。已住立、已增长:因为获得了能牵引结生的能力而住立,所以应当理解为既已住立又已增长。诸行:即能产生后有、作为再生之因的诸行。生、老、死:生以再生为特征,而不只是生起;老以衰熟为特征,而不只是住立;死以破坏为特征,而不只是坏灭。因此说“有忧、有悲、有恼”。巴利
Kabaḷīkāreti ṭhānūpacārena voharite ojāsaṅkhāte āhāre, rāgo ariyamaggena appahātabbattā anusayavasena, āsāvasena vā patthanāvasena vā atthi nandī. Atthi taṇhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Patiṭṭhitaṃ viruḷhanti paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāpattiyā patiṭṭhitattā patiṭṭhitañceva viruḷhañcāti gahetabbaṃ. Saṅkhārānanti punabbhavanibbattakassa bhavassa abhinibbattihetukānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ. Jātijarāmaraṇanti abhinibbattanalakkhaṇā jāti, na uppādova, paripākalakkhaṇā jarā, na ṭhitiyeva, bhedanalakkhaṇaṃ maraṇaṃ, na bhaṅgameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sasokaṃ sadaraṃ saupāyāsa’’nti.
比丘们,如果对触食……比丘们,如果对意思食……比丘们,如果对识食有贪……我说……这一施设,因为能使人知道苦和苦之集的生起根源,所以叫做生起施设。巴利
‘‘Phasse ce, bhikkhave, āhāre…pe… manosañcetanāya ce, bhikkhave, āhāre…pe… viññāṇe ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo…pe… vadāmī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti dukkhassa ca samudayassa ca pabhavassa paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti nāma.
以流转门来分的施设类别,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已了知。因为需要说明“如何以还灭门来分施设类别?”,所以说了“比丘们,若于段食无贪”等。“比丘们,若于段食……我说无有忧悲恼”,这个施设因为能使人了知苦的遍知,所以称为遍知施设;因为能使人了知集的断除,所以称为断除施设;因为能使人了知道的修习,所以称为修习施设;因为能使人了知灭的作证,所以称为作证施设。巴利
Vaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ vivaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre natthi rāgo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kabaḷīkāre…pe… anupāyāsanti vadāmī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
40 40. 以还灭门来分的施设类别,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经知道。因为需要说明“如何以思惟门来分施设类别”,所以说了“比丘们,要修习定”等话。“比丘们,要修习定……如实了知”,这个施设因为能使人知道修习之道,所以叫修习施设;因为能使人知道遍知苦,所以叫遍知施设;因为能使人知道断除集,所以叫断除施设;因为能使人知道作证灭,所以叫作证施设。巴利
40. Vivaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ sammasanavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvethā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvetha…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
以思惟门来分的施设差别,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了解。因为需要说明“如何依取蕴门来分施设差别?”,所以说了“罗陀,应散坏色”等。“罗陀,应散坏色……涅槃”——这个施设,因为能使人知道称为渴爱的灭尽与止息,所以叫灭施设;因为能使人知道对味著的厌离,所以叫厌离施设;因为能使人知道苦的遍知,所以叫遍知施设;因为能使人知道集的断除,所以叫断除施设;因为能使人知道道的修习,所以叫修习施设;因为能使人知道灭的作证,所以叫作证施设。巴利
Sammasanavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ upādānakkhandhavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘rūpaṃ, rādha, vikirathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, rādha, vikiratha…pe… nibbāna’’nti ayaṃ paññatti taṇhāsaṅkhātassa rodhassa nirodhassa ca paññāpanato nirodhapaññatti nāma, assādassa nibbidāya ca paññāpanato nibbidāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
因为要问“正在破坏、毁坏、令散坏色、受、想、行、识,依智慧行向渴爱灭尽的人,了知什么?”所以说了“他如实了知‘这是苦’”等。 “他如实了知‘这是苦’……如实了知‘导至灭之道’”——这个施设,因为说明了对诸谛的证悟,所以叫证悟施设;因为说明了见地的安立,所以叫安立施设;因为说明了道的修习,所以叫修习施设;因为说明了入流果的作证,所以叫作证施设。 “他如实了知‘这些是诸漏’……如实了知‘诸漏无余灭尽’”——这个施设,因为说明了尽智的生起,所以叫生起施设;因为说明了不生智与机缘,所以叫机缘施设;因为说明了道的修习,所以叫修习施设;因为说明了苦的遍知,所以叫遍知施设;因为说明了集的舍断,所以叫舍断施设;因为说明了精进根的发勤,所以叫发勤施设;因为说明了箭的拔除,所以叫拔除施设;因为说明了修习地的安立,所以叫安立施设;因为说明了对恶不善法的冲破,所以叫冲破施设。巴利
‘‘Rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇāni vikiranto viddhaṃsento vikīḷaniyaṃ karonto paññāya taṇhākkhayāya paṭipajjanto kiṃ pajānātī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘So ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti…pe… nirodhagāminipaṭipadāti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti saccānaṃ paṭivedhassa paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma, dassanabhūmiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, sotāpattiphalassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘So ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe… ‘āsavā asesaṃ nirujjhantī’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti khayeñāṇassa uppādassa ca paññāpanato uppādapaññatti nāma, anuppādeñāṇassa okāsassa ca paññāpanato okāsapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, vīriyindriyassa ārambhassa ca paññāpanato ārambhapaññatti nāma, āsāṭikānaṃ āhaṭanāya ca paññāpanato āhaṭanāpaññatti nāma, bhāvanābhūmiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinighātassa ca paññāpanato abhinighātapaññatti nāma.
41 41. 或者依轮回,或者依还灭,或者依法审察,或者依取蕴,或者依了知,阿阇梨已对诸谛中种种施设的差别作了分别,我们也已了知。由于应当说“如何依三转而于诸谛中分别施设差别”,为了显示依三转而于诸谛中的施设差别,便开始了“此是苦,诸比丘,于我……”等文。然而在义注中说:“如此,依轮回与还灭之门,仅依审察与取蕴之门,显示了于诸谛中的施设差别之后,现在为了依三转而显示,便开始了‘此是苦,诸比丘’等文。”(《藏释注》41)在那里,从先前的遍知开始。“于未曾闻之法中”:即依遍知,于前所未闻的四种谛法之中。“眼”:最初以见涅槃之义,故名为眼。“智”:以如实自性、依作用遍知与作证遍知之义,故名为智。“慧”:以如实自性,于作用遍知等已通达,依了知之义,故名为慧。“明”:以如是令知之义,故名为明。“光”:以令发光之义,故名为光。这眼等一切,都只是慧的同义语。“此是苦,诸比丘,于我……生起”:这一施设,因为说明诸谛之教示,故名为教示施设;因为说明闻所成慧与安立,故名为安立施设;因为说明未知当知根的作证,故名为作证施设;因为说明法轮的转动,故名为转动施设。巴利
41. Vaṭṭavasena vā vivaṭṭavasena vā dhammasammasanavasena vā upādānakkhandhavasena vā pajānanavasena vā saccesu nānāvidho paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu paññattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti me, bhikkhave’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭamukhena sammasanaupādānakkhandhamukheneva saccesu paññattivibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni teparivaṭṭavasena dassetuṃ ‘idaṃ dukkhanti me bhikkhave’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 41) vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbe parijānanato paṭṭhāya. Ananussutesūti parijānanavasena ananussutesu catūsu saccadhammesu. Cakkhunti paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanaṭṭhena cakkhu nāma. Yathāsabhāvato kiccaparijānanaṭṭhena sacchikiriyaparijānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ nāma. Yathāsabhāvato kiccaparijānanādīnaṃ paṭivijjhitvā pajānanaṭṭhena paññā nāma. Tathā viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā nāma. Ālokobhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena āloko nāma. Idaṃ cakkhādikaṃ sabbaṃ paññāvevacanameva. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti me bhikkhave…pe… udapādī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti saccānaṃ desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma, sutamayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma, dhammacakkassa pavattanāya ca paññāpanato pavattanāpaññatti nāma.
“然而,这苦应当被遍知……生起”——这个施设,因为说明了道的修习,所以叫修习施设;因为说明了思所成慧的安立,所以叫安立施设;因为说明了已知根的作证,所以叫作证施设。巴利
‘‘Taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… udapādī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, cintāmayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, aññindriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
“这苦已被遍知……生起”这一施设因为说明了道的修习,所以叫修习施设;因为说明了修所成慧的安立,所以叫安立施设;因为说明了具已知根者的作证,所以叫作证施设;因为说明了法轮的转动,所以叫转动施设。巴利
‘‘Taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ pariññātaṃ…pe… udapādī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, aññātāvino indriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma, dhammacakkassa pavattanāya ca paññāpanato pavattanāpaññatti nāma.
关于三转,在诸谛中,种种施设的差别已由导师分别解说,我们也已了知。因为需要说明“如何依善、不善等,对所说法门的施设差别加以分别”,所以说了“等与不等之生”等。或者也可以说:在《转法轮经》中,施设的差别已由导师分别解说,我们也已了知。因为需要说明“在‘等与不等’等偈颂中,施设的差别是如何分别的”,所以说了“等与不等”等。
所谓“等”,是被衡量、被限定,也就是欲界业。“不等”是指:再没有别的世间业能与此广大业相等同,也就是色界、无色界业。依靠这种行,后有得以生起,所以叫“生”,这就是“生”。它造作后有,所以叫“有行”。在内心依观而欢喜,所以叫“内心喜悦”。依止而心得定,所以叫“入定”。在自身中生起,所以叫“自生”,这就是“自生”。
牟尼、正觉者舍弃了“生”和“有行”,舍弃了“等”和“不等”,内心喜悦而入定,就像击破铠甲一样,这样击破、摧毁了“自生”——应当这样理解句义。
或者也可以这样理解:牟尼、正觉者“五蕴是无常、苦、无我、变易法,而涅槃是常、乐、无为、不变易法”,如此衡量“等”,见到“不等”的涅槃,以圣道舍弃了“生”和“有行”。怎样舍弃呢?那位牟尼依观而内心喜悦,依止而进入近行定和安止定,心得入定,就像击破铠甲一样,这样击破、摧毁了在自身中生起的烦恼;由于没有烦恼,也就舍弃了业——应当这样把握偈颂的含义。巴利
Teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu nānāvidho paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ kusalākusalādivasena desitadhammassa paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tulamatulañca sambhava’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā dhammacakkasutte paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘tulamatulañcātiādigāthāya kathaṃ paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tulamatulañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tulīyati paricchijjīyatīti tulaṃ, kāmāvacarakammaṃ, natthi tulaṃ sadisaṃ aññaṃ lokiyakammaṃ assa mahaggatakammassāti atulaṃ, rūpārūpāvacarakammaṃ. Punabbhavaṃ sambhavati etena saṅkhārenāti sambhavo, taṃ sambhavaṃ. Punabbhavaṃ saṅkharotīti bhavasaṅkhāro. Ajjhatte vipassanāvasena ramatīti ajjhattarato. Samathavasena samādhiyatīti samāhito. Attani sambhavatīti attasambhavo, taṃ attasambhavaṃ. Muni sambuddho sambhavaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ tulañca atulañca avassaji, ajjhattarato samāhito kavacaṃ abhindi iva, evaṃ attasambhavaṃ abhindi padālayīti yojanā kātabbā. Atha vā muni sambuddho ‘‘pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā vipariṇāmadhammā, nibbānaṃ pana niccaṃ sukhaṃ asaṅkhataṃ avipariṇāmadhamma’’nti tulaṃ tulayanto atulaṃ nibbānaṃ disvā sambhavaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ avassaji? So hi muni vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato ca hutvā, samathavasena upacārappanāsu samāhito ca hutvā kavacaṃ abhindi iva, evaṃ attasambhavaṃ attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ abhindi padālayi, kilesābhāvena kammañca jahīti gāthāttho gahetabbo.
“等与不等之生”这一施设,因为是对一切法的证知而施设,所以叫证知施设;因为是对法无碍解的安立而施设,所以叫安立施设。“牟尼舍弃了有行”这一施设,因为是对集的舍离而施设,所以叫舍离施设;因为是对苦的遍知而施设,所以叫遍知施设。“内心喜悦、入定”这一施设,因为是对身至念的修习而施设,所以叫修习施设;因为是对心一境性的安住而施设,所以叫安住施设。“破除了如铠甲般的自生”这一施设,因为是对心的厌离而施设,所以叫厌离施设;因为是对一切知性的取着而施设,所以叫取着施设;因为是对无明卵壳的破开而施设,所以叫破开施设。因为应当说明“如上所说的施设分类,应依什么而信受?”所以说“因此说”等。由于如上所说的施设分类是依世尊所说“等与不等”等偈颂而成立,所以应依此成立之理,信受如上偈颂中所说的施设分类。巴利
‘‘Tulamatulañca sambhava’’nti paññatti sabbadhammānaṃ abhiññāya paññāpanato abhiññāpaññatti nāma, dhammapaṭisambhidāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, ‘‘bhavasaṅkhāramavassaji munī’’ti paññatti samudayassa pariccāgassa ca paññāpanato pariccāgapaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, ‘‘ajjhattarato samāhito’’ti paññatti kāyagatāya satiyā bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, cittekaggatāya ṭhitiyā ca paññāpanato ṭhitipaññatti nāma, ‘‘abhindi kavacamivattasambhava’’nti paññatti cittassa abhinibbidāya ca paññāpanato abhinibbidāpaññatti nāma, sabbaññutāya upādānassa ca paññāpanato upādānapaññatti nāma, avijjāṇḍakosānaṃ padālanāya ca paññāpanato padālapaññatti nāma, ‘‘yathāvutto paññattippabhedo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathāvuttassa paññattippabhedassa sambhavato bhagavā yaṃ ‘‘tulamatula’’ntiādigāthamāha, tathāsambhavato yathāvuttāya gāthāya yathāvutto paññattippabhedo saddahitabboti.
在“同与不同”等偈颂中,施设的分类已由导师分别解说,我们也已经了解。巴利
‘‘Tulamatulañcā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto.
已经看见苦和苦的根源的人,怎么会还对诸欲动心呢?
要知道世间诸欲就是缠缚,具念的人应当为了调伏它们而修学。巴利
‘Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidānaṃ, kāmesu so jantu kathaṃ nameyya; Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā, tesaṃ satīmā vinayāya sikkhe’ti. –
在这首偈颂里,因为要说明“施设的分类是如何被解说的”,所以说了“那见到苦的人”等话。一个已经开始修观的人,见到了从某个根源而生起的一切三界因果之苦,他怎么会对诸欲倾心呢?他实在不该倾心。因为世间诸欲确实应当被看作“缠缚”,所以不该倾心。这样,了知了苦的性质和苦因的性质之后,具念而具足身至念的人,为了调伏、平息那些欲,应当修学三学。这首偈颂的大意应当这样简要理解。而在注释书(《导论注》41)中则有详细解释。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ pana kathaṃ paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yo dukkhamaddakkhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo āraddhavipassako jantu yatonidānaṃ sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ hetuphalaṃ dukkhaṃ addakkhi, so āraddhavipassako jantu kāmesu kathaṃ nameyya nametuṃ nārahati. Kāmā loke ‘‘saṅgo’’ti hi yasmā passitabbā, tasmā nametuṃ nārahati, iti etaṃ dukkhabhāvaṃ dukkhahetubhāvaṃ ñatvā tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vinayāya vūpasamāya satimā kāyagatāsatisampanno tīṇi sikkhāni sikkhe sikkheyyāti gāthāttho saṅkhepena viññātabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 41) pana vitthārena saṃvaṇṇito.
“见苦”这个施设,因为是在安立苦的同义词和遍知,所以既是同义施设,也是遍知施设。“从何因”这个施设,因为是在安立集、生起和断除,所以既是生起施设,也是断除施设。“见”这个施设,因为是在安立智眼的同义词和通达,所以既是同义施设,也是通达施设。“他怎么会对诸欲倾心”这个施设,因为是在安立欲贪的同义词和不耽着,所以既是同义施设,也是不耽着施设。“因为了知世间诸欲是缠缚”这个施设,因为是在安立将诸欲视为怨敌,所以名为见施设。因为诸欲会带来无益,所以与怨敌相似。巴利
‘‘Yo dukkha’’nti paññatti dukkhassa vevacanassa ca pariññāya ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti, pariññāpaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Yatonidāna’’nti paññatti samudayassa pabhavassa ca pahānassa ca paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti ceva pahānapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Addakkhī’’ti paññatti ñāṇacakkhussa vevacanassa ca paṭivedhassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti ceva paṭivedhapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Kāmesu so jantu kathaṃ nameyyā’’ti paññatti kāmataṇhāya vevacanassa ca anabhinivisassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti ceva anabhinivesapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā’’ti paññatti kāmānaṃ paccatthikato dassanassa ca paññāpanato dassanapaññatti nāma. Kāmā hi anatthajānanato paccatthikasadisā.
有人问:要成为什么样,才会产生无益?因为需要回答这个问题,所以说了“因为诸欲”等话。诸欲被贪欲之火等从内部烧灼,所以像炭坑;会变成腐烂,所以像肉块;被外面的东西烧灼,所以像炽燃的火堆;没有可依住之处,所以像悬崖;被像毒一样的嗔等伤害他人,所以像蛇。“具念者”这个施设,因为安立了断除和损减,所以叫损减施设;因为安立了身至念的安立,所以叫安立施设;因为安立了道的修习,所以叫修习施设。“为调伏而学”这个施设,因为安立了调伏贪、调伏嗔、调伏痴和通达,所以叫通达施设。“人”这个施设,因为安立了瑜伽行者的同义词,所以叫同义施设。巴利
‘‘Kīdisā hutvā anatthajanakā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kāmā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmā rāgaggiādīhi antodayhanato aṅgārakāsūpamā ca, pūtibhāvāpajjanato maṃsapesūpamā ca, bahi aññena dayhanato pāvakakappā jalitaggikkhandhūpamā ca, patiṭṭhānābhāvato papātūpamā ca, visasadisehi dosādīhi parahiṃsanato uragopamā ca. ‘‘Tesaṃ satīmā’’ti paññatti pahānāya apacayassa ca paññāpanato apacayapaññatti nāma, kāyagatāya satiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Vinayāya sikkhe’’ti paññattirāgavinayassa dosavinayassa mohavinayassa paṭivedhassa ca paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Jantū’’ti paññatti yogissa vevacanassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti nāma.
“人”这个词通常指一般的有情,为什么在这里要理解为指瑜伽行者呢?因为需要这样说明,所以接着说了“因为当……的时候”等话。瑜伽行者在某个时候,当他了知诸欲是缠缚,就在那个时候,他为了不让诸欲生起,通过身至念等来让善法生起。当他这样让善法生起时,这位瑜伽行者为了令尚未生起的善法生起而努力,发起善的精进。因此应当知道,“人”这个词在这里是指瑜伽行者。
“人”这个施设,因为它是为了获得尚未获得的禅那等善法而努力的施设,所以叫精进施设;又因为它是不满足于微小成就而安立的施设,所以叫安立施设。
“他为令尚未生起的善法生起而努力”这个施设,就是精进施设。接着有人问:“为了令已经生起的善法,由何种因缘而住立,他努力——这个施设是什么施设?”因为需要回答这个问题,所以说了“其中,他为令已生的……”等话。其中,在那“尚未生起的”等话里面。
“他为令已经生起的善法住立而努力”这个施设,因为是对修习和不放逸的施设,所以叫不放逸施设;因为是对精进根安立的施设,所以叫安立施设;因为是对善法守护的施设,所以叫守护施设;因为是对增上心学住立的施设,所以叫住立施设。
为了说明“上面所说的施设分类应该依据什么来信受”,所以说了“因此说”等话。巴利
‘‘Jantūti sāmaññasattavācako saddo kasmā yogivācakoti viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yogī yadā yasmiṃ kāle kāmā saṅgoti pajānāti, tadā tasmiṃ kāle so yogī kāmānaṃ anuppādāya kusale dhamme kāyagatāsatiādīhi uppādayati, so kusale dhamme uppādento yogī anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya vāyamati kusalavīriyaṃ karoti, tasmā yogīvācako jantusaddoti viññātabbo. ‘‘Jantū’’ti ayaṃ paññatti appattassa kusalassa jhānadhammādikassa pattiyā vāyāmassa ca paññāpanato vāyāmapaññatti nāma, oramattikāya asantuṭṭhiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. ‘‘So anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya vāyamatī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti vāyāmapaññatti, ‘‘hetuso uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā vāyamatīti paññatti katamā paññattī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha so uppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tasmiṃ ‘‘anuppannāna’’ntiādimhi. ‘‘So uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā vāyamatī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti bhāvanāya appamādassa ca paññāpanato appamādapaññatti nāma, vīriyindriyassa nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ārakkhassa ca paññāpanato ārakkhapaññatti nāma, adhicittasikkhāya ṭhitiyā ca paññāpanato ṭhitipaññatti nāma. ‘‘Kena yathāvuttappakāro paññattippabhedo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在“凡见到苦,以及从何因……”等偈颂中,施设的分类已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了解。巴利
‘‘Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidāna’’ntiādigāthāya paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto.
世间被愚痴缠缚,看起来却好像能解脱一样。
为依着所缚的愚者,被黑暗笼罩;
看起来像没有福报的样子,但在看见的人看来,根本没有任何东西可执著。巴利
‘‘Mohasambandhano loko, bhabbarūpova dissati; Upadhibandhano bālo, tamasā parivārito; Assirī viya khāyati, passato natthi kiñcananti. –
在这首偈颂里,为了说明“施设的分类是怎样被分别解说的”,所以说了“与痴相连”等话。其中,“与痴相连”是指与以痴为因的结缚相连。“世间”是指还没有断除结缚的有情世间。“看似有能力的样子而显现”是说,即使是没有能力的人,在愚者、没有观慧的人看来,也像是很有能力的样子,就像天生有能力的人一样显现出来。“被依着所缚”是指应当被烦恼依着所束缚;因为“yu”这个后缀是用在表示行为的意义上。或者说,愚者的烦恼束缚存在于各种依着之中,所以叫“被依着所缚”。“取两种不增长”就是愚者。他被黑暗、被痴所包围、所遮蔽,在智者、有观慧的人看来,他显得没有光彩,就像缺少光彩一样显现出来。对于用慧眼观看的智者来说,什么都不存在——应当这样理解其简要含义。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ pana kathaṃ paññattippabhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘mohasambandhano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mohasambandhanoti mohahetukehi saṃyojanehi sambandho. Lokoti appahīnasaṃyojano sattaloko. Bhabbarūpovadissatīti abhabbopi attā bhabbarūpova bhabbajātiko viya bālānaṃ avipassakānaṃ dissati. Upadhibandhanoti kilesūpadhīhi bandhitabbo. Yu-paccayo hi kammatthe vihito. Upadhīsu vā kilesānaṃ bandhanaṃ yassa bālassāti upadhibandhano. Dve avaḍḍhiyo lāti gaṇhātīti bālo. Tamasā sammohena parivārito paṭicchādito paṇḍitānaṃ vipassakānaṃ assirī viya sirīvirahito viya khāyati upaṭṭhāti. Passato paññācakkhunā passantassa paṇḍitassa kiñcanaṃ natthīti saṅkhepattho daṭṭhabbo.
“与痴相连的世间”这个施设,是从以痴为首来宣说诸颠倒的角度安立的,所以叫教说施设。“看似有能力者而显现”这个施设,是从颠倒的世间以颠倒的方式呈现的角度安立的,所以叫颠倒施设。“依着所缚的愚人”这个施设,是从宣说恶欲求界的来源的角度安立的,所以叫来源施设。“依着所缚的愚人”这个施设,是从宣说诸缠缚不善法的束缚作用的角度安立的,所以叫作用施设。“依着所缚的愚人”这个施设,是从宣说烦恼的束缚力和愚痴力的角度安立的,所以叫力施设。“依着所缚的愚人”这个施设,是从宣说诸行增长的角度安立的,所以叫增长施设。“被黑暗所包围”这个施设,是从宣说无明黑暗的角度安立的,所以叫教说施设;也是从宣说无明黑暗的同义词的角度安立的,所以叫同义施设。“看起来像没有祥瑞”这个施设,是从宣说天眼的看的作用的角度安立的,所以叫看施设。“看起来像没有祥瑞”这个施设,是从宣说慧眼的安立的角度安立的,所以叫安立施设。“正在看的人什么都没有”这个施设,是从宣说诸圣者的通达的角度安立的,所以叫通达施设。巴利
‘‘Mohasambandhano loko’’ti paññatti mohasīsena gahitānaṃ vipallāsānaṃ desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Bhabbarūpova dissatī’’ti paññatti lokassa viparītassa viparītākārena upaṭṭhahantassa paññāpanato viparītapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ pabhavassa paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti pariyuṭṭhānānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bandhanakiccassa paññāpanato kiccapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti kilesānaṃ bandhanabalamūhanabalānaṃ paññāpanato balapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti saṅkhārānaṃ viruhanāya paññāpanato viruhanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Tamasā parivārito’’ti paññatti avijjandhakārassa desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma, avijjandhakārassa vevacanassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Assirī viya khāyatī’’ti paññatti dibbacakkhussa dassanakiriyāya paññāpanato dassanapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Assirī viya khāyatī’’ti paññatti paññācakkhussa nikkhepassa paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Passato natthi kiñcana’’nti paññatti sattānaṃ ariyānaṃ paṭivedhassa paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma.
因为要问“什么是‘什么’?”,所以说了“贪是‘什么’”等等。因为要说“前面所说的施设差别,我们怎么能够相信呢?”,所以说了“因此他说”等等。由于前面所说的施设差别确实存在,世尊才说了“与痴相连”等等;正因为确实如此存在,所以依照这首偈颂,前面所说的施设差别应当随顺偈颂而信受。巴利
‘‘Katamaṃ kiñcana’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘rāgo kiñcana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathāvutto paññattippabhedo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathāvuttassa paññattippabhedassa sambhavato bhagavā yaṃ ‘‘mohasambandhano’’tiādimāha, tathāsambhavato tāya gāthāya yathāvutto paññattippabhedo gāthānusārena saddahitabbo.
“与痴相连的世间”等偈颂的施设分别,阿阇梨已经作了分析,我们也已经了解。因为应当问“诸比丘,有未生……这段经文的施设分别又是怎样分析的呢”,所以这里引出“诸比丘,有……”等经文。如果有人问:“世尊说这段经文是为了什么?”应当知道:因为在胜义上并不存在,涅槃是无;为了破斥那种认为“说有涅槃,就像说兔角一样,毫无意义,只是世俗言说”的邪见,世尊才说了这段经文。巴利
‘‘Mohasambandhano loko’’tiādigāthāya paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajāta’ntiādipāṭhassa paññattippabhedo kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādipāḷimāha. ‘‘Sā pana pāḷi kimatthaṃ bhagavatā vuttā’’ti ce puccheyya? Paramatthato avijjamānattā nibbānaṃ natthi, tasmā ‘‘atthi nibbāna’’nti vacanaṃ sasavisāṇavacanaṃ viya anatthaṃ, vohāramattametanti vadantānaṃ micchāvādaṃ bhañjituṃ bhagavatā vuttāti daṭṭhabbā.
涅槃之所以被称为“未生”“非有”,是因为它从任何地方都没有生起过,也从来没有真实地产生过。它被称为“非造”,是因为它不是由各种条件所造作的。又因为没有一切有为法的存在,所以无为的涅槃是存在的。如果这个以“未生”等为特征的涅槃不存在,那么出离就无法被了知。又因为涅槃是圣道和圣果的所缘对象,而且道果能断除烦恼、使烦恼止息,通过断除烦恼,三种轮回也不再转动,所以应当知道:以“未生”等为特征的涅槃确实是存在的。巴利
Kutocipi ajātattā abhūtattā ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ. Paccayehi akatattā akataṃ. Saṅkhatābhāvato asaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ atthi. Etaṃ ajātādikaṃ nibbānaṃ no ce abhavissa, evaṃ sati nissaraṇaṃ na paññāyetha, nibbānassa ca ariyamaggaphalānaṃ ārammaṇattā, maggaphalānañca kilesānaṃ samucchindanato paṭippassambhanato, samucchindanena ca tividhassa vaṭṭassa apavaṭṭanato ajātādikaṃ nibbānaṃ atthiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
比丘们,“有未生……略……无为”——这个施设既是涅槃的教说施设,也是涅槃的同义施设。“在此处,已生者……略……不能被了知”——这个施设既是有为的同义施设,也是有为的引导施设。“由于……略……无为”——这个施设既是涅槃的同义施设,也是涅槃的阐明施设。“由于已生者……略……被了知”——这个施设既是涅槃的同义施设,也是道从轮回中出离的施设,即出离施设。智者应当辨别并把握这些施设的差别。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ…pe… asaṅkhata’’nti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa desanāpaññatti ca nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Nayidha jātassa…pe… paññāyethā’’ti ayaṃ paññatti saṅkhatassa vevacanapaññatti ca saṅkhatassa upanayanapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Yasmā ca…pe… asaṅkhata’’nti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca nibbānassa jotanāpaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Yasmā jātassa…pe… paññāyatī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca maggassa saṃsārato niyyānikapaññatti ca nissaraṇapaññatti ca hotīti paññattiviseso paṇḍitehi niddhāretvā gahetabbo.
既然必须说明“像前面所说的那样,涅槃的施设分别应该由谁来信受”,所以就说了“因此世尊说”等话。“因此具寿说”等当中的衔接之义,以及“施设的摄取已经结合”的衔接之义,都应该按照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
‘‘Yathāvutto nibbānassa paññattippabhedo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tenāha āyasmā’’tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva ‘‘niyutto paññattihāro’’ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
智者应当依据注释书和复注,把其中甚深的含义详细地分别开来理解并受持。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
12. 入摄论分的阐释巴利
12. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
42 42. 通过种种作为解释差别的施设分别,诸施设已被分析;这个作为解释差别的分别就圆满了。因为应当问“什么是入摄的分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是入摄的摄”等。其中,“其中”是指:在已指明的十六种教说摄等当中,什么是作为解释差别的入摄之摄,也就是名为入摄摄的分别?这是在提问。对于“缘起”等所标示的内容,我现在要说的“向上、向下、于一切处得解脱”等详细解释的差别,应当理解为就是那名为入摄之摄、入摄摄的分别。巴利
42. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena paññattihāravibhaṅgena paññattiyo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo otaraṇo hāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo otaraṇo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Yo ca paṭiccuppādo’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.
在这段经文里,因为应当问“简择出哪些缘起等之后,以哪些被简择出的法而进入”,为了说明“在这段经文里,简择出这些缘起等之后,以这些被简择出的法而进入”,所以说了“于上、于下、于一切处彻底解脱”等话。其中,“于上”是指从欲界往上,在上方生起的色界和无色界。“于下”是指从色界往下,在下方生起的欲界。“于一切处”是指在一切欲界、色界、无色界中。“彻底解脱”是指因为不再以结生的方式再生而彻底解脱的无学者。这位有学者,因为以见道彻底断除了有身见,所以“不观‘有我’”而安住。应当这样理解这首偈颂的含义:有学者和无学者,以有学的解脱和无学的解脱,渡过了以前从未渡过的暴流,为了不再受生而解脱,已经出离。巴利
Tattha pāṭhe ‘‘katame paṭiccasamuppādādayo niddhāretvā katamehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā imasmiṃ pāṭhe ime paṭiccasamuppādādayo niddhāretvā imehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratīti dassetuṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha uddhanti kāmadhātuto uddhaṃ uparibhāge pavattāya rūpadhātuarūpadhātuyā. Adhoti rūpadhātuto heṭṭhābhāge pavattāya kāmadhātuyā. Sabbadhīti sabbasmiṃ kāmarūpaarūpadhātumhi. Vippamuttoti paṭisandhivasena appavattanato vippamutto asekkho. Ayaṃ sekkho dassanamaggena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā samugghātattā ‘‘ahaṃ asmī’’ti anānupassī viharati. Evaṃ sekkhāya vimuttiyā ceva asekkhāya vimuttiyā ca sekkho ceva asekkho ca atiṇṇapubbaṃ oghaṃ apunabbhavāya vimutto udatārīti gāthāttho gahetabbo.
在那段偈颂里,因为应当问“简择出哪些之后,以哪些进入”,所以说了“上方,是色界”等等。说“上方”,是因为从人间往上,连四大王天等也可能被包含进去,为了避免这种理解,所以说了“色界、无色界”。说“下方”,是因为从人间往下,四恶趣地也可能被包含进去,为了避免这种理解,所以说了“欲界”。说“一切处”,是因为四地也可能被包含进去,为了避免这种理解,所以说了“在三界中”。这无学解脱,就是已解脱的无学者所具有的离染,这离染也就是无学果解脱。在“上方、下方、一切处,彻底解脱”这段经文里,所说的这种无学解脱已经被简择出来了,这就是它的意思。对于已被简择出的无学解脱,那些已被简择出的信等五根,就成了无学的五根。像这样所说的进入,就是依诸根而进入解脱,叫做进入。巴利
Tasmiṃ gāthāpāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘uddhanti rūpadhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Uddhanti manussalokato uddhaṃ cātumahārājikādayopi gahitāti atthasambhavato taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘rūpadhātu arūpadhātū’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhoti manussabhavato adho cattāro apāyabhūmiyo ca gahitāti atthasambhavato taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘kāmadhātū’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbadhīti catubhūmiketi atthasambhavato ‘‘tedhātuke’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ asekkhā vimuttīti vimuttassa asekkhassa yā virāgatā atthi, ayampi virāgatā asekkhaphalavimutti. ‘‘Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’ti pāṭhe vuttappakārā ayaṃ asekkhā vimutti niddhāritāti attho. Niddhāritāya asekkhāya vimuttiyā yāni saddhādipañcindriyāni niddhāritāni, tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni bhavanti. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā indriyehi vimuttiyā otaraṇā nāma pavesanā nāma.
正是这同样的无学五根,因为能资助明,或者因为是慧的近因,所以成为明。由于明的生起,也就是这种明的生起,以生起为因,无明就灭尽,也就是无明灭尽……乃至……苦蕴灭尽。这种所说的入,就是依缘起而进入,名为入。巴利
Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni vijjāya upakārakattā, paññāpadaṭṭhānattā vā vijjā bhavanti. Vijjuppādā tādisāya vijjāya uppādā uppādahetuto avijjānirodho avijjāya nirodho hoti…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti, ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā nāma.
这些无学五根被三蕴所包含,因为信和精进是戒生起的来源,而念则随顺慧。其余的应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni saddhāvīriyehi sīlasambhavato, satiyā ca paññānuvattakattā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
在“向上、向下、遍一切处彻底解脱”这一读法中,阿阇梨已经对“入”作了分别解说,我们也已经了解。在“不观‘我即是此’”这一读法中,因为应当问“简择了什么之后,以哪些入而入”,所以说了“不观‘我即是此’,这就是有身见”等。那位不观“我即是此”的有学,他的有身见确实已被断除,那种被称为断除的断除解脱,就是有学解脱。对于这种有学解脱,那些被简择出的信等五根,就成为有学五根。以上所说的这种入,就是依根而入,名为入。其余的应按照已说的方法来理解。巴利
‘‘Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’ti pāṭhe niddhāretvā otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘ayaṃ ahasmīti anānupassī’’ti pāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaraṇehi otaratī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayaṃ ahasmīti anānupassīti ayaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo ayaṃ sekkho ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti nānupassī, tassa sekkhassa sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā yo samugghāto atthi, yā samugghātasaṅkhātā samugghātavimutti sekkhā vimutti hoti, tassā sekkhāya vimuttiyā yāni saddhādipañcindriyāni niddhāritāni, tāniyeva sekkhāni pañcindriyāni bhavanti. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā indriyehi otaraṇā nāma. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
43 在“上、下”等偈颂中,由阿阇梨分别解说了进入的方式,我们也已经了解。在“依著者有动摇”等经文中,因为应当问“简择了哪些之后,以哪些进入”,所以说了“依著者有动摇,无依著者无动摇”等。依著的人有动摇、有动转;无依著的人没有动摇、没有动转。没有动摇、没有动转时,就有轻安;有轻安存在时,就没有倾向;没有倾向存在时,就没有来去;没有来去存在时,就没有死生;没有死生存在时,在此处内六处中不见我,在彼处外六处中也不见我,排除两者之间后,在触等诸法聚中也不见我。这本身就是缘起,从“无明灭”等开始,使苦终结、穷尽,这就是其含义。巴利
43. ‘‘Uddhaṃ adho’’tiādigāthāyaṃ otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘nissitassa calita’’ntiādipāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nissitassa calitaṃ, anissitassa calitaṃ natthī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nissitassa puggalassa calitaṃ calanaṃ atthi, anissitassa puggalassa calitaṃ calanaṃ natthi. Calite calane asati passaddhi bhavati, passaddhiyā sati vijjamānāya nati na hoti, natiyā asati avijjamānāya āgatigati na hoti, āgatigatiyā asati avijjamānāya cutūpapāto na hoti, cutūpapāte asati avijjamāne idha chasu ajjhattikāyatanesu attānaṃ neva passati, huraṃ vā chasu bāhirāyatanesu attānaṃ na passati, ubhayaṃ antarena vajjetvā phassādisamudāyesu dhammesu attānaṃ na passati, esova paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘avijjānirodhā’’tiādiko dukkhassa anto avasānaṃ karotīti attho.
对于“有依者动摇”这一句,因为有人会问“依著到底有几种”,所以就说“有依者动摇,所谓依著”等等。其中,在那两种依著——贪爱依著和见依著——当中,对染著的人所确定的那个思,这个思法就叫贪爱依著;对愚痴的人所确定的那个思,这个思法就叫见依著。而这两种思,就叫作行。以行为缘而有识……乃至整个缘起都已确定。这种所说的“入”,就是依缘起而入,叫作入。巴利
Nissitassacalitanti ettha ‘‘nissayo katividho’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nissitassa calitanti nissayo nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu duvidhesu taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissayesu yā cetanā rattassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ cetanādhammo taṇhānissayo nāma. Yā cetanā mūḷhassa puggalassa niddhāritā. Ayaṃ cetanādhammo diṭṭhinissayo nāma. Sā duvidhā cetanā pana saṅkhārā nāma. Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ…pe… sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo niddhārito. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā nāma.
其中,在那两种依著——贪爱依著和见依著——当中,对于被贪爱染著的人所判定的受,这是乐受;对于愚痴的人所判定的思,这是不苦不乐受。其余的,大多数应依照上面所说的方法来了知。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissaye yā vedanā rattassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ sukhā vedanā. Yā cetanā sammūḷhassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Yebhuyyena sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
44 对于“依著者有动摇”等文句的入处,阿阇梨已经分别解说,我们也已经知道。巴利
44. ‘‘Nissitassa calita’’ntiādipāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā.
凡是任何忧愁、悲泣……
不要在世间任何地方做可爱的事。巴利
‘‘Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā…pe… Piyaṃ na kayirātha kuhiñci loke’’ti. –
在偈颂的读诵中,因为应当问“确定了哪些之后,又依哪些而进入?”所以说了“凡任何忧愁”等话。凡任何忧愁,或任何悲泣,以及世间生起的种种苦,这些都是依于可爱者而生起的;可爱者不存在时,这些忧愁等就不会有。因此,由于可爱者不存在时忧愁等便不存在,那些已离忧者在世间任何地方都没有忧愁,离忧者是快乐的。因此,因为离忧者具足安乐,想要得到无忧、无尘垢的善士,就不应在世间任何地方做可爱者。这就是偈颂的含义。巴利
Gāthāpāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ye keci sokā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye keci sokā vā yā kāci paridevitā vā anekarūpā yā kāci dukkhā vā lokasmiṃ sambhavanti. Ete sokādayo piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti, piye asante ete sokādayo na bhavanti. Tasmā piye asante sokādīnaṃ abhāvato yesaṃ vītasokānaṃ kuhiñci lokepi natthi, te vītasokā sukhino bhavanti. Tasmā vītasokānaṃ sukhasampannattā asokaṃ virajaṃ patthayāno sappuriso kuhiñci loke piyaṃ na kayirāthāti gāthāttho.
在“凡有任何忧愁、悲泣,以及世间种种苦,这些都依于所爱者而生起”这段文中,所确定的受就是苦受。其余的应依照前面所说的方法来了知。巴利
‘‘Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā, dukkhā ca lokasmimanekarūpā piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti ete’’ti ettha pāṭhe yā vedanā niddhāritā, ayaṃ dukkhā vedanā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
在“凡有任何忧愁”等偈颂的文本中,通达的方式已由阿阇梨分别说明,我们也已经了解。因为在“欲求欲乐者”等偈颂的文本中,应当问“确定了哪些法之后,凭借哪些法而通达”,所以说了“欲求欲乐者”等偈颂。那首偈颂的含义,前面已经说过了。巴利
‘‘Ye keci sokā’’tiādigāthāpāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā , ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādigāthāpāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttova.
这里,“其中”是指在“心生喜悦”这一读法中,所说的喜悦心已被确定,这个喜悦心就是贪爱随顺;在“如被箭刺而受苦”这一读法中,所说的受苦,这个受苦就是嗔恚。随顺和嗔恚都已被确定,这就是其含义。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘pītimano hotī’’ti pāṭhe yā pītimanatā vuttā niddhāritā, ayaṃ pītimanatā anunayo hoti. ‘‘Sallaviddhova ruppatī’’ti pāṭhe yaṃ ruppanaṃ āha, idaṃ ruppanaṃ paṭighaṃ hoti, anunayo ca paṭighañca niddhāritāti attho.
有人问:已经确定了随顺和嗔恚,那确定的是什么法?因为需要这样回答,所以就说随顺和嗔恚是渴爱这一边。所谓渴爱这一边,是因为它们属于渴爱这一边,所以渴爱就被确定了。如果有人这样说:随顺可以算是渴爱这一边,但嗔恚不应该算是渴爱这一边吧?因为嗔恚是依靠对自我的贪爱而生起的,所以嗔恚也属于渴爱这一边。又因为需要回答已经确定了渴爱,那确定的是什么,所以就说以渴爱……等等。由于十种色处是渴爱的立足处,所以十种色处就被确定了。这种所说的通达,叫做依处的通达。经典中出现的缘起等,是通过那种特定的注释方法而被确定,或者通过经义的门径而被确定,因此……在以那种方法等确定的缘起等当中,那种特定的注释方法,以表达其含义或者使人了知其含义的方式,通达、进入、汇入,这种特定的注释方法应当被理解为叫做通达的方法。在其余的地方,也应当依照所说的道理来理解通达。因此尊者说等等,这些连接语的含义,以及通达的方法已经结合,这些连接语的含义,都应当依照所说的道理来了知。巴利
‘‘Anunaye ca paṭighe ca niddhārite katamo dhammo niddhārito’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘anunayo paṭighañca pana taṇhāpakkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāpakkhoti taṇhāpakkhattā taṇhā niddhāritā. ‘‘Anunayo taṇhāpakkho hotu, paṭighaṃ pana taṇhāpakkhaṃ na siyā’’ti ce vadeyya? Paṭighassa attasinehavasena pavattanato paṭighampi taṇhāpakkhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Taṇhāya niddhāritāya katamo niddhārito’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘taṇhāya ca panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dasannaṃ rūpāyatanānaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānattā dasa rūpāni āyatanāni niddhāritāni. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā āyatanehi otaraṇā nāma. Sutte āgatā paṭiccasamuppādādayo tena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayena niddhāritā, suttatthamukhena vā niddhāritā, tena…pe… nayena niddhāritesu paṭiccasamuppādādīsu yo saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso tadatthavācakavasena vā tadatthañāpakavasena vā otarati pavisati samosarati, so saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso otaraṇo hāro nāmāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi vuttanayānusārena otaraṇā gahetabbā. ‘‘Tenāha āyasmā’’tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva ‘‘niyutto otaraṇo hāro’’ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
以上就是在通达方法的分别中,按照自身能力的差异而写成的。巴利
Iti otaraṇahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当依据注释书和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
净化方法的分别之阐明巴利
13. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
45 第45段。通过任何一种属于注释分类的通达方法分别,应当被通达的经义已经分别说明;当这个属于注释分类的分别已经圆满,因为应当问“什么是净化方法分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是净化方法”等。其中“在那些当中”,是在那些已指出的十六种说法方法等之中,问:什么是名为净化方法分别的注释分类?“在问题已被解答时”等说明,如今由我所说的“如同具寿阿耆多”等详细的注释分类,应当被理解为名为净化方法分别。因为应当说“如何在此问题中理解净化方法”,所以说了“如同具寿”等。如同具寿阿耆多在《彼岸道》中向世尊提问的方式,当问题已被解答时,这个净化方法就应当被理解。因为应当说“确定后分别”,所以为了确定后分别,说了“以何”等。偈颂的含义已经说过。巴利
45. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena otaraṇahāravibhaṅgena otaretabbā suttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo sodhanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo sodhano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhano hāro sodhanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Vissajjitamhi pañhe’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘yathā āyasmā ajito’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo. ‘‘Kathaṃ tattha pañhe sodhano hāro viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā āyasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena āyasmā ajito pārāyane bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati, tathā tena pakārena vissajjitamhi pañhe ayaṃ sodhano hāro viññātabboti. ‘‘Niyametvā vibhajehī’’ti vattabbattā niyametvā vibhajituṃ ‘‘kenassū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gāthāttho vuttova.
世间被什么遮住了?它为什么不再显现?
你说什么是它的污垢?什么又是它的大恐怖?巴利
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, kenassu nappakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. –
而在以提问方式展开的偈颂中:巴利
Pucchāvasena pavattagāthāyañca –
世尊说:阿耆多,世间被无明遮蔽,
因为悭吝和放逸,它不显现。
我说,贪求就是涂染,对它来说,这是巨大的怖畏。巴利
‘‘Avijjāya nivuto loko, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsati; Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmi, dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti. –
在按解答方式展开的偈颂中,对于这两首偈颂,当以“世间被什么遮蔽”这一句提出问题后,世尊以“世间被无明所遮蔽”这一句,通过去除对该义的无知、疑惑等垢染,净化了“世间被什么遮蔽”这一句。因为该义一旦被解答,无知、疑惑等就不存在了,所以义才算是被净化了;义被净化时,句也就同样被净化了。因此注释中说:“由于该义被解答”,复注中也说:“通过去除对该对象的无知、疑惑等垢染而得以净化”。并不是说“开始”——不应开始询问所有偈句或偈义,因为对于想要了知的一切义,并没有以解答的方式彻底完成,所以世尊仅以“世间被无明所遮蔽”这一句就净化了。其余各处也是这个道理。巴利
Vissajjanavasena pavattagāthāyañcāti imāsu dvīsu gāthāsu ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti iminā padena pañhe pucchite ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti iminā padena bhagavā ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti padaṃ tadatthe aññāṇasaṃsayādimalānaṃ apanayanena sodheti. Tadatthe hi vissajjite aññāṇasaṃsayādīnaṃ abhāvato attho sodhito nāma, atthe ca sodhite padampi sodhitaṃyeva. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘tadatthassa vissajjanato’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 45), ṭīkāyañca ‘‘tabbisayaaññāṇasaṃsayādimalāpanayanena sodhetī’’ti vuttaṃ. No ca ārambhanti pucchituṃ ārabhitabbaṃ sabbagāthāpadaṃ, gāthātthaṃ vā, ñātuṃ icchitassa sabbassa atthassa vissajjanavasena apariyositattā bhagavā ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti ettakeneva padena sodheti. Sesesupi esa nayo.
当有人用“什么是它的大怖畏”这句话来提问时,世尊用“苦是它的大怖畏”这句话作答,由此让人想了解的起始之义就变得清楚、纯净了。其余偈颂也是同样的道理。巴利
‘‘Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti iminā padena pañhe pucchite ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti padena bhagavatā ārambho ñātuṃ icchito attho suddho sodhito hoti. Sesagāthāsupi eseva nayo.
在某个问题上,如果以毫无遗漏地解答的方式开始,而这个开始是清净的、已经被净化的,那么这个问题就算是被解答了、被净化了。在某个问题上,如果以毫无遗漏地解答的方式开始,而这个开始还不清净、还没被净化,那么这个问题就还不算被解答、被净化——句义应当这样连接起来。“因此他说”等语句的句间衔接及其含义,以及“已结合的净化之引导”这一句间的衔接及其含义,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Yattha pañhe evaṃ niravasesavissajjanavasena ārambho suddho sodhito bhavati, so pañho vissajjito sodhito bhavati. Yattha pañhe evaṃ niravasesavissajjanavasena ārambho yāva asuddho asodhito bhavati, tāva so pañho vissajjito sodhito na bhavatīti yojanā. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādyānusandhyādyattho ceva ‘‘niyutto sodhano hāro’’ti anusandhyādyattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
以上就是对净化引导分类的解说,它是按照自己的能力相应写成的。巴利
Iti sodhanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
不过,智者应当依据注疏和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
14. 安立引导门分别的详细阐明巴利
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
46 凡是能用来澄清问题等的、属于某种特殊注释的分别,这种特殊注释的分别就是圆满的。因为接下来应该问“什么是安立引导的分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是安立引导”等话。这里的“其中”,就是在前面已经指出的十六种说示引导等当中,问:从反面指示的角度看,哪一种特殊注释是安立引导,也就是名为安立引导的分别?接着,“以统一性来说诸法,以及以差异性来说的诸法”等所指示的内容,也就是我现在要详细讲述的“那些在那里被指出的,应当这样持守”等广释的特殊注释,应当知道这就是安立引导的分别。巴利
46. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena pañhādayo sodhitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo adhiṭṭhāno hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paṭiniddesato adhiṭṭhāno hāro adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ekattatāya dhammā, yepi ca vemattatāya niddiṭṭhā’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ye tattha niddiṭṭhā, tathā te dhārayitabbā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.
有人会问:“那些在经典里以同一性和差别性被指出的法,到底应该完全照原样受持,还是也可以换一种方式去理解呢?”因为要这样发问,所以说“在那里……”等等。其中,在那些经典里,凡是苦谛等法以同一性和差别性被指出的,那些苦谛等法就应该按那样的同一性和差别性来受持、来观察,不应该换一种方式去理解。巴利
‘‘Ye dhammā suttesu ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca niddiṭṭhā, te dhammā kiṃ pana tatheva dhārayitabbā , udāhu aññathāpi vikappayitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ye tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu suttantesu ye dukkhasaccādayo dhammā ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca niddiṭṭhā, te dukkhasaccādayo dhammā tathā ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca dhārayitabbā upalakkhitabbā, na aññathā vikappayitabbā.
因为要问的是“以世俗言说的方式安立共相,并没有固定性,那么什么是统一性,什么是差异性”,所以才说了“苦是统一性”等话。所谓“苦”,是不去看生等具体差别,而说出的苦的共相,这个苦的共相就叫作苦的统一性。被问到“其中什么是苦”时,去看生等具体差别,而说“生是苦,老是苦……识是苦”,这个苦的具体差别就叫作苦的差异性。所谓“其中”,就是指经里所说的苦等诸法,在那些苦等含义当中。巴利
‘‘Sāmaññakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato katamā ekattatā, katamā vemattatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dukkhanti ekattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dukkhanti jātiādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā dukkhasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ dukkhasāmaññatā dukkhassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamaṃ dukkha’’nti pucchitā ‘‘jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā…pe... viññāṇaṃ dukkha’’nti jātiādivisesamapekkhitvā yā dukkhavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ dukkhavisesatā dukkhassa vemattatā nāma. Tatthāti ye dukkhādayo dhammā sutte vuttā, tattha tesu dukkhādīsu atthesu.
说到苦集,如果不考虑“渴爱能引再生”这个具体特征,而只是就集的一般共性来说,这种集的一般共性就叫作集的统一性。如果先问“其中什么是集”,然后考虑“此渴爱……乃至无有爱”这个具体特征来说,这种集的具体特征就叫作集的差异性。巴利
Dukkhasamudayoti ‘‘taṇhā ponobhavikā’’ti visesamanapekkhitvā yā samudayasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samudayasāmaññatā samudayassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo samudayo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yāyaṃ taṇhā…pe… vibhavataṇhā’’ti visesaṃ apekkhitvā yā samudayavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samudayavisesatā samudayassa vemattatā nāma.
说到“苦灭”,这是不看重“就是那渴爱的无余离贪灭”这类具体差别,而说出的灭的共通性,这个灭的共通性就叫作灭的单一性。先问“其中什么是苦灭”,然后看重“就是那渴爱的无余离贪灭、舍弃、放下、解脱、无执著”这类具体差别,而说出的灭的具体差别,这个灭的具体差别就叫作灭的差异性。巴利
Dukkhanirodhoti ‘‘tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti visesamanapekkhitvā yā nirodhasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhasāmaññatā nirodhassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo dukkhanirodho’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo’’ti visesamapekkhitvā yā nirodhavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhavisesatā nirodhassa vemattatā nāma.
什么是苦灭之道?说到“道”,如果考虑正见等具体差别,只是就通向灭尽的道这一共同层面来说,这就是道的统一性。如果先问“其中什么是苦灭之道”,然后不考虑正见等具体差别而说“就是这圣……乃至正定”,这就是就具体差别而说的苦灭之道,也就是道的差异性。巴利
Dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti? Paṭipadāti sammādiṭṭhiādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā nirodhagāminipaṭipadāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhagāminipaṭipadāsāmaññatā maggassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ayameva ariyo…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti sammādiṭṭhiādivisesamapekkhitvā yā visesadukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesadukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadatā maggassa vemattatā nāma.
称为道,这是不考虑地狱道等具体差别而说的普遍的道性,这种普遍的道性就叫作道的统一性。问“其中什么是道”,然后考虑地狱道等具体差别而说“地狱道……乃至涅槃道”,这种具体的道性就叫作道的差异性。巴利
Maggoti nirayagāmimaggādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā sāmaññamaggatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññamaggatā maggassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo maggo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘nirayagāmī maggo…pe… nibbānagāmī maggo’’ti nirayagāmimaggādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesamaggatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesamaggatā maggassa vemattatā nāma.
“灭”这里说的是:不考虑择灭等种种差别,而说的那种普遍意义上的灭,这个普遍意义上的灭,就叫作灭的同一性。追问“其中什么是灭”,然后考虑到择灭……乃至一切烦恼灭等种种差别,而说的那种有差别的灭,这个有差别的灭,就叫作灭的差异性。巴利
Nirodhoti paṭisaṅkhānirodhādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā sāmaññanirodhatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññanirodhatā nirodhassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo nirodho’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘paṭisaṅkhānirodho…pe… sabbakilesanirodho’’ti paṭisaṅkhānirodhādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesanirodhatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesanirodhatā nirodhassa vemattatā nāma.
看向四大种等具体差别,而说的那种共同的色性,这个共同的色性就叫作色的统一性。有人问“其中什么是色”,然后看向四大种等具体差别,而说“四大种所造……乃至风界使心离染”,这个具体差别层面的色性就叫作色的差异性。巴利
Rūpanti cātumahābhūtikādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā sāmaññarūpatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññarūpatā rūpassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamaṃ rūpa’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘cātumahābhūtikaṃ…pe… vāyodhātuyā cittaṃ virājetī’’ti cātumahābhūtikādivisesamapekkhitvā yā visesarūpatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesarūpatā rūpassa vemattatā nāma.
48 所谓无明,是说不去看苦无知等具体差别,而说出的那种无明的共同相,这个无明的共同相就叫作无明的统一性。有人问“其中,什么是无明”,回答时说“对苦无知,对苦的集起无知……乃至无明越渡、愚痴、不善根”,这是去看苦无知等具体差别而说出的无明的差别相,这个无明的差别相就叫作无明的差异性。巴利
48.Avijjāti dukkheaññāṇādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā avijjāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ avijjāsāmaññatā avijjāya ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā avijjā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ…pe… avijjālaṅghī moho akusalamūla’’nti dukkheaññāṇādivisesamapekkhitvā yā avijjāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ avijjāvisesatā avijjāya vemattatā nāma.
明:如果不看苦智等具体差别,而说它是泛指的明,那么这种泛指的明就叫作明的统一性。有人问“这里什么是明”,回答“苦智、苦集智……乃至择法觉支、道支、属于道”,这是看着苦智等具体差别而说的明,那么这种有差别的明就叫作明的差异性。巴利
Vijjāti dukkheñāṇādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā vijjāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ vijjāsāmaññatā vijjāya ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā vijjā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ…pe… dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo maggaṅgaṃ maggapariyāpanna’’nti dukkheñāṇādivisesamapekkhitvā yā vijjāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ vijjāvisesatā vijjāya vemattatā nāma.
所谓等至,就是:如果不考虑有想等至等具体类别,而说它作为一种共同的等至状态,那么这种共同的等至状态就叫作等至的单一性。反过来,先问“其中什么是等至”,然后回答“有想等至、无想等至……乃至灭尽等至”,这是考虑了有想等至等具体类别,而说它作为一种有差别的等至状态,那么这种有差别的等至状态就叫作等至的差异性。巴利
Samāpattīti saññāsamāpatyādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā sāmaññasamāpattitā vuttā, sā sāmaññasamāpattitā samāpattiyā ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā samāpattī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘saññāsamāpatti asaññāsamāpatti…pe… nirodhasamāpattī’’ti saññāsamāpatyādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesasamāpattitā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesasamāpattitā samāpattiyā vemattatā nāma.
说到“入禅者”:如果不考虑有学入禅者等具体分类,只是笼统地说入禅者的共同特征,这种共同特征就叫入禅者的“同一性”。先问“这里什么是入禅者”,然后回答“有有学入禅者,有无学入禅者……乃至慧增上入禅者”,这是考虑了有学入禅者、无学入禅者等具体分类,来说入禅者的差别特征,这种差别特征就叫入禅者的“差异性”。巴利
Jhāyīti sekkhajhāyīādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā jhāyīsāmaññatā vuttā, sā jhāyīsāmaññatā jhāyino ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo jhāyī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘atthi sekkho jhāyī, atthi asekkho jhāyī…pe… paññuttaro jhāyī’’ti sekkhajhāyīasekkhajhāyīādivisesamapekkhitvā yā jhāyīvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ jhāyīvisesatā jhāyino vemattatā nāma.
说到“定”:如果不考虑有诤定等具体类别,而只是就定的共通性来说,这种定的共通性就叫作定的“单一性”。先问“其中,什么是定”,然后回答“有诤定、无诤定……邪定、正定”,这是考虑了有诤定等具体类别之后,所说的定的差别性,这种定的差别性就叫作定的“差异性”。巴利
Samādhīti saraṇasamādhyādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā samādhisāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samādhisāmaññatā samādhino ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo samādhī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘saraṇo samādhi, araṇo samādhi…pe… micchāsamādhi, sammāsamādhī’’ti saraṇasamādhyādivisesamapekkhitvā yā samādhivisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samādhivisesatā samādhino vemattatā nāma.
所谓“行道”,如果不考虑苦行道等具体分类,而只是就行道的共通性来说,这种行道的共通性就叫作行道的单一性。先问“其中,什么是行道”,然后回答“苦行道、迟通行……乃至乐行道、速通达”,这是考虑了苦行道等具体分类,就行道的差别性来说,这种行道的差别性就叫作行道的差异性。巴利
Paṭipadāti āgāḷhapaṭipadādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā paṭipadāsāmaññatā vuttā, ayaṃ paṭipadāsāmaññatā paṭipadāya ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā paṭipadā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘āgāḷhapaṭipadā, nijjhāmapaṭipadā…pe… sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā’’ti āgāḷhapaṭipadādivisesamapekkhitvā yā paṭipadāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ paṭipadāvisesatā paṭipadāya vemattatā nāma.
所谓“身”,如果不考虑名身等差别,而说它共通的一面,这个身的共通性就叫作身的单一性。接着问“其中,什么是身”,然后回答“名身、色身……乃至此是名身”,这是考虑了名身等差别之后,说它差别的一面,这个身的差别性就叫作身的差异性。应当这样连接理解。词义等方面的差别,在注释书(《导论注》47)中已有详细说明。巴利
Kāyoti nāmakāyādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā kāyasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ kāyasāmaññatā kāyassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo kāyo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘nāmakāyo rūpakāyo…pe… ayaṃ nāmakāyo’’ti nāmakāyādivisesamapekkhitvā yā kāyavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ kāyavisesatā kāyassa vemattatā nāmāti yojanā kātabbā. Padatthādiko viseso aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 47) vitthārato vutto.
为了用结论的方式显示前面所说的苦、集等法的单一性等特征,所以说了“如是,凡法”等话。其中,“如是”是指通过我所说的“苦就是单一性。其中,什么是苦?生是苦,老是苦”等话来说的。“凡法”是指任何生、老、病等有差别的法。“彼法”是指从那些生等有差别的法之外的老等有差别的法。“相同性”是指以苦性来说,生等有差别的法和老等有差别的法相同。“彼法”是指老等有差别的法。“以单一性”是指依苦、集性等相同性,苦、集等状态成为一体。成为一体是指虽因生等差别而呈多样,但以“苦集”等同一言词所指称,故成为一体。或者说,凡是与任何事物不同类别的,就依彼彼而成为差异。对于任何生等法,以彼彼所生起、成熟等自性,凡生等法与老等法不同类、不相似,则对于该生等法,以彼彼所生起、成熟等自性,该生等法依老等法而成为差异、不相似;即使以苦、集等状态相同,生等法仍依老等法而成为殊异,应当如此理解其义。巴利
Vuttappakārassa dukkhasamudayādikassa dhammassa ekattatādilakkhaṇaṃ nigamanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ yo dhammo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti iminā mayā vuttena ‘‘dukkhanti ekattatā. Tattha katamaṃ dukkhaṃ? Jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā’’tiādivacanena. Yo dhammoti yo koci jātijarābyādhyādivisesadhammo. Yassa dhammassāti tato jātiādivisesadhammato aññassa jarādivisesadhammassa. Samānabhāvoti jātiādivisesadhammena jarādivisesadhammassa dukkhabhāvena samānabhāvo. Tassa dhammassāti jarādivisesadhammassa. Ekattatāyāti dukkhasamudayatādisamānatāya dukkhasamudayādibhāvānaṃ ekībhāvena. Ekībhavatīti jātiādivisesabhedena anekopi ‘‘dukkhasamudayo’’tiādinā ekasaddābhidheyyatāya ekībhavati. Yena yena vā pana vilakkhaṇo, tena tena vemattaṃ gacchati. Yassa jātiādidhammassa yena yena abhinibbattanaparipācanādisabhāvena yo jātiādidhammo jarādidhammena vilakkhaṇo visadiso hoti, tassa jātiādidhammassa tena tena abhinibbattanaparipācanādisabhāvena so jātiādidhammo jarādidhammena vemattataṃ visadisattaṃ gacchati, dukkhasamudayādibhāvena samānopi jātiādidhammo jarādidhammassa visiṭṭhataṃ gacchatīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
苦集等法的同一性和差异性,已由阿阇梨分别阐明,我们也已了知。为了说明“当被问及那同一性和差异性时,应当审察所依”,由于这是应当问的,所以为了显示“于经等中被问时应当审察”,说了“如是于经中”等话。其中,“如是”即按上述方式:于经中被问时,于记说中被问时,或于偈颂中被问时,应当审察所依。如果有人问“应当审察什么”,就应当审察“是以同一性来问,还是以差异性来问”。然而,注释书中说:“现在,为了引导到同一性和差异性的领域而加以显示,所以说了‘于经中或记说中’等。”为了说明“怎样问、怎样回答”,说了“若以同一性”等。而“故说”等语的连贯关系,以及“已连结的所依引导”等的连贯关系,应依照前面所说的方法来了知。巴利
Dukkhasamudayādidhammassa ekattavemattatā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tāya ekattavemattatāya kattha pucchite sati adhiṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā suttādike pucchite sati vīmaṃsitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sutte vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena sutte vā pucchite, veyyākaraṇe vā pucchite, gāthāyaṃ vā pucchitāyaṃ sati adhiṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vīmaṃsitabba’’nti puccheyya ‘‘ekattatāya pucchati kiṃ, udāhu vemattatāya pucchati ki’’nti vīmaṃsitabbanti yojanā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘idāni tāva ekattavemattatāvisaye niyojetvā dassetuṃ ‘sutte vā veyyākaraṇe vā’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 48) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ pucchitaṃ, kathaṃ vissajjitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘yadi ekattatāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādyānusandhyādiko ca ‘‘niyutto adhiṭṭhāno hāro’’ti imassa anusandhyādiko ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
以上是依照“依处引导分别”这一部分,按照众生的能力而写成的。巴利
Iti adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
有智慧的人应当依照注释书和复注的次第,把其中的深义详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
15. 资具引导的分别之阐明巴利
15. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
49 凡是某种属于殊胜诠释的分别,用它来分别说明苦谛等的一性等,这种殊胜诠释就是圆满的。因为应当问“什么是名为资具理的分别”,所以说了“于此,什么是资具理”等。其中“于此”是指:在所指示的十六种教说理等当中,哪一种殊胜诠释的资具理,名为资具理分别?他这样发问。对于“诸法生起某法”这段解说,现在由我来说明:作为资具的因与缘,其详细的殊胜诠释之资具分别,名为“凡某法生起某法,那法就是它的资具”等。巴利
49. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena dukkhasaccādīnaṃ ekattatādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo parikkhāro hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāro hāro parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāro’’tiādiko parikkhārabhūtassa hetuno ceva paccayassa ca vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāravibhaṅgo nāma.
因为有人会问“什么才是应当被说明的资具”,所以说了“凡法……”等话。在这里,凡是作为因缘方式的法,它生起、产生作为果的某个法,那么对那个果法来说,这个作为因缘方式的法就叫作资具。因为有人会问“资具有什么特征”,所以先这样发问,为了显示它的特征差别,又说了“什么特征”等话。不过,注释书里说:“在这里,‘某法生起某法,那个法就是它的资具’,这样简要地说出资具的特征之后,为了把它分开来显示,所以说了‘什么特征’等话。”因为有人会问“有多少法在生起”,所以说了“两种法在生起,就是因和缘”。因为应当说“因也是原因,缘也是原因,所以既然同样是原因,凭什么特征说成两种”,所以说了“在这里,是什么特征”等话。因的特征是:对于它所生的果来说,不与其他果共有;缘的特征是:与一切果共有。应当用这种特征差别来说它们有两种,这就是这里的意思。因为有人会问“共有和不共有的差别到底是什么样”,所以先问“像什么呢”,然后说了“像芽那样”等话。意思是:那种共有和不共有的差别是怎样的,它就像那样。就像种子对于芽的生起是不共的,因对于果的生起也是不共的;就像地和水的对于芽的生起是共有的,缘对于果的生起也是共有的。因为缘是一切果的缘,所以种子对于芽来说,是能生的不共因。因为有人会问“怎么可以相信地和水的确是共有的能生者”,所以说了“因为对于芽……”等话。它平等地、同样地使果生起,这就是它的本性。那是什么呢?就是种子,也就是因本身。因为应当说“因和缘的差别,是只应该用种子和芽的比喻来显示,还是也应该用别的比喻来显示”,所以为了用别的比喻也显示这种差别,说了“或者,就像……”等话。意思是:用这个比喻,也应当了知因和缘的差别。巴利
‘‘Katamo saṃvaṇṇetabbo parikkhāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yo dhammo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo hetupaccayappakāro dhammo yaṃ phalabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ janayati janeti, tassa phaladhammassa so hetupaccayappakāro dhammo parikkhāro nāma. ‘‘Kiṃlakkhaṇo parikkhāro’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā lakkhaṇavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃlakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘tattha ‘yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāro’ti saṅkhepato parikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ vatvā taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘kiṃlakkhaṇo’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kittakā dhammā janayantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve dhammā janayanti hetu ca paccayo cā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Hetupi kāraṇaṃ, paccayopi kāraṇaṃ , tasmā kāraṇāyeva kena lakkhaṇena dvidhā vuttā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha kiṃlakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Janitabbaphalato aññehi phalehi asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetu, sabbaphalehi sādhāraṇalakkhaṇo paccayo, iminā visesalakkhaṇena dvidhā vattabbāti attho. ‘‘Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso kīdiso bhave’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yathā aṅkurassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yo sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso atthi, tathā so sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso kiṃ viya bhaveti attho. Aṅkurassa nibbattiyā bījaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ yathā, tathā hetu phalassa nibbattiyā asādhāraṇo bhave. Pathavī ca āpo ca aṅkurassa nibbattiyā sādhāraṇā bhavanti yathā, tathā paccayo phalassa nibbattiyā sādhāraṇo bhave. Sabbaphalassa paccayattā aṅkurassa bījaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ janakaṃ hetu. ‘‘Kathaṃ pathavī, āpo ca sādhāraṇā janakāti saddahitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘aṅkurassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samaṃ samānaṃ phalaṃ bhavāpetīti sabhāvo, ko so? Bījaṃ hetuyeva. ‘‘Kiṃ hetupaccayānaṃ viseso bījaṅkuropamāyeva dassetabbo, udāhu aññūpamāyapi dassetabbo’’ti vattabbattā aññāya upamāyapi visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imāya upamāyapi hetupaccayānaṃ viseso vijānitabboti adhippāyo.
对于种子、嫩芽等外在事物来说,作为资具的因缘有什么差别,阿阇梨已经分别解说了,我们也已经知道。因为有人会问“那么内在事物中又是怎样分别解说的呢”,所以说了“这确实就是轮回”等话。或者也可以说:因为有人会说“外在事物中作为资具的因缘已经讲通了,内在事物中又怎么讲得通呢”,所以说了“这确实就是轮回”等话。不过注疏里说:“这样显示了外在的因缘分别之后,现在为了显示内在的,所以说了‘这确实就是轮回’等话。”轮回是与因和缘一起存在的,所以是有因有缘的。这个轮回既然是由因缘所生起的,那么应当看出,在内在事物中,作为资具的因缘同样也是讲得通的。这就是这段话的意旨。巴利
Bījaṅkurādīsu bāhiresu parikkhārabhūtānaṃ hetupaccayānaṃ viseso ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ ajjhattikesu vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ayañhi saṃsāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘bāhiresu parikkhārabhūto hetupaccayo yutto hotu, kathaṃ ajjhattikesu yutto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayañhi saṃsāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ bāhiraṃ hetupaccayavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni ajjhattikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘ayañhi saṃsāro’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) vuttaṃ. Hetupaccayehi saha saṃsāro bhavatīti sahetupaccayo. Ayaṃ saṃsāro hi yasmā sahetupaccayo hutvā nibbatto, tasmā ajjhattikepi parikkhārabhūto hetupaccayo yuttoyevāti daṭṭhabboti adhippāyo.
如果世尊说过,这个轮回是有因有缘的,那么我们就应当相信。因为有人会问“要怎么相信”,所以说了“正因为如此”等话。“如此”的意思是:由无明等这些因和缘,整个缘起就是轮回的产生——世尊以此说明了轮回是有因有缘的,因此应当相信。无明等是行等的缘。因为有人会问“什么是无明的因”,所以说了“无明就是无明的因”。因为有人会问“什么是无明的缘”,所以说了“不恰当作意是缘”。因为有人会问“什么是无明?什么是那个无明的因”,所以说了“前面的无明是后面无明的因”。因为有人会问“什么是前面的无明?什么是后面的无明”,所以说了“其中”等话。因为有人会问“作为无明现起之因的前面的无明随眠,仅仅是无间因,还是也可以作为辗转因”,所以说了“就像种子和芽”等话。“种子和芽”就是种子的芽。就像芽是依种子的无间因性而生起的。比如在树木等当中生起某种果实,对于那棵树等当中生起的那个果实来说,这颗种子则是以辗转因的方式成为因。巴利
So imassa saṃsārassa sahetupaccayattaṃ yadi bhagavatā vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati amhehi saddahitabbaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evanti iminā avijjādinā hetupaccayena sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo saṃsāroti nibbattoti bhagavatā saṃsārassa sahetupaccayattaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā saddahitabbaṃ. Avijjādayo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayo hotu, ‘‘katamo avijjāya hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti avijjā avijjāya hetū’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamo avijjāya paccayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ayoniso manasikāro paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamā avijjā katamāya avijjāya hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘purimikā avijjā pacchimikāya avijjāya hetū’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamā purimikā avijjā katamā pacchimikā avijjā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa hetubhūto purimo avijjānusayo samanantarova kiṃ, udāhu paramparahetupi hotī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘bījaṅkuro viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bījaṅkuroti bījānaṃ aṅkuroti bījaṅkuro, bījānaṃ samanantarahetutāya aṅkuro nibbattati viya. Yattha rukkhādike yaṃ phalaṃ nibbattati, tasmiṃ rukkhādike nibbattassa assa phalassa idaṃ bījaṃ pana paramparahetutāya hetubhūtaṃ bhavati.
如果有人问:种子只有一个,为什么说成两种呢?因为需要这样说明,所以接着说了“确实有两种”等等。意思是:按无间时和相续时的区别,因也确实有两种。就像作为种子的因有两种一样,作为无明之因的无明随眠,按时间的区别也有两种:无间因和相续因。无间的无明随眠,是无间生起的无明缠缚的无间因;较早的无明随眠,是较后生起的无明缠缚的相续因。这样,正如作为种子的不共因,与地、水等共同的缘,二者的区别很清楚;同样应当看到,无明随眠是不共因,非理作意是共缘,这就是它们的区别。巴利
‘‘Bījaṃ pana ekaṃyeva hoti, kathaṃ dvidhā vattabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘duvidho hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, samanantarakālaparamparakālabhedena hetupi duvidho hotiyevāti attho. Bījabhūto hetu duvidho yathā, evaṃ avijjāya hetubhūto avijjānusayopi samanantarahetu ca paramparahetu cāti kālabhedena duvidho bhavati, samanantaro avijjānusayo samanantarassa avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa samanantarahetu hoti. Purimataro avijjānusayo pacchimatarassa avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa paramparahetu hoti. Iti bījabhūto asādhāraṇo hetu, pathavīāpādiko sādhāraṇo paccayoti viseso pākaṭo yathā, evaṃ avijjānusayo asādhāraṇo hetu, ayonisomanasikāro sādhāraṇo paccayoti viseso daṭṭhabbo.
有人会说:只凭这一点,就该说明因和缘的差别。因为需要这样说明,所以接着说了“又如灯盏等”这一段。不过,注疏里说:“‘又如’等话,也是在显示因和缘的差别。”
在这里应当这样理解:灯盏、灯芯和油虽然是灯的缘,但它们并不是灯的自性因或同类因。有人会问:“为什么应当相信,作为灯之缘的灯盏等不是自性因呢?”因为需要这样说明,所以说了“因为不能”等话。也就是说,没有火、离开火的灯盏、灯芯和油,根本不可能让灯点亮、燃烧。因此,就像前一盏灯可以成为后一盏灯的自性因那样,灯盏等则不是自性因。
这样一来,同类性质的东西可以作为因,异类性质的东西则只能作为缘;内在的同类性质可以作为因,外在的异类性质则只能作为缘。能生的无明随眠是无明缠缚的因,而执取、支撑它的则是缘。与某些特定果不共的,是因;与一切果都共通的,是缘。这样联系起来看,即使在灯的比喻里,因和缘的差别也应当能清楚地看出来,这就是这里的意旨。巴利
‘‘Ettakeneva hetupaccayānaṃ viseso vattabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā vā pana thālakañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘yathā vā panātiādināpi hetupaccayavibhāgameva dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha padīpassa paccayabhūtaṃ thālakañca vaṭṭi ca telañca padīpassa sabhāvahetu samānahetu na hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Padīpassa paccayabhūtampi thālakādikaṃ sabhāvahetu na hotīti kasmā saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘na hi sakkā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Padīpassa paccayabhūtaṃ anaggikaṃ aggirahitaṃ thālakañca vaṭṭiñca telañca dīpetuṃ jāletuṃ hi yasmā na sakkā, tasmā purimo padīpo pacchimassa padīpassa sabhāvahetu hoti viya, evaṃ thālakādikaṃ sabhāvahetu na hoti. Iti evaṃpakāro sabhāvo samāno padīpo hetu hoti yathā, parabhāvo asamāno thālakādiko paccayo hoti yathā ca, tathā ajjhattiko sabhāvo hetu hoti, bāhiro asamāno paccayo hoti. Janako avijjānusayo avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa hetu hoti, pariggāhako upatthambhako paccayo hoti. Aññehi phalehi asādhāraṇo hetu hoti, sabbehi phalehi sādhāraṇo paccayo hotīti yojetvā padīpopamāyapi hetupaccayānaṃ pākaṭo viseso daṭṭhabboti adhippāyo.
导师把因缘的类别、因和资具这样区分来说,而这个因的因性是要看果才成立的。因此,为了说明“因性是以什么方式存在的,什么是因性,什么是方式”“什么果是以什么差别存在的,什么是果,什么是差别”“因和果之间有什么关联”这些问题,才说了“不断义”等。在注疏中,这个衔接义是这样说的:“现在因为被称为‘资具’,而因性要看果才成立,所以为了说明因的因性如何、如何存在,什么是果,什么是果的差别,什么是因果的关联,才说了‘不断义’等。”应当这样理解。巴利
Hetupaccayappabhedaṃ kāraṇaṃ parikkhāroti ācariyena vuttaṃ, tassa kāraṇassa kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkho hoti, tasmā ‘‘yo kāraṇabhāvo yenākārena hoti, katamo so kāraṇabhāvo, katamo so ākāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ca ‘‘yaṃ phalaṃ yena visesena hoti, katamaṃ taṃ phalaṃ, katamo so viseso’’ti pucchitabbattā ca ‘‘kāraṇaphalānaṃ yo sambandho hoti, katamo so sambandho’’ti pucchitabbattā ca taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘avupacchedattho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayamanusandhyattho ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘idāni yasmā kāraṇaṃ ‘parikkhāro’ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāya, tasmā kāraṇassa yo kāraṇabhāvo yathā ca so hoti, yañca phalaṃ, yo ca tassa viseso, yo ca kāraṇaphalānaṃ sambandho, taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘avupacchedattho’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) iminā vuttoti daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,对于被称为因缘的、未曾中断的因,它那种不中断的意义,就是相续的意义,因为它与果相关联。而且,那个因在成为自己果的生起者和支持者之后才灭去,它就被叫作未中断的。如果某个果在成为另一个果的因之后才灭去,在这个未中断的情况下,它也有相续的意义。但是,如果某个果没有成为另一个果的因就灭去了,那它就是被中断的,就像阿罗汉的死心那样。由因所生的果,它那种已生起的意义,就是果的意义。结生诸蕴的结生意义、结生作用,就是再有、再生起的意思。烦恼的障碍意义、在相续中生起的意义,就是缠缚的意思。烦恼没有被道彻底断除的意义,就是随眠的意思。无明对四圣谛没有通达的意义,就是无明的意思。没有被阿罗汉道完全了知的意义,就是识、结生识的种子意思。巴利
Tattha avupacchinnassa hetupaccayasaṅkhātassa kāraṇassa yo anupacchedattho atthi, so anupacchedattho santatiattho hoti phalena sambandhattā , yañca kāraṇaṃ attano phalassa janakaṃ upatthambhakaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, so anupacchinno eva nāma hotīti. Yañca phalaṃ aññassa kāraṇaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, tasmiṃ anupacchinne tassa ca santatiattho hoti. Yaṃ pana phalaṃ aññassa phalassa kāraṇaṃ ahutvā nirujjhati, taṃ upacchinnaṃ hoti, yathā taṃ arahato cuticittanti. Kāraṇato nibbattassa phalassa yo nibbattiattho atthi, so nibbattiattho phalattho hoti. Paṭisandhikkhandhānaṃ yo paṭisandhiattho paṭisandahanattho atthi, so paṭisandhiattho punabbhavattho punabbhavanattho hoti. Kilesānaṃ yo palibodhattho santāne uppajjanattho atthi, so palibodhattho pariyuṭṭhānattho hoti. Kilesānaṃ maggena yo asamugghātattho atthi, so asamugghātattho anusayattho hoti. Avijjāya catunnaṃ saccānaṃ yo asampaṭivedhattho atthi, so asampaṭivedhattho avijjattho hoti. Arahattamaggena yo apariññātattho atthi, so apariññātattho viññāṇassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa bījattho hoti.
到这里,导师已经分别说明了因的状态、因的作用、果以及果的差别,我们也已经了解了。因为有人会问:“什么是辗转因缘义?什么是关联义?”所以说了“在哪里没有中断”等这些话。在哪里、在哪种色与非色的生起中,对于没有中断的、被称为因缘差别的因,如果有无中断,那么这种无中断在那里、在那种色与非色的生起中就是相续。在哪里、在哪种色与非色的生起中有相续,那种相续在那里、在那种色与非色的生起中就是生起。这样连接起来之后,就应当知道辗转因等。巴利
Ettāvatā kāraṇabhāvo ca kāraṇākāro ca phalañca phalaviseso ca ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamo paramparahetupaccayattho, katamo ca sambandhattho’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yattha avupacchedo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yattha yassaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ avupacchinnassa hetupaccayappabhedassa kāraṇassa yo avupacchedo atthi, so avupacchedo tattha tissaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ santati hoti. Yattha yassaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ yā santati atthi, sā santatitattha rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ nibbatti hotītiādinā yojetvā paramparahetuādiko viññātabbo.
戒蕴,就是清净的戒蕴。定蕴,就是广大蕴,因为广大法是以定为立足处的。慧蕴,就是以道果慧为主的蕴。它确实是被称为解脱智见的省察智蕴的缘。知异方等义,在《足处义摄分别释》中已经说过了。巴利
Sīlakkhandhoti parisuddhasīlakkhandho. Samādhikkhandhassāti mahaggatakkhandhassa, samādhipaṭṭhāno hi mahaggatadhammo. Paññākkhandhoti maggaphalapaññāpadhānakkhandho. So hi vimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇakkhandhassa paccayo hoti. Titthaññutādīnaṃ attho padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttova.
导师说“自性就是因”,因为有人会问“那自性是什么样的因”,所以接着说了“又如依眼等”这一段。眼识是依眼和眼根为依靠、以色为所缘而生起的。在这里,眼等当中,眼根通过增上缘和根缘的方式,成为眼识的缘;色所缘通过前生所缘缘的方式,成为缘;光明通过依止缘和亲依止缘的方式,成为缘。这些虽然是缘,但和果——眼识——不同类,所以不是自性因,只是缘;作意也是这样。但唯作意界和果眼识同属识性,是同类,所以是自性因。同样,诸行和识同属名蕴性,当它们成为识的缘时,就是自性因。识和名色属于同一相续,是同类,当它成为名色的缘时,就是自性因。按照这个道理,“名色缘六处”等也应该这样理解。像上面所说的因——能生的缘、支持的缘,以及任何一种亲依止和强缘,这一切因缘,因为对所生、所支持之果有资助和造作的作用,所以从究竟意义上说,就叫做资具。巴利
Sabhāvo hetūti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘kīdiso so sabhāvo hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā vā pana cakkhuñca paṭiccā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ cakkhuñca cakkhundriyañca paṭicca nissayaṃ katvā rūpe paṭicca ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati. Tattha cakkhādīsu cakkhundriyaṃ ādhipateyyapaccayatāya indriyapaccayatāya cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo, rūpārammaṇaṃ purejātārammaṇapaccayatāya paccayo, āloko sannissayatāya upanissayatāya paccayo hoti. So paccayo honto phalena cakkhuviññāṇena asamānattā sabhāvo hetu na hoti, paccayo ca hoti manasikāro. Kiriyamanodhātu pana phalena cakkhuviññāṇena viññāṇabhāvena samānattā sabhāvo hetu hoti yathā, evaṃ saṅkhārā nāmakkhandhabhāvena samānattā viññāṇassa paccayā hontā sabhāvo hetu honti. Viññāṇaṃ nāmarūpena ekasantativasena samānattā nāmarūpassa paccayo hontaṃ sabhāvo hetu hoti. Iminā nayena ‘‘nāmarūpaṃ saḷāyatanassā’’tiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ vuttappakāro hetu, paccayo janako, upatthambhako ca yo koci upanissayo balavapaccayo hoti, sabbo so hetupaccayo janakaupatthambhako janitabbupatthambhiyassa phalassa parikkharaṇato abhisaṅkharaṇato nippariyāyato parikkhāro nāma.
“所说的这种因缘就是资具”,我们凭什么要相信这句话呢?因为应当这样追问,所以接着说了“因此”等等。正是由于这个原因——一切因缘都具有资具的性质——具寿马哈咖咤那说出了“诸法生起彼法”这句话,就应当依据这句话来相信。意思是:你们应当依据“诸法生起彼法”这句话来审察。巴利
‘‘Vuttappakāro hetupaccayo parikkhāro nāmāti kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena kāraṇabhūtena sabbassa hetupaccayassa parikkhārabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena saddahitabbo, ‘‘ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī’’ti vacanaṃ nissāya tumhehi sallakkhetabboti adhippāyo.
因为要说明“应当结合的就只有这么多资具理趣”,所以说了“已结合的资具理趣”。凡是应当结合的资具理趣,都要把那种资具理趣提取出来,结合之后再加以运用。巴利
‘‘Ettakova parikkhāro hāro yuñjitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto parikkhāro hāro’’ti vuttaṃ, yo yo parikkhāro hāro yuñjitabbo, so so parikkhāro hāro nīharitvā yutto yuñjitabboti.
智者应当依据注疏和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分析开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
16. 增益摄持分门的详细阐释巴利
16. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
50 以各种属于特殊解释的资具取舍分别,解析了诸经义的因缘,这个……分别就圆满了。因为应当问“什么是增益取舍分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是增益的取舍”等。其中,在所说的十六种宣说取舍等当中,哪一种特殊解释是增益取舍分别,也就是名为增益取舍分别的?针对“诸法以彼为根”等指示,现在由我宣说的“在一处所中,有多少处所进入”等广说的特殊解释,就叫作增益取舍分别。巴利
50. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena parikkhārahāravibhaṅgena suttatthānaṃ hetupaccayo vibhatto, so…pe… vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo samāropanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo samāropano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropano hāro samāropanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otarantī’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropanahāravibhaṅgo nāma.
因为有人问“经里说到多少个依据处时,应该把多少个依据处加进教说里”,所以说了“在一个依据处”等等。当经里说到一个依据处时,那些没有说到的依据处,凡是能进入、能汇合进来的,全都要像经里已经说到的依据处那样,以简择的方式引出来,加进教说里。因为有人会说“应该像什么那样加进去呢”,所以说了“像在回转中那样”等等。在“回转”这一理趣中,当经里说到一个依据处时,有许多经里没说的依据处会进入;就像那些众多的依据处需要被寻找出来一样,同样地,在“增益”这一理趣中,也要把众多的依据处加进教说里——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Kittake padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte kittakāni padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte sati avuttāni yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otaranti samosaranti, sabbāni tāni avuttāni padaṭṭhānāni sutte vuttāni viya niddhāraṇavasena ānetvā desanāya āropayitabbāni. ‘‘Kāni viya samāropayitabbānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā āvaṭṭe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āvaṭṭe hāre ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte sati sutte avuttāni bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni otaranti, tāni bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni pariyesitabbāni yathā, evaṃ samāropane hārepi bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni desanāya samāropayitabbānīti attho.
既然要问“增益是不是只按处所来作,还是也可以按其他方式来作”,那就说明也可以按其他方式来作;因此,为了显示增益应当有四种,就说“其中,增益有四种”等。其中,在那些应当增益的增益中,处所是处所增益,同义词是同义词增益,修习是修习增益,断除是断除增益,按这样的分类,增益应当有四种。巴利
‘‘Kevalaṃ pana padaṭṭhānavaseneva samāropanā kātabbā kiṃ, udāhu aññavasenāpi samāropanā kātabbā ki’’nti vattabbattā aññavasenāpi samāropanā kātabbā; tasmā samāropanā catubbidhā kātabbāti dassento ‘‘tattha samāropanā catubbidhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tāsu samāropayitabbasamāropanāsu padaṭṭhānaṃ padaṭṭhānasamāropanā, vevacanaṃ vevacanasamāropanā, bhāvanā bhāvanāsamāropanā, pahānaṃ pahānasamāropanā, iti iminā pabhedena samāropanā catubbidhā kātabbā.
在这四种增益当中,应当问“什么是处所增益”,所以这样问了之后,为了说明处所增益,就说“其中,什么是……”等等。这里问的是:用经中已说的处所,去增益经中未说的处所,这算什么?巴利
‘‘Tāsu catubbidhāsu samāropanāsu katamā padaṭṭhānasamāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā padaṭṭhānasamāropanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthakatamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sutte vuttena padaṭṭhānena sutte avuttānaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā katamāti pucchati.
对于一切恶和不善的不造作,如果存在一种以不造作为因的教法,那么这种教法就是诸佛的教法、是诸佛的教诫;或者,不造作——为了不造作而存在的教法,这种就是诸佛的教法、是诸佛的教诫,而不是其他任何人的教法,这就是这里的意思。因为“不造作”这个词在这里是作为目的格来用的主格,就像“为了什么目的、有什么用处”那样。对于善的成就,为了成就而存在的教法,这就是诸佛的教法。对于自心的清净,为了自心清净而存在的教法,这就是诸佛的教法。巴利
Sabbapāpassa akusalassa yaṃ akaraṇaṃ akaraṇahetu sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ sāsanaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo hoti, atha vā akaraṇaṃ akaraṇatthāya yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo hoti, na yassa kassaci sāsananti attho. Akaraṇanti hi sampadānatthe pavattaṃ paccattavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘kissa atthāya kimattha’’nti. Kusalassa sampadā sampadāya yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ. Sacittapariyodāpanaṃ sacittapariyodāpanatthaṃ yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ hoti.
就这样,对于以这种方式说出的那个教法,什么是它的立足处?于是又追问更具体的立足处。应当知道,这三种善行就是教法、教诫的立足处,因为以三种善行为因,才成为教法,就像说“靠食物而住”等等那样。由于要问“当三种善行作为立足处说了之后,应当把什么立足处安立上去”,所以说了“其中,凡是身体的”等等。应当把这三种蕴安立为教法的立足处。由于要问“当三种蕴作为立足处安立之后,应当把什么安立上去”,所以说了“其中,戒蕴”等等。应当把这止与观两者安立为教法的立足处。由于要问“当止与观两者作为立足处安立之后,应当把什么立足处安立上去”,所以说了“其中,止的果”等等。应当把这两种果安立为教法的立足处。巴利
Iti evaṃpakārena vuttassa tassa sāsanassa kiṃ padaṭṭhānanti visesassa visesapadaṭṭhānaṃ puna pucchati. Idaṃ sucaritattayaṃ sāsanassa ovādassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sucaritattayena hetunā sāsanattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādi. ‘‘Sucaritattaye padaṭṭhāne vutte katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yaṃ kāyikañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ khandhattayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ, ‘‘khandhattaye padaṭṭhāne samāropayite katamaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha sīlakkhandho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ samathavipassanādvayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. ‘‘Samathavipassanādvaye padaṭṭhāne samāropayite katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha samathassa phala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ phaladvayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ.
教法的近因应当被安立。这些近因已由阿阇梨确定并分别解说,我们也已经了知。因为接着要问“现在,哪一个近因应当安立在哪一个上面”,所以说了“林与林丛”等语。这五种欲乐功德就是“林”,应当安立为渴爱所成的“林丛”的近因,因为它们是渴爱的依托之处。这个以“女人”或“男人”等相为所取的“林”,应当安立为以执取“啊,眼!啊,耳!啊,鼻!啊,舌!啊,身!”这些各各肢体的随好为所取的“林丛”的近因。这未遍知的、被称为十二处的“林”,应当安立为被称为结缚的“林丛”的近因,因为结缚是依处而生起的。这被称为随眠的“林”,应当安立为被称为缠缚的“林丛”的近因。因为接着要说“五欲乐功德等为什么是林、渴爱等为什么是林丛,我们凭什么相信”,所以说了“因此世尊说”等语。也就是说,由于五欲乐功德等是林、渴爱等是林丛,世尊所说的“断除林与林丛”这句话,应当依据世尊的这话语、随顺这话语来信受。Ayanti:这是对“在一个近因上”等语的注释。Padaṭṭhānenāti:即每一个近因。Samāropanāti:即把其他近因安立上去。Samāropenti:以这注释来安立那些应当安立的,所以叫samāropanā,这是词义分解。巴利
Sāsanassa padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbānīti ācariyena niddhāretvā vibhattāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, ‘‘idāni katamassa katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘vanaṃ vanathassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ kāmaguṇapañcakaṃ vanaṃ taṇhābhūtassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ taṇhāvatthubhāvato, ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā nimittaggāhasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ ‘‘aho cakkhu, aho sotaṃ, aho ghānaṃ, aho jivhā, aho kāyo’’ti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ anubyañjanaggāhasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. Apariññātaṃ dvādasāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ saṃyojanasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ, āyatanaṃ paṭicca saṃyojanuppajjanato anusayasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pañcakāmaguṇādīnaṃ vanabhāvo ca taṇhādīnaṃ vanathabhāvo ca kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena pañcakāmaguṇādīnaṃ vanabhāvena ca taṇhādīnaṃ vanathabhāvena ca bhagavā ‘‘chetvā vanañca vanathañcā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena bhagavato vacanena vacanānusārena saddahitabboti. Ayanti ayaṃ ‘‘ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne’’tiādisaṃvaṇṇanā. Padaṭṭhānenāti ekekena padaṭṭhānena. Samāropanāti tadaññapadaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā . Samāropenti samāropayitabbāni etāya saṃvaṇṇanāyāti samāropanāti viggahoti. (1)
51 51. 以近因为依据的安立,阿阇梨已经指出,我们也已经了解。因为需要问“以同义词进行的安立是哪一个”,所以说了“tattha katamā vevacanenā”等话。其中,在这四种近因安立等当中,问的是:以同义词的方式,把一一同义词安立到其他同义词上,那是什么样的安立?“rāgavirāg┓cetovimuttsekkhaphala”这三个词,因为是不来果的含义,所以是不来果的同义词。“avijjāvirāg┓paññāvimuttasekkhaphala”这三个词,因为是阿罗汉果的含义,所以是阿罗汉果的同义词。按照这个方法,在其余各处也应这样套用。巴利
51. Padaṭṭhānena samāropanā ācariyena niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā vevacanena samāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā vevacanenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu samāropanāsu vevacanena ekekena rotadaññavevacanānaṃ samāropanā katamāti pucchati. ‘‘Rāgavirāgā’’ti ca ‘‘cetovimuttī’’ti ca ‘‘sekkhaphala’’nti ca idaṃ vacanattayaṃ anāgāmiphalatthattā anāgāmiphalassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Avijjāvirāgā’’ti ca ‘‘paññāvimuttī’’ti ca ‘‘asekkhaphala’’nti ca idaṃ vacanattayaṃ arahattaphalatthattā arahattaphalassa vevacanaṃ. Iminā nayena sesesu yojanā kātabbā. (2)
以异名所作的安立,导师已经指出,我们也已经了解。因为应当问“以修习所作的安立是什么”,所以说了“tattha katamā bhāvanāyā”等话。其中“tattha”的意思是:在那四种立足点安立等当中,问的是以哪一种已教导的修习,对哪些未教导的修习,作怎样的安立。意思是:就像世尊以某种方式说“因此,比丘,于身随观身而住,热诚、正知、具念,调伏世间的贪忧”那样宣说了某种修习,同样地,也应当以那种方式,通过那种修习,把其他修习也如此安立。巴利
Vevacanena samāropanā ācariyena niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā bhāvanāya samāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā bhāvanāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu katamāya desitāya bhāvanāya katamesānaṃ adesitānaṃ bhāvanāropanā katamāti pucchati. Yathā yena pakārena yaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhagavā ‘‘tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.369, 371, 395, 415) āha, tathā tena pakārena tāya bhāvanāya tadaññabhāvanāpi samāropayitabbāti attho.
在“tasmātiha”等这一段里,因为有人会问“世尊说的是哪种修习”,所以接着说了“ātāpī”等话。用“ātāpī”这个词,世尊说的是精进根;用“sampajāno”这个词,说的是慧根;用“satimā”这个词,说的是念根;用“vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ”这句话,说的是定根。因为有人会问“这样说之后,应当把哪种修习安立起来”,所以说了“evaṃ kāye kāyānupassino viharato cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī”。意思是:按照上面所说的精进根等修习,应当把四念处安立起来。有人问:凭什么说它们达到修习圆满?回答:因为这四根具有根的作用,或者具有应当被修习的性质,同一种特征,所以说达到修习圆满。因为有人会问“把它们安立起来之后,又应当安立哪些”,所以说了“catūsū”等话。意思是:当四念处正在被修习、应当被安立时,四正勤就达到修习圆满,所以应当把它们安立起来。其余各处也应当这样安立。巴利
‘‘Tasmātihā’’tiādipāṭhe ‘‘kiṃ bhāvanaṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’ti vacanena vīriyindriyaṃ bhagavā āha. ‘‘Sampajāno’’ti vacanena paññindriyaṃ bhagavā āha. ‘‘Satimā’’ti vacanena satindriyaṃ āha. ‘‘Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti vacanena samādhindriyaṃ āha. ‘‘Evaṃ vutte katamā bhāvanā samāropayitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘evaṃ kāye kāyānupassino viharato cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttāya vīriyindriyādibhāvanāya cattāro satipaṭṭhānā samāropayitabbāti attho. Kena kāraṇena bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti pucchati. Catunnaṃ indriyānaṃ indriyabhāvena, bhāvetabbabhāvena vā ekalakkhaṇattā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti vissajjeti. ‘‘Tesu samāropitesu katame samāropayitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘catūsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu samāropayitabbesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti samāropayitabbāti attho. Sesesupi evameva samāropayitabbā.
修习的安立,导师已经分别说明了,我们也已经知道。因为有人应当问“以断除所作的安立是什么”,所以说了“tattha katamā”等话。其中“tattha”的意思是:在那四种立足点安立等当中,以哪一种已教导的断除,对哪些未教导的断除,作怎样的安立?这样提问。以“于身随观身而住时,舍断于不净中‘净’的颠倒”这一已教导的、舍断“净”颠倒的断除,也应当安立对段食遍知而应断的障碍烦恼、欲取之断除等。巴利
Bhāvanāya samāropanā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā pahānena samāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu katamena desitena pahānena katamesaṃ adesitānaṃ pahānānaṃ katamā samāropanāti pucchati. ‘‘Kāye kāyānupassī viharanto asubhe ‘subha’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāsappahānena kabaḷīkārāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesakāmupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.
在诸受中随观受而住时,对于苦断除“乐”的颠倒——按照这一教导,通过断除“乐”的颠倒,也应当安立对触食的遍知、障碍烦恼和有取的断除等义。巴利
‘‘Vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharanto dukkhe ‘sukha’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāsappahānena phassāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesabhavupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.
按照“于心随观心而住时,于无常断除‘常’的颠倒”这一教导,通过断除“常”的颠倒来了知识食的遍知,也应一并安立断除障碍烦恼、见取等义。巴利
‘‘Citte cittānupassī viharanto anicce ‘nicca’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāsappahānena viññāṇāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesadiṭṭhupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.
依“于诸法中随观法而住时,在无我中舍断‘我’的颠倒”这一教导,通过舍断“我”的颠倒,也应一并提出:对意思食的遍知、障碍它的烦恼、我语取的舍断等含义——这就是本段的意趣。巴利
‘‘Dhammesudhammānupassī viharanto anattani ‘attā’ti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsappahānena manosañcetanāhārapariññāya? Manosañcetanāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesaattavādupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbāti adhippāyo. (4)
至于“断除理”,在《相理分别》的注释里已经讲过了,所以这里不再说。巴利
Pahānahāro pana lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyevāti idha na vadāma.
既然要这样问:“对于经中已教导的每一个词项等,那些未教导的词项等是以什么方式归摄的,我们怎么知道、怎么相信呢?”所以他说了“因此,尊者……”等话。通过这样的归摄方式,具寿马哈咖咤那——巴利
‘‘Sutte desitena ekekena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitānaṃ padaṭṭhānādīnaṃ samāropanabhāvo kena amhehi vijānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha āyasmā’’tiādimāha. Tena tathā samāropanabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno –
“那些以何为根的法,以及牟尼宣说为同一义的法;”
它们应当被善为确立,这就是归摄的理趣——如此。巴利
‘‘Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā, ye cekatthā pakāsitā muninā; Te samāropayitabbā, esa samāropano hāro’’ti –
他说了这番话,你们就应当通过这番话、顺着这番话的脉络,去了知并相信这样的归摄方式——这就是这段话所要表达的意思。巴利
Yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vacanānusārena tathā samāropanabhāvo tumhehi vijānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
有人会问:仅仅做到这些,归摄这一理趣就算圆满了吗?难道没有别的应用了吗?因为需要这样说明,所以就说“已应用的归摄理趣”。按照经中所教导的方式,比如以根据等,应当把未经教导的根据等归摄起来;用这样那样的根据等,对未经教导的根据等作归摄,这就是归摄理趣的应用——应当确定并运用它,这个意思要理解。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ pana ettāvatā samāropano hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto samāropano hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Sutte desitena nayena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitāni padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbāni bhavanti, tena tena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitānaṃ padaṭṭhānādīnaṃ samāropano hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yuñjitabboti attho daṭṭhabbo.
就这样,在归摄门的分别中,按照众生的力量与能力而作。巴利
Iti samāropanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā
有智慧的人应当依据义注和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分别开来理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabbo.
上面说的这十六种分别殊胜,因为能去除和遣除在对所应分别之义上的无知与疑惑,所以称为“摄”。巴利
Ime yathāvuttā soḷasa saṃvaṇṇanāvisesā saṃvaṇṇetabbatthesu aññāṇasaṃsayānaṃ haraṇato apanayanato hārā nāmāti.
教示摄相应合的阐明巴利
1. Desanāhārasampātavibhāvanā
52 凡是那种属于解说殊胜的教示摄分别等摄分别,它把味等种种经义分别开显出来,这个属于解说殊胜的教示摄分别等摄分别就圆满了。巴利
52. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhāravibhaṅgādihāravibhaṅgena assādādayo nānāsuttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhāravibhaṅgādihāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo.
先以十六种摄义,从观察方向的角度看清了方向之后,
用钩子简要地通过三种理趣来指示经。巴利
‘‘Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā; Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta’’nti. (netti. 4 nayasaṅkhepa) –
偈颂是论师在〈指示分〉里说的。对这首偈颂的解释,在〈摄分别分〉的开头并没有加以分别。因为应当问:“是在某处已经分别了呢?还是在〈摄会合〉里已经分别了呢?或者是在〈理趣起源摄〉里已经分别了呢?”为了让你们明白“应当看作是在〈摄会合〉里已经分别了”,所以说了“先以十六摄”等话。巴利
Gāthā niddesavāre ācariyena vuttā, tassā gāthāya niddeso hāravibhaṅgavārassa ādimhi na vibhatto, ‘‘kuhiñci vibhatto, hārasampāte vā vibhatto kiṃ, udāhu nayasamuṭṭhānahāre vā vibhatto ki’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘hārasampāte vibhatto’’ti tumhehi daṭṭhabboti viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
或者,就像在精心整治过的土地上,对种种应当分别讲解的经文片段,以分别讲解的方式运用十六种摄,如同用各种颜色、香气、花朵来装饰一样,导师把十六种摄分别开来。同样,就像在技艺娴熟的导师仔细琢磨过的阎浮金饰品上,对种种应当分别讲解的经文片段,以分别讲解的方式运用十六种摄,如同用种种光网和各种宝珠来装饰一样,导师把十六种摄分别开来。又像把大地翻过来,让人去吃生米屑,那是极难做到的;在种种应当分别讲解的经文片段中,用十六种摄让人领会胜义的精华,就像极难让人吃下去一样,导师这样做了。又像挤压由旬大的蜜团,让人喝到极甜的味道,那是极难做到的;在种种应当分别讲解的经文片段中,用十六种摄让人领会胜义的甘甜,就像极难让人喝下去一样,导师这样做了。导师在众多应当分别讲解的经文片段中,以分别讲解的方式运用十六种摄,把十六种摄分别开来,我们也已经知道了。因为有人会问:“是在种种经文片段中以分别讲解的方式运用后,把十六种摄分别开来的呢?还是在单独一个应当分别讲解的经文片段中,以分别讲解的方式运用后,把十六种摄分别开来的呢?”为了说明“正是在单独一个应当分别讲解的经文片段中,以分别讲解的方式运用后,把十六种摄分别开来的”,导师就这样分别解说,说出了“十六种摄,第一”等开头的摄会合品。巴利
Atha vā suparikammakatabhūmisadisesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu nānāsuttappadesesu nānāvaṇṇasugandhapupphasadise soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā ācariyena vibhattā, tathā susikkhitasippācariyasuvicāritajambunadābharaṇasadisesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu nānāsuttappadesesu nānāvidharaṃsijālavividhamaṇiratanasadise soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvāva soḷasa hārā vibhattā, mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojassa khādāpanaṃ atidukkaraṃ viya, nānāvidhesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttappadesesu paramatthojāya soḷasahi hārehi atidukkarakhādāpanasadisaṃ viññāpanaṃ karontena ca yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasassa pāyāpanaṃ atidukkaraṃ viya nānāvidhesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttappadesesu paramatthamadhurasassa soḷasahi hārehi atidukkaraṃ pāyāpanasadisaṃ viññāpanaṃ karontena ca ācariyena anekesu saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadesesu soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘nānāvidhasuttappadesesu te saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā kiṃ , udāhu ekasmimpi saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadese saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā ki’’nti vattabbattā ekasmimpi saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadese saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattāyevāti tathā vibhajanto ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādikaṃ hārasampātavāraṃ āha.
有人问:想要讲说“摄会合分”的导师,难道不该先说“其中,什么是教示摄会合”这样的话吗?那为什么却先说“先以十六摄”等等呢?回答是:在指示分中已经说过,“先以十六摄”等开头的偈颂,摄分别分并不使用它,因为它的所缘分散,而且理趣的考察也被隔开了。但摄会合分则使用这首偈颂,因为它的所缘不分散。因此,为了让人知道应当回溯这首偈颂、在摄会合分中见到对它的指示,就必定要这样说“先以十六摄”等等。然而,在注疏中——巴利
Nanu hārasampātavāraṃ kathetukāmena ācariyena ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto’’tiādivacanaṃ vattabbaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādi vattabbanti ce? Niddese vuttaṃ ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādikaṃ gāthaṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti vippakiṇṇavisayattā ca nayavicārassa ca antaritattā. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ gāthaṃ payojeti avikiṇṇavisayattā. Tasmā taṃ gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā hārasampātavāre tassā gāthāya niddeso daṭṭhabboti viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādi vattabbaṃyevāti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
就像在一整平好的地面上撒下各种颜色的落花,就像把种种光芒闪耀的宝珠镶嵌在技艺精湛的工匠精心打造的金饰上,就像把大地翻转过来让人吃生米碎,就像把一由旬大的蜜团压榨出来让人喝那极甜的味道——具寿马哈咖咤那在种种经文段落中举例,把十六种摄分别说明之后,现在要把它们归到同一部经里来展示,于是开始了摄会合分。开始的时候,在义释分中——巴利
Evaṃ suparikammakatāya bhūmiyā nānāvaṇṇāni muttapupphāni pakiranto viya, susikkhitasippācariyavicāritesu surattasuvaṇṇālaṅkāresu nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalāni vividhāni maṇiratanāni bandhanto viya, mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ khādāpento viya , yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasaṃ pāyento viya ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nānāsuttappadese udāharanto soḷasa hāre vibhajitvā idāni te ekasmiṃyeva sutte yojetvā dassento hārasampātavāraṃ ārabhi. Ārabhanto ca yāyaṃ niddesavāre –
先以十六种摄义,从观察方向的角度看清了方向之后,
用钩子简要地,以三种理趣来说明经典。巴利
‘‘Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā; Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta’’nti. –
偈颂已经说了。因为“摄分别分”并不使用它,它所涉及的范围太分散,而且对理趣的考察中间有间断。所谓“摄分别分”,确实只是通过许多经文片段来显示诸摄的分别;而“摄会合分”则使用它,因为它在同一个经文片段里就结合了十六摄,紧接着就讲述了理趣的生起。因此,回顾“先以十六摄”这句偈颂之后,接着问:“这句偈颂的详细解释应该在哪里见到?回答说:在摄会合中见。”巴利
Gāthā vuttā. Yasmā taṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti vippakiṇṇavisayattā, nayavicārassa ca antaritattā. Anekehi suttappadesehi hārānaṃ vibhāgadassanameva hi hāravibhaṅgavāro. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojeti ekasmiṃyeva suttappadese soḷasa hāre yojetvāva tadanantaraṃ nayasamuṭṭhānassa kathitattā. Tasmā ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’nti gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā ‘‘tassā niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo? Hārasampāteti āhā’’ti –
已说。偈颂的含义在义释的阐明中已经说过了。有人问:老师在那义释里说的“十六……经”这个偈颂,它的义释应该在哪里找到呢?是应该认为老师在摄分别分的开头没有加以分别,而在摄会合分里回顾之后才作了分别?还是应该认为在理趣生起处回顾之后才作了分别?回答:应该认为是在摄会合分里回顾之后才作了分别。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Gāthāttho niddesavibhāvanāyaṃ vuttova. ‘‘Soḷasa…pe… sutta’’nti yā gāthā niddese ācariyena vuttā, tassā gāthāya niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo, hāravibhaṅgassa ādimhi ācariyena na vibhatto, hārasampāte vā paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo kiṃ, udāhu nayasamuṭṭhāne vā paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo kinti pucchati. Hārasampāte paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabboti vissajjanā.
阿阇梨说过:这首偈颂的释义应当到“行摄”(hārasampāta)中去寻找。这个行摄按“教说行摄”等类别分为十六种。因为需要问“其中什么是行摄?什么是教说行摄?”,所以在这部应当注释的经里,由我以注释的方式加以分别解释,这种属于行摄的注释类别,就叫作“教说行摄”。为了这样分别解释,便说了“其中,什么是教说行摄”等话。那里的“其中”,就是指那十六种当中以教说行摄为首的行摄。接着问:属于行摄的注释类别,哪一种叫作教说行摄呢?巴利
Hārasampāte tassā gāthāya niddeso daṭṭhabboti ācariyena vutto, so hārasampāto desanāhārasampātabhedena soḷasavidho, ‘‘tattha katamo hārasampāto desanāhārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā imasmiṃ sutte saṃvaṇṇetabbe saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena mayā vibhajiyamāno hārasampātabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti tathā vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ soḷasavidhe desanāhārasampātādike hārasampāte. Katamo hārasampātabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
心没有守护好,又被邪见击垮,
被昏沉和睡眠压倒的人,就会落入魔的掌控。巴利
‘‘Arakkhitena cittena, micchādiṭṭhihatena ca; Thinamiddhābhibhūtena, vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti. –
在经里,先问“以无防护之心,是在说明什么”,然后回答“是在说明放逸”等,像这样对注解所作的特别说明,就叫作“说法杖论汇集”。这个偈颂的意义已经在注释书(《导论注》52)里分别解释了。至于关联的意义:以无防护之心,就是具有无防护心的人,落入魔罗和死神的掌控。被邪见所害,就是被颠倒所害,具有颠倒的人,落入魔罗的掌控。被昏沉睡眠所胜,就是心需要靠外力策励、懈怠的人,具有这样的心的人,落入魔罗、烦恼等众魔的掌控。巴利
Sutte ‘‘arakkhitena cittenāti kiṃdesayatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘pamādaṃ desayatī’’tiādisaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāthāttho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 52) vibhatto. Yojanattho pana arakkhitena cittena arakkhitacittasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa maccuno vasaṃ gacchati. Micchādiṭṭhihatena vipallāsena vipallāsasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa vasaṃ gacchati. Thinamiddhābhibhūtena sasaṅkhārikacittena kusītacittena taṃcittasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa kilesādimārassa vasaṃ gacchatīti.
有人问:“‘以无防护之心’这句话所说明的、属于放逸的那类法,是谁的境界?”所以就说:“那是死神的境界。”由“以无防护之心”这句经文所说明的含义,阿阇梨已经解释过了,我们也已经了解了。又有人问:“‘被邪见所害’这句经文所说明的含义,是怎么解释的?”所以就说“被邪见所害”等等。当一个人以某种颠倒,在无常的事物上把它看成常,那时生起的那个颠倒,就叫做“被邪见所害”。有人问:“那这个颠倒有什么特征?”这样问了之后,就说:“颠倒的特征就是执取相反的一面。”巴利
‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’ti padena desitaṃ taṃ pamādadhammajātaṃ kassa pada’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘taṃ maccuno pada’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’’ti iminā suttappadesena desito attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihatena cāti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihatena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena vipallāsena yadā anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti passati, tadā pavatto so vipallāso ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāmā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘So pana vipallāso kiṃlakkhaṇo’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā ‘‘viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso’’ti vuttaṃ.
以颠倒执取为特征,是指对不净等事物,却执取为净等,也就是执取与真相相反的特征。由于“令颠倒”这个使役含义,所以叫颠倒。什么是颠倒?什么是执取相反的特征?这个颠倒令想颠倒,也令心颠倒,也令见颠倒。它就这样令三种法颠倒;因为所应颠倒的法有三种,颠倒也就有三种。其中,想颠倒细微而软弱,因为它只是以净等的方式执取所呈现的相而已。心颠倒比想颠倒有力,因为它对以净等方式呈现的色蕴等,以净等方式加以确定后执取。见颠倒比想颠倒和心颠倒都更强有力,因为对于任何以净等相状呈现的所缘,它都以常等的方式坚持执取。因此,先说想颠倒,接着说心颠倒,接着说见颠倒。详细来说,每一种颠倒都依执取净、乐、我、常而分成四种,所以一共十二种。巴利
Viparītaggāhalakkhaṇoti asubhādīnaṃyeva subhādiviparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso ‘‘vipallāsayatī’’ti kāritatthasambhavato. Kiṃ vipallāso viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo? So vipallāso saññaṃ vipallāsayati, cittampi vipallāsayati, diṭṭhimpi vipallāsayati. Iti tayo dhamme vipallāsayatīti vipallāsetabbānaṃ tividhattā vipallāsāpi tividhā honti. Tesu saññāvipallāso muduko dubbalo subhādivasena upaṭṭhitākāraggahaṇamattattā, cittavipallāso saññāvipallāsato balavā subhādivasena upaṭṭhahantānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ subhādivasena sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā gahaṇato. Diṭṭhivipallāso saññāvipallāsacittavipallāsehi balavataro, yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ subhādiākārena upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ sassatādivasena abhinivisitvā gahaṇato. Tasmā saññāvipallāso paṭhamaṃ vutto, tadanantaraṃ cittavipallāso, tadanantaraṃ diṭṭhivipallāso vutto. Vitthārato pana ekekassa subhasukhaattaniccaggahaṇavasena catubbidhattā dvādasavidhā honti.
颠倒已由导师分别说明,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问“哪些是颠倒活动处和颠倒所缘境”,为了指出这些自身存在的立足处就是颠倒活动处和颠倒所缘境,所以说“它在何处颠倒?在四种自身存在的立足处。”在被称为色身、受、心、法的四种自身存在的立足处中,那一切颠倒都让想、心、见发生颠倒。因为有人会问“对于怎样观察的人,它发生颠倒”,所以说“观色是我”等。如果有人观色是我,或者观有色的我是我,或者观我中有色,或者观色中有我,或者观色中的我是我,对于这样观察的人,颠倒就在色身中让想、心、见发生颠倒。受等处也是同样的道理。巴利
Vipallāsā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katame vipallāsapavattiṭṭhānavisayā’’ti pucchitabbattā imāni attabhāvavatthūni vipallāsapavattiṭṭhānavisayānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘so kuhiṃ vipallāsayati catūsu attabhāvavatthūsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Catūsu rūpakāyavedanācittadhammasaṅkhātesu attabhāvavatthūsu so sabbo vipallāso saññācittadiṭṭhiyo vipallāsayati. ‘‘Kathaṃ samanupassantassa vipallāsayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo puggalo rūpaṃ vā attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ vā attato samanupassati , attani rūpaṃ vā attato samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ vā attato samanupassati, evaṃ tassa samanupassantassa puggalassa vipallāso rūpakāye saññācittadiṭṭhiyo vipallāsayati. Eseva nayo vedanādīsupi.
对于“在色身等这些当中,哪一个是哪一种颠倒的所依?”这个问题需要这样提问,所以为了分别说明如此生起的颠倒中“这是这个的所依”,就说了“其中,色”等。其中,在色等四种当中,首先要把握为:颠倒的所依——色,是“于不净为净”这样生起的颠倒的所依。其余几种也照这个方式类推。这样一来,依“于不净为净”等不同方式,颠倒就有四种。巴利
‘‘Tesu rūpakāyādīsu katamaṃ katamassa vipallāsassa vatthū’’ti pucchitabbattā evaṃ pavattamānassa vipallāsassa idaṃ imassa vatthūti vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha rūpa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu rūpādīsu catūsu paṭhamaṃ vipallāsavatthu rūpaṃ ‘‘asubhe subha’’nti evaṃ pavattamānassa vipallāsassa vatthu hotīti vibhajitvā gahetabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evaṃ ‘‘asubhe subha’’ntiādippakārena vipallāsā catubbidhā bhavanti.
这是它的所依事,老师已经分别开示过,我们也已经了解。因为要问“那些颠倒的根本因法到底是哪些”,所以说了“二法”等等。心的染污,也就是渴爱和无明——这两种法就是颠倒的根本因。巴利
Idaṃ imassa vatthūti ācariyena vibhajitvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ katame mūlakāraṇadhammā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittassa saṃkilesā, taṇhā ca avijjā ca – ime dve dhammā vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtā bhavanti.
有人要问:“这两个法是一起成为各种颠倒的根本因,还是各自分开?”因为需要这样分别说明,所以说了“被渴爱所覆”等话。没有无明就没有渴爱,那是不是应该说“被渴爱和无明所覆”?不是,因为渴爱是特别强的缘。正因为渴爱特别强,人们才会把不净看成净,把苦看成乐。既然说了“渴爱和无明”,就应该说“被无明所覆”,为什么却说“被见所覆”?因为无明会产生见,所以以见为代表来包含无明,说成“被见所覆”,应当理解为“被无明所覆”的意思。不过,如果只说“被无明所覆”,那可能连不带见的无明也包括进去了;正是因为带有见的无明,人们才会把无常看成常,把无我看成我。巴利
‘‘Ime dve dhammā ekato vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ kiṃ honti, udāhu visuṃ visu’’nti vattabbattā visuṃ visuṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘taṇhānivuta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjārahitā taṇhā nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘taṇhāavijjānivuta’’nti vattabbanti? Na, taṇhāya sātisayapaccayattā. Sātisayāya hi taṇhāya asubhepi ‘‘subha’’nti, dukkhepi ‘‘sukha’’nti samanupassanti. ‘‘Taṇhā ca avijjā cā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘avijjānivuta’’nti vattabbaṃ, kasmā ‘‘diṭṭhinivuta’’nti vuttanti? Avijjāya diṭṭhi bhavatīti diṭṭhisīsena avijjaṃ gahetvā ‘‘diṭṭhinivuta’’nti vuttaṃ, avijjānivutanti attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Avijjānivuta’’nti vutte pana diṭṭhirahitā avijjāpi gahitā siyā, diṭṭhisahitāya hi avijjāya aniccepi ‘‘nicca’’nti, anattaniyepi ‘‘attā’’ti samanupassanti.
“贪爱为根的颠倒怎样转起?带有见的无明为根的颠倒怎样转起?”因为应当这样问,所以说了“其中,见颠倒”等。“其中”是指在以贪爱为根和以带有见的无明为根这两类当中。“见颠倒”就是以带有见的无明为根的颠倒。他观过去色为我,这是把非实质的说成像实质的一样。“贪爱颠倒”就是以带有见的贪爱为根的颠倒,它以欢喜见的方式欢喜未来色。如此,应当看到依过去观照与未来欢喜的差别而有转起的差异。“心的杂染,难道只有贪爱与无明这两法,十种烦恼不也是吗?为什么只说这两法?”因为应当这样问,所以说了“二法是心的随烦恼”等。贪爱与无明——正是这两法,成为极重过患的颠倒的根本因。由贪爱与无明而清净的心,就从一切烦恼中清净,因此它们特别地成为心的随烦恼,所以说这两法。因为当贪爱与无明被阿拉汉道断除时,没有任何杂染是未断的。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ taṇhāmūlako vipallāso pavatto, kathaṃ diṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlako vipallāso pavatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha yo diṭṭhivipallāso’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu taṇhāmūlakadiṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlakesu. Diṭṭhivipallāsoti diṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlakavipallāso. Atītaṃ rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti adabbabhūtopi dabbabhūto viya vutto. Taṇhāvipallāsoti diṭṭhisahitataṇhāmūlako vipallāso anāgataṃrūpaṃ diṭṭhibhinandanavasena abhinandatīti. Evaṃ atītasamanupassanaanāgatābhinandanabhedena pavattiviseso daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Cittassa saṃkileso taṇhāavijjāyeva dve dhammā na honti, atha kho dasa kilesāpi, kasmā dveyeva vuttā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhā ca avijjā ca – ime dveyeva dhammā paramasāvajjassa vipallāsassa mūlakāraṇattā. Tāhi taṇhāavijjāhi visujjhantaṃ cittaṃ sabbehi kilesehi visujjhati, tasmā ca visesato cittassa upakkilesā hontīti dve dhammā vuttā. Na hi tāsu taṇhāavijjāsu arahattamaggena pahīnāsu koci saṃkileso appahīno nāma natthīti.
有人问:前面说的贪爱和无明,只是那些颠倒的根本原因,还是整个轮回的根本原因?为了说明它们既是那些颠倒的根本原因,也是整个轮回的根本原因,所以接着说了“那些”等内容。这里“那些”指的是心没有守护、又被邪见所害的人。对于那些被无明遮障、被贪爱系缚、看不到生死起点的众生来说,他们被无明盖住、被贪爱绑住,在轮回中不断流转、漂泊,有时流转漂泊到地狱,落入魔的掌控;有时流转漂泊到畜生道;有时流转漂泊到饿鬼界;有时流转漂泊到阿修罗众;有时流转漂泊到天界;有时流转漂泊到人间。巴利
‘‘Vuttappakārā taṇhāavijjā vuttappakārānaṃ vipallāsānaṃyeva mūlakāraṇaṃ honti kiṃ, udāhu sakalassa vaṭṭassāpi mūlakāraṇaṃ honti ki’’nti vattabbattā vuttappakārā taṇhāavijjā vuttappakārānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ honti yathā, evaṃ sakalassa vaṭṭassāpi mūlakāraṇaṃ hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yesaṃ puggalānaṃ cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, micchādiṭṭhihatañca hoti, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ. Yesaṃ avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ pubbakoṭi na paññāyati, tehi avijjānīvaraṇehi taṇhāsaṃyojanehi saṃsāre sandhāvantānaṃ saṃsarantānaṃ puggalānaṃ sakiṃ nirayaṃ māravasagamanena sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ tiracchānayoniṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ pettivisayaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ asurakāyaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ deve sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ manusse sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hotīti attho.
“被邪见所害”这一经文所说明的含义,阿阇梨已经分别解释过了,我们也已经了解了。接着因为要问“被昏沉睡眠所胜”这一经文所说明的含义又是怎样分别解释的,所以说了“被昏沉睡眠所胜”等话。心,也就是识蕴,那种不适业、不堪能的状态,这种不适业、不堪能就叫作昏沉。身,也就是受等三蕴,那种沉滞、懈怠的状态,这种身的沉滞就叫作睡眠。这里只是直接说明了昏沉和睡眠本身的样子。至于心被这些昏沉睡眠所制伏的状态等,因为很容易理解,所以没有加以解释。虽然没有解释,但对于那些心被昏沉睡眠所制伏的人,他们以那样的心——以心为首,被结缚所绑——在轮回中落入魔的掌控而流转、轮回,这其中的究竟道理应当展开来了知。巴利
‘‘Micchādiṭṭhihatena cā’’ti suttappadesena desito attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhūtenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittassa viññāṇakkhandhassa yā akallatā akammaniyatā atthi, idaṃ akallattaṃ akammaniyattaṃ thinaṃ nāma. Yaṃ kāyassa līnattaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayalīnattaṃ atthi, idaṃ kāyassa līnattaṃ middhaṃ nāmāti thinamiddhasarūpameva vuttaṃ. Tehi thinamiddhehi cittassa abhibhūtabhāvādiko pana suviññeyyattā na vutto, avuttepi yesaṃ puggalānaṃ cittaṃ thinamiddhehi abhibhūtaṃ, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ tena cittena cittasīsena saṃyojanena saṃsāre māravasagamanena sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ pariyosānasabhāvo vitthāretvā gahetabbo.
“随顺魔的掌控”这一经文所说明的含义,又是怎样分别解说的呢?因为应当这样问,所以说了“随顺魔的掌控”。其中,“烦恼魔”:烦恼会杀害、阻止布施等善行,因此称为“魔”,这就是烦恼魔。由于是依止这烦恼魔而转起,所以行魔、蕴魔、死魔也都被包含在内;或者也可以理解为,是由“ca”这个词而把它们包含进来的。“众生魔”:指天子魔。或者说,因为不说“天子魔”而说“众生魔”,所以凡是像国王、盗贼之类能杀害布施等善行,或杀害权势受用等类的,那国王、盗贼等也都被包含在内,因此其含义是:无论对任何一位众生魔而言。“掌控”:是指欲求、贪求、意图、喜好、期望、命令、敕令。“入”:是接近、随从、随顺、跟随、不超越的意思。因为应当问“为何随顺掌控”,所以说了“因为他”等语。凡是有情以不守护之心、以被邪见所害之心、以被昏沉睡眠所制伏之心而具足,那有情被无明障等所障蔽,便成为面向轮回者,而非面向离行,因此其含义是:随顺魔的掌控。巴利
‘‘Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kilesamārassāti kileso dānādipuññe māreti nivāretīti atthena māroti kilesamāro. Iminā kilesamāraṃ nissāya pavattattā abhisaṅkhāramārakhandhamāramaccumārā ca gahitā, ca-saddena vā gahitāti veditabbā. Sattamārassāti devaputtamārassa. Atha vā ‘‘devaputtamārassā’’ti avatvā ‘‘sattamārassā’’ti vuttattā yo yo rājacorādiko dānādīni vā issariyabhogādīni vā māreti, so so rājacorādikopi gahito, tasmā yassa kassaci sattamārassāti attho. Vasanti icchaṃ lobhaṃ adhippāyaṃ ruciṃ ākaṅkhaṃ āṇaṃ āṇattiṃ. Gacchatīti upagacchati upeti anuvattati anugacchati nātikkamatīti attho. ‘‘Kasmā vasaṃ gacchatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo satto arakkhitacittena ca micchādiṭṭhihatacittena ca thinamiddhābhibhūtacittena ca samannāgato hoti, so satto avijjānīvaraṇādīhi nivuto hutvā saṃsārābhimukho hi yasmā hoti, na visaṅkhārābhimukho, tasmā mārassa vasaṃ gacchatīti attho.
对于“以无守护”等开头的这部经,它的含义已经分别解说了,因此,由于应当说“以‘无守护’等经宣说了多少谛”,所以说了“这些由世尊”等。世尊以“无守护”等经宣说了苦与集这二谛。是怎样宣说的呢?是依阿毗达摩的论说和依经文的论说而宣说的。在这些论说中,依阿毗达摩的论说而宣说时,通过“以无守护的心”这个词,世尊宣说并让人知道:无守护的贪心、无守护的嗔心、无守护的痴心。其中应当知道,贪心按与贪俱起的心生起有八种,嗔心按与嗔相应的心生起有两种,痴心按与痴俱起的心生起有两种。因为由于这些心生起,眼根等的不防护、无守护就产生了;由于那不防护、无守护,心就成为无守护——这是依照果来就近说因。巴利
‘‘Arakkhitenātiādikassa yassa suttassa attho vibhatto, tena ‘arakkhitenā’tiādikena suttena kittakāni saccāni desitānī’’tivattabbattā ‘‘imāni bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Arakkhitenā’’tiādisuttena bhagavatā imāni dve saccāni desitāni dukkhaṃ, samudayo cāti. Kathaṃ desitāni? Abhidhammanissitāya kathāya ceva suttantanissitāya kathāya ca desitāni. Tāsu kathāsu abhidhammanissitāya kathāya desite sati ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti iminā padena arakkhitaṃ rattampi cittaṃ, arakkhitaṃ duṭṭhampi cittaṃ, arakkhitaṃ mūḷhampi cittaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ ñāpitaṃ. Tattha rattacittaṃ lobhasahagatacittuppādavasena aṭṭhavidhaṃ, duṭṭhacittaṃ paṭighasampayuttacittuppādavasena dubbidhaṃ, mūḷhacittaṃ momūhacittuppādavasena dubbidhanti veditabbaṃ. Imesañhi cittuppādānaṃ vasena yā cakkhundriyādīnaṃ agutti anārakkhā uppannā, tāya aguttiyā anārakkhāya cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ hoti phalūpacārenāti.
用“被邪见所毁坏”这个词,说的是与邪见相应的心。应当知道,这个心按与见相应的心生起来算,有四种。因为它与邪见相应、随顺邪见的力量,所以就叫作“被邪见所毁坏”。用“被昏沉睡眠所压倒”这个词,说的是与昏沉睡眠相应的心。应当知道,这个心按有行的心生起来算,有五种。因为它与昏沉睡眠相应、随顺昏沉睡眠的力量,所以就叫作“被昏沉睡眠所压倒”。这样一来,在“哪些法是不善?当不善心生起时”等等(《法集论》365)详细说明十二种不善心生起的篇章里,应当知道,这十二种不善心生起,就是世尊用这三个词来说明的。用“魔的”这个词,包含了五种魔。其中,烦恼魔在“四漏、四流、四轭、四结、四取、八盖、十烦恼”(《法集论》1102等)里说明。行作魔在“善思、不善思、善业、不善业”(《分别论》226)等里说明。蕴魔在“自身、五蕴”等里说明。死魔在“死、死亡”(《分别论》193)等里说明。天子魔则通过相应的教法来说明。总之,在这里应当看到,这是依据阿毗达摩论说所宣示的含义。巴利
‘‘Micchādiṭṭhihatenā’’ti iminā padena micchādiṭṭhisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ diṭṭhisampayuttacittuppādavasena catubbidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi micchādiṭṭhiyā saṃsaṭṭhabhāvena micchādiṭṭhivasānugatattā micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāmāti. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhūtenā’’ti iminā padena thinamiddhena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sasaṅkhārikacittuppādavasena pañcavidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi thinamiddhena saṃsaṭṭhabhāvena thinamiddhavasānugatattā thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ nāmāti evaṃ ye dvādasākusalā cittuppādakaṇḍe ‘‘katame dhammā akusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye akusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 365) vitthārato vattabbā, te dvādasākusalacittuppādā tīhi padehi bhagavatā desitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Mārassā’’ti padena pañca mārā gahitā. Tesu kilesamāro ‘‘cattāro āsavā, cattāro oghā, cattāro yogā, cattāro ganthā, cattāri upādānāni, aṭṭha nīvaraṇā, dasa kilesā’’ti (dha. sa. 1102 ādayo) desito. Abhisaṅkhāramāro pana ‘‘kusalā cetanā (vibha. 226) akusalā cetanā (vibha. 226) kusalaṃ kammaṃ akusalaṃ kamma’’ntiādinā desito. Khandhamāro pana ‘‘attabhāvo pañcakkhandhā’’tiādinā desito. Maccumāro pana ‘‘cuti cavanatā’’tiādinā (vibha. 193) desito. Evaṃ tāvettha abhidhammanissitāya kathāya desito attho daṭṭhabbo.
当依经文而说的教说被宣说时,也就是“以眼见色后,执取相、执取随好;如果住于不防护眼根,贪忧与种种恶不善法就会流入他的心,而他不为了防护而修行,不守护眼根,在眼根上不成就防护……乃至在耳根上不成就防护……在鼻根上不成就防护……在舌根上不成就防护……在身根上不成就防护……在意根上不成就防护”这样一段。这里以补特伽罗为立足点所说的六门心,就是由“以无守护之心”这个词所宣说的。
那些邪见,不论是由于对前际的分别、对后际的分别,还是对前后际的分别,对于不如理作意、不断向外冒出来的人,生起了“世间是常”“世间非常”“如来死后不存在”等邪见;与这些邪见相应的心,或者与《梵网经》等(《长部》1.30等)中所说的“这四种常见……乃至现法涅槃见”等邪见相应的心,就是由“以被邪见所破坏之心”这个词所宣说的。巴利
Suttantanissitāya pana kathāya desite sati ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī, yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati…pe… sotindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… ghānindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… jivhindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… kāyindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… manindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.347) evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena yaṃ chadvārikacittaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ chadvārikacittaṃ ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti iminā padena desitaṃ. Yā micchādiṭṭhiyo pubbantakappanavasena vā aparantakappanavasena vā pubbantāparantakappanavasena vā micchā abhinivisantassa ayoniso ummujjantassa ‘‘sassato loko’’ti vā ‘‘asassato loko’’ti vā ‘‘na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vā uppannā, tāhi diṭṭhīhi vā, yā ca diṭṭhiyo ‘‘imā cattāro sassatavādā…pe… paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā’’ti brahmajālasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 1.30 ādayo) vuttā, tāhi diṭṭhīhi vā sampayuttaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihatena cā’’ti iminā padena desitaṃ.
所谓昏沉,就是心没有堪任性;所谓睡眠,就是受等三蕴没有堪任性。或者说,昏沉是无力消沉,睡眠是摧毁精进力。凡是像这样所说的昏沉与睡眠,当心被这些昏沉与睡眠压倒、覆盖时,这颗心就用“被昏沉睡眠压倒”这句话来表达。巴利
‘‘Thinaṃ nāma cittassa akammaññatā, middhaṃ nāma vedanādikkhandhattayassa akammaññatā’’ti vā ‘‘thinaṃ anussāhasaṃsīdanaṃ, middhaṃ ussāhasattivighāto’’ti vā yāni thinamiddhāni vuttāni, tehi thinamiddhehi yaṃ cittaṃ abhibhūtaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ, taṃ cittaṃ ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhūtenā’’ti iminā padena desitaṃ.
所谓“自在力”,就是欲求、贪、意愿、喜好、渴望、命令、教令——凡是所说的“自在力”,都是用“自在力”这个词来说明的。所谓“五魔”——蕴魔、行作魔、死魔、天子魔、烦恼魔——凡是所说的“魔”,都是用“魔的”这个词来说明的。“行走、趣向、到达、随转、随行、不超越”——凡是如此所说的补特伽罗,都是用“行走”这个词来说明的。这样,在所宣说的诸法中,不善法是集谛;而通过“行走于魔的自在力”这个词,凡是依五取蕴而施设的补特伽罗,那五取蕴就是苦谛——这样就宣说了二谛。因为有人会问“为什么宣说二谛?”,所以说了“那些由世尊……”等话。为了遍知和断除这二谛,世尊宣说了“以无守护”等法,意思是:用“以无守护”等词语来使人了知那二谛。巴利
‘‘Vaso nāma icchā lobho adhippāyo ruci ākaṅkhā āṇā āṇattī’’ti yo vaso vutto, so vaso ‘‘vasa’’nti iminā padena desito. ‘‘Pañca mārā – khandhamāro abhisaṅkhāramāro maccumāro devaputtamāro kilesamāro’’ti yo māro vutto, so māro ‘‘mārassā’’ti iminā desito. ‘‘Gacchati, upagacchati, upeti, anuvattati, anugacchati, nātikkamatī’’ti yo puggalo vutto, so puggalo ‘‘gacchatī’’ti iminā desitoti. Evaṃ desitesu dhammesu akusalā samudayasaccaṃ, ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti iminā padena ye pañcupādānakkhandhe upādāya paññatto puggalo vutto, te pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccanti dve saccāni desitāni. ‘‘Kimatthāya dve saccāni desitānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tesaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ saccānaṃ pariññāya ca pahānāya ca ‘‘arakkhitenā’’tiādi dhammaṃ bhagavā deseti, tāni dve saccāni ‘‘arakkhitenā’’tiādikena ñāpetīti attho.
有人问:在这两个谛当中,是为了遍知哪个谛、为了断除哪个谛而宣说的呢?因为这样问,所以回答说:是为了遍知苦、为了断除集。又问:通过遍知和断除,宣说了哪些谛呢?因为要这样说,所以讲了“由彼……”等话。也就是:通过那个阿拉汉道而遍知,通过那个阿拉汉道而断除,这个阿拉汉道就叫作道谛。以涅槃法为所缘,生起了对渴爱和无明的断除,这个涅槃法就叫作灭,是灭谛。这样,世尊宣说了四谛。巴利
‘‘Tesu dvīsu saccesu kassa saccassa pariññāya, kassa saccassa pahānāya desetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya, samudayassa pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariññāpahānehi katamāni saccāni desitānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena arahattamaggena parijānāti, yena arahattamaggena pajahati ca, ayaṃ arahattamaggo maggasaccaṃ nāma. Yaṃ nibbānadhammaṃ ārabbha taṇhāya, avijjāya ca pahānaṃ jātaṃ, ayaṃ nibbānadhammo nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ cattāri saccāni bhagavatā desitāni.
有人问:四圣谛被宣说这件事,怎么才能知道呢?因为需要这样回答,所以说了“因此……”等话。在这四谛当中,用集谛把握了乐味,用苦谛把握了过患,用道谛和灭谛把握了出离;依靠断除集谛,就产生了舍断一切趣,而舍断一切趣被把握为果。通过守护心等而产生了舍断一切趣,这守护心等就被把握为方法;以遮止不守护心等的方式,劝导守护心等,就是世尊的教令。这样,依照宣说的理路,在种种经中显示的乐味等,被提取出来,显示在这一部经里,也就是“以不守护……”等那段经文之中。巴利
‘‘Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ desitabhāvo kena viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesu catūsu saccesu samudayasaccena assādo gahito, dukkhasaccena ādīnavo gahito, maggasaccanirodhasaccehi nissaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, samudayappahānavasena sabbagatipajahanaṃ jātaṃ, sabbagatipajahanaṃ phalanti gahitaṃ. Yena rakkhitacittatādikena sabbagatipajahanaṃ jātaṃ, so rakkhitacittatādiko upāyoti gahito, arakkhitacittatādikassa paṭisedhanamukhena rakkhitacittatādikassa niyojanaṃ bhagavato āṇattīti gahitanti desanāhārena nānāsuttesu dassitā assādādayo ‘‘arakkhitenā’’tiādike ekasmiṃyeva sutte nīharitvā dassitā.
有人会说:乐味等被抽出来显示,这件事凭什么能知道、凭什么能相信?所以经文接着说了“因此……”等等。这里要分清两种不同的解释方式:一种是在不同经典中把乐味等抽出来显示,这种方式叫“宣说理分别”;另一种是只在同一部经里把乐味等抽出来显示,这种方式叫“宣说理合集”。这就是两者的差别。巴利
‘‘Assādādīnaṃ nīharitvā dassitabhāvo kena viññātabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nānāsuttesu assādādayo nīharitvā dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāravibhaṅgo nāma. Yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena ekasmiṃyeva sutte assādādayo nīharitvā dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti viseso daṭṭhabbo.
因为可以这样说:“教法引摄的连贯就仅此而已,已经圆满。”所以才说“教法引摄的连贯已经结合”。意思是:在每一部经里,乐味等由某种作为特定解释的教法引摄的连贯抽取出来,并按照合适的方式显示;那种作为特定解释的教法引摄的连贯就已经结合,应当按合适的方式确定并运用。这个意思已经被把握了。巴利
‘‘Ettakova desanāhārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto desanāhārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekekasmiṃyeva sutte assādādayo yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātena nīharitvā yathārahaṃ dassitā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahito.
就这样,在教法理路的汇合中,按照众生的根机能力而造。巴利
Iti desanāhārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
有智慧的人……应当这样理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
2. 审查理合集的阐明巴利
2. Vicayahārasampātavibhāvanā
53 老师已经通过宣说理合集的组合,把味等内容分别讲清楚了,我们也已经了解,所以这个宣说理合集就算讲完了。因为接下来有人要问“什么是审查理合集”,所以就说“其中,什么是审查理合集”等等。那里的“其中”,是在宣说理合集等十六种理合集当中发问:哪一种具体的解释叫做审查理合集?在这些法里面,应当通过哪一种具体的解释来审查这个法,那种具体的解释就叫做审查理合集。为了确定并分别说明这一点,就说“其中,渴爱……”等等。不过在注释书里——巴利
53. Yena desanāhārasampātena assādādayo ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, so desanāhārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vicayahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vicayo hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati. Imesu dhammesu ayaṃ dhammo yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vicayitabbo, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahārasampāto nāmāti niyametvā vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha taṇhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
已经展示了宣说理合集,现在要展示审查理合集。因为对宣说理中句义的审查就是审查理,所以为了展示审查理合集,就通过在宣说理中由颠倒之因所确定的渴爱,以善、不善等分类细查的方式,开始说“其中,渴爱有两种”等。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ desanāhārasampātaṃ dassetvā idāni vicayahārasampātaṃ dassento yasmā desanāhārapadatthavicayo vicayahāro, tasmā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena niddhāritāya taṇhāya kusalādivibhāgapavicayamukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ ‘tattha taṇhā duvidhā’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 53) –
已说。其中,“其中”是指在“以不守护的心……”等经文里,按照教法理趣所阐明的不善法中,被确定为“渴爱”的一切渴爱。那么善的渴爱呢?就是以四地善法为对象而生起的渴爱。不善的渴爱呢?就是以不善法为对象而生起的渴爱。这样,渴爱有两种,应当加以审察。因此,复注中说:“‘以善法为所缘’,是就缘着善法而生起这一点说的,并不是说它们成为所缘缘,因为这里所说的‘善法’也包括出世间法。”巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’tiādisuttatthe desanāhārasampātena saṃvaṇṇite akusaladhamme ‘‘taṇhā’’ti niddhāritā sabbataṇhā. Kusalāpīti catubhūmake kusale uddissa pavattā taṇhāpi. Akusalāpīti akusaladhamme uddissa pavattā taṇhāpīti duvidhā hotīti vicayitabbā. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ – ‘‘kusaladhammārammaṇāti kusaladhamme uddissa pavattamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tesaṃ ārammaṇapaccayataṃ, idha ‘kusalā dhammā’ti lokuttaradhammānampi adhippetattā’’ti.
因为有人会问“善的渴爱导向哪里?不善的渴爱导向哪里?”,所以说“不善的导向轮回……”等等。或者,因为有人会问“善的渴爱和不善的渴爱差别在哪里?”,所以说“不善的导向轮回……”等等。因为有人会说“渴爱嘛,导向轮回倒说得通,可它怎么能导向损减呢?”,所以说“断除渴爱”。意思是:作为断除之因的渴爱,就是断除渴爱。也就是说,依靠应当被断除的渴爱,应当发起断除;通过这种应当发起的断除,而走向损减——这就是那句话的意思。巴利
‘‘Kusalā taṇhā kiṃgāminī, akusalā taṇhā kiṃ gāminī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘akusalā saṃsāragāminī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘katamo kusalākusalataṇhānaṃ viseso’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘akusalā saṃsāragāminī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṇhā nāma saṃsāragāminī hotu, kathaṃ apacayagāminī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘pahānataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ, pahānassa hetubhūtā taṇhā pahānataṇhāti attho, pahātabbataṇhaṃ āgamma yaṃ pahānaṃ pavattetabbaṃ, tena pavattetabbena pahānena apacayaṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
如果问:难道只有渴爱分善和不善两种,还是其他法也分善和不善两种?因为需要这样问,所以说了“慢也是……”等话。因为需要问“什么是善的慢?什么是不善的慢?”,所以说了“依靠那个慢来舍断慢,这个慢是善的;然而,那个慢产生苦,这个慢是不善的。”其中,“依靠那个慢……是善的”:依靠、亲近依止那个慢而使舍断运作起来,通过那种舍断,舍断相续中可能生起的慢,这个作为亲依止缘的慢,以果来称呼,所以叫善。“然而……是不善的”:如果那个慢以恼害他人等方式运作,产生自己和他人的苦,这个慢应当审察了知为不善。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ pana taṇhāyeva kusalākusalāti dubbidhā, udāhu aññopi kusalākusalāti dubbidho’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘mānopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamo māno kusalo, katamo māno akusalo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ mānaṃ nissāya mānaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ māno kusalo. Yo pana māno dukkhaṃ nibbattayati, ayaṃ māno akusalo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ mānaṃ…pe… kusaloti yaṃ mānaṃ nissāya upanissāya pahānaṃ pavattitaṃ, tena pahānena santāne uppajjanārahaṃ mānaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ upanissayapaccayabhūto māno phalūpacārena kusalo. Yo pana…pe… akusaloti yo pana māno parahiṃsanādivasena pavattamāno hutvā attano ca parassa ca dukkhaṃ nibbattayati, ayaṃ māno akusaloti vicayitvā veditabbo.
因为有人问“在那些导向轮回与导向减损的渴爱里,哪一种算是导向减损的善渴爱”,为了说明被称作“善”的那种渴爱本身是什么样,就说了“其中,凡是依出离而住的”等等。“其中”指的是那些导向轮回与导向减损的渴爱,也就是善的和不善的渴爱。这里要连起来理解:这种渴爱是善的。当一位善男子这样期望:“圣者们证得寂静处,也就是圣果法之后,安住其中;我什么时候也能证得那圣果法而安住呢?”这时,他对那圣果生起希求,以这希求为缘,生起了忧。这种忧就叫做“依出离而住的”。应当这样审察:这种被称为对圣果的希求的渴爱,是善的、没有过失的,因为它是以没有过失的圣果法为对象而生起的。巴利
‘‘Saṃsārāpacayagāminīsu tāsu taṇhāsu katamā apacayagāminī taṇhā kusalā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kusalā’’ti vuttāya taṇhāya sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yaṃ nekkhammasita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu saṃsārāpacayagāminīsu taṇhābhūtāsu kusalākusalāsu. Ayaṃ taṇhā kusalāti sambandho. ‘‘Ariyā puggalā santaṃ āyatanaṃ yaṃ ariyaphaladhammaṃ sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti, taṃ āyatanaṃ ariyaphaladhammaṃ ahaṃ kudāssu sacchikatvā viharissa’’nti patthayantassa tassa kulaputtassa tasmiṃ ariyaphale pihā uppajjati, pihāpaccayā yaṃ domanassaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ domanassaṃ ‘‘nekkhammasita’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ ariyaphale pihāsaṅkhātā taṇhā kusalā anavajjā anavajjaariyaphaladhammaṃ uddissa pavattattāti vicayitabbaṃ.
因为应当说“如何转起”,所以说了“离贪染”等。应当证得离贪染的心解脱。应当这样审察:以彼为所缘、依那心解脱而转起的渴爱是善的、无过失的;应当证得离无明染的慧解脱,以彼为所缘、依那慧解脱而转起的渴爱是善的、无过失的。依那慧解脱,世尊说:巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ pavattā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘rāgavirāgā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā rāgavirāgā cetovimutti pattabbā. Tadārammaṇā taṃ cetovimuttiṃ āgamma pavattā taṇhā kusalā anavajjā, yā avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti pattabbā, tadārammaṇā taṃ paññāvimuttiṃ āgamma pavattā taṇhā kusalā anavajjāti vicayitabbā. Tāya paññāvimuttiyā vasena bhagavatā –
因此,对于守护好心的人,正思惟就是他的行境;
以正见为先导,了知生灭;
制伏了昏沉与睡眠的比丘,应当舍弃一切恶趣。巴利
‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro; Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ; Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti. (udā. 32; netti. 31, 65, 78) –
偈颂里说了“应当舍弃一切恶趣”这一句。因为需要追问:“对于那个慧解脱,应当作什么样的审察?那个审察是什么?”所以说了“那个的审察是什么”等话。如果问:“对于那个慧解脱,审察是什么?”就应当知道,审察就是八支圣道——正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定。又因为需要追问:“那个审察应当在哪里见到?”所以说了“它在哪里”等话。他问的是:那个慧解脱的审察,应当在哪里、在哪种法上见到?答案是:在第四禅中。当波罗蜜达到最高程度时,在第四禅的修习中,应当见到那个审察。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti padaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘tassā paññāvimuttiyā yo pavicayo kātabbo, katamo so pavicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tassā ko pavicayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā paññāvimuttiyā ko pavicayoti ce puccheyya ‘‘aṭṭha maggaṅgāni – sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhī’’ti pavicayo veditabbo. ‘‘So pavicayo kattha daṭṭhabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so katthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So paññāvimuttiyā pavicayo kattha kasmiṃ dhamme daṭṭhabboti pucchati. Catutthe jhāne pāramitāya ukkaṃsagatāya catutthajjhānabhāvanāya so pavicayo daṭṭhabbo.
为了解释“在第四禅中,波罗蜜达到究竟”这句话的意思,所以说了“因为在第四禅中”等话。那个证得第四禅的人,在第四禅中修习一颗清净、洁白、没有垢染、远离随烦恼、柔软、堪能、安住、达到不动的心,也就是具足八支的心;这个证得第四禅的人,就在第四禅中证得八种明行。哪八种呢?六神通和两种殊胜。神变等五种是世间神通,加上阿罗汉道智,就是六神通;意所成神通和观智,就是两种殊胜。巴利
‘‘Catutthe jhāne pāramitāyā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘catutthe hi jhāne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo so catutthajjhānalābhī puggalo catutthe jhāne parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ anaṅgaṇaṃ vigatūpakkilesaṃ mudu kammaniyaṃ ṭhitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ, iti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ bhāvayati, so catutthajjhānalābhī puggalo tattha catutthe jhāne aṭṭhavidhaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ adhigacchati. Katamaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ? Cha abhiññā, dve ca visese vā adhigacchatīti yojanā. Iddhividhādayo pañca, lokiyābhiññā ceva arahattamaggapaññā cāti cha abhiññā. Manomayiddhi ceva vipassanāñāṇañcāti dve ca visesā honti.
因为有人问:“那第四禅心从何处清净……乃至从何处达到不动?”所以说了“那心从何处清净”等话。那心因为具有舍与念清净的状态,所以清净;因为具有那种舍与念清净的状态,所以洁白。因为断除了乐等诸缘,所以具有离贪等无垢的状态,因此无垢;因为具有那种离贪等无垢的状态,所以远离随烦恼。因为具有善修习的状态,所以柔软;因为具有那种善修习的状态,所以堪任。因为具有安住于清净等状态,所以安住;因为具有那种安住于清净等状态,所以达到不动——这样配释是合理的,因为注释书中正是以成对的方式来说的。因为被信、精进、念、定、慧和光明所摄持,所以达到不动。被信摄持的心,面对相反的不信,不动摇、不颤动;被精进摄持的心,面对相反的懈怠,不动摇;被念摄持的心,面对相反的放逸,不动摇;被定摄持的心,面对相反的掉举,不动摇;被慧摄持的心,面对相反的无明,不动摇;与光明相应的心,面对烦恼的黑暗,不动摇。这样,被这六种法摄持的第四禅心,就达到不动。如此,因为具足八支,第四禅心就成为六种神通智、意所成神通和观智的证得途径,所以对慧解脱的审察应当就在第四禅中看到——这是简要的含义。至于详细解说,注释书中已经用“其中,以舍念清净的状态……”等话,或者用“另一种理路……”等话说过,所以我们不再说。巴利
‘‘Taṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ kuto parisuddhaṃ…pe… kuto āneñjappatta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ cittaṃ yato parisuddha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ cittaṃ yato upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato parisuddhaṃ, tato upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato pariyodātaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayaghātena yato vītarāgādianaṅgaṇabhāvato anaṅgaṇaṃ, tato vītarāgādianaṅgaṇabhāvato vigatūpakkilesaṃ. Yato subhāvitabhāvato mudu, tato subhāvitabhāvato kammaniyaṃ. Yato parisuddhādīsu ṭhitabhāvato ṭhitaṃ, tato parisuddhādīsu ṭhitabhāvato āneñjappattaṃ hotītipi yojanā yuttā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) yugaḷato āgatattā. Saddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāobhāsehi pariggahitabhāvato āneñjappattaṃ. Saddhāya hi pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe assaddhiye na iñjati na calati, vīriyena pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe kosajje na iñjati, satiyā pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe pamāde na iñjati, samādhinā pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe uddhacce na iñjati, paññāya pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhāya avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ cittaṃ kilesandhakāre na iñjati. Iti imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattā catutthajjhānacittaṃ channaṃ abhiññāñāṇānañca manomayiddhivipassanāñāṇānañca adhigamūpāyo hoti, tasmā so paññāvimuttiparicayo catutthajjhāne daṭṭhabboyevāti saṅkhepattho. Vitthārato pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) ‘‘tattha upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvenā’’tiādinā vā ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādinā vā vuttoyevāti amhehi na vutto.
因为有人会问:那些贪等垢秽不存在,所以是无垢;那些贪欲等随烦恼不存在,所以是离随烦恼;那种心的安住不存在,所以是安住;没有动摇,所以达到不动——那么,这些贪等垢秽等到底属于哪一方?所以接着说了“其中,垢秽”等话。其中,在那些贪等垢秽等当中,垢秽就是贪等垢秽,随烦恼就是贪欲等随烦恼,这两者——贪等垢秽和贪欲等随烦恼——属于渴爱这一方,因为贪等垢秽以渴爱为自性,而贪欲等随烦恼也随顺于渴爱。凡是动摇、颤动,以及心的不安住、不确立,这种动摇和不安住属于见这一方,因为动摇和不安住是以邪执为原因的。应当这样审察。巴利
‘‘Yesaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ, yesaṃ abhijjhādiupakkilesānaṃ abhāvena vigatūpakkilesaṃ, yāya cittassa ṭhitiyā abhāvena ṭhitaṃ, iñjanāya abhāvena āneñjappattaṃ, te rāgādiaṅgaṇādayo katamāya pakkhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha aṅgaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu rāgādiaṅgaṇādīsu aṅgaṇā ca rāgādiaṅgaṇā ca upakkilesā abhijjhādiupakkilesā ca santi, tadubhayaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇaabhijjhādiupakkilesadvayaṃ taṇhāpakkho rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ taṇhāsabhāvattā, abhijjhādiupakkilesānañca taṇhāya anulomattā. Yā iñjanā phandanā yā ca cittassa aṭṭhiti anavaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, ayaṃ iñjanā aṭṭhiti diṭṭhipakkho iñjanāya ca aṭṭhitiyā ca micchābhinivesahetubhāvatoti pavicayo kātabbo.
有人会问:第四禅心是不是仅仅因为它具足八支,就成了证得六种神通智、意所成神通和观智的途径?为了回答这个问题,所以说了“四根”。应当这样说明:对获得第四禅的人来说,苦根、忧根、乐根、喜根这四根在第四禅中灭尽,只剩下舍根。因此,第四禅心也是前面所说的八种智的证得途径。不过,这种作为证得途径的状态,应该只属于已经修成熟练自在的人;仅仅证得第四禅的人,怎么会有熟练自在呢?因此,那位获得第四禅的人,并不只是停留在第四禅,他还这样生起和修习无色等至,所以才具有熟练自在。为了说明这一点,才说了“他对于上等定”等话。这些内容在注释书(《指导论注》53)中已经详细解释过,所以我们这里只作衔接说明。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ pana catutthajjhānacittaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattāyeva channaṃ abhiññāñāṇānañca manomayiddhivipassanāñāṇānañca adhigamūpāyo hotī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘cattāri indriyānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tassa catutthajjhānalābhino, dukkhindriyaṃ domanassindriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ iti cattārindriyāni catutthajjhāne nirujjhanti, tassa catutthajjhānalābhino upekkhindriyaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ bhavati, tasmāpi catutthajjhānacittaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhigamūpāyo hoti, so ca adhigamūpāyabhāvo ciṇṇavasībhāvasseva bhaveyya, kathaṃ catutthajjhānamattalābhino ciṇṇavasībhāvo siyā’’ti vattabbattā so catutthajjhānalābhī catutthajjhāneyeva aṭṭhatvā arūpasamāpattiyopi evaṃ katvā nibbatteti bhāveti, tasmā ciṇṇavasībhāvo hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘so uparimaṃ samāpatti’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) vitthārato vutto, tasmā yojanamattaṃ karissāma.
一位已证得色界第四禅的修行者,从色界第四禅的等至出发,对更上面的空无边处等至作意,把它看作更寂静、更殊胜。当这位已证得第四禅的修行者,按照所说的方式,对更上面的等至作意其为寂静时,他第四禅中的想就变得像是一种以想为主导的等至,显得粗重;而碰触想则变成厌离、不喜乐的状态。这位修行者按照所说的方式作意,由于完全、无余地超越了色想,碰触想息灭了,不再作意种种想,作意“虚空无边”,于是现证并进入空无边处等至而安住。色想就是色界的想,是五种神通所引导的。种种想是在种种所缘中散动的不善运作。这样,他在色界禅中见到过患之后,就在所缘上超越了那些色想和种种想,这位修行者的碰触想也就灭去了。如此,通过所说的这种超越方式而得定,以寂静行相的无色界定而得定的这位修行者,他的光明——也就是色界禅的光明——消失了。以禅眼对色、对遍色的看见也消失了。这就是衔接。巴利
So rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānalābhī yogāvacaro rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamāpattito uparimaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃsantato santatarato manasi karoti. Yathāvuttaṃ uparimaṃ samāpattiṃ santato manasi karoto tassa catutthajjhānalābhino yogāvacarassa catutthajjhāne saññā saññāpadhānā samāpatti oḷārikā viya hutvā saṇṭhahati, paṭighasaññā ca ukkaṇṭhā anabhirati hutvā saṇṭhahati, so yathāvuttena vidhinā manasi karonto yogāvacaro sabbaso niravasesato rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘‘ākāsaṃ ananta’’nti manasi katvā pavattamānaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Rūpasaññā rūpāvacarasaññā pañcavidhaabhiññābhinīhāro hoti. Nānattasaññā nānārammaṇesu vokāro akusalo pavattati. Evaṃ rūpāvacarajjhāne ādīnavadassī hutvā tā rūpasaññānānattasaññāyo ārammaṇe samatikkamati, assa yogāvacarassa paṭighasaññā ca abbhatthaṃ gacchati. Evaṃ iminā vuttanayena samatikkamena samāhitassa, santavuttinā arūpāvacarasamādhinā samāhitassa yogāvacarassa obhāso rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso antaradhāyati. Rūpānaṃ kasiṇarūpānaṃ jhānacakkhunā dassanañca antaradhāyatīti yojanā.
有人问:“以哪种定入定的人,他的光明和对色的看见会消失?这种定具备几个支?应该怎样观察?”因为要回答这个问题,所以说了“这种定”等话。所谓“这种定”,就是以色界和无色界的定而入定的人,这两种定都应该从六个支来观察、反复思量、仔细辨认:三个有帮助的支是无贪、无瞋、精进勤策,两个资具支是轻安和念,一个自性支是不散乱。因为要回答“怎样观察、在哪里观察?”所以说了“我于一切世间,心与无贪俱行……”等话。因为要回答“在这六个支当中,多少是止,多少是观?”所以为了分别说明而说了“其中,凡……”等话。巴利
‘‘Yena samādhinā samāhitassa, samāhitassa obhāso ca rūpānaṃ dassanañca antaradhāyati, so samādhi kittakehi aṅgehi samannāgato, kathaṃ paccavekkhitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samādhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So samādhīti yena rūpārūpāvacarasamādhinā samāhito, so duvidhopi samādhi anabhijjhābyāpādavīriyārambhehi tīhi upakārakaṅgehi ca passaddhisatīhi dvīhi parikkhāraṅgehi ca avikkhittena ekena sabhāvaṅgena ca chahi aṅgehi samannāgatoti paccavekkhitabbo punappunaṃ cintetabbo sallakkhetabbo . ‘‘Kathaṃ kattha paccavekkhitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘anabhijjhāsahagataṃ me mānasaṃ sabbaloke’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tesu chasu aṅgesu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ettako samatho, ettakā vipassanāti vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha yañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
54 对于所说的“慧解脱”,也就是阿罗汉果定,导师已经从定的角度,把被称为止观的前分行道分别说明了。因为有人应当问:“通过这条行道所证得的阿罗汉果定,应该以几种方式来了知?”所以说:“这个定应该以五种方式来了知。”那通过止观行道所证得的阿罗汉果定,应该以五种智见来了知。巴利
54. ‘‘Paññāvimuttī’’ti vuttassa arahattaphalassa samādhissa samathavipassanāsaṅkhātā pubbabhāgapaṭipadā samādhimukhena ācariyena vibhattā, ‘‘tāya paṭipadāya labhitabbo arahattaphalasamādhi kittakena veditabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo arahattaphalasamādhi samathavipassanāpaṭipadāya labhitabbo, so arahattaphalasamādhi pañcavidhena ñāṇadassanena veditabbo.
有人问:“五种智见是怎样现前的?”因为需要这样说明,所以接着说了“这个定”等内容。这个阿罗汉果定,在每一次入定的当下,因为具有果等至的快乐,所以是当下快乐的;这样观察的阿罗汉,他自己的智见就现前了。这个阿罗汉果定,因为是未来应当入的阿罗汉果定的亲依止缘,所以是未来会带来快乐的;这样观察的……乃至……现前。这个阿罗汉果定,因为远离了烦恼这个怨敌,所以是圣的;因为不存在欲贪、轮回贪、世间贪,所以也是无贪的;这样观察的……乃至……现前。这个阿罗汉果定,因为是正自觉者、独觉、声闻这些非卑劣之人所修习的,所以是非卑劣之人所修习的;这样观察的……乃至……现前。这个阿罗汉果定,因为诸支和俱生烦恼的不安已经止息,所以是寂静的;即使整天入定也不会感到满足,所以是殊胜的;因为被烦恼已止息的阿罗汉所证得,所以是止息所得;因为是通过称为阿罗汉道定的一境性而证得,所以是一境性所证得;它是有行有功用而证得的,不是通过镇伏盖等敌对法而证得,不是通过遮止其他烦恼而证得,只因为是依阿罗汉道果本身而生起,所以不是有行镇伏遮止所行;这样观察的阿罗汉,他自己的智见就现前了。应当以这五种智见来审察、了知那个阿罗汉果定。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ pañcavidhañāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayaṃ samādhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi appitappitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattisukhattā paccuppannasukho hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa assa arahato paccattameva ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi āyatiṃ samāpajjitabbassa arahattaphalasamādhissa upanissayapaccayattā āyatiṃ sukhavipāko hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi kilesaarīhi ārakattā ariyo, kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvato nirāmiso ca hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi akāpurisehi sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhasāvakabuddhehi sevitabbattā akāpurisasevito hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi aṅgasantakilesadarathasantattā santo ceva divasampi samāpajjantassa atittikaraṇato paṇīto ca paṭippassaddhakilesena arahatā puggalena laddhattā paṭippassaddhiladdho ca arahattamaggasamādhisaṅkhātena ekodibhāvena adhigatattā ekodibhāvādhigato ca sasaṅkhārena sapayogena adhigatattā, nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhamme niggayha anadhigatattā, aññe kilese vāretvā anadhigatattā, arahattamaggaphalabhāveneva pavattattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa assa arahato paccattameva ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavatīti pañcavidhena ñāṇadassanena so arahattaphalasamādhi vicayitvā veditabboti.
有人问:在现在乐等诸定当中,有多少是止,有多少是观?因为要回答这个问题,所以说了“其中,那现法乐的定”等话。这里说的止和观,指的是阿拉汉果位的止和观,不是前行阶段的止和观。导师说,阿拉汉果定应当从五个方面来理解。有人问:那阿拉汉果定在它前行行道当中所说的定,应当从几个方面来理解?因为要回答这个问题,所以说了“那定应当从五个方面来理解”。在色界第四禅定中,前行行道所说的定,也就是这色界第四禅定,应当从五种方式来理解。有人问:是哪五种?因为要回答这个问题,所以说了“喜遍满”等。在初禅和二禅中,慧是喜遍满。在初禅、二禅、三禅中,慧是乐遍满。在第四禅中,他心智是心遍满。天眼智是光明遍满。观察禅那之后生起的慧是观察相。这样,应当从五种慧的方式审察了知。有人问:在这五种方式当中,有多少是止,有多少是观?因为要回答这个问题,所以说了“其中,那喜遍满的”等话。巴利
‘‘Paccuppannasukhādīsu samādhīsu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo ca samādhi paccuppannasukho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samatho, vipassanāti ca arahattaphalasamathavipassanāva adhippetā, na pubbabhāgasamathavipassanāti. Arahattaphalasamādhi pañcavidhena veditabboti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘tassa arahattaphalasamādhissa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto samādhi kittakena veditabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto, so rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi pañcavidhena pakārena veditabbo. ‘‘Katamenā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘pītipharaṇatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā hoti. Paṭhamadutiyatatiyajjhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā hoti. Catutthajjhāne cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā hoti. Dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā hoti. Jhānaṃ paccavekkhitvā pavattamānapaññā paccavekkhaṇānimittaṃ hoti. Iti pañcavidhena paññāpakārena vicayitvā veditabboti. ‘‘Tesu pañcavidhesu pakāresu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo ca pītipharaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
55 老师已经按相应关系分别解说了定,我们也已经了解。因为有人会问“那按所缘又是怎么分别的”,所以接着说了“十遍处”等内容。应当通过这十种所缘,也就是各种遍处,去审察并了知定。因为有人会问“在这十种当中,多少属于止,多少属于观”,所以又说了“其中,那……”等内容。所谓“遍处”,既可以指遍处的圆盘,也可以指准备工作,也可以指似相,还可以指在似相上生起的禅那;但在这里,只指与相应心所共同生起的禅那。巴利
55. Sampayogavasena samādhi ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ ārammaṇavasena vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dasa kasiṇāyatanānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imehi dasahi ārammaṇehi kasiṇehipi samādhi vicinitvā veditabboti. ‘‘Tesu dasasu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kasiṇanti ca kasiṇamaṇḍalampi parikammampi paṭibhāganimittampi tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte uppannajjhānampi vuccati, idha pana sasampayuttajjhānameva adhippetaṃ.
有人会问:是不是只有前面说的那种定,才应该用来修止观?还是别的定也可以用来修?为了说明应当把由念处等前行修行类别所区分的、种种不同而无遗余的圣道都审察之后加以运用,所以说了“如是,一切”等话。其中,“如是”的意思是:按照我所说的方式,遵循所说的理路,由念处等前行修行类别所区分的、种种不同而无遗余的圣道,都应当加以运用。怎么运用呢?凡是我以无贪等行相、以当下安乐等行相所说的定,就以这些无贪等行相、当下安乐等行相,凡是能够以止来运用的圣道,就审察那条圣道而以止来运用;凡是能够以观来运用的圣道,就审察那条圣道而以观来运用。应当这样理解其中的意思。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ pana vuttappakāro samādhiyeva samathavipassanāya yojetabbo, udāhu aññopi yojetabbo’’ti vattabbattā satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno niravaseso ariyamaggopi vicayitvā yojetabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sabbo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti mayā vuttanayena vuttanayānusārena sabbo niravaseso satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno ariyo maggo yojetabbo. Kathaṃ? Yena yena anabhijjhādiākārena paccuppannasukhatādiākārena samādhi mayā vutto, tena tena anabhijjhādiākārena paccuppannasukhatādiākārena yo yo ariyamaggo samathena yojetuṃ sambhavati, so so ariyamaggo samathena vicayitvā yojayitabbo. Yo yo ariyamaggo vipassanāya yojetuṃ sambhavati, so so ariyamaggo vipassanāya yojayitvā yojayitabboti attho gahetabbo.
应当被问的是:那些要用来与止的所依相应的观法,到底被哪些法所包含?因此说,它们被三种法所包含,也就是无常性、苦性、无我性。那些以止为所依的观法,是被三种随观法所包含、所摄取的,也就是无常性慧、苦性慧、无我性慧。意思是:由于随观慧与无常性等一起生起,所以随观慧也被称为无常性、苦性、无我性。巴利
‘‘Yehi samathādhiṭṭhānehi vipassanādhammehi yojayitabbo, te samathādhiṭṭhānā vipassanādhammā katamehi dhammehi saṅgahitā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘te tīhi dhammehi saṅgahitā aniccatāya dukkhatāya anattatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, te samathādhiṭṭhānā vipassanādhammā ‘‘aniccatāya paññāya dukkhatāya paññāya anattatāya paññāyā’’ti tīhi anupassanādhammehi saṅgahitā gaṇhitāti attho. Aniccatādinā sahacaraṇato anupassanāpaññāpi ‘‘aniccatā dukkhatā anattatā’’ti vuccati.
因为要问的是:那位瑜伽行者、那个人,在修习以止为依托的观时,他修习的是什么?所以说了“他正在修习止观”等话。巴利
‘‘Yo yogī puggalo samathādhiṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno hoti, so yogī puggalo kiṃ bhāvayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
正在修习止观等法的人,可以分为三种:贪行者、嗔行者、痴行者。因为需要这样发问:“其中,哪种人以哪种解脱门出离?在哪种法上修学?断除什么?不随行什么?遍知什么?驱除什么?抖落什么?舍弃什么?熄灭什么?拔除什么?解开什么而出离?”所以才说了“贪行者”等这些话。不过,注释书里说:“现在,为了说明哪些人在哪里修学时,有特别的出离之门,以及哪些烦恼的对治是三种解脱门,并连同它们一起显示出来,所以说了‘贪行者’等。”这个意思在注释书(《导论注》第55章)里也已经说过了。巴利
Samathavipassanādīni bhāvayamāno puggalo rāgacarito dosacarito mohacaritoti tividho, ‘‘tattha katamo puggalo katamena katamena vimokkhamukhena niyyāti, katamāyaṃ katamāyaṃ sikkhanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ pajahanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ anupagacchanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ parijānanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ pavāhento, katamaṃ katamaṃ niddhunanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ vamento, katamaṃ katamaṃ nibbāpento, katamaṃ katamaṃ uppāṭento, katamaṃ katamaṃ vijaṭento niyyātī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘rāgacarito puggalo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni yesaṃ puggalānaṃ yattha sikkhantānaṃ visesato niyyānamukhāni, yesañca kilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni, tehi saddhiṃ tāni dassetuṃ ‘rāgacarito’tiādi vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tassatthopi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vuttoyeva.
因为需要说明“为什么修习三种解脱门就是在修习三蕴”,所以接着说了“其中,空解脱门”等话。这里的“其中”,是指在三种解脱门当中。空解脱门是慧蕴,因为无我随观是以慧为主的;无相解脱门是定蕴,因为无常随观是以定为主的;无愿解脱门是戒蕴,因为苦随观是以戒为主的。这样一来,由于三种解脱门含摄了三蕴,所以那位修习三种解脱门的瑜伽行者,就是在修习三蕴。这种“以慧为主”等的说法,在注释书(《导论注》第55节)中已经讲过。修习三蕴,就是在修习圣八支道。因为需要说明“为什么修习”,为了显示其中的理由,所以说了“其中,那些……”等话。巴利
‘‘Kasmā tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto tayo khandhe bhāvayatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha suññatavimokkhamukha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu tīsu vimokkhamukhesu. Suññatavimokkhamukhaṃ paññākkhandho anattānupassanāya paññāpadhānattā. Animittavimokkhamukhaṃ samādhikkhandho aniccānupassanāya samādhipadhānattā. Appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ sīlakkhandho dukkhānupassanāya sīlapadhānattā. Iti tīhi vimokkhamukhehi tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ saṅgahitattā tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto so yogī puggalo tayo khandhe bhāvayatiyevāti paññāpadhānādibhāvo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vutto. Tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayati. ‘‘Kasmā bhāvayatī’’ti vattabbattā kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
三蕴与圣八支道的关系已经分别解说清楚,我们也已经了解了。因为需要说明“止观的状态应该如何了知”,为了显示三蕴的止观状态,所以说了“其中,戒蕴……”等话。因为需要问“修习止观的瑜伽行者,他的有分心进入哪种修习”,所以说了“修习止观者的……”等话。身和心这两种有分,作为再生有的组成部分,进入修习、增长。戒和定这两项、这两种足,作为导向有灭的行道,进入修习、增长。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ ariyaaṭṭhaṅgikamaggabhāvo vibhatto, amhehi ca jānito, ‘‘kathaṃ samathavipassanābhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ samathavipassanābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha sīlakkhandho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yo yogī puggalo samathavipassanaṃ bhāveti, tassa yogino puggalassa bhavaṅgāni katamaṃ bhāvanaṃ gacchantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yo samathavipassanaṃ bhāveti, tassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyo ca cittañca dve bhavaṅgāni upapattibhavassa aṅgāni bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ gacchanti. Sīlañca samādhi ca dve padāni dve pādā bhavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ gacchanti.
因为要回答“如何进入”,所以说了“他是比丘”等话。已修身,意思是身已被修习,也就是身正行或身律仪被那位比丘修习了,所以叫已修身。其余几项也是同样的道理。当身正行或身律仪被修习时,正业和正精进这两法就进入修习,因为它们属于身行戒。当戒依语律仪和活命律仪而运作、戒被修习时,正语和正命这两法就进入修习,因为它们属于语等律仪戒。当心依心律仪而运作、心被修习时,正念和正定这两法就进入修习,因为它们属于心律仪戒。当慧被修习时,正见和正思惟这两法就进入修习,因为它们性质相同,而且能起辅助作用。因为以正思惟反复思惟的人,他的慧就会增长。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ gacchantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so hoti bhikkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhāvitakāyoti bhāvito kāyo kāyaābhisamācāriko, kāyasaṃvaro vā yena bhikkhunāti bhāvitakāyo. Sesesupi esa nayo. Kāye kāyaābhisamācārike, kāyasaṃvare vā bhāviyamāne sati sammākammanto, sammāvāyāmo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti kāyasamācārasīlattā. Sīle vācāsaṃvaraājīvasaṃvaravasena pavatte sīle bhāviyamāne sati sammāvācā ca sammāājīvo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti vācādisaṃvarasīlattā. Citte cittasaṃvaravasena pavatte citte bhāviyamāne sati sammāsati ca sammāsamādhi ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti cittasaṃvarasīlattā. Paññāya bhāviyamānāya sati sammādiṭṭhi ca sammāsaṅkappo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti samānattā, upakārakattā ca. Sammāsaṅkappena hi punappunaṃ saṅkappantassa paññā vaḍḍhatīti.
有人问:“正业和正精进这两种法,是只按身体来区分观察,还是按心来区分观察?”为了回答这个问题,所以说了“其中,凡是正业……”等话。凡是属于身善行之思的正业,以及和它一起生起的正精进,可以算作身体这一类;凡是属于远离的正业,以及和它一起生起的正精进,可以算作心这一类。在这两类当中,属于身体类的正业和正精进,当身体的行为或身体的防护被修习时,这些正业和正精进就进入修习;属于心类的正业和正精进,当心的防护被修习时,这些正业和正精进就进入修习。应当这样连接理解。巴利
‘‘Sammākammanto ca sammāvāyāmo ca dve dhammā kāyavaseneva vibhattā vicetabbā kiṃ, udāhu cittavasena vibhattā vicetabbā ki’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo ca sammākammanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyasucaritacetanābhūto yo ca sammākammanto, taṃsahito yo ca sammāvāyāmo siyā kāyiko, viratibhūto yo ca sammākammanto, taṃsahito yo ca sammāvāyāmo siyā cetasiko, tattha tesu kāyikacetasikabhūtesu sammākammantasammāvāyāmesu yo sammākammantasammāvāyāmo kāyasaṅgaho, so sammākammantasammāvāyāmo kāye kāyaābhisamācārike, kāyasaṃvare vā bhāvite sati bhāvanaṃ gacchati. Yo sammākammantasammāvāyāmo cittasaṅgaho, so sammākammantasammāvāyāmo citte cittasaṃvare bhāvite sati bhāvanaṃ gacchatīti yojanā.
为了探究“修习止观的瑜伽行者能达到什么样的证得”,所以说了“他修习止观”等话。为了显示五种圣道的证得,所以说了“速证得”等话。这些话的含义在注释书里已经分别说明了。为了回答“由什么而得到哪一种证得”这个问题,所以说了“其中,由止”等话。巴利
‘‘Samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayanto so yogī puggalo kittakaṃ adhigamaṃ gacchatī’’ti vicayitabbattā ‘‘so samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañcavidhaṃ ariyamaggādhigamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘khippādhigamo cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vibhatto. ‘‘Kena katamo adhigamo hotī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha samathenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
56 导师为了引导所教化的弟子,从阿拉汉果解脱的角度,对“以未防护之心”等经句的含义进行了探究和分别解说,我们也已经了解。因为有人问“具足十力的说法者,他的十力应当如何探究”,所以说了“其中,凡是说法的人,他就具足十力”等话。不过在注释书里——巴利
56. ‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’’tiādisuttattho veneyyānaṃ arahattaphalavimuttimukhena ācariyena vicayito vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘desakassa dasabalasamannāgatassa dasa balāni kathaṃ vicayitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo desayati, so dasabalasamannāgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
大长老这样以“因此,对于守护心的人”这首偈颂为切入点,通过阿罗汉果解脱的门径,开示了思择理趣的相应方式;他又凭借说法的善巧,借助许多经句,从各个方面分别说明了那前行道的修习差别和修习功德,从而展示了思择理趣。现在,为了以十种如来之力也来展示这一点,所以说了“其中,凡是说法的人”等话。巴利
‘‘Iti mahāthero ‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’ti gāthāya vasena arahattaphalavimuttimukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ niddisanto, desanākusalatāya anekehi suttappadesehi tassā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhāvanāvisesānaṃ bhāvanānisaṃsānañca vibhajanavasena nānappakārato vicayahāraṃ dassetvā, idāni dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘tattha yo desayatī’tiādimāhā’’ti –
已说。其中“在那些地方”,是指在那些应当被教导、应当被调伏而修习止观的弟子们当中。具足十力的那位说法者、导师,宣说“以未防护的心”等法,通过教诫不欺骗弟子——应当探究这位说法者、导师的十力。这就是句子的连接方式。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayantesu sāsitabbasāsakesu. Dasabalasamannāgato yo desako satthā ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’tiādidhammaṃ deseti, ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayati, tassa desakassa satthuno dasa balāni vicayitabbānīti yojanā.
因为要问“他是怎么教导的?”,所以说了“那三种”等话。在十种如来力当中,处非处智就叫第一种如来力。因为要问“这种力应该怎么探究?”,所以说了“他这样被教诫”等话。它的含义在注释书里已经说过,从经文本身来看也很清楚。知道“这个处不存在”,这叫非处智;知道“这个处存在”,这叫处智。应当明白,这里的意思是:了知处与非处的智慧,应当被探究为第一种如来力。巴利
‘‘Kinti desetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so tividha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tesu dasasu tathāgatabalesu ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ nāma, ‘‘taṃ balaṃ kathaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so tathā ovadito’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 56) vutto, pāḷivasenapi pākaṭo. ‘‘Etaṃ ṭhānaṃ na vijjatī’’ti jānanaṃ aṭṭhānañāṇaṃ nāma, ‘‘etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti jānanaṃ ṭhānañāṇaṃ nāmāti ṭhānāṭṭhānānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti adhippāyo veditabbo. (1)
57 处非处智是第一如来力,已由导师探究、分别,我们也已了知。因为需要问“遍行道智——第二如来力——应当如何探究”,所以说了“如是处非处性”等话。“这条道导向这种生命状态,这条道导向这种生命状态”,像这样了知导向一切处的道的智慧,就叫遍行道智。这里的意趣是:遍行道智应当被探究为第二如来力。巴利
57. Ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyatathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti ṭhānāṭṭhānatā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ paṭipadā imasmiṃ bhave gāminī, ayaṃ paṭipadā imasmiṃ bhave gāminī’’ti sabbattha gāminiyā paṭipadāya jānanañāṇaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ nāmāti sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti adhippāyo. (2)
59 遍行道智这第二如来力,老师已经抉择过,我们也已经知道。因为需要问“怎样抉择种种界智这第三如来力”,所以说了“如是遍行道”等话。所谓“这个界和这个界,就叫种种界;这个界和这个界,就叫差别界”,这样了知种种界和差别界的智慧,就叫种种界智。因此,种种界智应当被抉择为第三如来力。巴利
59. Sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti sabbatthagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ dhātu ca ayaṃ dhātu ca anekadhātu nāma, ayaṃ dhātu ca ayaṃ dhātu ca nānādhātu nāmā’’ti anekadhātunānādhātūnaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ nāmāti anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (3)
60 老师已经抉择并分别了种种界、种种差别界的智慧,也就是第三如来力,我们也已经了解了。因为有人要问:“怎样抉择有情种种意乐智,也就是第四如来力呢?”所以说了“如是种种界、种种差别界的世间”等话。所谓“这些有情是这样的意乐,这些有情是这样的意乐”,这样了知有情种种意乐的智慧,就叫有情种种意乐智。因此,有情种种意乐智应当被抉择为第四如来力。巴利
60. Anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti anekadhātunānādhātukassa lokassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ime sattā evaṃ adhimuttā, ime sattā evaṃ adhimuttā’’ti sattānaṃ adhimuccanānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (4)
众生种种意乐智是第四如来力,已由老师分别,也为我们所知。因为应当问:如何抉择果报差别智这第五如来力?所以说了“如是他们随其意乐”等话。所谓“如是意乐的众生,此业是黑,这黑业的果报是这样;此业是白,这白业的果报是这样”,像这样了知各种果报差别的智慧,就叫果报差别智。因此,果报差别智应当被抉择为第五如来力。巴利
Sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti te yathādhimuttā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ adhimuttānaṃ sattānaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ kaṇhaṃ, imassa kaṇhakammassa ayaṃ vipāko. Idaṃ kammaṃ sukkaṃ, imassa sukkakammassa ayaṃ vipāko’’ti evamādīhi vipākānaṃ nānattajānanañāṇaṃ vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti.
62 果报差别智这第五种如来力,老师已经抉择过了,我们也已经了解。因为接下来要问“诸禅那的杂染、清净、出离智这第六种如来力应当如何抉择”,所以说了“如是所取……”等话。对于如此所取的诸业、诸禅那、诸解脱、诸定、诸等至,这是杂染,这是清净,这是出离;如是杂染,如是清净,如是出离——这样了知诸禅那杂染、清净、出离的无碍智,就叫做诸禅那杂染清净出离智。因此,诸禅那杂染清净出离智应当抉择为第六种如来力。巴利
62. Vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tathā samādinnāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ samādinnānaṃ kammānaṃ jhānānaṃ vimokkhānaṃ samādhīnaṃ samāpattīnaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso, idaṃ vodānaṃ, idaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ saṃkilissati, evaṃ vodāyati, evaṃ vuṭṭhahatī’’ti jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānānaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ nāmāti jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (5)
63 诸禅那的杂染智是第六如来力,已由老师抉择。因为应当问“如何抉择根的高下差别智为第七如来力”,所以说了“如是,对于同一定……”等。通过了知“如此,以增上之义为根,以不动摇之义为力”,再加上了知“此人是钝根、此人是中根、此人是利根”——对其他有情、其他人的根与力,了知其钝、中、利差别的智,就叫做根的高下差别智。因此,根的高下差别智应当抉择为第七如来力。巴利
63. Jhānānaṃ saṃkilesañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tasseva samādhissā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ ādhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyāni, evaṃ akampiyaṭṭhena balānī’’ti jānanena saha ‘‘ayaṃ mudindriyo, ayaṃ majjhindriyo, ayaṃ tikkhindriyo’’ti parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyabalānaṃ amudumajjhādhimattatājānanañāṇaṃamudumajjhādhimattatājānanañāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (6)
64 第七如来力——根器高下差别智,已由老师抉择。因为接下来要问“第八如来力——宿住随念智该怎么抉择”“第九如来力——天眼智该怎么抉择”,所以说了“如是,于彼处,凡种种……”等话。以“一生……”等,按生的方式;或以“名为如此……”等,按名、族姓、容色、食物、苦乐感受的界限方式,对有相、有说明的种种宿住,对一一有的一切无余了知之智,名为宿住随念智。因此,宿住随念智应抉择为第八如来力。巴利
64. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbaṃ, kathaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ navamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tattha yaṃ anekavihita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekaṃ jāti’’ntiādinā jātivasena vā ‘‘evaṃnāmo’’tiādinā nāmagottavaṇṇāhārasukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedanāya pariyantavasena vā sākārassa sauddesassa anekavihitapubbenivāsassa taṃtaṃbhavassa asesato jānanañāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ nāmāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (7)
对于正在死去和投生的众生,无论他们是低劣还是殊胜、容貌好看还是难看、投生善趣还是恶趣、随各自业力而去,都能毫无遗漏地了知他们死亡与投生的智慧,就叫作天眼智。因此,天眼智应当被认定为第九如来力。巴利
Cavamānaupapajjamānahīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇasugataduggatayathākammūpagānaṃ sattānaṃ asesato cutūpapātānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ nāmāti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ navamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (8-9)
老师已经分析并区分了宿住随念智等第八、第九两种如来力。因为有人要问“怎样分析一切漏尽智这第十种如来力”,所以说了“如是,于彼处,凡……”等话。在菩提树下生起的、能灭除烦恼魔的智慧,这灭除烦恼魔的智慧就叫一切漏尽智。因此,一切漏尽智应当被分析为第十种如来力——这是简要的含义。至于详细展开,无论从巴利圣典还是从注疏来看,对比丘学子们来说本来就已经很清楚,所以就不再展示了。巴利
Pubbenivāsādiaṭṭhamanavamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ dasamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tattha ya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Bodhimūle saṃkilesamāranihanaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ, idaṃ kilesamāranihanaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ nāmāti sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ dasamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Vitthārato pana pāḷito ca aṭṭhakathāto ca yatipotānampi pākaṭo bhaveyyāti maññitvā na dassito.(10)
因为必须说“抉择与摄取的组合到此就完整了”,所以才说“抉择与摄取的组合已经运用”。凡是所说的各段经文之义,都应当通过各自那种作为殊胜解说的抉择与摄取组合来抉择;而每一种作为殊胜解说的抉择与摄取组合,都已经如理引出并加以运用——这就是应当把握的意思。巴利
‘‘Ettakova vicayahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vicayo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Ye ye suttappadesatthā vuttā, te te suttappadesatthā yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vicayahārasampātena vicayitabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vicayahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,在抉择摄取的运用中,按照众生的根机能力而造。巴利
Iti vicayahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者应当采纳……中略……巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
理摄集的详细说明巴利
3. Yuttihārasampātavibhāvanā
65 老师以各种审察摄的方式,对经文段落中的义理进行审察,而这些我们也已经了知,那么这种审察摄就是圆满的。因为有人问“什么是理趣摄?”,所以接着说了“其中,什么是理趣摄?”等等。不过,在义注中则说:“这样以种种理趣详细阐述了审察摄之后,现在为了显示理趣摄等,所以开始说‘其中,什么是理趣摄?’等等。”这里“其中”是指,在他们所讲说的十六种摄——即教说摄等——当中,问的是:哪一种解说类别叫做理趣摄?这样问了之后,为了引出那个经文段落——也就是应当在那段经文所说诸义中审察其理趣性的那段经文——巴利
65. Yena yena vicayahārasampātena suttappadesatthā ācariyena vicayitabbā, amhehi ca ñātā, so vicayahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo yuttihārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ nānānayehi vicayahārasampātaṃ vitthāretvā idāni yuttihārasampātādīni dassetuṃ ‘tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 65) vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihārasampāto nāmāti pucchati, pucchitvā yasmiṃ suttappadese vuttānaṃ atthānaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo, taṃ suttappadesaṃ nīharituṃ –
因此,对于守护自心的人,正思惟就是他的行境;
以正见为先导,了知生灭;
降伏了昏沉睡眠的比丘,将舍弃一切恶趣。巴利
‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro; Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ; Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti. (udā. 32; netti. 31, 78) –
已说。在这个偈颂里,因为不守护心的人随顺魔的势力,所以比丘应当通过守护念、守护根门等方式,成为守护心的人;因为以欲寻等邪思惟为行境的人随顺魔的势力,所以比丘应当通过出离寻等方式,成为以正思惟为行境的人;因为被邪见损坏了心的人随顺魔的势力,所以比丘应当通过如理作意,了知生灭,成为以正见为先导的人;因为被昏沉睡眠损坏了心的人随顺魔的势力,所以比丘应当通过精进力,成为降伏昏沉睡眠的人。这样的比丘将舍断一切恶趣,应当知道,这就是“将舍断”的意思。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ tasmā arakkhitacittassa māravasānugatattā satisaṃvaraindriyasaṃvarādivasena bhikkhu rakkhitacitto assa bhaveyya, tasmā kāmavitakkādimicchāsaṅkappagocarassa māravasānugatattā nekkhammasaṅkappādivasena bhikkhu sammāsaṅkappagocaro assa bhaveyya, tasmā micchādiṭṭhihatacittassa māravasānugatattā yonisomanasikārena bhikkhu udayabbayaṃ ñatvāna sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro assa bhaveyya, tasmā thinamiddhena hatacittassa māravasānugatattā vīriyavasena bhikkhu thinamiddhābhibhū assa bhaveyya, tādiso bhikkhu sabbā duggatiyo jahe jahissatīti attho veditabbo.
在这首偈颂里,应当如何审察它是否合乎道理呢?因为需要这样说明,所以接着说了“因此,对于守护心的人”等话。对于守护心的人来说,其行境会成为正思惟,这个道理是成立的,并非不成立。又因为已经舍弃了邪思惟,所以当他以正见为前导而安住时,必将通达生灭,这个道理也成立,因为以正见为前导的人,不可能没有生灭随观。通达生灭的人,必将舍断一切恶趣,这个道理成立,因为依照生灭随观的次第,圣道必然会生起。舍断一切恶趣的人,将超越一切恶趣堕落的怖畏,这个道理成立,因为一切恶趣堕落的怖畏已不再生起。巴利
‘‘Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ kathaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro bhavissatīti attho yujjati eva, no na yujjati. Micchāsaṅkappānampi jahitattā sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro hutvā viharanto udayabbayaṃ paṭivijjhissatīti attho yujjati sammādiṭṭhipurekkhārassa udayabbayānupassanāsambhavato. Udayabbayaṃ paṭivijjhanto sabbā duggatiyo jahissatīti attho yujjati udayabbayānupassanānukkamena ariyamaggasambhavato. Sabbā duggatiyo jahanto sabbāni duggativinipātabhayāni samatikkamissatīti attho yujjati sabbesaṃ duggativinipātabhayānaṃ anuppajjanato.
因为要说明“只有这一点理趣摄已经圆满”,所以说了“已配合理趣摄”。凡是作为释解差别、用来审察经文段落义理的理趣摄,都应当拿来推究它是否与经文相应;这些作为释解差别的理趣摄,都应按照适当的方式确定下来并加以配合——应当这样理解其含义。巴利
‘‘Ettakova yuttihārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto yuttihārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena yuttihārasampātena suttappadesatthānaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo , so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto yuttihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,在理趣摄的编排中,按照众生根机能力而撰写。巴利
Iti yuttihārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
然而,智者应当把握……(中略)……巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
第四,词基摄的分别阐明巴利
4. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātavibhāvanā
66 老师通过某种理趣摄的方式,已经清楚说明了经文段落的义理,而我们也已经了解了,那么这种理趣摄就算讲完了。因为接下来应该问“什么是词基摄”,所以就问:在这里,什么是词基摄?巴利
66. Yena yena yuttihārasampātena suttappadesatthānaṃ yuttibhāvo ācariyena vibhāvito, amhehi ca ñāto, so yuttihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo padaṭṭhānahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto’’ti pucchati.
问完以后,为了引出那段经文里所举出的近因,就说出了“因此,守护心者,正思惟为行境”这首偈颂。偈颂的意思前面已经说过。因为应当问“哪些是偈颂的意思,哪些法的近因”,所以说了“因此,守护心者”等。“因此,守护心者”这段经文的意思,是守护诸根之门,它被称为三种善行的近因,因为它是使善行圆满的近因。“正思惟为行境”这段经文的意思,是出离思惟等正思惟,它被称为止的近因,因为它是镇伏欲欲等诸盖的近因。“正见为先导”这段经文的意思,是业自性正见和见有缘的名色正见,它被称为观的近因,因为它是无常随观等的殊胜原因。“了知生灭”这段经文的意思,是生灭随观慧,它被称为见地的近因,因为它是证得初道的近因。“战胜昏沉睡眠的比丘”这段经文的意思,是战胜昏沉睡眠,它被称为精进的近因,因为它是精进的近因。“舍断一切恶趣”这段经文的意思,是修习应当舍断的法,它被称为修习圣道的近因,因为通过舍断应当舍断的法,就能生起圣道修习的圆满。巴利
Pucchitvā yasmiṃ suttappadese vuttāni padaṭṭhānāni nīharitāni, taṃ suttappadesaṃ nīharituṃ ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaroti gāthā’’ti vuttā. Gāthāttho vuttova. ‘‘Katame gāthātthā katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā indriyesu guttadvāratā tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma sucaritapāripūriyā āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā nekkhammasaṅkappādayo sammāsaṅkappā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kāmacchandaādinīvaraṇavikkhambhanassa āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā kammassakatāsammādiṭṭhi ca sappaccayanāmarūpadassanasammādiṭṭhi ca vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma aniccānupassanādīnaṃ visesakāraṇattā. ‘‘Ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā udayabbayānupassanāpaññā dassanabhūmiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma paṭhamamaggādhigamassa āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā pahātabbajahanabhāvanāya ariyamaggabhāvanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma pahātabbappahānena ariyamaggabhāvanāpāripūrisambhavato.
应当说“只有这一些词基摄的汇集才算圆满”,所以才说“词基摄已经配置好了”。意思是:凡是依照某种作为特定解说方式的词基摄,把经文段落中的义理引出来作为词基,那么这种作为特定解说方式的词基摄就已经配置好了,应当根据情况加以确定并配合起来理解。巴利
‘‘Ettakova padaṭṭhānahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena padaṭṭhānahārasampātabhūtena suttappadesatthāni padaṭṭhānāni nīharitāni, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto padaṭṭhānahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者应当把握……中略……巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
第五,特相摄取法的阐明巴利
5. Lakkhaṇahārasampātavibhāvanā
67 凡是靠着某种“近因摄取法”而由导师确定、又被我们了知的经文段落之义理近因,这种“近因摄取法”就算完整了。因为接下来要问“什么是相之摄取法?”,所以说了“其中,什么是相之摄取法?”等话。在这里,也就是在以宣说摄取法等为首的十六种摄取法当中,他问:哪一种特殊的诠释方式叫作“相之摄取法”?巴利
67. Yena yena padaṭṭhānahārasampātena suttappadesatthāni padaṭṭhānāni ācariyena niddhāritāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, so padaṭṭhānahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo lakkhaṇahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
因为要问“与哪些经义具有共同特征的法被摄取了呢”,所以说了“因此”等话。通过“因此,对于守护心的人,正思惟是行境”这段经文所说的这种守护,就是摄取了念根;念根被摄取时,信等五根也就被摄取了,因为它们都以“根”的含义而具有共同特征。通过“以正见为前导”这段经文所说的正见被摄取了;正见被摄取时,八支圣道也就被摄取了。这是什么原因呢?这里提问原因。提问之后,用“因为从正见……”等话说明原因:因为正思惟从正见生起,所以;因为正语从正思惟生起,所以;因为正业从正语生起,所以;因为正命从正业生起,所以;因为正精进从正命生起,所以;因为正念从正精进生起,所以;因为正定从正念生起,所以;因为正解脱从正定生起,所以;因为正解脱智见从正解脱生起,所以,八支圣道就被摄取了。巴利
‘‘Katamehi suttatthehi samānalakkhaṇā katame dhammā gahitā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti suttappadesena vuttaṃ idaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ satindriyaṃ gahitaṃ, satindriye gahite saddhādipañcindriyāni gahitāni bhavanti indriyaṭṭhena samānalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti suttappadesena vuttā sammādiṭṭhi gahitā, sammādiṭṭhiyā gahitāya ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo gahito bhavati. Taṃ kissa hetūti kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Pucchitvā kāraṇamāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhito hī’’tiādinā. Sammādiṭṭhihetuto sammāsaṅkappo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsaṅkappato sammāvācā hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvācāto sammākammanto hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammākammantato sammāājīvo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāājīvato sammāvāyāmo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvāyāmato sammāsatihi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsatito sammāsamādhi hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsamādhito sammāvimutti hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvimuttito sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo gahito bhavatīti.
应当说“相摄法的运用到此才算完整”,所以才说“相摄法已经运用起来了”。意思是:无论通过哪一种作为特殊解释方式的相摄法,只要经文段落的意义被以相同特征统摄起来,那么这种作为特殊解释方式的相摄法就已经按各自适当的方式确定并运用了,这样才算真正把握了它的含义。巴利
‘‘Ettakova lakkhaṇahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto lakkhaṇo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena lakkhaṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā samānalakkhaṇena gahitā bhavanti, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto lakkhaṇahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahitoti.
就这样,在“相之摄取法”这一部分中,是依照众生的能力而撰写的。巴利
Iti lakkhaṇahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
智者……(中略)……应当这样理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
四种组合的摄取法的详细说明巴利
6. Catubyūhahārasampātavibhāvanā
68 凡是靠某种“相之摄取法”把经文段落的意思以相同特征统摄起来的,这种相之摄取法就算圆满了。因为接下来应当问“什么是四种配列的摄取法”,所以说了“其中,什么是四种配列的摄取法”等话。在这里,就是在以教说摄取法等为首的十六种摄取法当中发问:哪一种特别的解释方式,叫做“四种配列的摄取法”?巴利
68. Yena yena lakkhaṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā samānalakkhaṇena gahitā, so lakkhaṇahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo catubyūhahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo catubyūho hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūhahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
有人问:“在哪部经里,确定了哪些语源、意趣、缘起和前后关联?”因为需要这样发问,所以说了“因此”等话。在“因此,护心者”这一经文片段中,用“被守护、被保护”来说明“护”这个词的语源,并通过“被周全地守护”这个说法来显示。又因为“iti”这个词有“这样、如此”的开头之义,所以引出语源说:“思虑,所以叫心;在自己相续中积集,所以叫心;被各种条件所描绘,所以叫心;以种种之义,所以叫心;以造作之义,所以叫心。其心被守护,所以叫护心者。正确地思惟,所以叫正思惟;牛群在这里行走,所以叫行境;像行境一样,所以叫行境;以正思惟为行境,所以叫正思惟行境者。正确地照见,所以叫正见;以正见为前导,所以叫正见前导者。了知,所以叫已知。生起与灭去,叫生灭。昏沉与睡眠,叫昏沉睡眠;超越它,所以叫超越者;超越昏沉睡眠,所以叫昏沉睡眠超越者。乞食,所以叫比丘。”这样,语源也被引出来了。因此说:“‘iti’一词有开头之义。”以上所说的这种施设,就叫做语源。巴利
‘‘Katamasmiṃ sutte katame nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhayo niddhāritā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti suttappadese ‘‘rakkhīyate rakkhita’’nti niruttiṃ ‘‘paripālīyatī’’ti iminā pariyāyena dasseti, itisaddassa ādyatthattā ‘‘cintetīti cittaṃ, attano santānaṃ cinotīti cittaṃ, paccayehi citanti cittaṃ, cittavicittaṭṭhena cittaṃ, cittakaraṇaṭṭhena cittaṃ, rakkhitaṃ cittaṃ yassāti rakkhitacitto. Sammā saṅkappetīti sammāsaṅkappo, gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viyāti gocaro, sammāsaṅkappo gocaro assāti sammāsaṅkappagocaro. Sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi, sammādiṭṭhi purekkhāro assāti sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro. Jānātīti ñatvāna. Udayo ca vayo ca udayabbayaṃ. Thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ, abhibhavatīti abhibhū, thinamiddhaṃ abhibhūti thinamiddhābhibhū. Bhikkhatīti bhikkhū’’ti niruttipi nīharitā. Tenāha – ‘‘iti-saddo ādyattho’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 68). Esā vuttappakārā paññatti nirutti nāmāti nīharitā.
如果有人问:在这段经文里,世尊的用意是什么?那么应该这样理解:凡是想要从一切恶趣中解脱的善士,这些善士都会依法而行、守护自己的心——这就是世尊的用意。在这里,“因此,护心者”等经文段落中,应当这样引出世尊的用意。巴利
Idha suttappadese bhagavato ko adhippāyoti ce puccheyya, ye sappurisā sabbāhi duggatīhi parimuccitukāmā bhavissanti, te sappurisā dhammacārino rakkhitacittā bhavissantīti ayaṃ adhippāyo. Ettha ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādisuttappadese bhagavato adhippāyoti nīharitabbo.
如果有人问:“起因是什么?”那就应当这样引出起因:拘迦利对舍利弗和目犍连两位长老没有守护自己的心,生起了嗔害,因此投生到大莲花地狱;又因为世尊具足正念的守护,能舍离一切恶趣。所以,想要舍离一切恶趣的善士比丘,就应当守护自己的心。巴利
‘‘Katamaṃ nidāna’’nti ce puccheyya, kokāliko sāriputtamoggallānesu theresu cittaṃ arakkhitvā padosayitvā mahāpadumaniraye yasmā upapanno, yasmā bhagavā ca satiārakkhena samannāgato sabbā duggatiyo jahati, tasmā ca sabbā duggatiyo jahitukāmo bhikkhu sappuriso rakkhitacitto assa bhaveyyāti nidānaṃ nīharitabbaṃ.
如果有人问:“什么是前后连结?”经里说“应当以正念守护心”,根据这句前面的话,后面这段经文“因此,守护好心的人……乃至……能舍离一切恶趣”就和它前后相随、相衔接、相会合,这样就能确定前后连结。巴利
‘‘Katamo pubbāparasandhī’’ti ce puccheyya, suttamhi ‘‘satiyā cittaṃ rakkhitabba’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tena pubbavacanena ayaṃ ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa…pe… sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti suttappadeso anusandhi saṃsandati sametīti pubbaparānusandhi niddhāritabboti.
应当说“四支行的摄取法到此才算完整”,所以才说“四支行摄取法已经应用”。无论通过哪一种具体的解释——也就是四支行摄取法——来判定词源、意趣、缘起和前后关联,那种作为具体解释的四支行摄取法,都应按照合适的方式判定并运用,这才是这里要把握的意思。巴利
‘‘Ettakova catubyūhahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto catubyūho hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena catubyūhahārasampātena nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhi niddhāritabbo, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto catubyūhahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,按照众生的能力,撰写了关于四种阵列与句法组合的论述。巴利
Iti catubyūhahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
有智慧的人……中略……应当这样理解。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
回转摄句的阐明巴利
7. Āvaṭṭahārasampātavibhāvanā
69 69. 通过任何一种四聚摄句,词义、意趣、因缘、前后连接都被分别说明了,这四聚摄句就算圆满。因为接下来要问“什么是回转摄句”,所以说了“在此,什么是回转摄句”等话。这里问的是:什么样的特殊诠释叫做回转摄句?巴利
69. Yena yena catubyūhahārasampātena nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhayo vibhattā, so catubyūhahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo āvaṭṭahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
因为要问“哪些经义应当如何回转”,所以说了“因此”等话。心多倾向于出离思惟,也就是名为正思惟的出离寻,以遍处等为所缘;心多倾向于无害思惟,也就是名为正思惟的无害寻,以慈等为所缘;这样安住在所证得的心一境性上,令心安住,便叫作从杂染中守护的心。当说“因此,守护之心以正思惟为行境”时,这里应当回转的一境性,就是这止。当说“以正见为前导”时,这里应当回转的慧,就是这观。当说“了知生灭”时,这里应当回转的遍知苦,就是这苦遍知。当说“比丘克服昏沉睡眠”时,这里依人而说的克服昏沉睡眠,就是这集断除。当说“正确舍弃诸恶趣”时,这里所说的舍弃一切恶趣的不生起,就是这灭。这样,以苦遍知应当回转所应遍知的苦谛,以集断除应当回转所应断除的集谛,以灭应当回转灭谛,以止和观应当回转道谛,这四谛就是应当回转的。巴利
‘‘Katame suttatthā kathaṃ āvaṭṭetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nekkhammasaṅkappasaṅkhātasammāsaṅkappabahulo kasiṇādivasena, avihiṃsāsaṅkappasaṅkhātasammāsaṅkappabahulo mettādivasena adhigatāya cittekaggatāya cittaṃ ṭhapento saṃkilesato rakkhitacitto nāma hoti, ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti iminā rakkhitacitte vutte sati yā ekaggatā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ ekaggatā samatho. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti iminā sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāre vutte sati yā paññā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ paññā vipassanā. ‘‘Ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti iminā udayabbayañāṇasamannāgate vutte sati yā dukkhaparijānanā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ dukkhaparijānanā dukkhapariññā. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū’’ti iminā puggalādhiṭṭhānena yaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ samudayappahānaṃ. ‘‘Sammā duggatiyo jahe’’ti iminā yo sabbaduggatijahanasaṅkhāto anuppādo vutto, so ayaṃ anuppādo nirodho. Iti dukkhapariññāya pariññetabbaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, samudayappahānena pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, nirodhena nirodhasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, samathavipassanāhi maggasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbanti imāni cattāri saccāni āvaṭṭetabbānīti.
因为必须说“回转与行相结合只有这么多,才算圆满”,所以才说“回转与行相结合已经确定”。意思是:凡是作为某种殊胜诠释的回转与行相结合,应当用来回转止等法,那种作为殊胜诠释的回转与行相结合就已经确定,应当根据各自的情况加以抉择并运用。巴利
‘‘Ettakova āvaṭṭo hārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto āvaṭṭo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena āvaṭṭahārasampātena samathādayo āvaṭṭetabbā , so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto āvaṭṭahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,在回转摄句的运用中,按照众生的能力与力量而撰述。巴利
Iti āvaṭṭahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
然而,智者应当采纳……中略……。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
8. 分别摄句的说明巴利
8. Vibhattihārasampātavibhāvanā
70 凡是应当通过某种回转摄句的方式来回转经义的地方,这种回转摄句就算完整了。因为接下来应当问“什么是分别摄句”,所以说了“在此,什么是分别摄句”等等。在这里,问的是:什么样的解释差别,叫做分别摄句?巴利
70. Yena yena āvaṭṭahārasampātena suttatthā āvaṭṭetabbā, so āvaṭṭahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vibhattihārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vibhattihārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
因为要问“哪些经义在哪里被分别”,所以说了“因此,守护之心者”等话。在所说的“因此……行境”这首偈颂里,偈颂中所说的善品法,应当用善品法来指示、分别念防护法,也应当用不善品法来指示、分别。巴利
‘‘Katame suttatthā kattha vibhattā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā…pe… gocaro’’ti gāthā vuttā, tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ vutto kusalapakkho dhammo kusalapakkhena dhammena satisaṃvaro dhammo niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo, akusalapakkhena dhammena niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo.
怎么分呢?用“守护之心者”这句话说到的善品方面的念防护法,应当用六种善品方面的法来指示、分别,也就是:眼门防护……中略……意门防护。用“正思惟”这句话说到的善品方面的正思惟法,应当用三种善品方面的法来分别,也就是:出离思惟、无嗔思惟、无害思惟。用“以正见为前导”这句话说到的善品方面的诸法,应当用八种善品方面的法来分别,也就是:苦智、苦集智、苦灭智、趣向苦灭之道智、前际智、后际智、前后际智、对此缘性及缘起诸法的智。用“了知生灭”这句话说到的善品方面的生灭智诸法,应当用五十种生灭智以善品方面来分别。用“克服昏沉睡眠”这句话说到的克服昏沉睡眠的善品诸法,应当用四种善品方面来分别,也就是:入流道的克服、一来道的克服、不来道的克服、阿拉汉道的克服。巴利
Kathaṃ? ‘‘Rakkhitacittassā’’ti padena vutto kusalapakkho satisaṃvaro dhammo ‘‘cakkhudvārasaṃvaro…pe… manodvārasaṃvaro’’ti chabbidhena kusalapakkhena dhammena niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappo’’ti padena vutto kusalapakkho sammāsaṅkappo dhammo ‘‘nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpāda-saṅkappo avihiṃsāsaṅkappo’’ti tividhena kusalapakkhena dhammena vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti padena vuttā kusalapakkhā dhammajāti ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāya ñāṇaṃ, pubbante ñāṇaṃ, aparante ñāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante ñāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu ñāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 1063) aṭṭhavidhena kusalapakkhena dhammena vibhajitabbā. ‘‘Ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti padena vuttaṃ kusalapakkhaudayabbayañāṇaṃ dhammajātaṃ paññāsavidhena udayabbayañāṇena kusalapakkhena vibhajitabbaṃ. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū’’ti padena vuttaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ kusalapakkhaṃ dhammajātaṃ ‘‘sotāpattimaggābhibhavanaṃ sakadāgāmimaggābhibhavanaṃ anāgāmimaggābhibhavanaṃ arahattamaggābhibhavana’’nti catubbidhena kusalapakkhena vibhajitabbaṃ.
念防护属于善的这一边,应当分成两种来说明:世间念防护和出世间念防护。世间念防护应当只用一种方式来说明,就是欲界念防护。出世间念防护应当分成两种来说明:见地地和修习地。欲界念防护应当分成四种来说明:身随观念防护、受随观念防护、心随观念防护、法随观念防护。出世间念防护也同样分成四种来说明。正思惟和正见也应当按世间与出世间的区别,以两种等方式来分别说明。就现前因来说,也应当依照现前因摄句中所说的方式来分别说明。巴利
Satisaṃvaro kusalapakkho ‘‘lokiyo satisaṃvaro, lokuttaro satisaṃvaro’’ti dubbidhena vibhajitabboti. Lokiyo satisaṃvaro kāmāvacarovāti ekavidhena vibhajitabbo. Lokuttarā satisaṃvaro ‘‘dassanabhūmi, bhāvanābhūmī’’ti dubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Kāmāvacaro satisaṃvaro ‘‘kāyānupassanāsatisaṃvaro vedanānupassanāsatisaṃvaro cittānupassanāsatisaṃvaro dhammānupassanāsatisaṃvaro’’ti catubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Lokuttaro satisaṃvaropi tathā catubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Sammāsaṅkappasammādiṭṭhiyopi lokiyalokuttaravasena dubbidhādibhedena vibhajitabbā. Padaṭṭhānenapi padaṭṭhānahārasampāte vuttanayena vibhajitabbā.
从恶法这一边来说,被“以未防护的心”这句话所说的不防护,应当按八种来分别:眼不防护……乃至……身不防护、动身不防护、语不防护、意不防护。被“被邪见击倒”这句话所包含的邪思惟,应当按三种来分别:欲思惟、瞋思惟、害思惟。被“邪见”这句话所说的邪见,应当按八种来分别:对苦无知……乃至……对缘性缘起所生诸法无知;也应当按六十二种邪见来分别。昏沉睡眠应当按五种有行来分别。巴利
Akusalapakkhena ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti padena vutto asaṃvaro ‘‘cakkhuasaṃvaro …pe… kāyaasaṃvaro, copanakāyaasaṃvaro, vācāasaṃvaro, manoasaṃvaro’’ti aṭṭhavidhena vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Micchādiṭṭhihatenā’’ti padena gahito micchāsaṅkappo ‘‘kāmavitakko byāpādavitakko vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti tividhena vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Micchādiṭṭhī’’ti padena vuttā micchādiṭṭhi ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇaṃ…pe…idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti aṭṭhavidhena vibhajitabbā, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhividhenapi vibhajitabbā. Thinamiddhaṃ pañcavidhena sasaṅkhārikavidhena vibhajitabbaṃ.
应当说“分别摄受至此已经圆满”,所以才说“分别摄受已经运用”。凡是借着某种殊胜诠释的分别摄受,把经文段落的意思分别说明出来,那种殊胜诠释的分别摄受就已经被运用了。这个意思应当这样理解:应当随宜确定并加以运用。巴利
‘‘Ettakova vibhattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vibhattihārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhattihārasampātena suttappadesatthā vibhattā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhattihārasampāto niyuttoti yathāraha niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,在分别摄持法门中,是依照众生的能力而撰作的。巴利
Iti vibhattihārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
然而,智者……应当把握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
转变摄持法门的阐明巴利
9. Parivattanahārasampātavibhāvanā
71 凡是按照某一种分别摄持法门,把经文段落的意思分别说明清楚了,这个分别摄持法门就算圆满了。因为接下来应当问“什么是转变摄持法门”,所以说了“其中,什么是转变摄持法门”等话。巴利
71. Yena yena vibhattihārasampātena suttappadesatthā vibhattā, so vibhattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo parivattanahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo parivattano hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
有人问:“哪些经文段落的含义应该怎样转换?”因为要这样问,所以说了“因此”等话。在“因此……行境”这首偈颂里,所确定的止观,当它被修习之后,不善法的息灭就是它的果、它的利益;苦被遍知,集被断除,道被修习——应该这样转换。反过来,如果没有修习止观,那么不善法就不会息灭,苦不会被遍知,集不会被断除,道不会被修习——应该这样作相反的转换。巴利
‘‘Katame suttappadesatthā kathaṃ parivattetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā…pe… gocaro’’ti gāthā vuttā, tāya gāthāya yā samathavipassanā niddhāritā, tāya samathavipassanāya bhāvitāya akusalānaṃ nirodho phalaṃ payojanaṃ hoti, pariññātaṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, samudayo pahīno hoti, maggo bhāvito hotīti parivattetabbo. Paṭipakkhena pana samathavipassanāya abhāvitāya akusalānaṃ anirodho, apariññātaṃ dukkhaṃ, samudayo appahīno, maggo abhāvito hotīti parivattetabbo.
因为要说明“转变法门结合到这里就圆满了”,所以就说“转变法门结合已经运用”。意思是:凡是能用来把经文段落的意思转变过来的那种特别的解释方式,也就是转变法门结合,应当根据情况把它提取出来并加以运用。巴利
‘‘Ettakova parivattanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto parivattano hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena parivattanahārasampātena suttappadesatthā parivattetabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto parivattanahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
就这样,在转变持持法门的运用中,是依照众生的能力而作的。巴利
Iti parivattanahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
然而,智者应当……中略……如此把握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
同义语摄持法门的阐明巴利
10. Vevacanahārasampātavibhāvanā
72 通过任何一种转变摄持法门来转变经文段落之义时,这个转变摄持法门就是圆满的。由于应当追问“什么是同义语摄持法门”,所以说了“其中什么是同义语摄持法门”等话。巴利
72. Yena yena parivattanahārasampātena suttappadesatthā parivattetabbā, so parivattano hārasampātoti paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vevacano hārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vevacano hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为要问“哪些经文段落之义,或者哪些经文词句,有哪些同义词”,所以说了“因此”等话。在那首“因此……行境”的偈颂里,通过“护心者”这个词所说的心,或者“护心者”这里“心”这个词,所说的“心……能了知”这一说法,就是同义词;“意、心脏”等说法也是心的同义词。在“正思惟为行境”这里,对于正思惟,所说的“出离思惟、无嗔恨思惟、无伤害思惟”这一说法,就是同义词;“寻、伺”等说法也是正思惟的同义词。在“以正见为前导”这里,对于正见这个词,所说的“正见名为慧之矛、慧之剑、慧之宝、慧之驱策、慧之殿堂”这一说法,就是同义词;“慧、了知、简择”等说法也是正见这个词的同义词。所说的“昏沉、昏沉性、昏沉状态,心之不适、心之不堪用、覆盖、遍覆、内收缩”这一说法,就是昏沉的同义词。所说的“身之不适、身之不堪用、身之懈怠、睡眠、睡眠状态、已睡状态”这一说法,就是睡眠的同义词。所说的“乞食者、比丘”等说法,就是比丘这个词的同义词。所说的“恶趣、堕处、倒坠处、轮回之苦、流转”等说法,就是恶趣这个词的同义词。以上就是提取出来的各种同义词。巴利
‘‘Katamesaṃ suttappadesatthānaṃ, suttapadānaṃ vā katamāni vevacanānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā…pe… gocaro’’ti gāthā vuttā, tāya gāthāya ‘‘rakkhitacittassā’’ti padena vuttassa cittassa, ‘‘rakkhitacittassā’’ti ettha cittassa padassa vā ‘‘cittaṃ…pe… vijānitatta’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, ‘‘mānasaṃ hadaya’’ntiādivacanampi (dha. sa. 17, 63) cittassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti ettha sammāsaṅkappassa ‘‘nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpādasaṅkappo avihiṃsāsaṅkappo’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, ‘‘takko vitakko’’tiādi (dha. sa. 7) vacanampi sammāsaṅkappassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti ettha sammādiṭṭhipadassa ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi nāma paññāsatthaṃ paññākhaggo paññāratanaṃ paññāpatodo paññāpāsādo’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, ‘‘paññā pajānanā vicayo’’tiādi (dha. sa. 16) vacanampi sammādiṭṭhipadassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Thinaṃ thiyanā thiyitattaṃ cittassa, cittassa akallatā akammaññatā onāho pariyonāho antosaṅkoco’’ti (dha. sa. 1162-1163) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ thinassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā kāyālasiyaṃ soppaṃ supanā suppitatta’’nti (dha. sa. 1163) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ middhassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhako bhikkhū’’tiādikaṃ (pārā. 45; vibha. 510) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ bhikkhupadassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Duggati apāyo vinipāto vaṭṭadukkhaṃ saṃsāro’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ duggatipadassa vevacanaṃ. Iti vevacanāni nīharitāni.
因为应当说“同义语摄持法门到此就完整了”,所以才说“同义语摄持法门已运用”。凡是作为某种殊胜诠释的同义语摄持法门,借此把诸同义词提取出来,那么该殊胜诠释的同义语摄持法门就已运用——意思是:应当根据具体情况提取之后加以运用,这个含义已经被采纳了。巴利
‘‘Ettakova vevacanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vevacano hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vevacanahārasampātena vevacanāni nīharitāni, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vevacanahārasampāto niyutto yathāsambhavaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahitoti.
然而,智者应当……中略……取受。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
施设摄持法门的阐明巴利
11. Paññattihārasampātavibhāvanā
73 凡是靠某种同义语摄持法门来确定的同义语,这个同义语摄持法门就是圆满的。因为接下来要问“什么是施设摄持法门?”,所以说了“其中,什么是施设摄持法门?”等等。巴利
73. Yena yena vevacanahārasampātena vevacanāni niddhāritāni, so vevacanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo paññattihārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo paññattihārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为要回答“什么是属于经文片段的施设?是谁的施设?”这个问题,所以说了“因此”等话。“因此,对于守护心的人”——这种施设,因为是在说明念的所依处、即应当守护的心,所以叫念的所依处施设。应当由念来守护的心,就是念的所依处、依止。因此注疏中说:“以确立而守护,被念所守护的心,就像它的依止一样。”“正思惟的行境”——这种施设,因为是在说明止的修习,所以叫止的修习施设。“以正见为先导,了知生灭”——这种施设,因为是在说明见地的安立,所以叫安立施设。“比丘战胜昏沉睡眠”——这种施设,因为是在说明集的完全无余断除,所以叫完全无余断除施设。“舍断一切恶趣”——这种施设,因为是在说明道、圣道的修习,所以叫修习施设。巴利
‘‘Katamā suttappadesabhūtā paññatti katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ paññattī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti paññatti satiyā padaṭṭhānassa rakkhitabbassa cittassa paññāpanato satiyā padaṭṭhānapaññatti nāma. Satiyā hi rakkhitabbaṃ cittaṃ satiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā rakkhantiyā satiyā rakkhiyamānaṃ cittaṃ tassā adhiṭṭhānaṃ viya hotī’’ti. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti paññatti samathassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato samathassa bhāvanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti paññatti dassanabhūmiyā nikkhepassa paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū’’ti samudayassa anavasesappahānassa paññāpanato anavasesappahānapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti paññatti maggassa ariyamaggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma.
因为应当说“只有这个施设串联才是圆满的”,所以才说“施设串联已结合”。凡是依靠那种作为注释特殊形式的施设串联而确定了施设分类的,那种作为注释特殊形式的施设串联就是已结合的;应当根据情况确定之后再加结合,这个意思要这样理解。巴利
‘‘Ettakova paññattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto paññattihārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena paññattihārasampātena paññattippabhedā niddhāritā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paññattihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
有智慧的人……应当取受。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
第12章 下降串联的阐明巴利
12. Otaraṇahārasampātavibhāvanā
74 通过任何一种施设理趣的组合,施设的分类被确定下来,这个施设理趣的组合就是圆满的。因为应当问“什么是下降理趣的组合?”,所以说了“其中,什么是下降理趣的组合?”等等。巴利
74. Yena yena paññattihārasampātena paññattippabhedā niddhāritā, so paññattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto’’tiādimāha.
在这里,有人问:在这首偈颂中,是要先确定哪些根,再通过哪些已确定之法而进入?因为应当这样问,所以说了“因此”等话。在所说的“因此,心受到守护的人”等偈颂中,这首偈颂里通过“因此……前导”这一段经文,已经包含了正见;正见被包含时,信等五根也就被包含了。巴利
‘‘Tattha tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ katamāni indriyāni niddhāretvā katamehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādigāthā vuttā, tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ ‘‘tasmā…pe… purekkhāro’’ti suttappadesena sammādiṭṭhi gahitā, sammādiṭṭhiyā gahitāya pañcindriyāni saddhādipañcindriyāni gahitāni bhavanti.
那些信等五根,因为能帮助明,或者能作为明的基础,所以就成了明。由于明的生起,也就是那种明的生起,以这个生起为因,无明就灭了;无明灭了,行就灭了……生灭了,老死就灭了。这种下降,就叫作以缘起来下降五根。巴利
Tāniyeva saddhādipañcindriyāni vijjāya upakārattā vā padaṭṭhānattā vā vijjā bhavanti, vijjuppādā tādisāya vijjāya uppādā uppādahetuto avijjānirodho sambhavati, avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho sambhavati…pe… jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho sambhavatīti. Ayaṃ otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādena pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.
这五根同样被戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴这三蕴所包含,因为信和精进能生起戒,而念则随顺慧。这就是以蕴来含摄五根,称为五根的“蕴摄”。巴利
Tāniyeva pañcindriyāni sīlakkhandhena samādhikkhandhena paññākkhandhena tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni bhavanti saddhāvīriyehi sīlasambhavato, satiyā ca paññānuvattakattā. Ayaṃ otaraṇā khandhehi pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.
这五根本身也属于行的范畴。凡是那些无漏的行,它们不成为有分,也不成为有的因,这些无漏的行被法界所包含,因为它们落入法界之中。这就叫作以界来含摄五根的“下降”。巴利
Tāniyeva pañcindriyāni saṅkhārapariyāpannāni bhavanti. Ye saṅkhārā anāsavā bhavanti, bhavaṅgā bhavahetū no bhavanti, te anāsavā saṅkhārā dhammadhātusaṅgahitā bhavanti dhammadhātuyā antogadhattā. Ayaṃ otaraṇā dhātūhi pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.
这个无漏的法界,属于法处的范围。凡是那个无漏的处,它不成为有支,不成为有的因。这就叫做“依诸处而进入法界”的进入。巴利
Sā anāsavā dhammadhātu dhammāyatanapariyāpannā bhavati, yaṃ āyatanaṃ anāsavaṃ bhavati, bhavaṅgaṃ bhavahetu no bhavati. Ayaṃ otaraṇā āyatanehi dhammadhātuyā otaraṇā nāma.
因为应当说“只有这样的下降与行相结合才是圆满的”,所以就说“下降与行相结合已经结合”。凡是能作为某种注释差别来让经文段落的义理得以“下降”的下降与行相结合,就应当根据情况把那种作为注释差别的下降与行相结合确定下来,然后加以运用。应当这样理解其中的意思。巴利
‘‘Ettakova otaraṇo hārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto otaraṇo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena otaraṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā otaritabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto otaraṇo hārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者……应当受持。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
从这里开始,“于彼何者”这一类前后衔接的含义,以及结尾处“相应”这一类前后衔接的含义,都应按照前面所说的方式去理解。个别地方如果文句不清楚,我们就尽自己所能加以说明。巴利
Ito paṭṭhāya ‘‘tattha katamo’’tiādianusandhyattho ca pariyosāne ‘‘niyutto’’tiādianusandhyattho ca vuttanayānusāreneva viññātabbo. Katthaci katthaci pāṭhe apākaṭaṃyeva yathābalaṃ kathayissāma.
净化串联的详细说明巴利
13. Sodhanahārasampātavibhāvanā
75 “在哪里”是指在哪一个问题上。如果一个问题开头的含义是清楚、完整的,那么这个问题就算得到了彻底解答。可是,如果一个问题开头的含义不清楚、不完整,还有某些该解答的内容剩下来,那么这个问题就还不算被解答。巴利
75.Yatthāti yasmiṃ pañhe. Ārambho attho suddho paripuṇṇo, so pañho niravasesato vissajjito bhavati. Yattha pañhe pana ārambho attho na suddho aparipuṇṇo koci vissajjetabbo avasiṭṭho, so pañho tāva vissajjito na bhavati.
15. 资具与资粮圆满的分别说明巴利
15. Parikkhārahārasampātavibhāvanā
77 因此,通过“心被守护”这句话所说的念的守护,是止的辅助条件;通过“正思惟的行境”这句话所说的正思惟,是观的辅助条件。应当这样分别并结合起来理解。巴利
77.‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti padena yo satisaṃvaro vutto, ayaṃ satisaṃvaro samathassa parikkhāro. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti padena yo sammāsaṅkappo vutto, so sammāsaṅkappo vipassanāya parikkhāroti vibhajitvā yojetabbo.
安立与串连的分别阐明巴利
16. Samāropanahārasampātavibhāvanā
78 以“因此,守护心”这句话所说的守护心,这个守护心是三种善行的立足处。正见被修习时,圣八支道就被修习了,因为二者应当一起修习,也因为它是立足处的缘故。因此说“从正见”等。对那位有定解脱的应供者来说,这位应供者是无所依余的人,这个定解脱就是无余涅槃界。巴利
78.‘‘Tasmārakkhitacittassā’’ti padena yaṃ rakkhitacittaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ rakkhitacittaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ kammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiyā bhāvitāya ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito bhavati ekato bhāvitabbattā, padaṭṭhānakāraṇattā ca. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhito hī’’tiādi. Yassa arahato samādhivimutti bhavati, ayaṃ arahā anupādiseso puggalo, ayaṃ samādhivimutti anupādisesā nibbānadhātu.
有人应当这样说明:以教说行相结合等为开端的行相结合,是用哪十六种分别来确定经句之义并加以结合的?这十六种分别又凭什么让我们信受?因此论中说了“因此说”等话。具寿马哈咖咤那以那十六种分别所说的“十六……中略……经”这番话,就是你们应当凭它来信受十六种分别的依据。巴利
‘‘Desanāhārasampātādiko hārasampāto yena soḷasappabhedabhāvena suttappadesatthe niddhāretvā yujjito, soḷasappabhedabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena soḷasappabhedabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘soḷasa…pe… sutta’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena soḷasappabhedabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabbo.
因为可以这样说:只有这个范围的句聚才算圆满,所以才说句聚已经结合。凡是作为注释的殊胜形式、属于教说句聚等的句聚,依靠它确定了经句的含义,那么,这种作为注释殊胜形式的教说句聚等句聚,就应当根据情况确定之后再加结合——这是应当领会的义理。在注释书中也是这样确定之后再加结合的。巴利
‘‘Ettakova hārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātena suttappadesatthā niddhāritā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampātādihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabbo, aṭṭhakathāyañca (netti. aṭṭha. 73, 76) tathā niddhāretvā yujjitoti.
有智慧的人应当依据义注和复注,把深奥的含义详细地分析清楚后再来掌握。巴利
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.